BAC Product and Application Handbook

Product & Application Handbook
E U - VO LU M E I - 2 0 0 6
Welcome...
to the first European edition of the BAC Product and Application Handbook. In an era of information transfer, we are excited to make available to you a unique compilation of industry knowledge and product application details. This handbook reflects our commitment to facilitate the application of our products, services and technical resources for higher system efficiency, environmental responsibility and safe operation. BAC has a rich history in the design and development of the world's largest range of evaporative cooling and ice thermal storage products. A specialised hygiene services initiative is also presented in support of these products. I hope you will find this publication to be a valuable resource and a service to the industry because temperature matters.
Sincerely,
Andreas G. Coumnas Managing Director - Europe
A1
Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Baltimore Aircoil Company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1 Introduction to Heat Transfer Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A4 Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B Overview & Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . .CT - B1 Series 3000D Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . .S3000D - B9 TXV Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TXV - B29 FXT Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .FXT - B45 RCT Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCT - B57 IMT Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IMT - B77 VTL Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VTL - B97 VXT Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VXT -B115 Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C Overview & Engineering Considerations . . . . . .CCCT - C1 VXI Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . .VXI - C13 VFL Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . .VFL - C35 FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . .FXV - C53 Water Saving Hybrid Wet-Dry Products . . . . . . . . . .D Overview & Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . .WS - D1 HXI Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Tower . . . . . .HXI - D11 HFL Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Tower . . . . .HFL - D35 DFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DFC - D59 HXC Hybrid Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HXC - D85 Evaporative Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E Overview & Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . .EC - E1 VXC Evaporative Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VXC - E13 VCL Evaporative Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VCL - E35 CXV Evaporative Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CXV - E51 TSU ICE CHILLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F Thermal Storage Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TSU - F1 TSU - M (Internal Melt Application) . . . . . . . . . . . . .TSU - F9 TSU - C/D (External Melt Application) . . . . . . . . .TSU - F19
Technical Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G Connection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G2 Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G4 Selection Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G5 The Value of Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G6 Selection of Remote Sump Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G7 Filtration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G13 Sound Reduction Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G14 Fundamentals of Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G22 Motor Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G47 Plume Abatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G49 Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G51 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G52 Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G53 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TR - G61
Handbook Resources
Colour Coded Sections Vertical Identification Bars Sectional Icons
Open Cooling Towers Closed Circuit Cooling Towers Water Saving Hybrid Wet-Dry Products Evaporative Condensers ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Products
Complete Product Brochures featuring

Product Introductions Benefits Construction Details Custom Features & Options Accessories Engineering Data Structural Support Engineering Specifications
Technical Resources
A2
For nearly seven decades Baltimore Aircoil Company has been dedicated to the development of innovative, cost effective heat transfer solutions for its customers. This has established BAC as the global leader of factory assembled evaporative heat rejection and thermal storage equipment.
Design
Ongoing investment in research and development, combined with sophisticated R&D laboratory facilities enables BAC to consistently offer technology and products in advance of new industry demands.
Selection
BAC offers the widest array of factory assembled evaporative heat rejection and thermal storage equipment in the industry. Breadth of product enables BAC to provide its customers optimized solutions with regard to their specific needs. Whether an application calls for open or closed cooling circuits, axial or centrifugal fans, special materials of construction or unique dimensional considerations, BAC has the solution.
Performance
All BAC products are engineered to minimize lifecycle costs through a combination of low energy consumption and low maintenance. An extensive array of options addresses such issues as low sound or low water consumption requirements.
A3
How can we help?

From employees to partners every action at BAC centers on you, the customer. Our service philosophy extends beyond customer service to embody a total service approach. So from application to installation to aftermarket needs, whether you are working with our representatives, the Product & Application Handbook or using www.BaltimoreAircoil.com, BAC has a tool to help.
BAC Sales Channel

BAC employs the most extensive and experienced network of manufacturers representatives to provide you unrivalled local support for your specific application needs. Integrated globally, the BAC network of representatives facilitates design support for projects coordinated on a local, national, or international scale.
BAC Product & Application Handbook

A revolutionary tool for assisting with equipment application and selection requirements, it is the only place to find critical industry technical and product information together in one convenient format.
www. BaltimoreAircoil.com
A proprietary online tool that allows access to resources and education to assist product evaluation, comparison and selection.
Product Information Selections Equipment Specifications Technical Information Rigging and Installation Manuals
A4
Heat Transfer Products

Evaporative cooling products minimize the energy consumption of the entire system by providing lower operating temperatures than possible with comparably sized air-cooled equipment. BAC has a large selection of heat transfer products to offer, each of which falls into one of these five main categories:
Open Cooling Towers

Open cooling towers are a proven and cost-effective method of cooling condenser water loops and industrial processes. In operation, the condenser water (or process water) flows directly over the heat transfer surface of the open cooling tower. As air is introduced into the tower, a fraction of this water is evaporated, cooling the remaining water.
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers

Closed circuit cooling towers keep the process fluid clean and contaminant free in a closed loop. This creates two separate fluid circuits: (1) an external circuit, in which spray water circulates over the coil and mixes with the outside air, and (2) an internal circuit, in which the process fluid to be cooled circulates inside the coil. During operation, heat is transferred from the warm fluid in the coil to the spray water, and then to the atmosphere as a portion of the water evaporates. In addition to chiller applications and industrial process cooling, closed circuit cooling towers are often used in heat pump loops, where closed loop cooling is preferred.
Water Saving Hybrid Wet-Dry Products

Water saving and hybrid products are usually of the closed circuit type. The hybrid wet-dry products cool the liquid to be cooled by efficiently combining dry sensible air cooling with evaporative cooling. These products include two or more distinctive heat transfer surfaces or sections combined into one product optimising the use of ambient dry and wet bulb temperature. Low water and water treatment cost, vastly improved operational safety and virtual elimination of visible plume are the main advantages of intelligent water saving products.
Evaporative Condensers
When applied to HVAC and light industrial systems, evaporative condensers provide lower condensing temperatures and compressor kW savings of up to 15 percent compared with traditional systems. In an evaporative condenser, refrigerant vapor is condensed in a coil, which is continually wetted on the outside by a recirculating water system. Air is circulated over the coil, causing a small portion of the recirculating water to evaporate. The evaporation removes heat from the vapor in the coil, causing it to condense.
Ice Thermal Storage Products

Ice thermal storage units are used to build and store cooling in the form of ice during periods of reduced cooling demand. This way the mechanical refrigeration system need not be sized on peak load but on "average" conditions. Hence a smaller refrigeration system with lower power requirements and a smaller refrigerant charge can be selected. Compared to conventional refrigeration systems, ice thermal storage systems generally have a higher compressor operating efficiency since the compressor will operate continuously at full capacity and not at fluctuating part load conditions. Ice thermal storage units can either be of the "internal" or "external" melt type. For "internal melt" only glycol solutions can be used as secondary refrigerant. "External melt" ice thermal storage units can use either direct refrigerant feed or glycol solutions.
Need help deciding which product to use?

Contact your local BAC Balticare Representative for assistance.
Baltimore Aircoil
CT - B 1
Open Cooling Towers

Overview
Open Cooling Towers
Product Group Detail

General Information ................................................................................. B2 Principle of Operation .............................................................................. B2 Configuration ............................................................................................. B2 Water Distribution System ....................................................................... B2 Fan System ................................................................................................. B3 Capacity Range .......................................................................................... B3 Maximum Entering Water Temperature ................................................ B4 Typical Applications .................................................................................. B4 Product Line Overview Table .................................................................. B4 Engineering Considerations ..................................................................... B6
CT - B 2
General Information
Open cooling towers provide evaporative cooling for many types of systems, and the specific application will largely determine which BAC Cooling Tower is best suited for a project. The Product Line Overview Table is intended as a general guide. Specialised assistance is available through your local BAC Balticare Representative.
Principle of Operation
Overview
Open cooling towers reject heat from water-cooled systems to the atmosphere. Hot water from the system enters the cooling tower and is distributed over the wet deck (heat transfer surface). Air is pulled or pushed through the wet deck, causing a small portion of the water to evaporate. Evaporation removes heat from the remaining water, which is collected in the cold water basin and returned to the system to absorb more heat. Each open cooling tower line, although operating under the same basic principle of operation, is arranged a little differently. See the schematics on the Product Line Overview Table for product specific details.
Configuration
There are two main configurations of factory assembled open cooling towers: crossflow and counterflow. In crossflow cooling towers, the water flows vertically down the wet deck as the air flows horizontally across it. In counterflow cooling towers, the water flows vertically down the wet deck as the air flows vertically up it.
Crossflow Configuration
Counterflow Configuration
Water Distribution System

Open cooling towers employ either gravity distribution or pressurised spray systems to distribute water over the wet deck surface. Gravity distribution systems, installed on BACs crossflow cooling towers, feature hot water basins mounted on top of the tower above the wet deck. A series of metering orifices in the floor of each hot water basin distribute the water as a function of the depth of the water in the basin. Gravity distribution systems generally require minimal pump head, can be inspected while the unit is in operation and are easy to access for routine maintenance and service. Spray distribution systems, employed on counterflow cooling towers, feature a series of pipes fitted with spray nozzles mounted inside the tower above the wet deck. These systems typically require 0,15 through 0,5 bar of water pressure at the water inlet and require the unit to be out of service for inspection and maintenance.
Baltimore Aircoil
CT - B 3
Gravity Distribution Basin
Pressurised Spray Distribution
Open Cooling Towers
Fan System
The flow of air through most factory assembled evaporative cooling equipment is provided by one or more mechanically driven fans. The fan(s) may be axial or centrifugal, each type having its own distinct advantages. Axial fan units require approximately half the fan motor kilowatt of comparably sized centrifugal fan units, offering significant life-cycle cost savings. Centrifugal fan units are capable of overcoming reasonable amounts of external static pressure ( 125 Pa), making them suitable for both indoor and outdoor installations. Centrifugal fans are also inherently quieter than axial fans, although the difference is minimal and can often be overcome through the application of optional low sound fans and/or sound attenuation on axial fan units. Fans can be applied in an induced draft or a forced draft configuration.
Centrifugal Fans
Axial Fans
Induced Draft The rotating air handling components of induced draft equipment are mounted in the top deck of the unit, minimizing the impact of fan noise on near-by neighbors and providing maximum protection from fan icing with units operating in sub-freezing conditions. The air being drawn through the unit hereby discharges over the inducing fan. The use of corrosion resistant materials ensures long life and minimizes maintenance requirements for the air handling components. Forced Draft Rotating air-handling components are located on the air inlet face at the base of forced draft towers whereby fresh air is blown through the unit. This base fan position facilitates easy access for routine maintenance and service. Additionally, location of these components in the dry entering air stream extends component life by isolating them from the corrosive saturated discharge air.
Capacity Range
In the following Product Line Overview Table, product capacity range is called out in terms of water flow capability at 35C/30C/21C. A nominal cooling tower capacity is defined at 35C entering water temperature to a 30C leaving water temperature at a 21C entering wet-bulb temperature.
... because temperature matters
CT - B 4
Nominal conditions are typical of conventional HVAC designs but will not apply to all projects. All water flow capacities shown are for a single cell; multiple cell units can be applied to achieve larger capacities.
Maximum Entering Water Temperature

As previously stated, typical HVAC conditions call for an entering water temperature of approximately 35C. All BAC Cooling Towers are capable of withstanding temperatures of at least 50C with standard fill materials. For applications where the entering water temperature exceeds 50C, check the Product Line Overview Table to determine whether alternate fill materials are available for your project.
Overview
Typical Applications
A list of typical applications is provided in the Product Line Overview Table for your reference.
Product Line Overview Table

Series 3000-D TXV FXT
Configuration Water Distribution Fan System Capacity Range (Single Cell) Maximum Entering Water Temperature
Crossflow Gravity Axial Fan, Induced Draft 40 to 260 l/s 50 C standard wet deck 55C Alternative wet deck material
Crossflow Gravity Axial Fan, Induced Draft 10 tot 128 l/s 50 C standard wet deck 55C Alternative wet deck material
Crossflow Gravity Axial Fan, Forced Draft 3 tot 145 l/s 50 C standard wet deck 55C Alternative wet deck material
Medium to large HVAC & industrial applications Replacement of field erected towers
Medium HVAC & industrial applications Counterflow unit replacements Crossflow unit replacements Tight enclosures & installations requiring a single air inlet
Small to medium industrial applications
1. Air in, 2. Air Out, 3. Hot Water In, 4. Cooled Water out, 5. Water; 6. Wet Deck Surface, 7. Cold Water Basin; 8. Water Distribution System; 9. Eliminators.
Note: For projects requiring water conservation and/or plume sensitive location, VXT and VTL cooling towers can be equipped with plume abatement coils (PAC) in combination with 3-way valve arrangement. Refer to your BAC Balticare representative for more details and selections.
Baltimore Aircoil
CT - B 5
Note : BAC offers heat exchanger skids in combination with most of his open cooling tower products. These skids are available for both new installations or to retrofit on existing installations. The heat exchanger skid consists of a plate heat exchanger with pump and interconnecting piping and appendages. The skids are delivered on a heavy duty frame and with steel panel enclosure. Refer to your BAC Balticare representative for more details and selections.
Open Cooling Towers
RCT
IMT
VTL
VXT
Counterflow Pressurised Axial Fan, Induced Draft 40 to 145 l/s 55C Standard Wet Deck 65C w/Alternate Wet Deck Materials Small to medium industrial applications Dirty Water applications
Counterflow Pressurised Axial Fan, Induced Draft 45 to 560 l/s 55C Standard Wet Deck 65C w/Alternate Wet Deck Materials Large industrial applications Replacement of field erected towers with basinless units Dirty water applications.
Counterflow Pressurised Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft 4 tot 90 l/s 55C Standard Wet Deck 65 C w/Alternate Wet Deck Materials Small to medium HVAC & Industrial applications Installations w/extremely low height requirements Indoor Installations High temperature industrial applications Tight enclosures & installations requiring a single air inlet
Counterflow Pressurised Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft 1,6 to 1230 l/s 55C Standard Wet Deck 65C w/Alternate Wet Deck Materials Small to medium HVAC & industrial applications Indoor installations High temperature industrial applications Tight enclosures & installations requiring a single air inlet
CT - B 6
Engineering Considerations
Location
Units must have an adequate supply of fresh air to the air inlet(s). When units are located adjacent to building walls or in enclosures, care must be taken to ensure that the warm, saturated discharge air is not deflected off surrounding walls or enclosures and drawn back to the air inlet(s).
Warning: Each unit should be located and positioned to prevent the introduction of the warm discharge air and the associated drift, which may contain chemical or biological contaminants including Legionella, into the ventilation systems of the building on which the unit is located or those of adjacent buildings.
Overview
Note: For detailed recommendations on layout, please consult your local BAC Balticare Representative.
For VL and VX products, bottom screens or solid bottom panels may be desirable or necessary for safety, depending on the location and conditions at the installation site.
Piping and Valves

Piping must be sized and installed in accordance with good piping practice. All piping should be supported by pipe hangers or other supports, not by the unit. On open systems, in order to prevent basin overflow at shutdown and to ensure satisfactory pump operation at start-up, all heat exchangers and as much piping as possible should be installed below the operating level of the cooling tower. Some units may require flow balancing valves (supplied by others) at the hot water inlets to balance the flow to individual inlets and cells. External shutoff valves (supplied by others) may also be required if the system design necessitates the isolation of individual cells. When multiple cells are used on a common system, equalizing lines should be installed between the cold water basins to ensure balanced water level in all cells. It is good engineering practice to valve the inlet and outlet of each tower separately for servicing. The shut-off valves can be used, if necessary, to adjust any minor unbalanced condition in water flow to or from the units.
Capacity Control
Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) Installations which are to be controlled by Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) require the use of an inverter duty motor as designed IEC 34.1, which recognizes the increased stresses placed on motors by these drive systems. Inverter duty motors must be furnished on VFD applications in order to maintain the motor warranty. Fan motors must be furnished with thermal protection (either PTC sensors or coil thermostats normally open, or normally closed). The motor protection consists of temperature sensitive cutout devices embedded in the motor windings (minimum 3 per motor). BAC offers factory installed motor control packages including VFD drives. Refer to the section "Technical Resources, Motor Controls". Check with your local BAC Balticare representative for availability.
Warning: When the fan speed is to be changed from the factory-set speed, including through the use of a variable speed control device, steps must be taken to avoid operating at or near fan speeds that cause a resonance with the unit or its supporting structure. At start-up, the variable frequency drive should be cycled slowly between zero and full speed and any speeds that cause a noticeable resonance in the unit should be locked out by the variable speed drive.
Fan Cycling Fan cycling is the simplest method of capacity control. The number of steps of capacity control can be increased using the Baltiguard Fan System, the independent fan motor option, or two-speed fan motors in conjunction with fan cycling (see the Custom Features & Options section of the
Baltimore Aircoil
CT - B 7
appropriate product line to determine whether the Baltiguard Fan System or the independent fan motor option are available; two-speed motors are available for all products). These options provide substantial energy savings when compared to simple fan cycling.
Warning: Rapid on-off cycling can cause the fan motor to overheat. It is recommended that controls be set to allow a maximum of 6 on-off cycles per hour.
Capacity Control Dampers (VTL and VXT Models Only) On centrifugal fan models, modulating capacity control dampers are available to provide close control of the leaving temperature. See Section "Accessories" or contact your local BAC Balticare representative.
Open Cooling Towers
Vibration Cut-out Switch

Vibration cut-out switches are recommended on all axial fan installations. Vibration cut-out switches are designed to interrupt power to the fan motor and/or provide an alarm to the operator in the event of excessive vibration. BAC offers both electronic and mechanical vibration cut-out switches on all cooling towers.
Water Treatment
As water evaporates in the unit, the dissolved solids originally present in the water remain in the system. The concentration of these dissolved solids increases rapidly and can cause scale and corrosion. In addition, airborne impurities and biological contaminants, including Legionella, may be introduced into the circulating water. To control all potential contaminants, a water treatment program must be employed. In many cases, a simple bleed-off may be adequate for control of scale and corrosion. However, biological contamination, including Legionella, can be controlled only through the use of biocides. Such treatment should be initiated at system startup, after periods of equipment shutdown, and continued regularly thereafter. Accordingly, it is strongly recommended a biocide treatment be initiated when the unit is first filled with water and continued regularly thereafter. For more information, consult the appropriate Operating and Maintenance Manual. When a water treatment program is employed, it must be compatible with construction materials. Batch feeding of chemicals into the unit is not recommended. If units are constructed with optional corrosion resistant materials, acid treatment may be considered; however, the water quality must be maintained within the guidelines set forth in the Operating and Maintenance Instructions.
Note: Unless a common remote sump is utilised, each cell of a multi-cell installation must be treated as a separate entity, even if the cold water basins are equalised.
For complete Water Quality Guidelines, see the appropriate Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual, available at www.baltimoreaircoil.com. For specific recommendations on water treatment, contact a competent water treatment supplier.
Sound Levels
Sound rating data are available for all BAC models. When calculating the sound levels generated by a unit, the designer must take into account the effects of the geometry of the tower as well as the distance and direction from the unit to noise-sensitive areas. Whisper Quiet fans and intake and discharge sound attenuation can be supplied on certain models to provide reduced sound characteristics (see the Custom Features and Options section of the appropriate product line for details). The Baltiguard Fan System, two-speed motors, or variable frequency drives can also be used to reduce sound during periods of non-peak thermal loads. For more information on sound and how it relates to evaporative cooling equipment, see Section "Technical Resources, Fundamentals of Sound". For detailed low sound selections, please consult your local BAC Balticare Representative.
CT - B 8
Winterization
When a unit is shut down in freezing weather, the basin water must be protected by draining to an indoor auxiliary remote sump tank or by providing supplementary heat to the cold water basin. Supplementary heat can be provided by electric immersion heaters or in some cases, hot water, steam coils, or steam injectors. All exposed water piping, make-up lines, and spray pumps (if applicable) that do not drain at shutdown should be traced with electric heater tape and insulated. For remote sump applications, the spray water pump must be selected for the required flow at a total head which includes the vertical lift, pipe friction (in supply and suction lines) plus the required pressure at the inlet header of the water distribution system (14 kPa). A valve should always be installed in the discharge line from the pump to permit adjusting flow to the unit requirement. Inlet water pressure should be measured by a pressure gauge installed in the water supply riser at the spray water inlet, and adjusted to the specified inlet pressure.
Overview
Indoor Installations (applicable to VTL and VXT models only)

Many indoor installations require the use of inlet and/or discharge ductwork. Units installed with inlet ductwork must be ordered with solid-bottom panels. Generally, intake ducts are used only on smaller units while the equipment room is used as a plenum for larger units. Discharge ductwork will normally be required to carry the saturated discharge air from the building. Both intake and discharge ductwork must have access doors to allow servicing of the fan assembly, drift eliminators, and water distribution system. All ductwork is supplied and installed by others and should be symmetrical and designed to provide even air distribution across the face of air intakes and discharge openings. Such ductwork may increase the external static pressure on the unit, requiring a larger fan motor to be installed. This external static pressure must be quantified (in Pa) to BAC to allow for suitable fan motor sizing.
Warning: The discharge opening must be positioned to prevent the introduction of discharge air into the fresh air intakes serving the unit or the ventilation systems of adjacent buildings.
Note: Axial fan units are not suitable for indoor installations.
Safety
Adequate precautions, appropriate for the installation and location of these products, should be taken to safeguard the public from possible injury and the equipment and the premises from damage. Operation, maintenance and repair of this equipment should be undertaken only by personnel qualified to do so. Proper care, procedures and tools must be used in handling, lifting, installing, operating, maintaining, and repairing this equipment to prevent personal injury and/or property damage.
Wet Deck Surface Compatibility

BACs standard wet deck is constructed of plastic material. The wet deck surface is compatible with the water found in most evaporative cooling applications. The maximum allowable water temperature for each product is as shown in the following table.
Product Line VTL VXT S3000-D TXV FXT IMT RCT Standard Wet Deck 55C 55C 50C 50C 50C 55C 55C High Temperature Wet Deck 65C 65C 55C 55C 55C 65C 65C FRP N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 55C 55C
N/A = not applicable
For applications where the entering water temperature exceeds the limits shown above, contact your local BAC Balticare Representative for assistance.
Baltimore Aircoil
S3000D
-B9
S3000D
Open Cooling Towers
Open Cooling Towers
Product Detail
S3000D Open Cooling Towers ................................................................ B10 Benefits ...................................................................................................... B11 Construction Details ................................................................................ B13 Custom Features and Options ................................................................ B14 Accessories ............................................................................................... B16 Engineering Data ..................................................................................... B19 Structural Support .................................................................................. B24 Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... B27
S3000D
- B 10
S3000D Open Cooling Towers

Capacity
Single Cell Capacity: 40 260 l/s
S3000D
General Description
Series 3000D Cooling Towers deliver independently verified, fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of flow and temperature requirements. Standard design features satisfy todays environmental concerns, minimize installation costs, maximize year-round operating reliability, and simplify maintenance requirements.
Key Features
z
Low energy consumption Low installed cost Easy maintenance Reliable year-round operation Long service life Easy removable high efficient fill as standard Cold water basin is to be free draining
Baltimore Aircoil
S3000D
- B 11
Benefits
Low Energy Consumption
z
Evaporative cooling equipment minimises the energy consumption of the entire system because it provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving natural resources and reducing environmental impact. The cooling towers provide the heat rejection required at the lowest possible energy input via:
Open Cooling Towers
- High efficiency, low kW axial fans - High efficiency easy removable heat exchange surface, which provides maximum air/water contact time at low air pressure drops - Variable Frequency Drives
Low Installed Cost

z
Support All models mount directly on two parallel I-beams and ship complete with motors and drives factory-installed and aligned. Modular Design Models S3-D728L through S3-D1056L and S3-D1132L through S3-D1301L ship in two sections to minimise the size and weight of the heaviest lift, allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes.
Modular Design
Combined Inlet Shields
Reliable Year-Round Operation

z
Belt Drive System utilizes special corrosion-resistant materials of construction and state-ofthe-art technology to ensure ease of maintenance and reliable year-round performance. Combined Inlet Shields prevent biological growth from sunlight, act as a filter for air borne impurities and debris and eliminate water splash out.
Easy Removable Fill

The fill removal system allows nesting the fill in place for cleaning or replacement. The fill section can easily be reached through the access hatch in the hot water basin, while the telescope fill supports allow for easy removal.
S3000D
- B 12
S3000D
Sloped Cold Water Basin
Spacer Rod
Free Draining Cold Water Basin

The sloping cooling tower basin allows for free draining.
Long Service Life

z
Frame Construction Enables casing panels, critical links for long service life, to be constructed of corrosion-resistant, fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP). Materials of Construction Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance, unit operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project (see section: Custom Features and Options for more details).
S3000D Frame Construction shown without FRP Panels
Easy Maintenance
z
Easy Cleaning The wet deck surface is elevated above the sloped cold water basin floor to facilitate flushing of dirt and debris from this critical area. Hinged Access Doors Provide easy entry to the spacious plenum for routine drive maintenance.
Access Hatches in Hot Water Basin
Easy access to hot water basin
Baltimore Aircoil
S3000D
- B 13
Construction Details
Open Cooling Towers
1. Heavy-Duty Construction
z
z z
Large orifice, non-clog nozzles Steel distribution covers
Heavy-gauge Z600 galvanized steel frame
2. FRP Casing Panels

z z z
Corrosion resistant UV resistant finish Maintenance free
6. BACross II Wet Deck Surface with Integral Drift Eliminators (Not Shown)
z z z
Plastic material Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack Designed and manufactured by BAC
3. Fan Drive System

z z z z
Premium quality belts Corrosion resistant sheaves Heavy-duty bearings Adapted fan motor for operation in saturated conditions.
7. Combined Inlet Shields

z z z
Corrosion Resistant Easily removable UV resistant plastic material
4. Low kW Axial Fan

z z
8. Cold Water Basin

z z z
Quiet operation Corrosion resistant aluminum
Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning Suction strainer with anti-vortex hood Adjustable water make-up assembly from inside the unit
5. Water Distribution System

z
Low pump head gravity distribution basin
9. Hinged Access Doors (Not Shown)

z
Inward swinging door on each end wall
S3000D
- B 14
Custom Features and Options

Construction Options
z
Standard Construction: Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized steel. All external steel panels are protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection. Casing panels are constructed of UV resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester. Optional BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System: The BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend equipment life, is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the unit. Optional Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin: A type 304 or 316 stainless steel cold water basin is provided.
S3000D
Note: See section Technical Resources, Material Options for more details on the materials described above.
Fan Drive System

The low sound fan drive system provides the cooling air necessary to reject heat from the system to the atmosphere. The standard fan drive system consists of two sheaves located on minimum shaft centreline distances to maximise belt life. A fan motor, custom engineered for BAC to provide maximum performance for cooling tower service, is provided.
Low Sound Fan Drive System
"Whisper Quiet Fan" Operation

The ultra low sound levels generated by Series 3000D Cooling Towers make them suitable for installation in most environments. For very sound sensitive installations, the Series 3000D is available with a Whisper Quiet Fan - option that significantly reduces the sound levels generated from the tower with minimal impact on thermal performance. For extremely sound sensitive installations, factory designed, tested and rated sound attenuation is available for both the air inlet and discharge of Series 3000D Cooling Towers.
S3000D with Intake and Discharge Attenuator
Baltimore Aircoil
S3000D
- B 15
Gear Drive System, Externally Mounted Motor

A gear drive system with a TEFC motor mounted outside the airstream is also available on Series 3000 Cooling Towers. A non-corrosive carbon-fiber composite drive shaft with stainless steel hubs is selected with a 2.0 service factor. The motor and drive shaft ship separately for easy field installation.
Gear Drive System, Closed-Coupled Motor

A close-coupled gear drive system is available as a fan drive option on Series 3000D Cooling Towers. Both the gear drive and couplings are selected with a 2,0 service factor. Gear construction includes a nickel-alloy steel shaft, casehardened gears, self-lubrication, and a single piece, gray iron housing. This drive system ships completely installed and aligned.
Open Cooling Towers
Remote Sump Execution

The use of an auxiliary sump within a heated space is the most satisfactory way to protect sump water from freezing. When the circulating pump is shut off, all the water in the water distribution, in suspension and in the sump will drain freely to the auxiliary sump.
Note: For detailed information on the calculation of the remote sump tank, please refer to the section "Technical Resources, Selection of Remote Sump Tank".
S3000D
- B 16
Accessories
External Service Platform
For external service, platforms can be added to the unit.
Ladder, Safety Cage and Handrails
S3000D
In the event the owner requires easy access to the top of the unit, the unit can be furnished with a platform and ladders extending from the base of the unit to the platform, as well as safety cages, and handrail packages.
Internal Service Platforms

A galvanized steel internal walkway is available to provide a permanent working surface for easy access to the strainer, outlet, and make-up water assembly. For access to the motor and drive assemblies on two-piece units, an internal ladder and upper service platform with handrails is available.
Internal Platform and Ladder
Internal Walkway
Vibration Cut Out Switch

A factory-mounted vibration cut-out switch is available to effectively protect against equipment failure due to excessive vibration of the mechanical equipment system. BAC can provide a vibration cut-out switch in an IP65 enclosure to ensure reliable protection.
Electric Water Level Control Package

The electric water level control replaces the standard mechanical make-up valve when a more precise water level control is required. This package consists of a float switch mounted in the basin and a solenoid activated valve in the make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize water hammer.
Baltimore Aircoil
S3000D
- B 17
Basin Heaters
Units exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to prevent freezing of the water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which maintain the water temperature at 4C, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection. The heater package includes the heaters, a thermostat and a low level cut out switch to protect the heaters if the water level is too low. Standard electric heaters are selected for -18C ambient temperature.
Open Cooling Towers
Model No. S3000D S3-D240 L S3-D379 L S3-D412 L S3-D527 L S3-D473 L S3-D672 L S3-D728 L S3-D1056 L S3-D583 L S3-D725 L S3-D1132 L S3-D1301 L
Heaters -18C (kW) 2x6 2x8 4x5 4x6 4x8 4x8
Extended Lubrication Lines

Extended lubrication lines with grease fittings are available for lubrication of the fan shaft bearings.
High Temperature Wet Deck

If operation above 50C is anticipated, an optional high temperature wet deck material is available which increases the maximum allowable entering water temperature to 55C.
Mechanical Equipment Removal System

The mechanical equipment removal system is a lightweight, easy to install system for removal and installation of fan motor or gearbox.
Side Outlet Depressed Sump

A side outlet depressed sump box is available for field installation below the base of the tower to facilitate jobsite piping.
Note: See chapter "Connection Guide" in the section Technical Resources for more information on standard and optional unit connection types.
S3000D
- B 18
Basin Sweeper Piping

Basin sweeper piping provides an effective method of preventing sediment from collecting in the cold water basin of the unit. A complete piping system, including nozzles, is provided in the unit basin for connection to side stream filtration equipment (Refer to section "Technical Resources, Filtration").
S3000D
Velocity Recovery Stacks

Velocity recovery stacks are available on the Series 3000D for incremental thermal performance increases. This accessory can be used to gain extra capacity in tight layouts, while maintaining the same footprint and unit kW. Field assembly is required.
Distribution Basin Covers

These covers help prevent the accumulation of leaves, debris and algae in the hot water distribution basins.
S3000D with Velocity Recovery Stacks
Baltimore Aircoil
S3000D
- B 19
Engineering Data
REMARK: Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Single Cell Units
Open Cooling Towers
1. Water In; 2. Overflow ND80; 3. Make-up; 4. Water Out; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access Door; 7. S3-D728 L thru S3-D1056 L and S3-D1132 L thru S3-D1301 L ship in two sections per cell. The top section is the heaviest and tallest. Top section heights are: S3-D728 L thru S3-D970 L: 3125 mm; S3-D1132 L: 3330 mm; S3-D985 L thru S3-D1056 L: 3533 mm; S3-D1213 L: 3736 mm; S3-D1301 L: 3822mm.
Model
Fan Motor (kW)
Airflow (m/s)
Operating Weight (kg)
Shipping Weight (kg)
Heaviest Section (kg)
Length (L1) (mm)
Width (W) (mm)
Height (H) (mm)
S3-D240 L S3-D272 L S3-D299 L S3-D333 L S3-D358 L S3-D379 L S3-D412 L S3-D436 L S3-D455 L S3-D482 L S3-D527 L S3-D473 L S3-D501 L S3-D552 L S3-D604 L S3-D648 L S3-D672 L S3-D728 L S3-D781 L S3-D828 L S3-D872 L S3-D923 L S3-D970 L S3-D985 L S3-D1056 L
7,5 11 15 15 18,5 22 18,5 22 18,5 22 30 18,5 22 22 30 37 45 30 37 45 37 45 55 45 55
28,6 32,5 35,6 39,1 41,9 44,4 47,2 50,1 51,2 54,2 59,4 54,2 57,4 62,1 68,0 72,9 75,7 81,6 87,5 92,6 94,2 99,8 104,9 104,9 112,4
6706 6765 6792 7151 7164 7187 8435 8458 8844 8867 8939 10483 10506 11663 11736 11740 12285 14555 14560 14660 15904 16004 16585 18269 18310
3083 3142 3169 3296 3310 3332 3823 3845 3968 3991 4063 4626 4649 4903 4976 4980 5530 6251 6256 6351 6583 6678 7264 7064 7105
3083 3142 3169 3296 3310 3332 3823 3845 3968 3991 4063 4626 4649 4903 4976 4980 5530 3959 3963 4059 3995 4091 4676 4295 4336
2584 2584 2584 2584 2584 2584 2978 2978 2978 2978 2978 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600
5500 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500 6110 6110 6110 6110 6110 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566
2915 2915 2915 3321 3321 3321 3321 3321 3727 3727 3727 3423 3423 3829 3829 3829 3829 4915 4915 5042 5728 5728 5804 6540 6616
2635 2635 2635 3040 3040 3040 3040 3040 3450 3450 3450 3040 3040 3450 3450 3450 3450 4710 4710 4710 5525 5525 5525 6335 6335
S3000D
- B 20
Model
Fan Motor (kW)
Airflow (m/s)
Length (L1) (mm)
Width (W) (mm)
Height (H) (mm)
S3-D583 L S3-D618 L S3-D676 L S3-D725 L S3-D1132 L
18,5 22 30 37 55 55 75
65,7 69,5 76,1 81,7 122,1 128,5 138,0
13756 13779 13852 13856 18746 20112 21151
5480 5502 5575 5580 7540 7968 9007
5480 5502 5575 5580 4644 4867 5906
4245 4245 4245 4245 4245 4245 4245
7328 7328 7328 7328 7328 7328 7328
3651 3651 3651 3651 5864 6769 6769
3450 3450 3450 3450 5525 6335 6335
S3000D
S3-D1213 L S3-D1301 L
Double Cell Units
1. Water In; 2. Overflow; 3. Make-up; 4. Water Out; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access Door; 7. S3-D728 L thru S3-D1056 L and S3-D1132 L thru S3D1301 L ship in two sections per cell. The top section is the heaviest and tallest. Top section heights are: S3-D728 L thru S3-D970 L: 3125 mm; S3-D1132 L: 3330 mm; S3-D985 L thru S3-D1056 L: 3533 mm; S3-D1213 L: 3736 mm; S3-D1301 L: 3822mm.
Model
Fan Motor (kW)
Airflow (m/s)
Length (L1) (mm)
Width (W) (mm)
Height (H) (mm)
S3-D240-2 L S3-D272-2 L S3-D299-2 L S3-D333-2 L S3-D358-2 L S3-D379-2 L S3-D412-2 L S3-D436-2 L S3-D455-2 L S3-D482-2 L S3-D527-2 L S3-D473-2 L S3-D501-2 L S3-D552-2 L S3-D604-2 L S3-D648-2 L S3-D672-2 L
(2) 7,5 (2) 11 (2) 15 (2) 15 (2) 18,5 (2) 22 (2) 18,5 (2) 22 (2) 18,5 (2) 22 (2) 30 (2) 18,5 (2) 22 (2) 22 (2) 30 (2) 37 (2) 45
57,2 65,0 71,2 78,2 83,8 88,8 94,4 100,2 52,4 108,4 118,8 108,4 114,8 124,2 136,0 145,8 151,4
13412 13530 13584 14302 14328 14374 16870 16916 17688 17734 17878 20966 21012 23326 23472 23480 24570
6166 6284 6338 6592 6620 6664 7646 7690 7936 7982 8126 9252 9298 9806 9952 9960 11060
3083 3142 3169 3296 3310 3332 3823 3845 3968 3991 4063 4626 4649 4903 4976 4980 5530
5232 5232 5232 5232 5232 5232 6020 6020 6020 6020 6020 7264 7264 7264 7264 7264 7264
5500 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500 6110 6110 6110 6110 6110 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566
2915 2915 2915 3321 3321 3321 3321 3321 3727 3727 3727 3423 3423 3829 3829 3829 3829
2635 2635 2635 3040 3040 3040 3040 3040 3450 3450 3450 3040 3040 3450 3450 3450 3450
Baltimore Aircoil
S3000D
- B 21
Model
Fan Motor (kW)
Airflow (m/s)
Length (L1) (mm)
Width (W) (mm)
Height (H) (mm)
S3-D728-2 L S3-D781-2 L S3-D828-2 L S3-D872-2 L S3-D923-2 L S3-D970-2 L S3-D985-2 L S3-D1056-2 L S3-D583-2 L S3-D618-2 L S3-D676-2 L S3-D725-2 L S3-D1132-2 L S3-D1213-2 L S3-D1301-2 L
(2) 30 (2) 37 (2) 45 (2) 37 (2) 45 (2) 55 (2) 45 (2) 55 (2) 18,5 (2) 22 (2) 30 (2) 37 (2) 55 (2) 55 (2) 75
163,2 175,0 185,2 198,4 199,6 209,8 209,8 224,8 131,4 139,0 152,2 163,4 244,2 257,0 276,0
29110 29120 29320 31808 32008 33170 36538 36620 27512 27558 27704 27712 37492 40224 42302
12502 12512 12702 13166 13356 14528 14128 14210 10960 11004 11150 11160 15080 15936 18014
3959 3963 4059 3995 4091 4676 4295 4336 5480 5502 5575 5580 4644 4867 5906
7264 7264 7264 7264 7264 7264 7264 7264 8555 8555 8555 8555 8555 8555 8555
6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 7328 7328 7328 7328 7328 7328 7328
4915 4915 5042 5728 5728 5804 6540 6540 3651 3651 3651 3651 5864 6769 6769
4710 4710 4710 5525 5525 5525 6335 6335 3450 3450 3450 3450 5525 6335 6335
Open Cooling Towers
General Notes
1. Operating weight is for tower with the water level in the cold water basin at overflow. If a lower operating wieght is needed to meet design requirements, your local BAC Balticare Sales Representative can provide additional assistance. 2. Models S3-D970 L, S3-D1056 L, S3-D1132 L, S3-D1213 L and S3D-1301 L are supplied with a gear fan drive system as standard. 3. Models shipped with aan optional gear drive or low sound fan may have heights up to 265 mm greater than shown. 4. Heights are for units with belt drive except models with motors of 55 kW and larger where gear box is standard.
Connection Sizes
Model S3000 S3-D240 L S3-D272 L S3-D299 L S3-D333 L S3-D358 L S3-D379 L S3-D412 L S3-D436 L S3-D455 L S3-D482 L S3-D527 L S3-D473 L S3-D501 L S3-D552 L S3-D604 L S3-D648 L S3-D672 L S3-D728 L S3-D781 L S3-D828 L S3-D872 L S3-D923 L S3-D970 L S3-D985 L S3-D1056 L Top Inlet (mm) (2x) ND 150 (2x) ND 150 (2x) ND 150 (2x) ND 150 (2x) ND 150 (2x) ND 150 (2x) ND 150 (2x) ND 150 (2x) ND 150 (2x) ND 150 (2x) ND 150 (2x) ND 200 (2x) ND 200 (2x) ND 200 (2x) ND 200 (2x) ND 200 (2x) ND 200 (2x) ND 200 (2x) ND 200 (2x) ND 200 (2x) ND 200 (2x) ND 200 (2x) ND 200 (2x) ND 200 (2x) ND 200 Water Outlet (mm) (1x) ND 200 (1x) ND 200 (1x) ND 200 (1x) ND 200 (1x) ND 200 (1x) ND 200 (1x) ND 200 (1x) ND 200 (1x) ND 250 (1x) ND 250 (1x) ND 250 (1x) ND 250 (1x) ND 250 (1x) ND 250 (1x) ND 250 (1x) ND 250 (1x) ND 250 (1x) ND 300 (1x) ND 300 (1x) ND 300 (1x) ND 300 (1x) ND 300 (1x) ND 300 (1x) ND 300 (1x) ND 300 Make-Up (mm) ND 25 ND 25 ND 25 ND 25 ND 25 ND 25 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 F (mm) 6 6 6 6 6 6 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 G (mm) 1292 1292 1292 1292 1292 1292 1489 1489 1489 1489 1489 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800 J (mm) 2648 2648 2648 2648 2648 2648 3042 3042 3042 3042 3042 3664 3664 3664 3664 3664 3664 3664 3664 3664 3664 3664 3664 3664 3664
S3000D
- B 22
Model S3000 S3-D583 L S3-D618 L S3-D676 L S3-D725 L S3-D1132 L S3-D1213 L S3-D1301 L
Top Inlet (mm) (2x) ND 200 (2x) ND 200 (2x) ND 200 (2x) ND 200 (2x) ND 250 (2x) ND 250 (2x) ND 250
Water Outlet (mm) (1x) ND 250 (1x) ND 300 (1x) ND 300 (1x) ND 300 (1x) ND 350 (1x) ND 350 (1x) ND 350
Make-Up (mm) ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50 ND 50
F (mm) 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
G (mm) 2116 2116 2116 2116 2116 2116 2116
J (mm) 4296 4296 4296 4296 4296 4296 4296
S3000D
Notes:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, all connections DN150 and smaller are MPT, and connections DN200 and larger are beveled for welding. 2. On double cell units, connections are the same size but are located on both ends of the unit.
Sound Attenuation S3-D240 L through S3-D725 L
1. Intake Attenuator; 2. Discharge Attenuator
Model No. S3-D240 L S3-D272 L S3-D299 L S3-D333 L S3-D358 L S3-D379 L S3-D412 L S3-D436 L S3-D455 L S3-D482 L S3-D527 L S3-D473 L S3-D501 L S3-D552 L S3-D604 L S3-D648 L S3-D672 L S3-D583 L S3-D618 L S3-D676 L S3-D725 L
Fan Motor (kW) 7,5 11 15 15 18,5 22 18,5 22 18,5 22 30 18,5 22 22 30 37 45 18,5 22 30 37
A (mm) 2578 2578 2578 2578 2578 2578 3035 3035 3035 3035 3035 3340 3340 3340 3340 3340 3340 3645 3645 3645 3645
B (mm) 1715 1715 1715 2121 2121 2121 2121 2121 2527 2527 2527 2121 2121 2527 2527 2527 2527 2527 2527 2527 2527
Weight Discharge Attenuator (kg) (1) 350 350 350 350 350 350 400 400 400 400 400 460 460 460 460 460 460 550 550 550 550
Weight Intake Attenuator (kg) (2) (3) 340 340 340 420 420 420 480 480 570 570 570 580 580 690 690 690 690 810 810 810 810
Baltimore Aircoil
S3000D
- B 23
Sound Attentuation S3-D728 L through S3-D1301 L
Open Cooling Towers
1. Intake Sound Attenuation; 2. Discharge Attenuation
Model No.
Fan Motor (kW) 30 37 45 37 45 55 45 55 55 55
A (mm) 3645 3645 3645 3645 3645 3645 3645 3645 4255 4255 4255
B1 (mm) 994 994 994 1807 1807 1807 2213 2213 1807 2213 2213
B2 (mm) 2353 2353 2353 2353 2353 2353 2353 2353 2353 2759 2759
Weight Discharge Attenuator (1) (kg) 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 570 570 570
Weight Lower Intake Attenuator (both) (2) (3) (kg) 270 270 270 500 500 500 500 500 580 710 710
Weight Upper Intake Attenuator(both) (2) (3) (kg) 640 640 640 640 640 640 750 750 750 880 880
S3-D728 L S3-D781 L S3-D828 L S3-D872 L S3-D923 L S3-D970 L S3-D985 L S3-D1056 L S3-D1132L S3-D1213L S3-D1301L
General Notes Sound Attenuation

1. Discharge attenuator is shipped in one piece, not installed. 2. Intake attenuators are shipped installed for single cell units. For 2 or more cells, consult factory. 3. Weight of intake attenuator is total for both attenuators. 4. For correct layout and piping considerations, please refer to your local BAC Balticare representative.
Remote Sump Data

Refer to the "Technical Resources" section "Selection of Remote Sump" for Remote Sump Data.
S3000D
- B 24
Structural Support
The recommended support arrangement for the Series 3000D Cooling Tower, consists of parallel I-beams positioned as shown in the drawings. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to assure access to the bottom of the tower. The Series 3000D may also be supported on columns at the anchor bolt locations as shown the following Plan. A minimum bearing surface of 100 cm must be provided under each of the concentrated load points (See Note 6 following page). To support a Series 3000D Cooling Tower on columns, or in an alternate steel support arrangement, consult your BAC Balticare Representative.
S3000D
Units with and without Sound Attenuation

Single Cell Unit Plan A
1. Outline of unit; 2. Air Inlet Side; 3. Mounting Holes (see Note 7); 4. Additional Anchor Bolts (see note 8).
Single Cell Unit Plan B
1. Outline of unit; 2. Air Inlet Side; 3. Mounting Holes (see Note 7).
Baltimore Aircoil
S3000D
- B 25
Double Cell Unit Plan C
Open Cooling Towers
1. Outline of unit; 2. Air Inlet Side; 3. Mounting Holes (see Note 7); 4. Additional Anchor Bolts (see note 8).
Model No.
Operating Weight (1) (kg) 6706 6765 6792 7151 7164 7187 8435 8458 8844 8867 8939 10483 10506 11663 11736 11740 12285 14555 14560 14660 15904 16004 16585 18269 18310 13756 13779 13852 13856 18746 20112 21151
Shipping Weight (1)(2) (kg) 3083 3142 3169 3296 3310 3332 3823 3845 3968 3991 4063 4626 4649 4903 4976 4980 5530 6251 6256 6351 6583 6678 7264 7064 7105 5480 5502 5575 5580 7540 7968 9007
Weight at bolt hole location (1)(2) (kg) 1677 1691 1698 1788 1791 1797 2109 2115 2211 2217 2235 2621 2627 2916 2934 2935 3071 3639 3640 3665 3976 4001 4146 4567 4578 3439 3445 3463 3464 4687 5028 5288
Length (L1) (mm) 2584 2584 2584 2584 2584 2584 2978 2978 2978 2978 2978 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 4245 4245 4245 4245 4245 4245 4245
Length (L2) (mm) 5232 5232 5232 5232 5232 5232 6020 6020 6020 6020 6020 7264 7264 7264 7264 7264 7264 7264 7264 7264 7264 7264 7264 7264 7264 8555 8555 8555 8555 8555 8555 8555
Width (W) (mm) 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500 6110 6110 6110 6110 6110 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 6566 7328 7328 7328 7328 7328 7328 7328
A (mm) 2845 2845 2845 2845 2845 2845 3454 3454 3454 3454 3454 3912 3912 3912 3912 3912 3912 3912 3912 3912 3912 3912 3912 3912 3912 4674 4674 4674 4674 4674 4674 4674
B (mm) 4991 4991 4991 4991 4991 4991 5600 5600 5600 5600 5600 6058 6058 6058 6058 6058 6058 6058 6058 6058 6058 6058 6058 6058 6058 6820 6820 6820 6820 6820 6820 6820
C (mm) 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 37 37 37 37 37 37 37
D (mm) 2527 2527 2527 2527 2527 2527 2921 2921 2921 2921 2921 3543 3543 3543 3543 3543 3543 3543 3543 3543 3543 3543 3543 3543 3543 4172 4172 4172 4172 4172 4172 4172
E (mm) 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 137 137 137 137 137 137 137
S3-D240 L S3-D272 L S3-D299 L S3-D333 L S3-D358 L S3-D379 L S3-D412 L S3-D436 L S3-D455 L S3-D482 L S3-D527 L S3-D473 L S3-D501 L S3-D552 L S3-D604 L S3-D648 L S3-D672 L S3-D728 L S3-D781 L S3-D828 L S3-D872 L S3-D923 L S3-D970 L S3-D985 L S3-D1056 L S3-D583 L S3-D618 L S3-D676 L S3-D725 L S3-D1132 L S3-D1213 L S3-D1301 L
S3000D
- B 26
Notes:
1. Weights are for a single cell. To obtain weights for multi-cell units, multiply by the number of cells. 2. Operating weight and weight loading are for a single cell tower with water at overflow level in the cold water basin. 3. Support beams and anchor bolts to be selected and installed by parties other than BAC. 4. All support steel must be level at the top. 6. If point vibration isolation is used with multi-cell towers, the isolators must be located under the support steel, not between the support steel and the cooling towers. 7. 19 mm mounting holes. 4 holes required for models S3-D240 L through S3-D725 L. 8 holes required for models S3-D728 L through S3-D1301 L. 8. Detail for additional anchor bolt models S3-D725 L through S3D1301 L.
S3000D
5. Beams must be selected in accordance with accepted structural practice. Maximum deflection of beam under unit to be 1/360 of span, not to exceed 12 mm.
Baltimore Aircoil
S3000D
- B 27
Engineering Specifications
1.0 Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Furnish and install _____ factory-assembled, induceddraft, axial fan, crossflow cooling tower(s) with vertical air discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications, schedules and as shown on the plans. Overall dimensions shall not exceed approximately _____ mm long x ______ mm wide x _____ mm high. The total connected fan kW shall not exceed _____ kW. The cooling tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model ____________. 1.2 Thermal Capacity: The cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to cool _____ l/s of water from ______ C to _____C at _____C entering wet-bulb temperature. 1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction (standard): Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all structural members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip galvanised steel with all edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound. All external surfaces are protected with the BALTIPLUS Corrosion Protection. Casing panels shall be constructed of corrosion and UV-resistant fibreglass reinforced polyester (FRP) to minimise maintenance requirements and prolong equipment life. (Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional): Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric hot-dip galvanised steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting, hybrid polymer fusebonded to the substrate during a thermally activated curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program. Casing panels shall be constructed of corrosion and UV-resistant fibreglass reinforced polyester (FRP) to minimise maintenance requirements and prolong equipment life.
Open Cooling Towers
(Alternate 1.3) Type 304 or 316 Stainless Steel Construction: All structural members, including the structural frame, hot and cold water basins, distribution covers and fan deck shall be constructed of Type 304 or 316 stainless steel and assembled with stainless steel nut and bolt fasteners. Fan cylinder shall be galvanised steel protected with the Baltibond Corrosion Protection System. Casing panels shall be constructed of corrosion and UV-resistant fibreglass reinforced polyester (FRP) to minimise maintenance requirements and prolong equipment life. 1.4 Quality Assurance: The cooling tower manufacturer shall have a Management System certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of products and services. 1.5 Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of startup or eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
2.0 Construction Details

2.1 Structure: The cooling tower shall be constructed with a sturdy structural frame designed to transmit all wind and mechanical loads to the equipment anchorage. The frame shall be constructed of heavy-gauge steel angles and channels. 2.2 Casing Panels: Casing panels shall be constructed of corrosion and UV-resistant fibreglass reinforced polyester (FRP) to minimise maintenance requirements and prolong equipment life. 2.3 Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be constructed of heavy-gauge steel panels and structural members. The basin shall include a sloping depressed section with drain/clean-out connection. The basin area under the wet deck surface shall be sloped toward the depressed section to facilitate cleaning. Standard basin accessories shall include a brass make-up valve with a large diameter plastic float for easy adjustment of operating water level. (Alternate 2.3) Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Type 304 or 316 stainless steel panels and structural members. The basin shall include a depressed centre section with drain/clean-out connection. The basin area under the wet deck surface shall be sloped toward the depressed section to facilitate cleaning. Standard basin accessories shall include a brass make-up valve with a large diameter plastic float for easy adjustment of operating water level. 2.4 Water Outlet: The cooling tower basin outlet shall be beveled for welding. The outlet shall be provided with large area lift out strainers with perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution nozzles and an anti-vortexing device to prevent air entrainment. The strainer and vortex device shall be constructed of the same materials as the cold water basin to prevent dissimilar metal corrosion. 2.5 Water Distribution System: Hot water distribution basins shall be the open gravity type and constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 hotdip galvanized steel. Basin weirs and plastic metering orifices shall be provided to ensure even distribution of water over the wet deck surface. Lift-off distribution covers shall be constructed of heavygauge Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel.
3.0 Mechanical Equipment

3.1. Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow with aluminum alloy blades selected to provide optimum cooling tower thermal performance with minimal sound levels. Air shall discharge through a fan cylinder designed for streamlined air entry and minimum tip clearance for maximum fan efficiency. The top of the fan cylinder shall be equipped with a conical, non-sagging removable fan guard. (Alternate 3.1) Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be of Whisper Quiet fan design for ultra low sound consisting of multi-blade aerofoil fan design constructed of fibreglass reinforced plastic blades. 3.2. Bearings: Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported by heavy-duty, self-aligning, grease-packed ball bearings with moisture proof seals and integral slinger collars, designed for a minimum L10 life of 40 000 hours (280 000 Hr. Avg. Life). 3.3. Fan Drive: The fan(s) shall be belt driven with taper lock sheaves. The belts shall be constructed of neoprene reinforced polyester cord and be specifically designed for cooling tower service. 3.4. Sheaves: Fan and motor sheave(s) shall be fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials to minimize maintenance and ensure maximum drive and powerband operating life. 3.5. Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing type designed specifically for cooling tower service. The motor shall be furnished with special moisture protection on windings, shafts and bearings.
S3000D
- B 28
4.0 BACross II Wet Deck Surface and Integral Drift Eliminators

4.1 BACross II Wet Deck Surface and Drift Eliminators: The wet deck surface and integral drift eliminators shall be formed from selfextinguishing plastic material and shall be impervious to rot, decay, fungus and biological attack. The wet deck shall be suitable for entering water temperatures up to 50C. The wet deck surface shall be manufactured, tested, and rated by the cooling tower manufacturer and shall be elevated above the cold water basin to facilitate cleaning.
5.0 Combined Inlet Shield Technology
S3000D
5.1. Combined Inlet Shields: Combined inlet shields shall be separate from the wet deck surface and removable to allow easy access for inspection of the air/water interface at the air inlet side of the equipment. Combined inlet shields shall prevent UV-light and
debris from entering the unit, as well as prevent water splash out during fan cycling. They shall be constructed of maintenance free, corrosion and UV resistant material.
6.0 Access
6.1 Plenum Access: Two hinged access doors shall be provided for access into the plenum section.
7.0 Sound
7.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment, the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound levels detailed below. (Alternate) 7.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment, the cooling tower shall be furnished with an extremely low sound fan Type Whisper Quiet. Maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound levels detailed below.
Location Discharge Air Inlet End
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
8000
dB(A)
Baltimore Aircoil
TXV - B 29
TXV
Open Cooling Towers
Open Cooling Towers
Product Detail
TXV Open Cooling Tower ...................................................................... B30 Benefits ..................................................................................................... B32 Construction Details ................................................................................ B34 Custom Features and Options ................................................................ B35 Accessories ............................................................................................... B37 Engineering Data ..................................................................................... B39 Structural Support .................................................................................. B42 Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... B43
TXV - B 30
TXV Open Cooling Tower

Capacity
Single Cell Capacity: 10 - 128 l/s
TXV
General Description
Series 1500 Cooling Towers minimize the operating, installation, and maintenance costs associated with both new and replacement cooling tower projects. The Series 1500 delivers fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of flow and temperature requirements. Standard design features minimize the costs associated with enclosures, support requirements, electrical service, piping, and rigging.
Key Features
z
Ideal replacement unit Single side air inlet Low energy consumption Low installed cost Easy maintenance Reliable year-round operation Long service life
Baltimore Aircoil
TXV - B 31
Open Cooling Towers
TXV - B 32
Benefits
Ideal Replacement Unit
z
Support Steel Units are designed to mount directly on the existing support steel of many cooling towers (both cross flow and counter flow). Electrical Service Fan motor configurations can be supplied to match existing wiring. Enclosures Units fit in most existing enclosures with little or no modifications due to the single air inlet design.
Single air inlet provides installation flexibility in tight layouts
TXV
Counterflow CoolingTower Replacement
Replaced by Crossflow units

z
Evaporative Cooling Equipment minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system because it provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving natural resources and reducing environmental impact. TXV provides heat rejection at the lowest possible energy input and maintenance requirements via: - High efficiency, low kW axial fans - High efficiency BACross Wet Deck, which provides maximum air/water contact time at low air pressure drops - Multiple Fan Motor System: independent fan motor and drive assembly per fan, which allows extra steps of capacity control.
Baltimore Aircoil
TXV - B 33
Low Installed Cost

z
Single Side Air Inlet Units can be placed close to solid walls, reducing the size of enclosures and allowing for more profitable use of premium space. Modular Design The modular design minimizes the size and weight of the heaviest lift, allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes. Modular Design All models mount directly on parallel I-beams and ship complete with motors and drives factory-installed and aligned.
Open Cooling Towers
The unit shown ships in tow pieces to minimize shipping and rigging costs
Easy Maintenance
z
Easy Cleaning The wet deck surface is elevated above the sloped cold water basin floor to facilitate flushing of dirt and debris from this critical area. Hinged Access Doors and Standard Internal Walkway Provide easy entry to the spacious plenum for routine drive maintenance. Accessibility Make-up, drain, overflow and optional basin accessories are accessible from outside the unit.

z
Long Service Life

z
Materials of Construction Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance, unit operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project (See section Technical Resources, Materials of Construction" for more details)
TXV - B 34
TXV
z
Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel panels
5. BACross Wet Deck Surface with Integral Drift Eliminators (Not Shown)
z
2. Fan Drive System

z z z z
z z

z z z
3. Low kW Axial Fan(s)

z z
7. Cold Water Basin

z z z
Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning Suction strainer with anti-vortex hood Adjustable water make-up assembly from air inlet side Integral internal walkway as standard

z z z z
Steel covers in easy to remove sections Low pump head gravity distribution basin Large orifice, non-clog nozzles Integral strainer
8. Hinged Access Doors

z
Inward swinging door
Baltimore Aircoil
TXV - B 35

z
Standard Construction: Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized steel protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection on the outside of the unit. Optional BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System: The BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend equipment life, is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the unit. Optional Stainless Steel Construction: Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of stainless steel either type 304 or 316.
Open Cooling Towers
Note: Refer to section Technical Resources, Material Options for more details on the materials described above.
Multiple Fan Drive System

All TXV-models are standard equipped with the multiple fan motor system. This system consists of an independent fan motor and drive assembly per fan with a plenum partition to allow independent operation of each fan. This standard feature provides 2 steps of capacity control on dual fan units and 3 steps of capacity control on triple fan units, as illustrated below.
Individual Motor and Drive on each Fan
Extra Steps of Capacity Control
Removable Bundled Fill

For installations where it is necessary or recommended to remove the wet deck surface for more thorough cleaning and disinfection, removable bundled fill is available. The fill bundles can be easily lifted and handled by one person and therefore provide a simple and secure method of removing and installing. The bundles can be dismantled and sheet by sheet can be removed for inspection and cleaning of both sides. After cleaning the sheets can be re-bundled and re-installed.
TXV - B 36
Low Sound Operation

The low sound levels generated by Series 1500 Units make them suitable for installation in most environments. For very sound sensitive installations, thanks to the use of high efficiency low noise fans as standard, all models are also available with a Whisper Quiet sound fan option that significantly reduces the sound levels generated from the tower with minimal impact on thermal performance.
TXV
Sound Attenuators on TXV Cooling Tower
For extremely sound sensitive installations, factory designed, tested and rated sound attenuation is available for both the air inlet and discharge.


Combined Inlet shields prevent biological growth from sunlight, act as a filter for air borne impurities and debris and eliminate water splash out.
Baltimore Aircoil
TXV - B 37
Accessories
External Service Platform with Ladder, Safety Cage and Handrails
Note: Top air inlet screens are recommended with this option.
Open Cooling Towers
Internal Ladder
For access to the motor and drive assemblies internal ladders are available on models TXV-292 up to TXV-500 and TXV-310 up to TXV-425.
External Service Platform, Ladder and Safety Cage

For access to the motor and drive assemblies on models TXV-292 up to TXV-500 and TXV-310 up to TXV-425 an upper service platform with ladder and handrails is available. Safety gates are available for handrail openings.
Standard Internal Walkway
Internal Ladder and Service Platform

TXV - B 38
Basin Heaters
Model No. TXV TXV 109 - 154 TXV 177 - 193 TXV 217 - 237 TXV 292 - 333 TXV 354 - 500 TXV 310 - 425 Heater -18C (kW) 1x6 1x6 1x8 1x8 2x6 2x6
TXV



These covers prevent the accumulation of leaves, debris and algae in the hot water distribution pans.
Baltimore Aircoil
TXV - B 39
Engineering Data
TXV 109 - TXV 237
Open Cooling Towers
1. Water in; 2. Water out; 3. Make Up; 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6.Access Door.
Model No. TXV TXV 109 TXV 123 TXV 135 TXV 154 TXV 177 TXV 193 TXV 217 TXV 237
Operating Weight (kg) 3040 3060 3070 3090 3780 3790 4600 4610
Shipping Weight (kg) 1640 1660 1670 1690 1910 1920 2290 2300
Heaviest Section (kg) 1640 1660 1670 1690 1910 1920 2290 2300
Air Flow (m/s) 16,4 18,8 20,8 23,8 27,1 29,8 30,8 33,9
Fan Motor (kW) (1) 4,0 (1) 5,5 (1) 7,5 (1) 11 (2) 5,5 (2) 7,5 (2) 5,5 (2) 7,5
Fluid Inlet ND (mm) 150 150 150 150 150 150 200 200
Fluid Outlet ND (mm) 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
Make Up ND (mm) 25 25 25 25 25 25 40 40
H (mm) 3150 3150 3150 3150 3150 3150 3150 3150
L (mm) 2775 2775 2775 2775 3690 3690 3690 3690
W (mm) 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2985 2985
TXV - B 40
TXV 292 - TXV 500
TXV
1. Water in; 2. Water out; 3. Make Up; 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6.Access door.
Operating Weight (kg) 6090 6110 6130 8560 8570 8610 8710
Model TXV TXV 292 TXV 314 TXV 333 TXV 354 TXV 402 TXV 441 TXV 500
Shipping Weight (kg) 3100 3120 3140 4040 4050 4080 4180
Heaviest Section (kg) 1720 1740 1760 2260 2270 2300 2400
Air Flow (m/s) 39,1 42,1 45,6 46,6 53,4 58,8 67,7
Fan Motor (kW) (2) 7,5 (2) 11 (2) 11 (3) 4,0 (3) 5,5 (3) 7,5 (3) 11
Fluid Inlet ND (mm) 250 250 250 250 250 250 250
Fluid Outlet ND (mm) 250 250 250 250 250 250 250
Make Up ND (mm) 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
H (mm) 4385 4385 4385 4525 4525 4525 4525
L (mm) 3690 3690 3690 5520 5520 5520 5520
W (mm) 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985
TXV 310 - TXV 425
1. Water in; 2. Water out; 3. Make Up; 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6.Access Door.
Baltimore Aircoil
TXV - B 41
Model No. TXV TXV 310 TXV 340 TXV 365 TXV 385 TXV 425
Operating Weight (kg) 7160 7170 7200 7210 7310
Shipping Weight (kg) 3370 3380 3400 3410 3510
Heaviest Section (kg) 1770 1780 1800 1810 1910
Air Flow (m/s) 38,3 42,1 45,4 48,2 53,1
Fan Motor (kW) (2) 5,5 (2) 7,5 (2) 11 (2) 11 (2) 15
Fluid Inlet ND (mm) 250 250 250 250 250
Fluid Outlet ND (mm) 250 250 250 250 250
Make Up ND (mm) 40 40 40 40 40
H (mm) 4790 4790 4790 4790 4790
L (mm) 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690
W (mm) 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610
General Notes
Open Cooling Towers
1. All connections 100 mm and smaller are MPT. Connections 125 mm and larger are bevelled-for-welding. 2. Make-up, overflow, suction, and drain connections can be provided on end opposite to that shown; consult your BAC Balticare representative.
3. Models TXV 292 up to 333, TXV 354 up to 500 and TXV 310 up to 425 are shipped in two sections per cell. The top section is the heaviest and has a height of 2130 mm.
Sound Attenuation
1. Intake Attenuator; 2. Discharge Attenuator.
Model No TXV TXV 109- 154 TXV 177 - 193 TXV 217 - 237 TXV 292 - 333 TXV 354 - 500 TXV 310 - 425 D 1345 1345 1665 1665 1500 2005
Dimensions (mm) Ht 3885 3885 3885 5120 5260 5525 Intake 190 250 250 400 600 450
Weight (kg) Discharge 210 255 270 270 385 310
Models TXV 292 up to 333, TXV 354 up to 500 and TXV 310 up to TXV 425: intake attenuators ship in two sections. Indicated weights are total weights of two sections. W = Unit Width, Refer to general Engineering Data.
Remote Sump Data

TXV - B 42
Structural Support
The recommended support arrangement for units consists of parallel I-beams running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following drawing. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to the bottom of the unit. To support units in an alternate steel support arrangement, consult your BAC Balticare Representative.
TXV
1. Unit Outline; 2. Air Intake; 3. Mounting holes 22 mm; 4. Unit.
Model TXV 109-154 177-193 217-333 310-425 354-500
Max. Deflection (mm) (4) 8 10 10 10 12
Dimensions (mm) A 2325 2325 2925 3550 2925 B 2440 C 255 255 255 255 270
N of 16 mm Anchor Bolts 4 4 4 4 8
Notes:
1. The recommended support arrangement for the units consists of parallel I-beams extending the full length of the unit. Supports and anchor bolts are to be designed and furnished by others. 2. All supporting beams are to be flush and level at top and must be oriented relative to gage line as shown. 3. Recommended design loads for each unit support beam should be 70% of the total unit operating weight applied as a uniform load to each of the unit beams. Beams should be designed in accordance with standard structural practice. For the maximum allowable deflection of beams under the unit see table. 4. All mounting holes have a diameter of 22 mm at the locations shown. 5. If vibration isolators are used, a rail or channel must be provided between the unit (and optional attenuator) and the isolators to provide continuous unit support. Additionally the support beams must be designed to accommodate the overall length and mounting hole location of the isolators that may differ from those of the unit. Refer to vibration isolator drawings for these data.
Baltimore Aircoil
TXV - B 43
1.0 Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Furnish and install _____ factory-assembled, induceddraft, axial fan, crossflow cooling tower(s) with single side air entry and vertical air discharge. Overall dimensions shall not exceed approximately _____ mm long x ______ mm wide x _____ mm high. The total connected fan kW shall not exceed _____ kW. The cooling tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model ____________. 1.2 Thermal Capacity: The cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to cool _____ l/s of water from ______ C to _____C at _____C entering wet-bulb temperature. 1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction (standard): Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip galvanised steel with all edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound and protected with the BALTIPLUS Corrosion Protection. (Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional): Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric hot-dip galvanised steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting, hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program. (Alternate 1.3) Type 304 or 316 Stainless Steel Construction: All steel panels and structural members, including the structural frame, hot and cold water basins, distribution covers and fan deck shall be constructed of Type 304 or 316 stainless steel and assembled with stainless steel nut and bolt fasteners. The fan cylinder shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip galvanised steel and protected with the BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System. 1.4 Quality Assurance: The cooling tower manufacturer shall have a Management System certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of products and services. 1.5 Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of start-up or eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
Open Cooling Towers

2.1 Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall include a depressed section with drain/clean-out connection. The basin area under the wet deck surface shall be sloped toward the depressed section to facilitate cleaning. Standard basin accessories shall include a brass make-up valve with a large diameter plastic float for easy adjustment of operating water level. 2.2 Water Outlet: The cooling tower basin outlet shall be beveled. The outlet shall be provided with large area lift out strainers with perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution nozzles and an anti-vortexing device to prevent air entrainment. The strainer and vortex device shall be constructed of the same materials as the cold water basin to prevent dissimilar metal corrosion. 2.3 Water Distribution System: The distribution system shall be furnished with a single water inlet. The pipe stub connection shall be beveled for welding. Plastic metering devices shall be provided to ensure the uniform distribution of water over the wet deck surface.

3.1. Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow with aluminum alloy blades selected to provide optimum cooling tower thermal performance with minimal sound levels. Air shall discharge through a fan cylinder designed for streamlined air entry and minimum tip clearance for maximum fan efficiency. The top of the fan cylinder shall be equipped with a conical, non-sagging removable fan guard. (Alternate 3.1) Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be of Whisper Quiet fan design for ultra low sound consisting of specially shaped aluminium blades with end caps and flexible hub connection. Air shall discharge through a fan cylinder designed for streamlined air entry and minimum tip clearance for maximum fan efficiency. The top of the fan cylinder shall be equipped with a conical, non-sagging removable fan guard. 3.2. Bearings: Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported by heavy-duty, self-aligning, grease-packed ball bearings with moisture proof seals and integral slinger collars, designed for a minimum L10 life of 40 000 hours (280 000 Hr. Avg. Life). 3.3. Fan Drive: The fan(s) shall be belt driven with taper lock sheaves. The belts shall be constructed of neoprene reinforced polyester cord and be specifically designed for cooling tower service. 3.4. Sheaves: Fan and motor sheave(s) shall be fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials to minimise maintenance and ensure maximum operating life. 3.5. Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing type designed specifically for cooling tower service. The motor shall be furnished with special moisture protection on windings, shafts and bearings.
4.0 BACross Wet Deck Surface and Drift Eliminators

4.1. Wet Deck Surface and drift Eliminators: The wet deck surface and integral drift eliminators shall be impervious to rot, decay, and fungus or biological attack. The wet deck surface shall be manufactured and performance tested by the cooling tower manufacturer to provide single source responsibility and assure control of the final product.
TXV - B 44
5.0 Combined Inlet Shields

5.1. Combined Inlet Shields: Combined inlet shields shall be separate from the wet deck surface and removable to allow easy access for inspection of the air/water interface at the air inlet side of the equipment. Combined inlet shields shall prevent UV-light and debris from entering the unit, as well as prevent water splash out during fan cycling. They shall be constructed of maintenance free, corrosion and UV resistant material.
6.0 Access
TXV
6.1. Plenum Access: Hinged access doors shall be provided on one or two sides of the tower for access into plenum section.
7.0 Sound
7.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment, the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound levels detailed below.
Location Discharge Air Inlet End Back
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
8000
dB(A)
Baltimore Aircoil
FXT - B 45
FXT
Open Cooling Towers
Open Cooling Towers
Product Detail
FXT Open Cooling Towers ..................................................................... B46 Benefits ..................................................................................................... B48 Construction Details ................................................................................ B49 Custom Features and Options ................................................................ B50 Accessories ............................................................................................... B51 Engineering Data ..................................................................................... B52 Structural Support .................................................................................. B54 Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... B56
FXT - B 46
FXT Open Cooling Towers

Capacity
FXT
General Description
FXT Cooling Towers deliver independently verified, fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of flow and temperature requirements. Standard design features satisfy todays environmental concerns, minimize installation costs, maximize operating reliability, and simplify maintenance requirements.
Key Features
z
Low energy consumption Low installed cost Easy maintenance Long service life Crossflow design Forced draught configuration Single side horizontal air entry Horizontal air discharge Aluminium axial fans Gravity water distribution
Baltimore Aircoil
FXT - B 47
Open Cooling Towers
FXT - B 48
Benefits
Low Installed Cost
z
All single cell FXT Cooling Towers ship completely assembled, minimizing installation time and cost:
-
No motors to mount No sheaves to align No belts to install No make-up system to assemble

This FXT unit is placed with one lift and ships fully assembled.
FXT
z z
Easy Maintenance
The interior of the unit is accessible through circular access doors for adjusting the float valve, cleaning the strainer or flushing the basin The fan motor is located on the exterior of the unit for easy maintenance and belt adjustment. On most models, a single threaded bolt and nut assembly further simplifies belt adjustment. Extended lubrication fittings are located on the exterior of the unit for bearing lubrication.
Circular Access Door
The Fan Motor is easily accessible at the base of the unit's exterior
Long Service Life

z
Materials of Construction Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance, unit operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project (See section Technical Resources, Materials of Construction" for more details)

z
Evaporative cooling equipment minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system because it provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving natural resources and reducing environmental impact. The FXT provides the heat rejection required at the lowest possible energy input via:
-
High efficiency, low kW axial fans High efficiency BACross Wet Deck, which provides maximum air/water contact time at low air pressure drops Variable frequency drives
Baltimore Aircoil
FXT - B 49
Open Cooling Towers
1. Heavy Duty Construction

z
z z
Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack Designed and manufactured by BAC
2. Fan Drive System

z z z
6. Air Inlet Cylinder

z
V-type belt drive Heavy-duty bearings Extended lubrication lines
Streamlines air entry for maximum efficiency
7. Inlet Screens
z z
Protection from moving parts Easily removed for access to fans, bearings, motor and drives
3. Low kW Axial Fan(s)

z z
8. Water Make-Up Valve Assembly

z
Bronze float valve Large diameter plastic float

z z z
Low pump head gravity distribution basin Large orifice, non-clog nozzles Steel distribution covers
9. Strainer
z
Anti-vortexing design to prevent air entrainment
10. Access Door 5. BACross Wet Deck Surface with Integral Drift Eliminators
z z
Circular access door
Plastic material
FXT - B 50

z
Standard Construction: Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized steel protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection on the outside of the cooling towers. Optional BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System: The BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend equipment life, is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the cooling tower.
FXT
Fan Drive System

FXT cooling towers are belt-driven. The belts are easily adjusted by means of a threaded bolt and nut arrangement.
BACross Wet Deck Surface

An efficient wet deck surface designed, manufactured and tested by BAC is furnished as standard in all FXT cooling towers. It is impervious to rot, decay, biological attack. The special configuration with integral eliminators provides maximum air/water contact and low air pressure drop to ensure efficient heat transfer while minimizing power requirements.
Baltimore Aircoil
FXT - B 51
Accessories
Basin Heaters
Model FXT 27 - FXT 68 FXT 74 - FXT 86 FXT 97 - FXT 133 FXT 160 - FXT 250 FXT 194 - FXT 266 FXT 320 - FXT 500 Heaters -18 C (kW) 1x3 1x4 2x3 2x4 4x3 4x4
Open Cooling Towers


Air Discharge Screens

Wire mesh screens are available to cover the discharge of the tower to prevent debris from entering the eliminators and cold water basin.

Removable covers for the hot water distribution basins will significantly reduce maintenance and cleaning requirements of the basins and nozzles. The covers will have either Baltiplus or Baltibond Corrosion Protection System to match the equipment material specification.
Discharge Air Turning Vanes

Discharge air turning vanes are available to direct the discharge air up and away from the unit. The turning vanes are installed at the factory on the discharge of the tower and require no increase in fan motor kW.
Note: Discharge Air Turning Vanes are not compatible with Air Discharge Screens.
FXT - B 52
Engineering Data
FXT 27 - FXT 500
FXT
1. Drain; 2. Water Outlet; 3. Overflow; 4. Make-Up; 5. Water Inlet; 6. Access Door ; 7. Top of Distribution Box; 8. Metering Orifices; 9. Flow Divider; *External Screen section only on FXT 211, 250, 422, 500.
Baltimore Aircoil
FXT - B 53
Model FXT FXT 27 FXT 32 FXT 43 FXT 51 FXT 60 FXT 68 FXT 74 FXT 88 FXT 97 FXT 116 FXT 133 FXT 160 FXT 173 FXT 211 FXT 250 FXT 194 FXT 232 FXT 266 FXT 320 FXT 346 FXT 422 FXT 500
Operating Weight (kg) 945 950 1100 1110 1425 1430 1920 1925 2755 2765 2780 3640 3655 4275 4295 5505 5525 5565 7285 7320 8545 8590
Shipping Weight (kg) 425 430 455 465 555 560 780 785 1000 1010 1025 1310 1325 1620 1640 1995 2015 2055 2615 2650 3230 3275
Heaviest Section (kg) 425 430 455 465 555 560 780 785 1000 1010 1025 1310 1325 1620 1640 1000 1010 1030 1310 1325 1620 1640
Air Flow (m/s) 4,85 5,32 7,08 8,11 9,93 11,76 11,03 13,07 14,68 17,40 19,93 24,10 26,53 30,22 34,60 29,36 34,81 39,85 48,19 53,04 60,44 69,19
Fan Motor (kW) (1) 0,75 (1) 1,1 (1) 1,5 (1) 2,2 (1) 2,2 (1) 4,0 (1) 2,2 (1) 4,0 (1) 2,2 (1) 4,0 (1) 5,5 (1) 5,5 (1) 7,5 (1) 7,5 (1) 11 (2) 2,2 (2) 4,0 (2) 5,5 (2) 5,5 (2) 7,5 (2) 7,5 (2) 11
Fluid Inlet ND (mm) 100 100 150 150 150 150 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 (2) 200 (2) 200 (2) 200 (2) 200 (2) 200 (2) 200 (2) 200
Fluid Outlet ND (mm) 100 100 150 150 150 150 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 (2) 200 (2) 200 (2) 200 (2) 200 (2) 200 (2) 200 (2) 200
Make Up ND (mm) 15 15 15 15 15 15 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
H (mm) 1810 1810 2216 2216 2216 2216 2540 2540 2540 2540 2540 2540 2540 3356 3356 2540 2540 2540 2540 2540 3353 3353
L (mm) 1374 1374 1374 1374 1832 1832 1832 1832 2772 2772 2772 3660 3660 3660 3660 5556 5556 5556 7334 7334 7334 7334
W (mm) 2181 2181 2181 2181 2181 2181 2219 2219 2219 2219 2219 2219 2219 2219 2219 2219 2219 2219 2219 2219 2219 2219
Open Cooling Towers
General Notes
1. Unless otherwise indicated, all connections ND 100 and smaller are MPT and connections ND 125 and larger are beveled for welding. 2. Operating weight is for tower with water level in the cold water basin at overflow. 3. Unit height is indicate, for precise value refer to the certified print. 4. Inlet piping must rest on the flow divider. The inlet piping to the distribution box must be the correct size as indicated in the table.
FXT - B 54
Structural Support
FXT
1. Supporting steelwork and anchor bolts are to be selected and installed by others. 2. All supporting steel must be flush and level at the top and must be oriented to the gage line as shown in SECTION A-A. 3. Recommended design loads for each beam should be 65% of the total operating weight applied as a uniform load to each beam. Beam should be designed in accordance with standard design practice. Refer to the below table for the maximum allowable deflection of beams
4. All mounting holes are 16 mm diameter at the locations shown. 5. If continuous vibration isolator rails are used, be certain to allow for the length of the rails when determining length of supporting steel. Vibration isolator rails are sometimes longer than the cooling tower dimensions shown. Refer to vibration isolator drawings for this information. If point vibration isolation is used, the isolators should be installed at the mounting hole locations shown.
Single Cell
Recommended Support
Alternate Support
1. Holes; 2. Outline of Tower; 3. Support Beams (by others); 4. Air Inlet Side.
Baltimore Aircoil
FXT - B 55
Double Cell
Open Cooling Towers
1. Holes; 2. Outline of Tower; 3. Support Beams (by others); 4. Air Inlet Side
Model FXT FXT 27 FXT 32 FXT 43 FXT 51 FXT 60 FXT 68 FXT 74 FXT 88 FXT 97 FXT 116 FXT 133 FXT 160 FXT 173 FXT 211 FXT 250 FXT 194 FXT 232 FXT 266 FXT 320 FXT 346 FXT 422 FXT 500
A (mm) 1549 1549 1549 1549 1549 1549 1549 1549 2181 2181 2181 2181 2181 2181 2181 2181 2181 2181 2181 2181 2181 2181
B (mm) 1067 1067 1067 1067 1524 1524 1524 1524 2438 2438 2438 3353 3353 3353 3353 2438 2438 2438 3353 3353 3353 3353
C (mm) 346 346 346 321 321 321 321
P1 (kg) 284 285 330 333 449 450 528 529 758 760 765 1001 1005 1154 1160 758 760 765 1001 1007 1154 1160
P2 (kg) 189 190 220 222 264 265 432 433 620 622 626 819 822 983 988 619 622 626 820 823 983 988
Maximum Deflection (mm) 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
FXT - B 56
1.0 Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Furnish and install _____ factory-assembled, forceddraft, axial fan, crossflow cooling tower(s). The tower(s) shall have air entry on one side only. The tower(s) shall have the fan and all moving parts located in the dry entering airstream provide greater reliability and long life. Overall dimensions shall not exceed approximately _____ mm long x ______ mm wide x _____ mm high. The total connected fan kW shall not exceed _____ kW. The cooling tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model ____________. 1.2 Thermal Capacity: The cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to cool _____ l/s of water from ______ C to _____C at _____C entering wet-bulb temperature. 1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction (standard): Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel with all edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound and the exterior protected with the BALTIPLUS Corrosion Protection. (Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional): Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting, hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program. 1.4 Quality Assurance: The cooling tower manufacturer shall have a Management System certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of products and services. 1.5 Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of startup or eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
FXT

2.1. Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel. Standard accessories shall include circular access doors, large-area, lift-out hot-dip galvanized steel strainers with perforated openings sized smaller than water distribution nozzle orifices, an integral anti-vortexing hood to prevent air entrainment, and a brass make-up valve with large diameter plastic float, arranged for easy adjustment. 2.3. Water Distribution System: Hot water distribution basin shall be open gravity type and constructed of heavy-gauge, Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel. Basin weirs and plastic metering orifices shall be provided to assure even distribution of water over the wet deck surface. Lift-off distribution cover shall be constructed of heavygauge, Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel.

3.1. Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow type. Air shall be drawn into the tower through a fan cylinder designed for streamlined air entry and minimum fan blade tip clearance for maximum fan efficiency. 3.2. Bearings: Fan(s) shall be mounted on a horizontal solid steel shaft supported by two heavy-duty, self-aligning, relubricatable ball bearings with cast iron housings and designed for minimum L10 life of 40 000 hours (280 000 Hr. Avg. Life). Extended lubrication lines are provided for ease of maintenance. 3.3. Fan Drive: Fan(s) shall be driven by V-belts and all moving parts shall be protected by removable steel screens that shall ship installed on the unit. 3.4. Fan Motor(s): Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing type, designed specifically for cooling tower service. The motor shall be furnished with special moisture protection on windings, shafts and bearings.
4.0 BACross Wet Deck Surface and Drift Eliminators

4.1. Wet Deck Surface and drift Eliminators: The wet deck surface and integral drift eliminators shall be impervious to rot, decay, and fungus or biological attack. The wet deck surface shall be manufactured and performance tested by the cooling tower manufacturer to provide single source responsibility and assure control of the final product.
5.0 Access
5.1 Basin Access: Circular access doors shall be provided for easy access to the make-up water assembly and suction strainer for routine maintenance.
6.0 Sound
Location Discharge Air Inlet End Top
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
8000
dB(A)
Baltimore Aircoil
RCT - B 57
RCT
.
Open Cooling Towers
Open Cooling Towers
Product Detail
RCT Open Cooling Tower ...................................................................... B58 Benefits ..................................................................................................... B60 Construction Details ................................................................................ B64 Custom Features and Options ................................................................ B66 Accessories ............................................................................................... B67 Engineering Data ..................................................................................... B68 Structural Support .................................................................................. B72 Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... B75
RCT - B 58
RCT Open Cooling Tower

Capacity
RCT
General Discription
Commercial applications demand reliable, cost effective and energy efficient solutions. With an ever increasing focus on operational reliability and ease of maintenance. It is paramount that cooling equipment be also easy to inspect, clean & maintain. The RCT-2000 cooling tower responds to all these requirements thanks to built-in design features. Industrial applications face unique challenges in their processes with varying site conditions The RCT-2000 cooling tower provides solutions to these challenges by reducing the cost of plant design, construction, operation and on-going maintenance, whilst improving the standard of quality and construction, required by medium to heavy industry.
Key Features
z
Total Lower Installation Costs Low Noise Low Height Superior Pultruded Composite Construction Superior Maintenance and Cleaning Possibilities
Baltimore Aircoil
RCT - B 59
Open Cooling Towers
RCT - B 60
Benefits
Total Lower Installation Costs
RCT
Modular Design
Factory Assembled
Single or multiplexed configurations, common or segmented basins, partitioned or extended air inlets and increased capacity control steps, all are but a few examples of the flexible modular cooling tower design. The tower can be shipped directly from the factory as a fully assembled unit, as unit modules or knocked down, to suit diverse and often restricted on-site conditions. The low shipping weights and modular shipping options reduce transport and crane costs. Lifting lugs, provided as standard, offer secure fixing points for safe crane lifts. Lower installation costs are achieved due to flanged inlet-outlet connections, solvent welded drain connections and threaded make-up, overflow and quick-fill connections.
Total Lower Installation Cost
Low Noise
The use of high efficiency axial fans as standard, a smooth faced streamlined air entry fan cylinder and a minimum tip clearance, all translate into a low air inlet velocity which in turn ensures noise levels are minimised. Varying fan powers can also be achieved within a nominal tower size.
Low Noise Axial Fan
Baltimore Aircoil
RCT - B 61
Low Height
The tower has been designed as a low height counter-flow cooling tower able to accommodate height sensitive sites, reduce pump head and provide easy access to all of its components.
Open Cooling Towers
Low Height
Strenght Pultruded Composite
Superior Pultruded Composite Construction

The use of high strength Pultruded Composite components for the primary structure combined with BAC's patented "Bonded Panel to Post Connection", offers many advantages over conventional hand laid or chopped strand fibreglass construction methods. Pultruded composites possess a superior strength to weight ratio of up to five times that of chopped strand fibreglass.
Superior Maintenance and Cleaning Possibilities

z
Access to complete unit interior - The large access panel is fitted with easily removable knobs. Removing the access panel does not require any tools or dismantling of the tower structure, providing unequalled access to all of the internal cooling tower components for inspection, cleaning and maintenance.
Large Access Door
Easy Access to Basin
Basin Accessible from all Sides - Removal of the louvers, requiring no tools, provides access to all sides of the smooth faced cold water basin for inspection, cleaning and maintenance.
RCT - B 62
Easy Access to Float Valve - Access to and adjustment of the float valve is simplified. The stainless steel suction strainer can easily be inspected, removed and cleaned inside.
RCT
Easy Access to Float Valve
Removable Fill
Removable Fill - The fill medium can easily be removed for cleaning thanks in part to the ample accessibility, gained by removal of the access panel, and to the easy to handle removable fill blocks. Removable Spray System - Cleaning and inspection of the spray system can be performed insitu or by removing the spray branch arms. No tools are required for the removal of the branch arms or the individual water distribution nozzles.
Removable Spray system
Removable Eliminators
Removable Eliminators - Removal of high efficiency drift eliminators can be accomplished easily without the removal of other internal components or by having to dismantle the tower structure. The eliminators rest on supports specifically designed to this purpose.
Baltimore Aircoil
RCT - B 63
Motor Outside Airstream - Units larger than model 2142 include an adjustable motor base plate for belt tensioning, extended lubrication lines with externally mounted grease nipples are provided, as standard to ease of scheduled maintenance. Smaller units are supplied as direct drive units.
Open Cooling Towers
Motor Outside Airstream
Easy Access to Drives
Easy Access to Drives - Removal of the fan screen for access to belts and drives is not required. These drive components are easily accessible through the specially designed hinged belt guard for inspection adjustment or replacement purposes.
RCT - B 64
RCT
1. Fan
z z z z
Aluminium Axial Fans Small tip clearance tolerance Low air inlet velocity Minimum Noise
2. Drive Train
z z z z
Easy access to drives and belts for inspection and adjustment. Stainless steel shaft. Corrosion resistant cast aluminium sheaves Heavy-duty bearings
3. Motor
z z z
Models RCT-2118 and 2129 utilise direct drive motor. Larger units have the fan motor outside of the moist discharge air stream and use belt drives. Belts provide reliability and long service life with low maintenance requirements
Baltimore Aircoil
RCT - B 65
4. Drift Eliminators
z z z
UV resistant non-corrosive material, impervious to rot, decay and biological attack Three distinct changes in air direction to reduce drift loss significantly Assembled in easy to handle sections, which can be removed for access to the equipment interior
5. Access Door
z
The larger access door is easily removable to provide complete access to drift eliminators, spray system and fill Larger units are equipped with anchor points to secure door when removed
Open Cooling Towers
6. Fill
z z z
The fill is impervious to rot, decay and resistant to fungus or biological attacks It consists of high efficiency cross-fluted sheets, solvent welded into lightweight blocks Blocks are sized for easy handling and removal for cleaning.

z z
Low pressure, stationery type nozzles Heavy duty PVC spray branches are grommeted to facilitate removal and cleaning
8. Cold Water Basin

z
The cold water basin is made of fibreglass reinforced polyester (FRP) and extra reinforced in critical areas. Sloped basin sides with smooth internal finish for easy cleaning.
9. Strainer
z
Stainless steel construction, anti-vortex design.
10. Make-up Assembly

z
Adjustable water make-up assembly, over flow and quick fill connections are supplied standard.
11. Connections
Flanged inlet- and outlet connections z Threaded make-up-, over flow- and quick fill connections
z
12. Louvers
z
Removal of the louvers provides access to all sides of the cold water basin for inspection, cleaning and maintenance.
13. Roofdeck
z z
Smooth faced air entry fan cylinders Close manufacturing tolerances allow small tip clearance providing an increased efficiency.
RCT - B 66

Standard construction: High strenght pultruded composite components for the primary structure combined with patented bonded panel to post connection.
Fan Drive System
RCT
High efficiency fans with direct drive motors for models RCT-2118 and RCT-2129. Larger models are belt driven. All belt driven units have extended lubrication lines to the edge of the fan cylinder. The mechanical equipment support and fan guard are made of hot dip galvanised steel. Optional: Mechanical equipment support assembly in SST 304.
Cold Water Basin

The RCT tower cold water basin is constructed of high performance fibreglass reinforced polyester. The suction connection is flanged. Optional: Units can be supplied without cold water basin for field assembly on a concrete tank. A unit supplied without cold water basin excludes basin, louvers, legs, strainer, suction drain and make-up assembly. Triple fan units are always supplied without cold water basin.
Factory Assembled
The RCT Tower is completely factory-assembled. Optional: The tower can be shipped in knocked-down version for assembly on site. This enables overseas transport in containers and significantly reduces transport cost.
Heat Transfer Surface Alternatives

z
Standard Heat Transfer Surface: The filmtype heat transfer surface supplied as standard with the cooling towers has been carefully selected for industrial applications. The 19 mm spacing between the surface sheets gives excellent air/water contact with low air pressure loss. The standard heat transfer surface provides high thermal efficiency and is sufficient to avoid clogging in most environments. Optional Film-Type Space 12 mm: For applications where the cooling tower water is clean, alternative models with 12 mm fill are available.
Telescopic fill supports (only for heavy duty 26 mm Fill Type)
Heavy Duty 26 mm Fill Type: Heavier contamination, which results in a heavy accumulation on the heat transfer surface, requires a higher structural strength than can be accomplished with film-type. For such situations, a heat transfer surface is available, constructed of heavy-duty wave formed FRP panels spaced 26 mm apart. With the unique integrated telescopic fill supports, the FRP fill panels can easily be removed for cleaning.
Baltimore Aircoil
RCT - B 67
Accessories
Two-Speed Fan Motor
An effective method of adding steps of capacity control and saving energy is the installation of twospeed fan motors in lieu of the standard single-speed motors. Two-speed motors are ideally suited for this purpose. At half fan speed the equipment capacity is still about 60% of design whereas the drawn fan power is only about 20% of the full speed motor power. In addition, at low speed, sound levels will generally reduce by about 9 dB(A).
Open Cooling Towers


Basin Heaters
Model No. RCT Single Fan Units RCT-2118 / RCT 2129 RCT-2142 / RCT-2156 RCT-2183 / RCT-2208 RCT-2238 / RCT2262 RCT-2299 / RCT-2320 RCT-2368 / RCT-2386 RCT-2418 / RCT-2441 1x5 1x6 1x6 2x4 2x5 2x6 2x6 Heater -18C (kW) Double Fan Units 2x5 2x6 2x6 4x4 4x5 N.A. N.A.
Equalising Connection
Whenever cooling towers are installed to operate in parallel, the water level in the basins should be equalised by means of an equalising connection. The equalising connection can be either a whole pattern cut out only or a connection to the basin.

RCT - B 68
Engineering Data
Single Fan Units - Square Box Sizes
RCT
1. Water Inlet; 2. Water Outlet; 3. Drain; 4. Overflow; 5. Make-Up; 6. Quick Fill; 7. Fan Motor.
Model
L 2284 2284 2589 2589 2894 2894 3198 3198 3499 3499
H 3252 3252 3326 3326 3413 3413 3646 3646 3810 3810
Shipping Operatin Fan Air Fan Weight g Weight Motor Flow (mm) (kg) (kg) (kW) (m/s) 1000 1000 1250 1250 1550 1550 1800 1800 2100 2100 2675 2675 3375 3375 4125 4125 4850 4850 5700 5700 5,5 7,5 5,5 7,5 7,5 11 11 15 15 18,5 15,4 17,3 18,5 20,4 23,9 27,2 31,2 34,2 39,0 41,8 1524 1524 1829 1829 2134 2134 2134 2134 2438 2438
Inlet ND (mm) 150 150 150 150 200 200 200 200 200 200
Outlet ND (mm) 150 150 150 150 200 200 200 200 250 250
Drain ND (mm) 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Overflow ND (mm) 50 50 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
Makeup ND (mm) 20 20 20 20 20 20 40 40 40 40
Quick-fill ND (mm) 20 20 20 20 20 20 40 40 40 40
RCT-2118-1 2284 RCT-2129-1 2284 RCT-2142-1 2589 RCT-2156-1 2589 RCT-2183-1 2894 RCT-2208-1 2894 RCT-2238-1 3198 RCT-2262-1 3198 RCT-2299-1 3499 RCT-2320-1 3499
Remarks: 1. Access door is always opposite to inlet connection end. 2. Alternative inlet/outlet and tower configurations are available. 3. Nominal outlet connection size provided. 4. Actual outlet sized to match flow. 5. Models RCT-2118-1 and RCT-2129-1 have direct drive motors.
Baltimore Aircoil
RCT - B 69
Single Fan Units - Rectangular Box Sizes
Open Cooling Towers
Model
H 4228 4228 4428 4428
Shipping Operatin Fan Weight g Weight Motor (kg) (kg) (kW) 2700 2700 3000 3000 7300 7300 8500 8500 18,5 22 18,5 22
Air Flow (m/s) 47,8 50,2 54,3 57,3
Fan (mm) 2134 2134 2438 2438
Inlet ND (mm) 200 200 200 200
Outlet ND (mm) 200 200 250 250
Drain ND (mm) 50 50 50 50
Overflow ND (mm) 80 80 80 80
Makeup ND (mm) 40 40 40 40
Quick-fill ND (mm) 40 40 40 40
RCT-2368-1 3198 4787 RCT-2386-1 3198 4787 RCT-2418-1 3500 5247 RCT-2441-1 3500 5247
Remarks: 1. Access door is always opposite to inlet connection end. 2. Alternative inlet/outlet and tower configurations are available. 3. Nominal outlet connection size provided. 4. Actual outlet sized to match flow.
RCT - B 70
Double Fan Units
RCT
Model
H 3385 3385 3479 3479 3585 3585 3836 3836 4019 4019
Shipping Operatin Weight g Weight (kg) (kg) 2 x 5,5 2 x 7,5 2 x 5,5 2 x 7,5 2 x 7,5 2 x 11 2 x 11 2 x 15 2 x 15 2 x 18,5 30,8 34,6 37,1 40,8 47,8 54,4 62,4 68,4 78,1 83,5
Fan Motor (kW) 2 x 5,5 2 x 7,5 2 x 5,5 2 x 7,5 2 x 7,5 2 x 11 2 x 11 2 x 15 2 x 15 2 x 18,5
Air Flow (m/s)
Fan (mm)
Inlet ND (mm)
Outlet ND (mm) 200 200 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250
Drain ND (mm) 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Overflow ND (mm) 50 50 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
Makeup ND (mm) 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
Quick-fill ND (mm) 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
RCT-2118-2 4551 2284 RCT-2129-2 4551 2284 RCT-2142-2 5160 2589 RCT-2156-2 5160 2589 RCT-2183-2 5770 5894 RCT-2208-2 5770 2894 RCT-2238-2 6379 3198 RCT-2262-2 6379 3198 RCT-2299-2 6985 3499 RCT-2320-2 6985 3499
30,8 2 x 1524 2 x 150 34,6 2 x 1524 2 x 150 37,1 2 x 1829 2 x 150 40,8 2 x 1829 2 x 150 47,8 2 x 2134 2 x 200 54,4 2 x 2134 2 x 200 62,4 2 x 2134 2 x 200 68,4 2 x 2134 2 x 200 78,1 2 x 2438 2 x 200 83,5 2 x 2438 2 x 200
Remarks: 1. Access door is always opposite to inlet connection end. 2. Alternative inlet/outlet and tower configurations are available. 3. Nominal outlet connection size provided. 4. Actual outlet sized to match flow. 5. Models RCT-2118-2 and RCT-2129-2 have direct drive motors.
Baltimore Aircoil
RCT - B 71
Triple Fan Units
Open Cooling Towers
1. Water Inlet; 2. Fan Motor; 3. Concrete Basin (by others).
Model RCT-2118-3 RCT-2129-3 RCT-2142-3 RCT-2156-3 RCT-2183-3 RCT-2208-3 RCT-2238-3 RCT-2262-3 RCT-2299-3 RCT-2320-3
W 6817 6817 7732 7732 8646 8646 9560 9560 10471 10471
L 2284 2284 2589 2589 2894 2894 3198 3198 3499 3499
H 3452 3452 3555 3555 3671 3671 3931 3931 4124 4124
Shipping Weight (kg) 3000 3000 3750 3750 4650 4650 5400 5400 6300 6300
Operating Weight (kg) 8025 8025 10125 10125 12375 12375 14550 14550 17100 17100
Fan Motor (kW) 3 x 5,5 3 x 7,5 3 x 5,5 3 x 7,5 3 x 7,5 3 x 11 3 x 11 3 x 15 3 x 15 3 x 18,5
Air Flow (m/s) 46,2 52 55,6 61,2 71,6 81,6 93,6 102,6 117,1 125,3
Fan (mm) 3 x 1524 3 x 1524 3 x 1829 3 x 1829 3 x 2134 3 x 2134 3 x 2134 3 x 2134 3 x 2438 3 x 2438
Inlet ND (mm) 3 x 150 3 x 150 3 x 150 3 x 150 3 x 200 3 x 200 3 x 200 3 x 200 3 x 200 3 x 200
Remarks: 1. Access door is always opposite to inlet connection end. 2. Alternative water inlet and tower configurations are available. 3. Triple fan units are not available with common FRP Basin. Only for installation on concrete basin.
RCT - B 72
Structural Support
Single Fan - Square Box Sizes
RCT
1. Outline of Unit; 2. Mounting holes; 3. FRP Cold Water Basin; 4. Water Inlet Side.
Single Fan - Rectangular Box Sizes
Baltimore Aircoil
RCT - B 73
MINIMUM SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS RCT-2000 Nominal Box Size A 7 x 7 8 x 8 9 x 9 10 x 10 11 x 11 10 x 15 11 x 16,5 2260 2560 2865 3170 3475 3170 3475 B C 1130 1280 1435 1585 1740 1585 1740 1485 1640 1695 1850 D E F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1185 1290 1085 1140 1295 1400 DIMENSIONS (mm) G H J 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 K 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 L 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 M 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 N 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 400 400 P Q N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A R PIER DESIGN LOADS (kg) S 410 510 620 730 T 540 680 830 970 U V W
210 N/A N/A 340 N/A N/A 420 N/A N/A 490 N/A N/A
860 1140 570 N/A N/A 730 980 490 N/A N/A
Open Cooling Towers
860 1140 570 N/A N/A
N/A = Not Applicable
Double Fan Units
MINIMUM SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS RCT-2000 Nominal Box Size A 14 x 7 16 x 8 18 x 9 20 x 10 22 x 11 2260 2560 2865 3170 3475 B C D 1135 1285 1435 1590 1740 E F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1130 1280 1435 1585 1740 DIMENSIONS (mm) G H J 200 200 200 200 200 K 150 150 150 150 150 L 100 100 100 100 100 M 130 130 130 130 130 N 70 70 70 70 70 P N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Q 205 205 205 205 205 R 150 150 150 150 150 PIER DESIGN LOADS (kg) S 410 510 620 730 T 540 680 830 970 U 210 340 420 490 V W N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
860 1140 570
N/A = Not Applicable
RCT - B 74
Triple Fan Units - Concrete Sump
RCT
1. Outline of Unit; 2. Water Inlet Side.
MINIMUM SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS RCT-2000 Nominal Box Size A 21 x 7 24 x 8 27 x 9 30 x 10 33 x 11 2260 2560 2865 3170 3475 B C D 1135 1285 1435 1590 1740 E F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1130 1280 1435 1585 1735 DIMENSIONS (mm) G H J 200 200 200 200 200 K 150 150 150 150 150 L 100 100 100 100 100 M 130 130 130 130 130 N 70 70 70 70 70 P N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Q 205 205 205 205 205 R 150 150 150 150 150 PIER DESIGN LOADS (kg) S 410 510 620 730 T U V W N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
540 210 680 340 830 420 970 490
860 1140 570
N/A = Not applicable
Baltimore Aircoil
RCT - B 75
1.0 Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Supply and install factory assembled cooling tower of counter-flow, induced draft, axial fan design. Each cooling tower shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer to cool ___ litres per second of water from ___ C (HW) entering water temperature to ___ C (CW) leaving water temperature at ___ C (WB) entering wet bulb temperature.

2.1 Structure: The cooling tower structure and casing shall be constructed of high strength Pultruded Composite materials. All pultruded composite components shall be moulded to exacting standards with UV resistant polyester resins such that UV protection is afforded throughout the entire embodiment of the components as well as being an externally applied coating. 2.2. Internal Surfaces: All internal surfaces of the casing, basin, roof deck and fan cylinder shall have an even and regular smooth faced finish resulting from either an open moulding or pultruded moulding process where the faces of these components come into direct contact with the mould to facilitate easy cleaning. Internal flow coated surfaces that have not come in contact with the mould shall not be acceptable. 2.3 Cold Water Basin: The basin shall be constructed of high performance Fibreglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP) and reinforced in critical areas. The basin shall have a smooth internal finish and slope to a center drain for ease of cleaning. All suction, drain, overflow and quick fill connections shall be furnished as standard. The suction connection shall be flanged. Easy and complete access shall be made possible from all sides. 2.4 Air Inlet Louvers: Air Inlet Louvers shall be plastic material, designed to prevent splash out and minimise the passage of sunlight to the cooling tower interior. Louvers shall be easily removable lightweight sections providing easy access for cleaning. 304-grade stainless steel deflector shall be factory fitted at the bottom of and inside the louvers to direct water away from the louver, preventing splash out. 2.5 Access: One full side of the casing shall be removable to provide full and open access to all internal tower components for inspection, maintenance and cleaning. The access panel shall be retained by easily removable knobs, not requiring dismantling of the tower structure. 2.6 Wet Deck Surface: The film type fill shall be impervious to rot, decay and fungus or biological attacks. It shall consist of high efficiency cross-fluted sheets solvent welded into lightweight blocks sized for easy handling and removal for cleaning. 2.7 Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed evenly over the wet deck surface by a low pressure, stationery, non rotating type water distribution system incorporating heavy duty PVC spray branches and plastic spray nozzles held into place with snap rubber grommets. 2.8 Drift Eliminators: The plastic drift eliminators shall be UV resistant and impervious to rot, decay and fungus or biological attacks. They shall consist of high efficiency three pass wave formed blades solvent welded into lightweight, easily removable sections. 2.9 Strainer: The cold water basin strainer shall be a 304-grade stainless steel cylindrical type having a solid top cover plate with a perforated mesh bottom of sufficient open area relative to the suction flow rate and by design, prevent vortexing at the outlet. 2.10 Hardware: All wetted hardware, fill, eliminator, water distribution supports and miscellaneous metal components shall be 304-grade stainless steel.
Open Cooling Towers

3.1 Fan: The adjustable pitch axial flow fan(s) shall be of low noise, multi-bladed type heavy duty extruded aluminium. The fan shall operate within a FRP fan cylinder having an even and regular smooth faced internal finish ensuring a streamlined air entry and minimum tip clearance for maximum fan efficiency. 3.2 Motor: The fan motor(s) shall be to IP55 standard with Class F insulation specifically designed for cooling tower service. The fan motor shall be fully outside of the moist discharge air stream for belt driven units. The motor shall be located adjacent to the fan cylinder for ease of access for maintenance and increased motor life expectancy. The motor is to be located below the top of the cooling tower ensuring overall tower height is kept to a minimum and external of discharge ducting in such applications. 3.3 Mechanical Support: The mechanical support shall be of HDG steel construction. The entire mechanical arrangement shall simply bolt to the top of the fan cylinder for ease of access for maintenance. The fan shaft shall be of 304 stainless steel supported by heavy duty, self aligning, grease packed ball bearings specifically suited to vertical shaft application with moisture proof seals and integral slingers. Extended lubrication lines shall be provided as standard to the bearings with grease nipples located outside for ease of scheduled maintenance. 3.4 Belt Drive: Units with belt drive shall be via standard "B" section V belts for ease of availability. The motor pulley shall be located outside of the discharge air stream. The entire drive arrangement is to be protected by a hinged cover guard in HDG.
RCT - B 76
RCT
Baltimore Aircoil has developed a network of highly qualified sales representatives backed up by an experienced technical staff who will work hand-in-hand with you to ensure that each of your projects is a success. If you need help deciding which product to use, you can count on the support of your local BAC Balticare representative to develop solutions that meet your requirements. You can find BAC contact details on the web www.BaltimoreAircoil.com or You can send a request to info-bac@baltimoreaircoil.be
Baltimore Aircoil
IMT - B 77
IMT
Open Cooling Towers
Open Cooling Towers
Product Detail
IMT Open Cooling Towers ..................................................................... B78 Benefits ..................................................................................................... B80 Construction Details ................................................................................ B82 Custom Features and Options ................................................................ B83 Accessories ............................................................................................... B85 Engineering Data ..................................................................................... B86 Structural Support .................................................................................. B89 Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... B94
IMT - B 78
IMT Open Cooling Towers

Capacity
single cell capacity 35 575 l/s
IMT
General Description
The features of modular design are incorporated in all IMT cooling towers to significantly reduce site assembly time and cost. IMT cooling towers are designed to meet the demanding conditions of a harsh industrial environment. Highly corrosion resistant materials are available to insure long life under these conditions. Structural strength is provided by heavy duty structural angles of stainless steel, hot dip galvanized steel or galvanized steel protected by the Baltibond Corrosion protection system. Standard cladding and fan stack materials are Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP)
Key Features
z
Sharply reduced Site assembly cost Superior durability through industrial quality materials Assured thermal performance Versatility in selection to suit every project requirement
Baltimore Aircoil
IMT - B 79
Open Cooling Towers
IMT - B 80
Benefits
Different Construction Material Options
To meat each customers technical and economic requirement, IMT cooling towers offer a broad choice of construction materials such as :
z
Fibreglass Reinforced Polyester cladding with a hot dip galvanised steel structure Z600 hot dip galvanised cladding and structure protected with the unique Baltibond Corrosion Protection System. Fibreglass Reinforced Polyester cladding with a stainless steel structure
IMT
Choice of Heat Transfer Surface Alternatives

In addition to the standard IMT heat transfer surface, wide spaced film type and heavy duty cleanable fill material is available.
Total Lower Installed Cost

z
Modular Design - The time consuming field assembly of individual parts is reduced to the rigging of large factory assembled sections and final assembly details. Your own construction people can receive the shipment, assemble the modules and component parts, and complete the cooling tower installation in a fraction of time required for conventional field erected cooling towers. Less construction time on site means less susceptibility to the variables of weather, labour productivity and workmanship. Field cutting, patching and drilling are virtually eliminated by use of standardized modular sections. The result is the consistent high quality, quickly assembled installation required by todays industrial cooling tower user.
Hoist heat transfer modules from truck to concrete basin
Mount mechanical drive system
Baltimore Aircoil
IMT - B 81
Open Cooling Towers
Assemble and position fan stack and plenum sections.
Install miscellaneous components
Low Sound and Low kW

IMT Cooling towers offer low year round energy consumption, and moderately low noise levels, which can be reduced by approx. 6-8 dB(A) on the low speed of two speed fan motors Low kW custom models are available for even lower energy consumption and lower noise levels.
IMT - B 82
IMT
1. Wet Deck Surface
z Efficient plastic heat transfer surface suitable for most industrial
applications
7. Access Door
z Large sized access door in the fan plenum.
z Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
8. Fan Motor
z TEFC fan motor, IP 55 protected and Class F insulation designed for
cooling tower operation.
2. Steel Frame
z Heavy duty steel structural angles connected with corresponding hardware
z Extra moisture protection on bearings
3. FRP casing
z Fibreglass reinforced (FRP) fan stack
9. FRP Fan Cylinder

z Fibreglass reinforced (FRP) fan stack
4. Axial Fan
z Heavy duty, extruded aluminium axial fan, with maximum fan efficiency z Safe fan selection distant from critical fan speed or resonant frequencys

z Heavy duty spray branches z Low pressure, large diameter, non clog nozzles.
z UV resistant non-corrosive material, impervious to rot, decay and biological
attack
11. Air Inlet Louvers

z FRP air inlet louvers z Easy removable of access to cooling tower basin.
z Three distinct changes in air direction to reduce drift loss significantly z Assembled in easy to handle sections, which can be removed for access to
the equipment interior
12. Baltidrive Power Train (Not Shown)

Standard on models IMT 500 650 with
6. Gear Drive System

z Standard on models IMT 650 and larger. z Optional on models IMT 500 up to 650.
z Specially designed belt with corrosion resistant fan sheave. z Heavy duty grease lubricated ball bearings with moisture seals and integral
slinger rings
13. Cold Water Sump (Not Shown)

z Right angle double reduction gear with AGMA rating of 2 according PCMA. z Factory assembled sump available for models IMT 500 990 (for BBCPS
unit execution only)
Baltimore Aircoil
IMT - B 83

z
Standard Construction: Structural elements are constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge galvanized steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Optional BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System: The BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend equipment life, is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the unit. Optional Stainless Steel Construction: Structural elements are constructed of stainless steel either type 304 or 316.
Open Cooling Towers
Standard Unit Hot-Dip Galvanized Structure Cold Water Sump* Cladding Fan Cowl Frame and Support Columns Louvers Not Available Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester Steel Hot-Dip Galvanized after Fabrication Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester
Optional Stainless Steel Structure Not Available Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester 304 or 316 Stainless Steel Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester
Optional Baltibond Corrosion Protection System (BBCPS) Z 600 Galvanized Steel with BBCPS Z 600 Galvanized Steel with BBCPS Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester Z 600 Galvanized Steel with BBCPS Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester
* Optional on models IMT 500 to 990.
Baltiguard Drive System (Optional on IMT-500 to 650)

The BALTIGUARD Drive System consists of two standard single-speed fan motors and drive assemblies. One drive assembly is sized for full speed and load, and the other is sized for approximately 2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3 of the design kilowatt power. This configuration allows the system to be operated like a two-speed motor, but with the reserve capacity of a standby motor in the event of failure. As a minimum, approximately 70% capacity will be available from the low kilowatt motor, even on a design wet-bulb Baltiguard Drive System day. Controls and wiring are the same, as those required for a two-speed, two-winding motor. Significant energy savings are achieved when operating at low speed during periods of reduced load and/or low wet-bulb temperatures.
IMT - B 84
Wetdeck Surface
z
IMT
Standard Heat Transfer Surface: The filmtype heat transfer surface supplied as standard with the cooling towers has been carefully selected for industrial applications. The 19 mm spacing between the surface sheets gives excellent air/water contact with low air pressure loss. The standard heat transfer surface provides high thermal efficiency and is sufficient to avoid clogging in most environments. Optional Film-Type Space 12 mm: For applications where the cooling tower water is clean, alternative models with 12 mm fill are available.
Telescopic fill supports (only for heavy duty 26 mm Fill Type)
Heavy Duty 26 mm Fill Type: Heavier contamination, which results in a heavy accumulation on the heat transfer surface, requires a higher structural strength than can be accomplished with film-type. For such situations, a heat transfer surface is available, constructed of heavy-duty wave formed FRP panels spaced 26 mm apart. With the unique integrated telescopic fill supports, the FRP fill panels can easily be removed for cleaning.
Cold Water Basin

Integral cold water basins are available as an option on IMT models 500 to 990 and models IMT500-2 to 990-2.
Model No. IMT IMT 500 IMT 630 IMT 650 IMT-760 IMT 795 IMT 990 Sump Height (mm) 5620 5620 5620 5620 6820 6820 Sump Weight (kg) 5700 5700 6900 6900 6900 6900 Sump Volume (l) 5140 5140 5450 5450 5450 5450 Make Up Size ND (mm) 50 50 40 40 50 50 Water Outlet Size ND (mm) (2x) 250 (2x) 250 (2x) 250 (2x) 250 (1x) 300 (1x) 300 Equalizer Size ND (mm) (2x) 250 (2x) 250 (2x) 250 (2x) 250 (2x) 250 (2x) 250
Low Sound Fan

To maintain the quality of the local environment, the IMT cooling tower can be furnished with a low sound fan.
Baltimore Aircoil
IMT - B 85
Accessories
The electric water level control to allow replaces the standard mechanical make-up valve when a more precise water level control is required. This package consists of a float switch mounted in the basin and a solenoid activated valve in the make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize water hammer. (Only for models IMT 500 up to IMT 990 with factory supplied basin.)
Open Cooling Towers
Vibration Cutout Switch

Two-Speed Fan Motor

An effective method of adding steps of capacity control and saving energy is the installation of twospeed fan motors in lieu of the standard single-speed motors. Two-speed motors are ideally suited for this purpose. At half fan speed the equipment capacity is still about 60% of design whereas the drawn fan power is only about 20% of the full speed motor power. In addition, at low speed, sound levels will generally reduce by about 9 dB(A).
Basin Heaters
Units exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to prevent freezing of the water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which maintain the water temperature at 4C, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection. The heater package includes the heaters, a thermostat and a low level cut out switch to protect the heaters if the water level is too low. Standard electric heaters are selected for -18C ambient temperature. (Only for models IMT 500 up to IMT 990 with factory supplied basin).
Model No. IMT IMT 500-630 IMT 650-760 IMT 795-990 Heaters -18C (kW) 2x8 4x5 4x6
Two-Step Thermostat
Single stage thermostats or two stage thermostats can be used for fan motor speed control.
Maintenance Switch
Safety switches or local isolators allow the electrical supply to motors to be disconnected for safety purposes during inspection or maintenance.
Ladder and Safety Cage

These items are available for field installation on all IMT models when required.
IMT - B 86
Engineering Data
IMT 500 - 1195
IMT
1. Water Inlet; 2. Access Door; 3. Motor System (Gear Drive Option); 4. Concrete Basin (by Others).
Model No. IMT IMT 500-1B O IMT 500-1B P IMT 630-1B P IMT 630-1B Q IMT 650-1B Q IMT 650-1B R IMT 760-1B R IMT 795-1B Q IMT 795-1B R IMT 990-1B R IMT 990-1B S IMT 925-1B S IMT 1195-1B S IMT 1195-1B T
Operating Weight (kg) 6430 6430 7120 7120 7980 7980 9020 9840 9840 10950 10950 11820 13410 13410
Shipping. Weight (kg) 4690 4690 5000 5000 5550 5550 6140 6850 6850 7390 7390 7820 8730 8730
Heaviest Section (kg) 1460 1460 1620 1620 1820 1820 2120 2050 2050 2320 2320 2440 2890 2892
Water In Width W (mm) 4800 4800 4800 4800 4800 4800 4800 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000
Length L(mm) 4880 4880 4880 4880 6080 6080 6080 6080 6080 6080 6080 7280 7280 7280
Height H(mm) 5140 5140 5450 5450 5450 5450 5760 5450 5450 5760 5760 5750 6060 6060
Airflow m/s 64,4 70,6 66,1 70,8 86,1 91,3 85.7 105,0 111,0 104,0 112,0 133.0 125,0 137,0
Motor (kW) 22 22 30 30 37 45 45 37 45 4 555 55 55 75
Water In ND (mm) (2x) 200 (2x) 200 (2x) 200 (2x) 200 (2x) 250 (2x) 250 (2x) 250 (2x) 250 (2x) 250 (2x) 250 (2) 250 (2x) 300 (2x) 300 (2x) 300
Baltimore Aircoil
IMT - B 87
IMT 1155 - 1945
Open Cooling Towers
1. Water Inlet; 2. Access Door; 3. Fan Motor System (Gear Drive Option); 4. Concrete Basin (by others).
Model No. IMT IMT 1155-1B T IMT 1360-1B T IMT 1550-1B T IMT 1550-1B U IMT 1695-1B T IMT 1695-1B U IMT 1780-1B U IMT 1780-1B V IMT 1945-1B U IMT 1945-1B V
Heaviest Section (kg) 2030 2280 3300 3300 3300 3300 4200 4200 4200 4200
Water in Width W (mm) 7200 7200 7200 7200 7200 7200 8400 8400 8400 8400
Length L (mm) 7280 7280 8480 8480 8480 8480 8480 8480 8480 8480
Height H (mm) 5450 5760 6070 6070 6070 6070 6120 6120 6120 6120
Airflow (m/s) 165 155 170 182 192 203 228 242 220 234
Motor (kW) 75 75 75 90 75 90 90 110 90 110
Water Inlet ND (mm) (3x) 250 (3x) 250 (3x) 300 (3x) 300 (3x) 300 (3x) 300 (3x) 300 (3x) 300 (3x) 300 (3x) 300
IMT - B 88
IMT 1990 - 2530
IMT
1. Water Inlet; 2. Access Door; 3. Fan Motor System (Gear Drive Option); 4. Concrete Basin (by others).
Model No. IMT IMT 1990-1B V IMT 1990-1B W IMT 2260-1B V IMT 2260-1B W IMT 2320-1B V IMT 2320-1B W IMT 2530-1B V IMT 2530-1B W
Operating Weight (kg) 27600 27600 28300 28300 31200 31200 32000 32000
Shipping Weight (kg) 17900 17900 18600 18600 20000 20000 20800 20800
Heaviest Section (kg) 3300 3300 3300 3300 3700 3700 2700 2700
Water In Width W (mm) 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600
Length L (mm) 8480 8480 8480 9480 9680 9680 9680 9680
Height H (mm) 6120 6120 6120 6120 6580 6580 6580 6580
Airflow (m/s) 270 272 262 271 297 315 287 305
Motor (kW) 110 132 110 132 110 132 110 132
Water Inlet ND (mm) (4x) 300 (4x) 300 (4x) 300 (4x) 300 (4x) 300 (4x) 300 (4x) 300 (4x) 300
General Notes
1. Special models with alternative configurations, fan power options or heat transfer surface options are available. Contact your BAC Balticare Representative for information. IMT models 500 to 990 are also available with sump as an option. Contact your local BAC Balticare Representative for sump dimensions of these models. 2. Motors located inside the fan plenum for models IMT-500 to IMT650.
Baltimore Aircoil
IMT - B 89
Structural Support
IMT-500 - 1195
Open Cooling Towers
IMT - B 90
Model No. IMT IMT 500-1B O IMT 500-1B P IMT 630-1B P IMT 630-1B Q IMT 650-1B Q IMT 650-1B R IMT 760-1B R
A (mm) 5204 5204 5204 5204 6404 6404 6404 6404
B (mm) 5294 5294 6494 6494 6494 6494 7694 7694
C (mm) 2310 2310 2310 2310 2910 2910 2910 2910
D (mm) 4710 4710 5910 5910 5910 5910 7110 7110
E (mm) 2310 2310 2910 2910 2910 2910 3510 3510
F (mm) 2400 2400 3000 3000 3000 3000 3600 3600
Support Points (Concrete Sump) (12) x M 12 (12) x M 12 (12) x M 12 (12) x M 12 (12) x M 12 (12) x M 12 (12) x M 12 (12) x M 12
IMT
IMT 795-1B Q IMT 795-1B R IMT 990-1B R IMT 990-1B S IMT 925-1B S IMT 1195-1B S IMT 1195-1B T
Baltimore Aircoil
IMT - B 91
IMT 1155 - 1360
Open Cooling Towers
Model No. IMT IMT 1155-1B IMT 1360-1B
A (mm) 7604 7604
B (mm) 7694 7694
C (mm) 2310 2310
D (mm) 7110 7110
E (mm) 3510 3510
F (mm) 3600 3600
Support Points (Concrete Sump) (18) x M 12 (18) x M 12
IMT - B 92
IMT 1550 - 1945
IMT
Model No. IMT IMT 1550-1B IMT 1550-1B IMT 1695-1B IMT 1695-1B IMT 1780-1B IMT 1780-1B IMT 1945-1B IMT 1945-1B
A (mm) 7604 7604 8804 8804
B (mm) 8894 8894 8894 8894
C (mm) 2310 2310 2910 2910
D (mm) 8310 8310 8310 8310
E (mm) 2910 2910 2910 2910
F (mm) 2400 2400 2400 2400
G (mm) 2490 2490 2490 2490
Support Points (Concrete Sump) (24) x M 12 (24) x M 12 (24) x M 12 (24) x M 12
Baltimore Aircoil
IMT - B 93
IMT 1990 - 2530
Open Cooling Towers
Model No. IMT IMT 1990-1B IMT 1990-1B IMT 2260-1B IMT 2260-1B IMT 2320-1B IMT 2320-1B IMT 2530-1B IMT 2530-1B
A (mm) 10004 10004 10004 10004
B (mm) 8894 8894 10094 10094
C (mm) 2310 2310 2310 2310
D (mm) 8310 8310 9510 9510
E (mm) 2910 2910 3510 3510
F (mm) 2490 2490 2490 2490
G (mm) 2400 2400 2400 2400
Support Points (Concrete Sump) (32) x M 12 (32) x M 12 (32) x M 12 (32) x M 12
Notes:
IMT Cooling Towers provided without the integral sump by BAC should be supported on concrete columns or sump walls as shown. Dimensions A en B show the minimum inside sump dimensions and the table above gives the total number of support points required in the sump. For exact support locations of double cell models refer to foundation drawing available from your BAC Balticare Representative.
IMT - B 94
1.0 Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Furnish and install _____ factory-assembled, induceddraft, axial fan, counterflow cooling tower(s) with vertical air discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications, schedules and as shown on the plans. Overall dimensions shall not exceed approximately _____ mm long x ______ mm wide x _____ mm high. The total connected fan kW shall not exceed _____ kW. The cooling tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model ____________. (Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional): Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting, hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program. 1.4 Quality Assurance: The cooling tower manufacturer shall have a Management System certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of products and services. 1.5 Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of startup or eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
IMT
1.2 Thermal Capacity: The cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to cool _____ l/s of water from ______ C to _____C at _____C entering wet-bulb temperature. 1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction (standard): Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all structural members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel with all edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound and hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Cladding will be of trapezium formed Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP) panels.

2.1 Structure: The cooling tower structure shall be made of heavy gauge steel angles hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. The angles shall be connected with galvanized bolts and nuts. 2.2 Cladding and Fan Deck: The cooling tower shall be clad with trapezium formed Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP) panels for maximum resistance to chemical attack. The panels are attached to the structure with galvanized fasteners. 2.3 Support Columns: The cooling tower heat transfer surface sections shall have integral support columns. The columns shall be constructed from heavy gauge galvanized steel angles which recess into the heat transfer section to reduce shipping volume. 2.4 Sump: (Optional for models IMT 500-990 and models IMT 500-2 990-2 and only for units protected with the Baltibond Corrosion Protection System.) The integral sump shall be constructed of heavy gauge Z600 Hot dip galvanized steel. Standard accessories shall include large area, liftout, galvanized strainers with BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System and perforated openings, sized smaller than the water distribution nozzle orifices; an integral anti-vortexing hood to prevent air entrainment, brass make-up valve with larger diameter plastic float arrangement for easy adjustment (field installed) and connections for water outlet, overflow and drain. 2.5. Fans: Fans shall be axial flow type constructed of heavy duty aluminium, and tested in actual models by the cooling tower manufacturer. Each fan cylinder shall be designed for streamlined air entry and minimum tip clearance for maximum fan efficiency.

3.1. Belt Drive (models IMT 500-650): Fans shall be driven by neoprene/polyester belt(s) designed specifically for cooling tower service. The sheaves shall be cast aluminum. Fan shaft shall be mounted in heavy duty, grease-packed, self-aligning relubricatable ball bearings with moisture proof seals and integral slinger rings. Extended lube lines shall be provided for ease of maintenance. 3.2. Gear Drive (models IMT 650 and larger, optional on models IMT 500-650): Fan shall be driven through a right angle gear box designed for a service factor of 2 according to PCMA. 3.3. Fan Motors: The fan motor(s) shall be ______ kW, 1500 RPM, squirrel cage, totally enclosed, fan cooled (TEFC) with IP55 protection and Class F insulation. Motor(s) shall be specifically designed for cooling tower service and shall have special moisture protection on windings, shaft and bearings.
4.0 Wet Deck Surface and Drift Eliminators

4.1. Wet Deck Surface: The wet deck surface shall consist of plastic formed sheets. It shall be impervious to rot, decay and fungus or biological attack. The surface shall be performance tested in actual models by the cooling tower manufacturer to assure specified performance. 4.2. Drift Eliminators: Eliminators shall be constructed of formed plastic sheets and be removable in easily handled sections. They shall have a minimum of three changes in air direction.
5.0 Air Inlet Louvers

5.1. Air Inlet Louvers: Air inlet louvers shall be wave formed fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP) spaced to minimize resistance to entering airflow and to prevent water splash out. They shall be mounted in fittings constructed from heavy gauge steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and be easily removed for access to the cold water basin.
Baltimore Aircoil
IMT - B 95
6.0 Access
6.1. Access : Access doors for inspection of the internal components of the tower shall be installed on the plenum above the drift eliminators.
7.0 Sound
Open Cooling Towers
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
8000
DB(A)
IMT - B 96
IMT
Baltimore Aircoil
VTL - B 97
VTL
.
Open Cooling Towers
Open Cooling Towers
Product Detail
VTL Open Cooling Towers ..................................................................... B98 Benefits ................................................................................................... B100 Construction Details .............................................................................. B102 Custom Features and Options .............................................................. B103 Accessories ............................................................................................. B105 Engineering Data ................................................................................... B107 Structural Support ................................................................................. B111 Engineering Specifications .................................................................... B112
VTL - B 98
VTL Open Cooling Towers

Capacity
VTL
General Description
Open Circuit Cooling Towers with centrifugal fans, deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of flow and temperature requirements. This type of cooling towers can be installed indoors and can accommodate limited ceiling or enclosure heights. Cooling tower with centrifugal fans minimise sound levels and installation costs, provides year round operating reliability, and simplifies maintenance requirements. Cooling Towers provide an answer to the growing need to save water and energy and help protect the environment by providing the highest system efficiency.
Key Features
z
Suitable for indoor and outdoor installations Suitable for high temperature applications Low sound Single side air inlet Low energy consumption Low installed cost Easy maintenance Reliable year-round operation Long service life Suitable for locations with limited ceiling or enclosure heights and roof top installations
Baltimore Aircoil
VTL - B 99
Open Cooling Towers
VTL - B 100
Benefits
Installation and Application Flexibility
z
Indoor Installations Centrifugal fans can overcome the static pressure imposed by external ductwork, allowing this type of cooling towers to be installed indoors. High Temperature Applications A range of wet deck and construction options are available to accommodate entering water temperatures of up to 65C. Low Profile Models Motors and drive of low profile units are adjacent to the casing section to yield models suitable for use in height sensitive installations.
VTL
Low profile unit shown in contrast to a standard unit
Low Sound
z
Centrifugal Fan - Centrifugal fans have inherently low sound characteristics. Single Side Air Inlet - Particularly sound-sensitive areas can be accommodated by facing the quiet side (back panel) to the sound-sensitive direction.

z
Evaporative Cooling Equipment minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system because it provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving natural resources and reducing environmental impact.
Low Installed Cost

z
Support All models mount directly on two parallel I-beams (supplied by others) and ship complete with motors and drives factoryinstalled and aligned. Modular Design All models without intake or discharge accessories ship in one piece to minimize field installation time and lifting time.
Easy Maintenance
z
Internal Access - The interior of the unit is easily accessible for adjusting the float valve, cleaning the strainer or flushing the basin.
Modular Design

z
V-Belt Drive The fans, motor, and drive system are located outside of the moist discharge airstream, protecting them from moisture, condensation and icing hence allowing a safe yearround operation.
Baltimore Aircoil
VTL - B 101
Open Cooling Towers
The water level control is easily reached from the access door
V-Belt Drive System for Series VL-units
Long Service Life

z
Materials of Construction Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance, unit operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project (See section "Technical Resources, Materials of Construction" for more details)
VTL - B 102
.
VTL
z
z z z
Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack Self extinguishing High temperature wet deck option
2. Fan Drive System

z z
V-belt drive
6. Strainer
Heavy-duty bearings and fan motor
z
3. Low sound Centrifugal Fan(s)

z
7. Access Door
z
Quiet Operation

z z z
z
Plastic spray header and branches Large orifice, non-clog nozzles Grommetted for easy maintenance
5. BACount Wet Deck Surface

z
Plastic material
Baltimore Aircoil
VTL - B 103

z
Standard Construction: Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized steel protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection on the outside of the unit. Optional BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System: The BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend equipment life, is applied before assembly to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the unit. Optional Stainless Steel Construction: Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of stainless steel either type 304 or 316. Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin: A cost-effective alternative to an all stainless steel unit. The critical components in the cold water basin and the cold water basin itself are provided in stainless steel. The remaining components are protected with the BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System.
Open Cooling Towers
Fan Drive System

The fan drive system provides the cooling air necessary to reject heat from the system to the atmosphere. Centrifugal fans, forwardly curved, are driven by matched V-belts with taper lock sheaves.
Baltiguard Drive System

The BALTIGUARD Drive System consists of two standard single-speed fan motors and drive assemblies. One drive assembly is sized for full speed and load, and the other is sized for approximately 2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3 of the design kilowatt power. This configuration allows the system to be operated like a two-speed motor, but with the reserve capacity of a standby motor in the event of failure. As a minimum, approximately 70% capacity will be available from the low kilowatt motor, even on a design wet-bulb day. Controls and wiring are the same, as those required for a two-speed, two-winding motor. Significant energy savings are achieved when operating at low speed during periods of reduced load and/or low wet-bulb temperatures.
Unit with Sound Attenuation
VTL - B 104
Low Sound Operation

The low sound levels generated by BAC Products with centrifugal fans make them suitable for most installations. For situations when one direction is particularly sound sensitive, the unit can be oriented so that the side opposite the air inlet faces the sound-sensitive direction. Units with centrifugal fans are also available with factory designed, tested and rated sound attenuation for both the air inlet and discharge.
VTL

Baltimore Aircoil
VTL - B 105
Accessories
Basin Heaters
Model No. VTL VTL 039-072 VTL 076 VTL 079 VTL 082 VTL 086-094 VTL 095 VTL 103-137 VTL 139-215 VTL 225 VTL 227 VTL 238-272 Heaters -18 C (kW) 1x3 1x4 1x3 1x4 1x5 1x4 1x5 2x4 2x5 2x4 2x5
Open Cooling Towers

The electric water level control replaces the standard mechanical make-up valve when a more precise water level control is required. This package consists of a float switch mounted in the basin and a solenoid activated valve in the makeup water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize water hammer.


Capacity Control Dampers

Modulating capacity control dampers are available to provide better leaving water temperature control than can be obtained from fan cycling alone. Fan discharge dampers consist of a single airfoil type damper blade located in the discharge of each fan housing. A standard electrical control package for dampers is available from BAC.
VTL - B 106

VTL
Solid Bottom Panels

Factory-installed bottom panels are required when intake air is ducted to the unit.
Discharge Hoods
Discharge hoods reduce the risk of re-circulation in tight enclosures by increasing discharge air velocity, and can be used to elevate the unit discharge above adjacent walls to comply with layout guidelines.
Baltimore Aircoil
VTL - B 107
Engineering Data
VTL 039 G - VTL 137 M
Open Cooling Towers
1. Water Inlet; 2. Water Outlet; 3. Access Door; 4. Make up ND25; 5. Overflow ND50; 6. Drain ND50; 7. Fan Motor. Overflow connection is 80 mm on models VTL 086-L, VTL-094-M and VTL 103-K through VTL 137-M.
Model VTL VTL 039-G VTL 045-H VTL 052-H VTL 059-H VTL 059-J VTL 066-J VTL 072-K VTL 076-J VTL 079-K VTL 082-K VTL 086-L VTL 094-M VTL 095-K VTL 103-K VTL 116-L VTL 126-L VTL 126-M VTL 137-M
Operating Weight (kg) 1200 1230 1260 1290 1310 1320 1330 1720 1410 1740 2050 2060 1850 2150 2180 2320 2190 2330
Shipping Weight (kg) 720 750 780 810 830 840 850 1010 930 1030 1120 1130 1140 1220 1250 1390 1260 1400
Heaviest Section (kg) 720 750 780 810 830 840 850 1010 930 1030 1120 1130 1140 1220 1250 1390 1260 1400
Air Flow Fan Motor (m/s) (kW) 7,0 8,0 7,7 7,3 8,6 8,1 8,8 9,7 8,3 10,6 14,0 15,4 10,0 11,8 13,3 12,8 14,5 13,6 (1) 2,2 (1) 4,0 (1) 4,0 (1) 4,0 (1) 5,5 (1) 5,5 (1) 7,5 (1) 5,5 (1) 7,5 (1) 7,5 (1) 11,0 (1) 15,0 (1) 7,5 (1) 7,5 (1) 11,0 (1) 11,0 (1) 15,0 (1) 15,0
Fluid Inlet ND (mm) (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 150 (1) 100 (1) 150 (1) 150 (1) 150 (1) 150 (1) 150 (1) 150 (1) 150 (1) 150 (1) 150
Fluid Outlet Make Up A H L1 L2 W ND (mm) ND (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 150 (1) 100 (1) 150 (1) 150 (1) 150 (1) 150 (1) 150 (1) 150 (1) 150 (1) 150 (1) 150 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 105 75 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 1560 1560 1785 1990 1785 1990 1990 1990 2480 1990 1560 1560 2480 1990 1990 2480 1990 2480 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 4560 3350 4560 5480 5480 4560 5480 5480 5480 5480 5480 1820 1820 1820 1820 1820 1820 1820 2730 1820 2730 3650 3650 2730 3650 3650 3650 3650 3650 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
VTL - B 108
VTL 139 L - VTL 272 P
VTL
1. Water Inlet; 2. Water Outlet; 3. Access Door; 4. Make up ND 25; 5. Overflow ND 80; 6. Drain ND 50; 7. Fan Motor.
Operating Weight (kg) 3000 3010 3100 3170 3190 3200 3380 4000 3400 4110 4080 4310
Model VTL VTL 139-L VTL 152-M VTL 171-L VTL 185-M VTL 198-N VTL 209-O VTL 215-N VTL 225-O VTL 227-O VTL 238-N VTL 245-P VTL 272-P
Shipping Weight (kg) 1560 1570 1670 1740 1760 1770 1950 2080 1970 2210 2180 2410
Heaviest Section (kg) 1560 1570 1670 1740 1760 1770 1950 2080 1970 2210 2180 2410
Air Flow Fan Motor (m/s) (kW) 19,9 21,6 18,8 20,4 21,8 23,0 20,8 25,5 22,0 23,4 27,8 26,8 (1) 11,0 (1) 15,0 (1) 11,0 (1) 15,0 (1) 18,5 (1) 22,0 (1) 18,5 (1) 22,0 (1) 22,0 (1) 18,5 (1) 30,0 (1) 30,0
Fluid Inlet ND (mm) (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200
Fluid Outlet Make Up A H L1 L2 W ND (mm) ND (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 1560 1560 1990 1990 1990 1990 2480 1990 2480 2480 1990 2480 4560 4560 4560 4560 4560 4560 4560 5480 4560 5480 5480 5480 2730 2730 2730 2730 2730 2730 2730 3650 2730 3650 3650 3650 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400
General Notes
1. All connections 150 mm and smaller are MPT. Connections 200 mm and larger are bevelled-for-welding. 2. Fan kW is at 0 Pa ESP. To operate against external static pressure up to 125 Pa, consult your local BAC Balticare Representative for size and location. 3. Make up, overflow, suction, drain connections and access door can be provided on side opposite to that shown; consult your BAC representative. 4. Unit height is indicative, for precise value refer to certified print. 5. Shipping/operating weights indicated are for units without accessories such as sound attenuators, discharge hoods, etc. Consult factory certified prints to obtain weight additions and the heaviest section to be lifted.
Baltimore Aircoil
VTL - B 109
Sound Attenuation
HS Horizontal Intake Sound Attenuation
Open Cooling Towers
1.Discharge attenuator, 2. Access Door, 3. Intake Attenuator; H & W: unit height and width (see engineering data).
HD Horizontal Intake Sound Attenuation
1.Discharge attenuator, 2. Access Door, 3. Intake Attenuator; H & W: unit height and width (see engineering data).
VTL - B 110
VS Vertical Intake Sound Attenuation
VTL
1.Discharge attenuator, 2. Access Door, 3. Intake Attenuator, 4. Plenum; H & W: unit height and width (see engineering data).
Dimensions (mm) Model No VTL HS VTL039 G - 079 K VTL076 J - 095 K VTL086 L - 137 M VTL139 L - 227 O VTL225 O - 272 P 2390 2640 2640 2640 2640 L2 HD 3125 3375 3375 3375 3375 VS 2010 2010 2010 2010 2010 L1 HS,HD,VS 1820 2730 3650 2730 3650 Intake Attenuator HS 410 460 460 650 650 HD 685 730 730 1115 1115 VS 465 430 420 545 545
Weight (kg) Discharge Attenuator HS 205 290 360 460 560 HD 220 305 390 490 620 VS 225 310 395 485 600 HS 615 750 820 1110 1210 Total HD 905 1035 1120 1605 1735 VS 690 740 815 1030 1145
Note: All VL-units + HS or VS attenuators ship in 2 pieces. All VL-units + HD attenuators ship in 3 pieces.
Remote Sump Data

Baltimore Aircoil
VTL - B 111
Structural Support
Open Cooling Towers

VTL Cooling Tower Model No. 039-G - 072K 079-K 076-J 082-K 095-K 086-L & 094-M 103-K - 137-M 139-L - 215-N 227-O 225-O 238-N - 272-P A (mm) 2426 B (mm) 1193 Maximum Allowable Beam Deflection (mm) 10
3334
1193
13
4255 3334 4255
1193 2343 2343
13 13 13
1. Outline of Unit, 2. Support Beams, 3. Fan Side, 4. Mounting Holes.
Notes:
1. The recommended support arrangement for VL units consists of two parallel I-beams extending the full length of the unit. Supports and anchor bolts are to be designed and furnished by others. 2. All supporting beams are to be flush and level at top and must be oriented relative to gage line as shown. 3. Recommended design loads for each unit support beam should be 70% of the total unit operating weight applied as a uniform load to each of the unit beams. Beams should be designed in accordance with standard structural practice. For the maximum allowable deflection of beams under the unit refer to above table. 4. All mounting holes have a diameter of 22 mm at the locations shown. 5. If vibration isolators are used, a rail or channel must be provided between the unit and the isolators to provide continuous unit support. Additionally the support beams must be designed to accommodate the overall length and mounting hole location of the isolators that may differ from those of the unit. Refer to vibration isolator drawings for these data.
VTL - B 112
1.0 Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Furnish and install _____ factory-assembled, forceddraft, centrifugal fan, counter flow cooling tower(s) with vertical air discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications, schedules and as shown on the plans. Overall dimensions shall not exceed approximately _____ mm long x ______ mm wide x _____ mm high. The total connected fan power shall not exceed _____ kW. The cooling tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model ____________. Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting, hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program. (Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional): Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be constructed of Type 304 or 316 stainless steel and assembled with stainless steel nut and bolt fasteners. 1.4 Quality Assurance: The cooling tower manufacturer shall have a Management System certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of products and services. 1.5 Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of startup or eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
VTL
1.2 Thermal Capacity: The cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to cool _____ l/s of water from ______ C to _____C at _____C entering wet-bulb temperature. 1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction (standard): Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel with all edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound and the exterior protected with the BALTIPLUS Protection. (Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional): Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND

2.1 Structure: The unit shall be constructed of heavy-gauge steel utilizing double-brake flanges for maximum strength and rigidity and reliable sealing of watertight joints. The unit shall be of unitary design to minimize rigging requirements. The fan(s) and fan drive system, including the fan motor, shall be factory mounted and aligned and located in the dry entering air stream to ensure reliable operation and ease of maintenance. 2.2 Heat Transfer Section: The heat transfer sections(s) shall consist of a wet deck surface, spray water distribution system and drift eliminators arranged for optimal thermal performance with minimal drift. 2.3 Wet Deck Surface: The wet deck surface shall be formed from self-extinguishing plastic material and shall be impervious to rot, decay, and fungus or biological attack. The wet deck surface shall be manufactured and performance tested by the cooling tower manufacturer to assure single source responsibility and control of the final product. 2.4 Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed evenly over the wet deck surface by a water distribution system consisting of a header and spray branches of plastic pipe with large orifice, nonclog plastic distribution nozzles. The branches and spray nozzles shall be held in place by snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of individual nozzles or complete branches for cleaning or flushing. 2.5 Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be provided with large area lift out strainers with perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution system nozzles and an anti-vortexing device to prevent air entrainment. The strainer and anti-vortexing device shall be constructed of the same material as the basin to prevent dissimilar metal corrosion. Standard basin accessories shall include a brass make-up valve with large diameter polystyrene filled plastic float for easy adjustment of the operating water level. (Alternate2.5) Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Type 304 or 316 stainless steel panels and structural members up to the heat transfer section/basin joint. The basin shall be provided with large area lift out strainers with perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution system nozzles and an anti-vortexing device to prevent air entrainment. The strainer and anti-vortexing device shall be constructed of the same material as the basin to prevent dissimilar metal corrosion. Standard basin accessories shall include a brass make-up valve with large diameter polystyrene filled plastic float for easy adjustment of the operating water level.

3.1 Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be dynamically balanced, forwardly curved, centrifugal type selected to provide optimum thermal performance with minimal sound levels. Fan housings shall have curved inlet rings for efficient air entry and four-sided rectangular discharge cowls shall extend into the basin to increase fan efficiency and prevent water from splashing into the fans. 3.2 Bearings: Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported by heavy-duty, self-aligning, relubricatable bearings with cast iron housings, designed for a minimum L10 life of 40 000 hours (280 000 Hr. Average. Life). 3.3 Fan Drive: The fan(s) shall be driven by matched V-belts with taper lock sheaves. Motor shall be located on a heavy-duty motor base, adjustable by a single threaded bolt-and-nut arrangement. Removable steel screens or panels shall protect the fan drive and all moving parts. 3.4 Fan Motor: Furnish _____ kW, ______ RPM Totally Enclosed, Fan Cooled (TEFC), squirrel cage, ball bearing type fan motors suitable for outdoor service. Motor(s) shall be suitable for ________ volt, ___ hertz, and __ phase electrical service. 3.5 BALTIGUARD Fan System (optional): Two-single speed fan motors, one sized for full speed and load, the other sized for 2/3 speed and approximately 1/3 of full load kW shall be provided in each cell for capacity control and stand-by protection from drive or motor failure. Two-speed motor(s) are not an acceptable alternative.
Baltimore Aircoil
VTL - B 113
4.0 Drift Eliminators

4.1 Drift Eliminators: Eliminators shall be constructed of specially formulated plastic material and be removable in easily handled sections. They shall have a minimum of three changes in air direction.
5.0 Access
Open Cooling Towers
6.0 Sound
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
8000
dB(A)
VTL - B 114
VTL
Baltimore Aircoil
VXT - B 115
VXT
Open Cooling Towers
Open Cooling Towers
Product Detail
VXT Open Cooling Tower ..................................................................... B116 Benefits .................................................................................................... B118 Construction Details .............................................................................. B120 Custom Features and Options .............................................................. B122 Accessories ............................................................................................. B124 Engineering Data ................................................................................... B126 Structural Support ................................................................................ B131 Engineering Specifications ................................................................... B134
VXT - B 116
VXT Open Cooling Tower

Capacity
Single Cell Capacity: From 1,6 l/s to 1230 l/s
VXT
General Description
Open Circuit Cooling Towers with centrifugal fans, deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of flow and temperature requirements. This type of cooling towers can be installed indoors and can accommodate limited ceiling or enclosure heights. Cooling tower with centrifugal fans minimise sound levels and installation costs, provides year round operating reliability, and simplifies maintenance requirements. Cooling Towers provide an answer to the growing need to save water and energy and help protect the environment by providing the highest system efficiency.
Key Features
z
Suitable for indoor and outdoor installations Suitable for high temperature applications Low sound Single side air inlet Low energy consumption Low installed cost Easy maintenance Reliable year-round operation Long service life
Baltimore Aircoil
VXT - B 117
Open Cooling Towers
VXT - B 118
Benefits
z
Indoor Installations Centrifugal fans can overcome the static pressure imposed by external ductwork, allowing this type of cooling towers to be installed indoors. High Temperature Applications A range of wet deck and construction options are available to accommodate entering water temperatures of up to 65C.
VXT
Low Sound
z

z
Low Installed Cost

z
Support All models mount directly on two parallel I-beams (supplied by others) and ship complete with motors and drives factory-installed and aligned. Modular Design Large models ship in multiple sections to minimize the size and weight of the heaviest lift, allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes.
Easy Maintenance
z
The water level control is easily reached from the access door.
External V-belt drive system (shown here with panel removed)

z
Baltimore Aircoil
VXT - B 119
Long Service Life

z
Open Cooling Towers
VXT - B 120
VXT
Upper Section
Lower Section
Baltimore Aircoil
VXT - B 121

z
2. Fan Drive System

z
V-belt drive Heavy-duty bearings and fan motor
3. Centrifugal Fan(s)
z
Open Cooling Towers
Quiet Operation

z
5. BACount Wet Deck Surface

z
Plastic material Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack Self extinguishing High temperature wet deck option
6. Strainer
z
7. Access Door
z
z
VXT - B 122

z
Standard Construction: Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized steel protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection on the outside of the unit. Optional BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System: The BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend equipment life, is applied before assembly to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the unit.
VXT
Unit with Stainless Steel Option
Optional Stainless Steel Construction: Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of stainless steel either type 304 or 316. Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin: A cost-effective alternative to an all stainless steel unit. The critical components in the cold water basin and the cold water basin itself are provided in stainless steel. The remaining components are protected with the BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System.
Fan Drive System

The Baltiguard Drive System

The BALTIGUARD Drive System consists of two standard single-speed fan motors and drive assemblies. One drive assembly is sized for full speed and load, and the other is sized for approximately 2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3 of the design kilowatt power. This configuration allows the system to be operated like a two-speed motor, but with the reserve capacity of a standby motor in the event of failure. As a minimum, approximately 70% capacity will be available from the low kilowatt motor, even on a design wet-bulb day. Controls and wiring are the same, as those Baltiguard Drive System required for a two-speed, two-winding motor. Significant energy savings are achieved when operating at low speed during periods of reduced load and/or low wet-bulb temperatures.
Baltimore Aircoil
VXT - B 123
Low Sound Operation

Open Cooling Towers
Units with Intake and Discharge Sound Attenuation
VXT - B 124
Accessories
Ladder, Safety Cage and Handrails
In the event the owner requires easy access to the top of the unit, the unit can be furnished with ladders extending from the base of the unit to the top, as well as safety cages, and handrail packages.
VXT
Note: When these access options are employed, the unit must be equipped with steel drift eliminators.
Basin Heaters
Optional External Platform
Model No. VXT VXT 10-25 VXT 30-55 VXT 65-85 VXT 95-135 VXT 150-185 VXT N215-N265 VXT N310-N395 VXT N430-N535 VXT 315-400 VXT 470-600 VXT 630-800 VXT 870-1200 Heater -18 C (kW) 1 x 1,5 1 x 1,5 1 x 2,5 1x3 1x4 1x6 2x4 2x6 1x6 2x5 2x6 4x5

Baltimore Aircoil
VXT - B 125


Open Cooling Towers

Modulating capacity control dampers are Extended Lubrication Lines available to provide better leaving water temperature control than can be obtained from fan cycling alone. Fan discharge dampers consist of a single airfoil type damper blade located in the discharge of each fan housing. A standard electrical control package for dampers is available from BAC.
Solid Bottom Panels

Discharge Hoods

VXT - B 126
Engineering Data
VXT 10 - 185
VXT
1. Drain ND 50; 2. Water Outlet; 3. Overflow ND50; 4. Make Up; 5.Water Inlet; 6.Access Door. On models VXT-10 to VXT-135 sufficient space must be provided on the back of the unit for entry to access doors located on side opposite air entry side.
Model VXT VXT 010 VXT 015 VXT 020 VXT 025 Op. Weight Sh. Weight Heaviest Section (kg) (kg) (kg) 405 410 425 435 325 330 350 360 325 330 350 360
Air Flow (m/s) 1,79 1,94 2,19 2,50
Fan Motor Fluid Inlet (kW) ND (mm) (1) 0,75 (1) 1,1 (1) 1,5 (1) 2,2 (1) 80 (1) 80 (1) 80 (1) 80
Fluid Outlet Make Up ND (mm) ND (mm) (1) 80 (1) 80 (1) 80 (1) 80 25 25 25 25
H (mm) 2036 2036 2036 2036
L (mm) 914 914 914 914
W (mm) 1207 1207 1207 1207
VXT 030 VXT 040 VXT 045 VXT 055
655 685 695 780
490 520 530 615
490 520 530 440
3,74 4,48 4,97 5,16
(1) 1,5 (1) 2,2 (1) 4,0 (1) 5,5
(1) 80 (1) 80 (1) 80 (1) 80
(1) 80 (1) 80 (1) 80 (1) 80
25 25 25 25
2036 2036 2036 2506
1829 1829 1829 1829
1207 1207 1207 1207
VXT 065 VXT 070 VXT 075 VXT 085
1050 1075 1135 1140
715 740 805 810
715 740 540 540
7,22 8,12 8,02 8,83
(1) 5,5 (1) 5,5 (1) 5,5 (1) 7,5
(1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100
(1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100
25 25 25 25
2036 2220 2506 2506
2737 2737 2737 2737
1207 1207 1207 1207
VXT 095 VXT 105 VXT 120 VXT 135
1255 1445 1475 1665
890 1080 1110 1300
890 575 605 700
11,04 10,90 12,58 12,46
(1) 7,5 (1) 7,5 (1) 11 (1) 11
(1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100
(1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100
25 25 25 25
2036 2675 2675 3350
3658 3658 3658 3658
1207 1207 1207 1207
VXT 150 VXT 165 VXT 185
2215 2360 2565
1590 1740 1940
915 915 980
15,79 15,53 16,94
(1) 15 (1) 15 (1) 18,5
(1) 150 (1)150 (1)150
(1) 150 (1) 150 (1) 150
25 25 25
3128 3585 4042
3645 3645 3645
1438 1438 1438
Baltimore Aircoil
VXT - B 127
VXT N215 - N535
Open Cooling Towers
1. Drain ND 50; 2. Water Outlet; 3. Overflow ND 80; 4. Make Up; 5.Water Inlet; 6.Access Door.
Model VXT VXT N215 VXT N240 VXT N265
Sh. Op. Weight Weight (kg) (kg) 3640 3850 4080 2100 2310 2540
Heaviest Section (kg) 1395 1395 1435
Air Flow Fan Motor (m/s) (kW) 23,49 23,33 24,26 (1) 22 (1) 22 (1) 30
Fluid Inlet ND (mm) (1) 150 (1) 150 (1) 150
Fluid Outlet ND (mm) (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200
Make Up ND (mm) 50 50 50
H (mm) 3112 3569 4026
L (mm) 3550 3550 3550
W (mm) 2397 2397 2397
VXT N310 VXT N345 VXT N370 VXT N395
5300 5580 5860 5890
3060 3340 3620 3650
1875 1875 1875 1895
34,12 33,82 33,60 36,15
(1) 30 (1) 30 (1) 30 (1) 37
(1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200
(1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200
50 50 50 50
3112 3569 4026 4026
5385 5385 5385 5385
2397 2397 2397 2397
VXT N430 VXT N480 VXT N510 VXT N535
7330 7730 8110 8200
4190 4590 4980 5060
2758 2758 2758 2839
46,98 46,65 46,44 48,94
(2) 22 (2) 22 (2) 22 (2) 30
(2) 150 (2) 150 (2) 150 (2) 150
(1) 250 (1) 250 (1) 250 (1) 250
50 50 50 50
3112 3569 4026 4026
7226 7226 7226 7226
2397 2397 2397 2397
VXT - B 128
VXT 315 - 1200
VXT
1. Drain ND50; 2. Water Outlet; 3. Overflow ND 80; 4. Make Up; 5.Water Inlet; 6.Access Door.
Sh. Op. Weight Weight (kg) (kg) 4905 5195 5505 5535 2960 3260 3560 3590
Model VXT
Heaviest Section (kg) 1945 1945 1945 1970
Air Flow Fan Motor (m/s) (kW)
Fluid Inlet ND (mm)
Fluid Outlet ND (mm)
Make Up ND (mm)
H (mm)
L (mm)
W (mm)
VXT 315 VXT 350 VXT 375 VXT 400
34,55 34,31 34,10 36,62
(1) 30 (1) 30 (1) 30 (1) 37
(1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200
(1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200 (1) 200
50 50 50 50
4030 4487 4944 4944
3550 3550 3550 3550
3000 3000 3000 3000
VXT 470 VXT 525 VXT 560 VXT 600
7305 7750 8245 8325
4360 4810 5290 5370
2770 2770 2770 2845
51,82 51,44 50,92 54,93
(2) 22 (2) 22 (2) 22 (2) 30
(1) 250 (1) 250 (1) 250 (1) 250
(1) 250 (1) 250 (1) 250 (1) 250
50 50 50 50
4030 4487 4944 4944
5388 5388 5388 5388
3000 3000 3000 3000
VXT 630 VXT 700 VXT 750 VXT 800
9805 10385 11005 11055
5900 6490 7110 7160
3885 3885 3885 3925
69,09 68,62 68,20 73,25
(2) 30 (2) 30 (2) 30 (2) 37
(2) 200 (2) 200 (2) 200 (2) 200
(1) 300 (1) 300 (1) 300 (1) 300
50 50 50 50
4030 4487 4944 4944
7226 7226 7226 7226
3000 3000 3000 3000
VXT 870 VXT 945 VXT 1050 VXT 1125 VXT 1200
14570 14680 15560 16490 16570
8720 8830 9710 10640 10720
5670 5785 5785 5785 5855
94,37 103,64 102,93 102,30 109,87
(3) 22 (3) 30 (3) 30 (3) 30 (3) 37
(3) 200 (3) 200 (3) 200 (3) 200 (3) 200
(2) 250 (2) 250 (2) 250 (2) 250 (2) 250
80 80 80 80 80
4030 4030 4487 4944 4944
10903 10903 10903 10903 10903
3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
General Notes
1. All connections 100 mm and smaller are MPT. Connections 150 mm and larger are bevelled-for-welding. 2. Fan kW is at 0 Pa ESP. To operate against external static pressure up to 125 Pa, increase each fan motor one size. 3. Make up, overflow, suction, and drain connections can be provided on end opposite to that shown; consult your BAC representative.
Baltimore Aircoil
VXT - B 129
Sound Attenuation
XA + XB Sound Attenuation for VX-Line Cooling Towers
Open Cooling Towers
1. Access Door; L & W & H: unit dimensions (see Engineering Data).
XC Sound Attenuation for VX-Line Cooling Towers
1. Access Door; L & W & H: unit dimensions (see Engineering Data)
VXT - B 130
Model No. VXT
Unit + Atten. # pieces shipped XA, XB, XC
# Access doors (3) XA, XB, XC W2 Disch. Att. Int. Att. XA, XB XC 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 4 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2352 2352 2352 2352 2583 3542 3542 3542 4145 4145 4145 4145
Dimensions (mm) H1 W1 L1 L2 Intake + solid bottom XA 900 140 225 300 400 500 690 XB XC
Weights (kg) Discharge XA XB XC XA Total XB 310 490 720 890 XC N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
XA, XB, XC 890
10 - 25 30 - 55 65 - 85
3 3(1) 3(1) 4(2) 4 4 4 7 4 4 7 10
N.A. 1090 1030
160 N.A. 130 270 N.A. 175 370 N.A. 280 470 N.A. 360 600 1200 440 820 1610 530
150 N.A. 270 220 N.A. 400 350 N.A. 580 420 N.A. 760
N.A. 1090 1030 1800 1815 N.A. 1090 1030 2710 2730 N.A. 1090 1030 3635 3645 3728 1600 1420 3635 3645 4687 2070 1955 3510 3645 4687 2070 1955 5365 5480
VXT
95 - 135 150 - 185 N215 N265 N310 N395 N430 - N535 315 - 400 470 - 600 630 - 800 870 - 1200
520 1070 940 1120 2270 650 1330 1220 1470 2940 970 1980 1720 2130 4250
960 1160 2270 760
4687 2070 1955 7185 7320 1380 1640 3220 1060 1300 2660 2440 2940 5880 5290 2560 2965 3510 3645 790 940 1850 710 880 1820 1500 1820 3670
5290 2560 2965 5365 5480 1080 1330 2590 900 1210 2490 1980 2540 5080 5290 2560 2965 7185 7320 1580 1880 3700 1420 1760 3640 3000 3640 7340 5290 2560 2965 10865 10995 2370 2820 5550 2130 2640 5460 4500 5460 11010
(1) (1) (2) (3) (3)
VXT-55 + attenuation is shipped in 4 pieces VXT-75 and VXT 85 + attenuation is shipped in 4 pieces VXT-95 + attenuation is shipped in 3 pieces Intake Attenuator: Acces opening is 775 mm high, 406 mm wide and is located at each end of the unit.
Discharge Attenuator : Access opening is 400 mm high, 1080 mm wide and is located at blank off side of the unit (VXT 10-25 has 650 mm width)
Baltimore Aircoil
VXT - B 131
Structural Support
Units without Sound Attenuation
Open Cooling Towers
1. Outline of Unit; 2. Mounting Holes 22 mm; 3. Unit; 4. Air Intake.
Model
A Unit Length (mm) 914 1829 2737 3658 3645 3550 3550 5388 5388 7226 7226 10903
B Unit width (mm) 1207 1207 1207 1207 1438 2397 3000 2397 3000 2397 3000 3000
C Center dis. Length (mm) 750 1664 2572 3492 3492 3238 3238 5074 5074 6194 6194 10590
D Center dis. Width (mm) 1153 1153 1153 1153 1378 2327 2934 2327 2934 2327 2934 2934
E (mm)
F (mm)
G (mm)
H (mm)
X Max. Deflection (mm) 2 5 8 10 10 10 10 13 13 13 13 13
Mounting Holes
VXT 10-25 VXT 30-55 VXT 65-84 VXT 95-135 VXT 150-185 VXT N215-N265 VXT 315-400 VXT N310-N395 VXT 470-600 VXT N430-N535 VXT 630-800 VXT 870-1200
2496 2496 3238 3238 3238
102 102 438 438 438
3238
438
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 8 8 12
VXT - B 132
Units with Sound Attenuation
VXT
1. Outline of Unit; 2. Mounting Holes 22 mm; 3. Outline of attenuator (optional XA or XB); 4. Support Channel attached to optional XA or XB attenuator; 5. (3 + 5) Outline of Attenuator (optional XC); 6. (4 + 6) Support Channels attached to optional XC attenuator; 7. Unit; 8. Sound Attenuation (Type XA, XB or XC); 9. Air Intake.
Baltimore Aircoil
VXT - B 133
Model
A Unit Length (mm) 914 1829 2737 3658 3645 3550 3550 5388 5388 7226 7226 10903
B Unit width (mm) 1207 1207 1207 1207 1438 2397 3000 2397 3000 2397 3000 3000
C Center dis. Length (mm) 750 1664 2572 3492 3492 3238 3238 5074 5074 6194 6194 10590
D Center dis. Width (mm) 1153 1153 1153 1153 1378 2327 2934 2327 2934 2327 2934 2934
E (mm)
F (mm)
G (mm)
H (mm)
X Max. Deflection (mm) 2 5 8 10 10 10 10 13 13 13 13 13
Mounting Holes
VXT 10-25 VXT 30-55 VXT 65-84 VXT 95-135 VXT 150-185 VXT N215-N265 VXT 315-400 VXT N310-N395 VXT 470-600 VXT N430-N535 VXT 630-800 VXT 870-1200
2496 2496 3238 3238 3238
102 102 438 438 438
3238
438
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 8 8 12
Open Cooling Towers
Notes:
1. The recommended support arrangement for VX units consists of parallel I-beams extending the full length of the unit. Supports and anchor bolts are to be designed and furnished by others. 2. All supporting beams are to be flush and level at top and must be oriented relative to gage line as shown. 3. Recommended design loads for each unit support beam should be 70% of the total unit operating weight applied as a uniform load to each of the unit beams. The support beam(s) for the optional intake attenuator(s) needs to carry attenuator only, uniform load of 250 kg/m. Beams should be designed in accordance with standard structural practice. For the maximum allowable deflection of beams under the unit refer to above table. 4. All mounting holes have a diameter of 22 mm at the locations shown. 5. If vibration isolators are used, a rail or channel must be provided between the unit (and optional attenuator) and the isolators to provide continuous unit support. Additionally the support beams must be designed to accommodate the overall length and mounting hole location of the isolators that may differ from those of the unit. Refer to vibration isolator drawings for these data.
VXT - B 134
1.0 Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Furnish and install _____ factory-assembled, forced-draft, centrifugal fan, counter flow cooling tower(s) with vertical air discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications, schedules and as shown on the plans. Overall dimensions shall not exceed approximately _____ mm long x ______ mm wide x _____ mm high. The total connected fan power shall not exceed _____ kW. The cooling tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model ____________. 1.2 Thermal Capacity: The cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to cool _____ l/s of water from ______ C to _____C at _____C entering wet-bulb temperature. 1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction (standard): Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel with all edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound and the exterior protected with the BALTIPLUS Protection. (Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional): Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting, hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program. (Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional): Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be constructed of Type 304 or 316 stainless steel and assembled with stainless steel nut and bolt fasteners. 1.4 Quality Assurance: The cooling tower manufacturer shall have a Management System certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of products and services. 1.5 Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of startup or eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
VXT

2.1 Structure (VX-Line models): The cooling tower shall be constructed of heavy-gauge steel utilizing double-brake flanges for maximum strength and rigidity and reliable sealing of watertight joints. The heat transfer section shall be removable from the pan/fan section to facilitate shipping and handling. The fan(s) and fan drive system, including the fan motor, shall be factory mounted and aligned and located in the dry entering air stream to ensure reliable operation and ease of maintenance. 2.2 Heat Transfer Section: The heat transfer sections(s) shall consist of a wet deck surface, spray water distribution system and drift eliminators arranged for optimal thermal performance with minimal drift. 2.3 Wet Deck Surface: The wet deck surface shall be formed from selfextinguishing plastic material and shall be impervious to rot, decay, and fungus or biological attack. The wet deck surface shall be manufactured and performance tested by the cooling tower manufacturer to assure single source responsibility and control of the final product. 2.4 Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed evenly over the wet deck surface by a water distribution system consisting of a header and spray branches of plastic pipe with large orifice, non-clog plastic distribution nozzles. The branches and spray nozzles shall be held in place by snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of individual nozzles or complete branches for cleaning or flushing. 2.5 Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be provided with large area lift out strainers with perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution system nozzles and an anti-vortexing device to prevent air entrainment. The strainer and anti-vortexing device shall be constructed of the same material as the basin to prevent dissimilar metal corrosion. Standard basin accessories shall include a brass make-up valve with large diameter polystyrene filled plastic float for easy adjustment of the operating water level. (Alternate2.5) Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Type 304 or 316 stainless steel panels and structural members up to the heat transfer section/basin joint. The basin shall be provided with large area lift out strainers with perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution system nozzles and an antivortexing device to prevent air entrainment. The strainer and anti-vortexing device shall be constructed of the same material as the basin to prevent dissimilar metal corrosion. Standard basin accessories shall include a brass make-up valve with large diameter polystyrene filled plastic float for easy adjustment of the operating water level.

3.1 Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be dynamically balanced, forwardly curved, centrifugal type selected to provide optimum thermal performance with minimal sound levels. Fan housings shall have curved inlet rings for efficient air entry and four-sided rectangular discharge cowls shall extend into the basin to increase fan efficiency and prevent water from splashing into the fans. 3.2 Bearings: Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported by heavy-duty, selfaligning, relubricatable bearings with cast iron housings, designed for a minimum L10 life of 40 000 hours (280 000 Hr. Average. Life). 3.3 Fan Drive: The fan(s) shall be driven by matched V-belts with taper lock sheaves. Motor shall be located on a heavy-duty motor base, adjustable by a single threaded bolt-and-nut arrangement. Removable steel screens or panels shall protect the fan drive and all moving parts. 3.4 Fan Motor: Furnish _____ kW, ______ RPM Totally Enclosed, Fan Cooled (TEFC), squirrel cage, ball bearing type fan motors suitable for outdoor service. Motor(s) shall be suitable for ________ volt, ___ hertz, and __ phase electrical service. 3.5 BALTIGUARD Fan System (optional): Two-single speed fan motors, one sized for full speed and load, the other sized for 2/3 speed and approximately 1/3 of full load kW shall be provided in each cell for capacity control and stand-by protection from drive or motor failure. Two-speed motor(s) are not an acceptable alternative.

5.0 Access
6.0 Sound
6.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment, the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the cooling Location Discharge Air Inlet End Back 63 125 250 500 tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound levels detailed below. 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Baltimore Aircoil
CCCT - C 1

Overview

General Information ................................................................................. C2 Principle of Operation .............................................................................. C2 Configuration ............................................................................................. C2 Fan System ................................................................................................. C3 Capacity Range .......................................................................................... C3 Maximum Entering Fluid Temperature .................................................. C4 Typical Applications .................................................................................. C4 Product Line Overview Table .................................................................. C4 Advantages of Closed Circuit Cooling Towers ....................................... C6 Engineering Considerations ..................................................................... C9
CCCT - C 2
General Information
Closed circuit cooling towers provide evaporative cooling for many types of systems, and the specific application will largely determine which BAC Closed Circuit Cooling Tower is best suited for a project. The Product Line Overview Table is intended as a general guide. Specialized assistance is available through your local BAC Balticare Representative.
Overview
Closed circuit cooling towers operate in a manner similar to open cooling towers, except that the heat load to be rejected is transferred from the process fluid (the fluid being cooled) to the ambient air through a heat exchange coil. The coil serves to isolate the process fluid from the outside air, keeping it clean and contamination free in a closed loop. This creates two separate fluid circuits: (1) an external circuit, in which spray water circulates over the coil and mixes with the outside air, and (2) an internal circuit, in which the process fluid circulates inside the coil. During operation, heat is transferred from the internal circuit, through the coil to the spray water, and then to the atmosphere as a portion of the water evaporates.
Configuration
BAC manufactures two types of closed circuit cooling towers: combined flow and counterflow.
Combined Flow
Combined flow is the use of both a heat exchange coil and wet deck surface for heat transfer in a closed circuit cooling tower. The addition of wet deck surface to the traditional closed circuit cooling tower design reduces evaporation in the coil section, reducing the potential for scaling and fouling. BACs combined flow closed circuit cooling towers utilize parallel flow of air and spray water over the coil, and crossflow air/water flow through the wet deck surface. In parallel flow, air and water flow over the coil in the same direction. The process fluid travels from the bottom to the top of the coil, increasing efficiency by bringing the coldest spray water and air in contact with the process fluid at its coldest temperature.
Combined Flow: Parallel flow of air and water over the coil
Combined Flow: Crossflow configuration over the wet deck
Baltimore Aircoil
CCCT - C 3
Counterflow
In a counterflow closed circuit cooling tower design, the flow of the air is in the opposite direction of the spray water. In BACs counterflow closed circuit cooling towers, air travels vertically up through the unit while the spray water travels vertically down over the coil.
Fan System
The flow of air through most factory assembled Counterflow Configuration evaporative cooling equipment is provided by one or more mechanically driven fans. The fan(s) may be axial or centrifugal, each type having its own distinct advantages. Axial fan units require approximately half the fan motor kilowatt of comparably sized centrifugal fan units, offering significant life-cycle cost savings. Centrifugal fan units are capable of overcoming reasonable amounts of external static pressure ( 125 Pa), making them suitable for both indoor and outdoor installations. Centrifugal fans are also inherently quieter than axial fans, although the difference is minimal and can often be overcome through the application of optional low sound fans and/or sound attenuation on axial fan units. Fans can be applied in an induced draft or a forced draft configuration.
Centrifugal Fans
Axial Fans
Capacity Range
In the Product Line Overview Table, product capacities are called out in terms of a flow rate. This refers to the fluid flow rate that the unit can cool from a 30C entering water temperature to 25C leaving water temperature at a 21C entering ambient wet-bulb temperature. All capacities shown are for a single cell; multiple cell units can be applied to achieve larger capacities.
CCCT - C 4
Maximum Entering Fluid Temperature

All BAC Closed Circuit Cooling Towers are capable of withstanding entering fluid temperatures as high as 82C.

VXI VFL
Configuration Fan System Capacity Range (Single Cell) Maximum Entering Fluid Temperature
Counterflow Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft 1 tot 200 l/s 82C Small to medium HVAC & industrial applications such as water source heat pump loops and air compressor cooling Indoor installations High temperature applications Tight enclosures & installations requiring a single air inlet Extremely sound sensitive applications
Counterflow Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft 1 to 65 l/s 82C
Small to medium HVAC & industrial applications Installations with extremely low height requirements Indoor installations High temperature industrial applications Extremely sound sensitive applications
1. Air In; 2. Air Out; 3. Fluid In; 4. Fluid Out; 5. Wet Deck Surface; 6. Cold Water Basin; 7. Water Distribution System; 8. Coil; 9. Spray Water Pump; 10. Eliminators; 11. Optional Extended Surface.
HFL, HXI and DFC water saving and hybrid wet-dry products are available to meet these specific design requirements. Refer to the "Water Saving Products" section for more details on these products.
Baltimore Aircoil
CCCT - C 5
S1500 FXV - Single Air Inlet Models FXV-D Dual Air Inlet Models
Combined flow Axial Fan, Induced Draft 3 to 149 l/s 82C Small to medium HVAC & industrial applications such as water source heat pump loops and air compressor cooling Tight enclosures & installations requiring a single air inlet Unit replacements
Combined flow Axial Fan, Induced Draft 200 to 330 82C Medium to large HVAC & industrial applications such as electric arc furnaces and pharmaceutical plants
CCCT - C 6
Advantages of Closed Circuit Cooling Towers

Open cooling towers expose process cooling water to the atmosphere, typically as part of a chiller system loop (see Figure 1). These open towers use an efficient, simple, and economical design. All components in an open system must be compatible with the oxygen introduced via the cooling tower. Closed circuit cooling towers completely isolate process cooling fluid from the atmosphere. This is accomplished by combining heat rejection equipment with a heat exchanger in a closed circuit tower (see Figure 2). A closed loop system protects the quality of the process fluid, reduces system maintenance, and provides operational flexibility at a slightly higher initial cost. When deciding which system is best for an application, several factors should be considered.
Overview
Figure 1 : Chiller Loop w/Open Tower
Figure 2 : Chiller Loop w/Closed Circuit Tower
Performance
If an application must produce full capacity throughout the year, maintaining a clean, reliable system loop is critical. Isolating the process fluid in a closed loop system prevents airborne
Baltimore Aircoil
CCCT - C 7
contaminants from entering and fouling the system. Sustaining optimum performance in an open loop system will require regular maintenance to assure similar efficiency. High efficiency chillers and heat exchangers rely on clean process water to function properly and are significantly impacted by even small amounts of fouling.
Expense
The initial equipment cost of an open loop system will be less than a comparably sized closed loop system, since the open system does not include the intermediate heat exchanger component. However, the higher first cost of a closed loop system will be paid back during years of operation through the following savings:
z
Cleaner process fluid results in a cleaner internal surface area, and higher efficiency components in the system (e.g. chiller) Reduced system maintenance costs Reduced water treatment costs for evaporative equipment Operating in free cooling mode during the winter to save energy consumption
Maintenance
Since the process fluid of a closed loop system is completely isolated from the environment, routine maintenance is only required on the heat rejection equipment itself. The need to shut down the system periodically to clean the heat exchanger is dramatically reduced, if not entirely eliminated. Providing clean process fluid to the system will extend the life of other components in the system (condenser bundles, compressors, etc.).
Water Treatment
Maintaining proper process fluid quality in a system may involve several steps, such as chemical treatment, filtration equipment and the addition of clean make-up water. A closed circuit cooling tower can provide the following advantages over an open cooling tower:
z
Lower volume of recirculating water to treat Process loop requires minimal treatment During periods of dry operation, the need for make-up water is eliminated
Operational Flexibility
Closed circuit cooling towers allow for the following modes of operation not possible with open cooling towers:
z
Free cooling operation without the need for an intermediate heat exchanger: Chiller turned off Dry operation: Conserve water and treatment chemicals, prevent icing and eliminate plume Variable pumping: Closed condenser water loop allows for variable speed pumping to conserve energy
Closed Circuit Tower versus Open Tower / Heat Exchanger

Sometimes, an open cooling tower is paired with a heat exchanger (see Figure 3) to capture some of the benefits of closed loop cooling. Choosing closed circuit cooling towers over this open tower/ heat exchanger combination may still be a better choice for the following reasons:
CCCT - C 8
Total cost: Addition of a heat exchanger (pump, piping, etc.) to the open tower loop brings the initial cost much closer to that of the closed circuit tower system Single piece of equipment: Compact design of the closed circuit tower conserves space in a self-contained package, compared to multiple locations for the tower/heat exchanger arrangement Maintenance: Narrow spacing in heat exchanger (e.g. plate and frame) may trap solids introduced by the open tower, requiring frequent, time consuming cleaning to assure optimum performance Dry operation: Open tower/heat exchanger system cannot be run dry in the winter
Overview
These guidelines provide some general information to help decide whether a closed circuit cooling tower is better suited for a particular application than an open tower, with or without a heat exchanger. For additional assistance with a project, please contact your local BAC Balticare Representative.
Figure 3 : Chiller Loop w/Open Tower/Heat Exchanger Combination
Note : BAC offers heat exchanger skids in combination with most of his open cooling tower products. These skids are available for both new installations or to retrofit on existing installations. The heat exchanger skid consists of a plate heat exchanger with pump and interconnecting piping and appendages. The skids are delivered on a heavy duty frame and with steel panel enclosure. Refer to your BAC Balticare representative for more details and selections.
Baltimore Aircoil
CCCT - C 9
Location
Piping and Valves

Piping must be sized and installed in accordance with good piping practice. All piping should be supported by pipe hangers or other supports, not by the unit. Some installations may require flow balancing valves (supplied by others) at the coil inlets to balance the flow to individual coils and cells. External shutoff valves on the closed circuit loop (supplied by others) may also be required if the system design necessitates the isolation of individual cells. Although equalizing lines can be used to balance water levels between multi-cell closed circuit cooling towers, the spray water for each cell must be treated separately, and a separate make-up must be provided for each cell. Note that a common remote sump for multi-cell installations can simplify make-up and water treatment see "Technical Resources, Remote Sump Tank Selection" for details. See the appropriate Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual for more information on water treatment.
Capacity Control
Fan Cycling Fan cycling is the simplest method of capacity control. The number of steps of capacity control can be increased using the Baltiguard Fan System, the independent fan motor option, or two-speed fan motors in conjunction with fan cycling (see the Custom Features & Options section of the appropriate product line to determine whether the Baltiguard Fan System or the independent fan motor option are available; two-speed motors are available for all products). These options provide substantial energy savings when compared to simple fan cycling.
Warning: Rapid on-off cycling can cause the fan motor to overheat. It is recommended that controls be set to allow a maximum of 6 on-off cycles per hour.
CCCT - C 10
Note: Spray water pump cycling should not be used for capacity control. This method of control often results in short cycling of the pump motor as capacity changes substantially with pump cycling. In addition, alternate wetting and drying of the coil promotes scaling of the heat exchanger coil surface.
Capacity Control Dampers (VFL and VXI models only) On centrifugal fan models, modulating capacity control dampers are available to provide close control of the leaving temperature. See Section "Accessories" or contact your local BAC Balticare representative.
Vibration Cutout Switch
Overview
Vibration cutout switches are recommended on all axial fan installations. Vibration cutout switches are designed to interrupt power to the fan motor and/or provide an alarm to the operator in the event of excessive vibration. BAC offers both electronic and mechanical vibration cutout switches on all evaporative condensers.
Water Treatment
Wet Deck Surface Compatibility (FXV and FXV-D models only)

The standard wet deck surface in FXV and FXV-D Closed Circuit Cooling Towers is constructed of a plastic material This wet deck surface is compatible with the water found in most evaporative cooling applications. For applications where the entering fluid temperature exceeds 82C, contact your local BAC Balticare Representative to confirm that the standard wet deck is acceptable.
Sound Levels
Sound rating data are available for all BAC models. When calculating the sound levels generated by a unit, the designer must take into account the effects of the geometry of the tower as well as the distance and direction from the unit to noise-sensitive areas. Whisper Quiet fans and intake and discharge sound attenuation can be supplied on certain models to provide reduced sound characteristics (see the Custom Features and Options section of the appropriate product line for details). The Baltiguard Fan System, two-speed motors, or variable frequency drives can also be used to reduce sound during periods of non-peak thermal loads. For more information on sound and how it relates to evaporative cooling equipment, see Section "Technical Resources, Fundamentals of Sound". For detailed low sound selections, please consult your local BAC Balticare Representative.
Baltimore Aircoil
CCCT - C 11
Winterization
When a unit is shut down in freezing weather, the basin water must be protected by draining to an indoor auxiliary remote sump tank or by providing supplementary heat to the cold water basin. Supplementary heat can be provided by electric immersion heaters or in some cases, hot water, steam coils, or steam injectors. All exposed water piping, make-up lines, and spray pumps (if applicable) that do not drain at shutdown should be traced with electric heater tape and insulated. When dry operation is planned for low ambient conditions, centrifugal fan units should be supplied with oversized fan motors to prevent motor overload when the spray water is not operating. For remote sump applications, the spray water pump must be selected for the required flow at a total head which includes the vertical lift, pipe friction (in supply and suction lines) plus the required pressure at the inlet header of the water distribution system (14 kPa). A valve should always be installed in the discharge line from the pump to permit adjusting flow to the unit requirement. Inlet water pressure should be measured by a pressure gauge installed in the water supply riser at the spray water inlet, and adjusted to the specified inlet pressure.
Indoor Installation (applicable to VXI and VFL models only)

Safety
Fluid Compatibility
The fluid to be cooled must be compatible with the coil material (standard serpentine are carbon steel, hot-dip galvanized on the outside only). Fluids not compatible with coil materials can lead to corrosion and tube failure. Certain fluids may require occasional pressure cleaning or mechanical cleaning of the inside of coil tubes. In such cases the coil must be designed to provide this capability.
Open / Closed System

The standard galvanised steel serpentine and coils are carbon steel, hot-dip galvanised on the outside only, and are intended for application on closed, pressurised systems which are not open to the atmosphere. Stainless steel coils or cleanable coil units (with tubes hot-dip galvanized inside and out) are available to cool corrosive fluids or water and ethylene/propylene glycol solutions in systems open to the atmosphere
Protection Against Coil Freezing

At below freezing ambient conditions, the unit can experience heat loss even without the recirculating spray water pump and fans in operation. Without a heat load on the circulating fluid,
CCCT - C 12
Overview
coil freezing can occur even at full flow. Protective means are readily available to avoid potential freeze problems. Where the system will permit, the best protection against coil freeze-up is the use of an industrially inhibited anti-freeze solution. When this is not possible, the system must be designed to meet both of the following conditions: 1. Maintain minimum recommended flow through the coil at all times, as per the table below: 2. Maintain a heat load on the circulating fluid so that the temperature of the fluid leaving the coil will not be below 7C. If the process load is extremely light, or if the process is periodically shut off entirely, then an auxiliary heat load must be applied to the circulating fluid when below freezing ambient temperatures exist to prevent damage to the coil. Refer to the Heat Loss Data table (see the product section for applicable heat loss data) for the auxiliary heat load requirement. The amount of auxiliary heat necessary to prevent coil freezing can be further reduced by the use of a positive closure damper hood and insulation. Draining the coil is not recommended as a normal method of freeze protection. However, draining is acceptable as an emergency method of freeze protection. Frequent draining can promote corrosion inside the coil tubes. If the coil is not protected by an industrially inhibited anti-freeze solution, an automatic drain valve and air vent is recommended to drain the coil if flow stops or fluid temperature drops below 7C when the ambient temperature is below freezing. Note that cold water basin heaters will not provide freeze protection for the coil. The coil of dry and adiabatic coolers can never drain completely. If a minimum heat load can not be guaranteed on the dry coil during the winter period, then the use of an anti-freeze solution is the only available protection against coil freezing.
Model VFL 24X - 48X VFL 72X - 96X VXI 9, 18, 27, 36 VXI 50 VXI 70 VXI 95, 145 VXI 144, 215 VXI 180 VXI 190, 290 VXI 288, 430 VXI 360 VXI 42X, 43X FXV 44X FXV Q44X FXV 5XX FXV Q5XX FXV 64X, 66X FXV Q6XX FXV D288X FXV D288XQ FXV 364X FXV 364XQ Minimum Flow (l/s) 4,1 7,9 3,5 5 7 8 13 11 16 26 22 3 5 10 6 12 7 14 18 36 18 36
Warranties
Please refer to the Limitation of Warranties applicable to and in effect at the time of the sale/ purchase of these products.
Baltimore Aircoil
VXI - C 13
VXI
Product Detail
VXI Closed Circuit Cooling Towers ...................................................... C14 Benefits ..................................................................................................... C16 Construction Details ................................................................................ C17 Custom Features and Options ................................................................ C19 Accessories ............................................................................................... C21 Engineering Data ..................................................................................... C23 Structural Support .................................................................................. C30 Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... C32
VXI - C 14
VXI Closed Circuit Cooling Towers

Capacity
Single Cell Capacity: From 1,5 to 200 l/s
VXI
General Description
VXI Closed Circuit Cooling Towers deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of flow and temperature requirements. The VXI can be installed indoors and can accommodate limited ceiling or enclosure heights. The VXI design minimizes sound levels and installation costs, provides year-round operating reliability, and simplifies maintenance requirements.
Key Features
z
Suitable for indoor and outdoor installations Suitable for high temperature applications Low sound Single side air inlet Low energy consumption Low installed cost Easy maintenance Reliable year-round operation Long service life
Baltimore Aircoil
VXI - C 15
VXI - C 16
Benefits
z
Indoor Installations Centrifugal fans can overcome the static pressure imposed by external ductwork, allowing these units to be installed indoors.
Low Sound
VXI
z z

z
Low Installed Cost

z
Easy Maintenance
z
Long Service Life

z

z
Baltimore Aircoil
VXI - C 17
Upper Section
Lower Section
VXI - C 18

z

z
VXI
3. Coil
z
Continuous serpentine, steel tubing Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF) Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid Designed for max. 10 bar operating pressure according to PED
z
5. Fan Drive System

z
z
Quiet Operation
7. Recirculating Spray Pump

z
Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor Bleed line with metering valve installed from pump discharge to overflow
8. Access Door
z
9. Strainer (not shown)

z
Baltimore Aircoil
VXI - C 19

z
Coil Configurations
z
Standard Serpentine Coil: The standard condensing coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF). Optional Extended Surface Coil: Coils are available with selected rows finned at 3 to 5 fins per inch for wet/dry applications. The coil is hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF). Optional Stainless Steel Coil: Coils are available in Type 304L or 316L stainless steel for specialized applications.
All coils are designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid.
Fan Drive System

Extended Surface Coil
Fan Drive System
VXI - C 20

VXI
Low Sound Operation


Baltimore Aircoil
VXI - C 21
Accessories
Basin Heaters
Units exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to prevent freezing of the water in the cold water basin when Electric Water Level Control Package the unit is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which maintain the water temperature at 4C, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection. The heater package includes the heaters, a thermostat and a low level cut out switch to protect the heaters if the water level is too low. Standard electric heaters are selected for -18C ambient temperature.
Model No. VXI VXI 9-X VXI 18-X VXI 27-X VXI 36-X VXI 50-X VXI 70-X VXI 95-X VXI 144-X VXI 145-X VXI 180-X VXI 190-X VXI 215-X VXI 288-X VXI 290-X VXI 360-X VXI 430-X Heaters -18C (kW) 1 x 1,5 1 x 1,5 1 x 2,5 1x3 1x4 1x6 1x6 2x4 2x4 2x5 2x6 2x6 4x4 4x4 4x5 4x6

VXI - C 22

Solid Bottom Panels

VXI
Ladder, Safety Cage and handrails

Discharge Hoods
Plume Abatement Coil

The use of plume abatement coils is recommended to reduce significantly the formation of visible plume during wet operation and extend the dry operation capability of the closed circuit cooling tower. The combination of Discharge Hood discharge air reheating and extended dry operation minimises plume formation during weather conditions with high relative humidities. Plume abatement coils are also an effective way to save water and water treatment costs.

Baltimore Aircoil
VXI - C 23
Engineering Data
VXI 9 - VXI 36
1. Drain ND50; 2. Outlet Connection ND80 for VXI 9-X and ND100 for VXI 18-X, VXI 27-X and VXI 36-X; 3. Overflow ND50; 4. Make Up ND25; 5. Inlet Connection ND80 for VXI 9-X and ND100 for VXI 18-X, VXI 27-X and VXI 36-X; 6. Vent ND15; 7. Access Door (not shown).
Model No. VXI VXI 9-1 VXI 9-2 VXI 9-3 VXI 18-0 VXI 18-1 VXI 18-2 VXI 18-3 VXI 27-1 VXI 27-2 VXI 27-3 VXI 36-2 VXI 36-3
Heaviest Section (kg) 660* 480 540 920* 1030* 700 860 1320* 1000 1200 1200 1440
Air Flow (m3/s) 2,3 2,2 2,5 4,6 5,0 4,8 5,5 7,6 6,8 7,1 10,4 10,9
Fan Motor (kW) (1x) 1,5 (1x) 1,5 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 4,0 (1x) 4,0 (1x) 4,0 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 7,5 (1x) 7,5 (1x) 11
Spray Water Flow (l/s) 2,2 2,2 2,2 4,7 4,7 4,7 4,7 7,3 7,3 7,3 9,5 9,5
Pump Motor (kW) (1x) 0,25 (1x) 0,25 (1x) 0,25 (1x) 0,37 (1x) 0,37 (1x) 0,37 (1x) 0,37 (1x) 0,75 (1x) 0,75 (1x) 0,75 (1x) 0,75 (1x) 0,75
Coil Volume (l) (1x) 75 (1x) 95 (1x) 115 (1x) 98 (1x) 140 (1x) 182 (1x) 224 (1x) 205 (1x) 269 (1x) 333 (1x) 356 (1x) 442
H (mm) 2245 2467 2683 2035 2245 2467 2683 2343 2578 2813 2578 2813
L (mm) 914 914 914 1829 1829 1829 1829 2737 2737 2737 3658 3658
W (mm) 1207 1207 1207 1207 1207 1207 1207 1207 1207 1207 1207 1207
* Indicates unit ships in one piece.
VXI - C 24
VXI 50 - VXI 70
VXI
1. Drain ND50; 2. Outlet Connection ND100; 3. Overflow ND 80; 4. Make Up ND25 for VXI 50-X and ND50 for VXI 70-X; 5. Inlet Connection ND100; 6. Vent ND 15; 7. Access Door.
Model No. VXI VXI 50-2 VXI 50-3 VXI 50-4 VXI 70-2 VXI 70-3 VXI 70-4
Operating Weight (kg) 3740 4280 4825 6490 7190 8075
Shipping Weight (kg) 2670 2950 3255 4250 4770 5315
Heaviest Section (kg) 1720 1980 2240 2630 3150 3665
Air Flow (m3/s) 14,6 15,7 16,9 20,8 22,9 22,2
Fan Motor (kW) (1x) 11 (1x) 11 (1x) 15 (1x) 15 (1x) 18,5 (1x) 18,5
Spray Water Flow (l/s) 13,9 13,9 13,9 19,2 19,2 19,2
Pump Motor (kW) (1x) 1,5 (1x) 1,5 (1x) 1,5 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2
Coil Volume (l) (1x) 515 (1x) 638 (1x) 762 (2x) 356 (2x) 442 (2x) 527
H (mm) 3093 3328 3563 3586 3821 4056
L (mm) 3645 3645 3645 3550 3550 3550
W (mm) 1438 1438 1438 2397 2397 2397
VXI 95 - VXI 290
1. Drain ND50 (not shown); 2. Outlet Connection ND100; 3. Overflow ND80; 4. Make Up ND50; 5. Inlet Connection ND100; 6. Vent ND15; 7. Access Door.
Baltimore Aircoil
VXI - C 25
Model
Shipping Weight (kg) 4990 5630 6180 6300 7280 8175 9260 9820 11100 12305 12680 14570 16550 18505
Heaviest Section (kg) 3200 3850 4470 3780 4715 5710 6690 3390* 3840 4470 5120* 5120* 5710 6690
Air Flow (m3/s) 27,6 26,7 26,2 39,9 38,6 37,5 36,6 55,4 53,4 52,5 79,5 77,8 75,0 73,1
Fan Motor (kW) (1x) 30 (1x) 30 (1x) 30 (1x) 37 (1x) 37 (1x) 37 (1x) 37 (2x) 30 (2x) 30 (2x) 30 (2x) 37 (2x) 37 (2x) 37 (2x) 37
Spray Water Flow (l/s) 25,2 25,2 25,2 38,5 38,5 38,5 38,5 50,4 50,4 50,4 77,0 77,0 77,0 77,0
Pump Motor (kW) (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (2x) 2,2 (2x) 2,2 (2x) 2,2 (2x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4
Coil Volume (l) (2x) 448 (2x) 556 (2x) 664 (2x) 506 (2x) 669 (2x) 832 (2x) 995 (4x) 448 (4x) 556 (4x) 664 (4x) 506 (4x) 669 (4x) 832 (4x) 995
H (mm) 4013 4248 4483 3778 4013 4248 4483 4013 4248 4483 3778 4013 4248 4483
L (mm) 3550 3550 3550 5385 5385 5385 5385 7226 7226 7226 10903 10903 10903 10903
W (mm) 2397 2397 2397 2397 2397 2397 2397
VXI 95-2 VXI 95-3 VXI 95-4 VXI 145-1 VXI 145-2 VXI 145-3 VXI 145-4 VXI 190-2 VXI 190-3 VXI 190-4 VXI 290-1 VXI 290-2 VXI 290-3 VXI 290-4
2397 2397 2397 2397 2397 2397 2397
* Pan section is heaviest section.
VXI 180 - VXI 360
1. Drain ND50; 2. Outlet Connection ND100; 3. Overflow ND80; 4. Make Up ND50 for VXI 180-X and ND80 for VXI 360-X; 5. Inlet Connection ND100; 6. Vent ND15; 7. Access Door.
Model
Operating Weight (kg) 12970 14590 16250 25840 29090 32500
Shipping Weight (kg) 8990 10200 11530 17940 20380 23100
Heaviest Section (kg) 5810 7010 8200 5810 7010 8200
Air Flow (m3/s) 51,4 50,0 52,0 102,9 100,1 104,0
Fan Motor (kW) (2x) 18,5 (2x) 18,5 (2x) 22,0 (4x) 18,5 (4x) 18,5 (4x) 22,0
Pump Motor (kW) (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4
Coil Volume (l) (2x) 847 (2x) 1052 (2x) 1258 (4x) 847 (4x) 1052 (4x) 1258
H (mm) 4075 4310 4545 4075 4310 4545
L (mm) 5388 5388 5388 10903 10903 10903
W (mm) 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
VXI 180-2 VXI 180-3 VXI 180-4 VXI 360-2 VXI 360-3 VXI 360-4
VXI - C 26
VXI 144 - VXI 430
VXI
1. Drain ND50; 2. Outlet Connection ND100. 3. Overflow ND80; 4. Make Up ND50 for VXI 144-X, VXI 215-X, VXI 288-X and ND80 for VXI 430-X; 5. Inlet Connection ND 100; 6. Vent ND15; 7. Access Door.
Model
Heaviest Section (kg) 4680 5610 6550 5510 6900 8310 9710 5280* 5610 6550 7210* 7210* 8300 9710
Air Flow (m3/s) 38,6 40,2 39,4 59,4 57,9 62,3 60,4 77,3 80,0 78,8 119,2 115,9 124,6 120,7
Fan Motor (kW) (1x) 30 (1x) 37 (1x) 37 (2x) 22 (2x) 22 (2x) 30 (2x) 30 (2x) 30 (2x) 37 (2x) 37 (4x) 22 (4x) 22 (4x) 30 (4x) 30
Pump Motor (kW) (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4
Coil Volume (l) (2x) 686 (2x) 851 (2x) 1015 (2x) 774 (2x) 1024 (2x) 1272 (2x) 1521 (4x) 686 (4x) 851 (4x) 1015 (4x) 774 (4x) 1024 (4x) 1272 (4x) 1521
H (mm) 4075 4310 4545 3840 4075 4310 4545 4075 4310 4545 3840 4075 4310 4545
L (mm) 3550 3550 3550 5388 5388 5388 5388 7226 7226 7226 10903 10903 10903 10903
W (mm) 3607 3607 3607 3607 3607 3607 3607 3607 3607 3607 3607 3607 3607 3607
VXI 144-2 VXI 144-3 VXI 144-4 VXI 215-1 VXI 215-2 VXI 215-3 VXI 215-4 VXI 288-2 VXI 288-3 VXI 288-4 VXI 430-1 VXI 430-2 VXI 430-3 VXI 430-4
* Pan section is heaviest section.
General Notes
1. Make up, overflow, suction, drain connections and access door can be provided on side opposite to that shown; consult your BAC Balticare representative. 2. Unit height is indicative, for precise value refer to certified print. 3. Shipping/operating weights indicated are for units without accessories such as sound attenuators, discharge hoods, etc. Consult factory certified prints to obtain weight additions and the heaviest section to be lifted. 4. The standard right hand arrangement as shown has the air inlet side on the right when facing the connection end (for double pump units there is no difference between right and left hand arrangement; make-up connection only at one side). Left hand can be furnished by special order. Water connections are always located on the same end of the unit. 5. For indoor applications of closed circuit cooling towers, the room may be used as a plenum with ductwork attached to the discharge only. If inlet ductwork is required, an enclosed fan section must be specified; consult your BAC Balticare representative for details. 6. Fan kW is at 0 Pa ESP. To operate against external static pressure up to 125 Pa, increase each fan motor one size. 7. On models VXI 9 to VXI 36 access doors are located at the opposite of the air inlet side, ensure sufficient space for entry when positioning these units. 8. Coil, overflow, make-up and spray water connections are always located on the same end of the unit.
Baltimore Aircoil
VXI - C 27
9. When flow rate on model VXI 50 exceeds 30 l/s, on models VXI 144, 180, 215 exceeds 60 l/s and on models VXI 288, 360 and 430 exceeds 120 l/s, the quantity of coil connections will be double. 10. Models VXI 9 through VXI 70 have one coil section and one fan motor, which can be switched on and off. Multiple speed motors are available for additional steps of capacity control. Modulating capacity control can be obtained with fan discharge dampers. Consult your local BAC Balticare representative for details. 11. For dry operation, standard motors must be increased one size to avoid motor overloading. Extended surface coils are available to vastly increase dry capacity without motor size increase. Consult your local BAC Balticare representative for selection and pricing. 12. Models VXI 95, 144, 145, 180 and 215 are single side coil connection units. For these models coil, overflow, make-up and spray water connections are always located on the same end of the unit. Models can be supplied as standard in right hand arrangement as shown. Left-hand arrangement can be supplied on special order. Fan cycling of these models result in only on-off operation. 13. Models VXI 190, 290, 288, 360 and 430 are double side coil units. Coil, overflow and spray water connections are provided on both ends.
Sound Attenuation
Unit + Atten. # pieces shipped Dimensions (mm) W2 H1 W1 L1 L2 Intake + solid bottom XA 902 1816 2731 3645 3645 3645 3645 5480 140 225 300 400 500 690 690 XB 160 270 370 470 XC N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. Weights (kg) Discharge XA 130 175 280 360 XB 150 220 350 420 XC N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. XA 270 400 580 760 Total XB 310 490 720 890 XC N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
VXI
# Access doors (2) XA, XB, XC
XA, XB, XC Disch. Att. Int. Att. XA, XB XC 9-X 18-X 27-X 36-X 50-X 70-X 95-X 145-X 190-X 290-X 180-X 360-X 144-X 215-X 288-X 430-X 4(1) 4(1) 4 4 4 4 4 4 7 7 4 7 4 4 7 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 4 2 4 1 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2352 2352 2352 2352 2583 3542 3542 3542 3542 3542 4145 4145 4752 4752 4752 4752
XA, XB, XC 914
N.A. 1090 1030
N.A. 1090 1030 1829 N.A. 1090 1030 2737 N.A. 1090 1030 3658 3728 1600 1420 3645 4687 2070 1955 3550 4687 2070 2365 3550 4687 2070 2365 5385 4687 2070 2365 7226
600 1200 440 820 1610 530 820 1610 660
520 1070 940 1120 2270 650 1330 1220 1470 2940 800 1640 1350 1620 3250
960 1160 2270 830 1090 2240 1790 2250 4510
7322 1380 1640 3220 1320 1600 3280 2700 3240 6500
4687 2070 2365 10903 10998 1920 2320 4540 1660 2180 4480 3580 4500 9020 5290 2560 2965 5388 5480 1080 1330 2590 900 1210 2490 1980 2540 5080
5290 2560 2965 10903 10994 2160 2660 5180 1800 2420 4980 3960 5080 10160 5897 2560 3575 3550 5897 2560 3575 5388 5897 2560 3575 7226 3645 840 990 1900 810 1030 2130 1650 2020 4030
5480 1150 1400 2660 1020 1410 2920 2170 2810 5580 7322 1680 1980 3800 1620 2060 4260 3300 4040 8060
5897 2560 3575 10903 10994 2300 2800 5320 2040 2820 5840 4340 5620 11160
(1) (2) (2)
VXI 9-1, VXI 18-0 and VXI 18-1 + Attenuator are shipped in 3 pieces Intake Attenuator: Access opening is 775 mm high, 405 mm wide and is located at each end of the unit.
Discharge Attenuator : Access opening is 405 mm high, 1170 mm wide and is located at blank off side of the unit (VXI-9-X has 650 mm width)
VXI - C 28
XA + XB Sound Attenuation
VXI
1. Access Door; L= Unit Length; W= Unit Width; H.= Unit Height (see Engineering Data).
XC Sound Attenuation
Baltimore Aircoil
VXI - C 29
Heat Loss Data

Model No. VXI 9-1 9-2 9-3 18-0 18-1 18-2 18-3 27-1 27-2 27-3 36-2 36-3 50-2 50-3 50-4 70-2 70-3 70-4 95-2 95-3 95-4 144-2 144-3 144-4 145-1 145-2 145-3 145-4 180-2 180-3 180-4 190-2 190-3 190-4 215-1 215-2 215-3 215-4 288-2 288-3 288-4 290-1 290-2 290-3 290-4 360-2 360-3 360-4 430-1 430-2 430-3 430-4 Heatloss Data (kW) (1) Standard Unit 5,1 6,2 6,9 7,3 9,7 11,8 13,6 15,1 18,2 20,6 23,8 27,2 32,7 37,4 42,1 44,8 50,9 57,0 74,3 84,0 93,7 112,8 127,6 141,6 95,6 111,8 126,0 140,2 101,7 114,9 128,1 149,4 168,9 188,4 142,6 169,9 191,5 212,0 222,0 248,9 276,3 187,2 223,6 252,0 280,4 200,4 227,1 253,8 280,9 334,8 377,3 418,8 Unit with Hood and PCD's 3,6 4,0 4,3 5,4 5,8 6,1 6,5 9,0 9,7 10,4 13,3 14,1 16,9 17,7 18,5 17,7 18,4 19,1 27,2 28,6 30,0 25,9 26,4 27,7 35,8 37,6 39,5 41,5 34,0 35,5 37,0 63,7 66,9 70.2 54,1 56,8 59,7 62,7 76,3 80,1 84,1 71,6 75,2 78,9 82,7 68,5 71,0 73,5 108,8 114,3 120,0 126,0
(1) Heat loss data based on 10C water and -14C ambient temperature with 20 m/s wind velocity (fans and pump off)
Remote Sump Data

VXI - C 30
Structural Support
VXI
1. Outline of Unit; 2. Mounting holes 22 mm, 3. Unit; 4. Air Intake.
Notes:
Baltimore Aircoil
VXI - C 31
1. Outline of Unit; 2. Mounting Holes 22 mm; 3. Outline of attenuator (optional XA or XB);4. Support Channel attached to optional XA or XB attenuator; 5.+3. Outline of Attenuator (optional XC); 6.+4. Support Channels attached to optional XC attenuator; 7. Unit; 8. Sound Attenuator; 9. Air Intake.
Model
A Unit Length (mm) 914 1829 2737 3658 3645 3550 3550 5385 7226 10903 5388 10903 3550 5388 7226 10903
B Unit width (mm) 1207 1207 1207 1207 1438 2397 2397 2397 2397 2397 3000 3000 3607 3607 3607 3607
C D Center dis. Center dis. Length Width (mm) (mm) 750 1664 2572 3492 3492 3238 3238 5074 6914 10586 5074 10586 3238 5074 6914 10586 1153 1153 1153 1153 1378 2397 2327 2327 2327 2327 2934 2934 3537 3537 3537 3537
E (mm) 2486 3238 2486 2486 2486 2486 3238 2486
F (mm) 102 438 102 102 102 102 438 102
G (mm) 438 438 438
X Max. Deflection (mm) 2 5 8 10 10 10 10 13 13 13 13 13 10 13 13 13
Mounting holes 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 16 8 16 4 8 8 16
9-X 18-X 27-X 36-X 50-X 70-X 95-X 145-X 190-X 290-X 180-X 360-X 144-X 215-X 288-X 430-X
VXI - C 32
1.0 Closed Circuit Cooling Tower
1.0 General: Furnish and install ____factory assembled, forced draft, centrifugal fan, closed circuit cooling tower(s) with vertical air discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications and schedules as shown on the plans. Overall dimensions shall not exceed approximately ____mm long x ____mm wide x ____ mm high. The total connected fan kW shall not exceed ____kW. The total connected pump kW shall not exceed ____kW. The closed circuit cooling tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Company Model(s) ________________. 1.2. Thermal Capacity (water as heat transfer fluid): The closedcircuit cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to cool ______l/s of _______ water from ____C to ____C at ____C entering wet-bulb temperature. (Alternate1.2.) Thermal Capacity (aqueous glycol solution as heat transfer fluid): The closed circuit cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to cool ________l/s of _____% by volume ethylene/propylene glycol solution from ______C to _____C at _____C entering wet-bulb temperature. Coil pressure drop shall not exceed ________bar. 1.3. Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel, with all sheared edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound and the exterior protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection. (Alternate1.3.) Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, and dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program. 1.4. Quality Assurance: The closed circuit cooling tower manufacturer shall have a management system certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of its products and services. 1.5. Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of startup or eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
VXI

2.1.Tower Structure: The closed circuit cooling tower shall be constructed of heavy-gauge steel utilizing double-brake flanges for maximum strength and rigidity and reliable sealing of water-tight joints. All sheared edges shall be protected with a coating of zinc-rich compound. 2.2. Casing Assembly: The closed circuit cooling tower shall include a coil casing section consisting of a serpentine coil, spray water distribution system, and drift eliminators, as indicated by the manufacturer. Plastic drift eliminators shall be removable in easily handled sections. They shall incorporate a minimum of three changes in air direction. 2.3. Coil Assembly: The cooling coil shall be fabricated of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel at the manufacturers own facility, and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. The cooling coil shall be pneumatically tested at 15 bar. The cooling coil shall be designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid and shall be compliant to PED. Maximum allowable working pressure shall be 10 bar. 2.4. Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed evenly over the coil at a minimum flow rate of 3,1 l/s/m to ensure complete wetting of the coil at all times by large-diameter, non-clog, plastic 360 distribution nozzles, spaced across the coil face area in PVC spray branches by snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of individual nozzles or complete branches for cleaning or flushing. Nozzles shall utilize a two-stage diffusion pattern to provide overlapping, umbrella spray patterns that create multiple intersection points with adjacent nozzles. 2.5. Spray Pump System: The closed circuit cooling tower shall include a close-coupled, bronze-fitted centrifugal pump equipped with a mechanical seal, mounted on the basin and piped to the suction strainer and water distribution system. It shall be installed so that it can be drained when the basin is drained. The pump assembly shall include a metering valve and bleed line to control the bleed rate from the pump discharge to the overflow connection. The pump motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type with IP 55 protection and class B insulation suitable for outdoor service, _____ kW, _______Volt, ________Hz, ______Phase. (Alternate 2.5.) Spray Pump System-Remote Sump: On installations requiring a remote sump, the closed circuit cooling tower shall be modified to accommodate the use of an independent basin and pump (both by others) for recirculating water. 2.6. Basin Assembly: The combination basin/fan section shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 galvanized steel. The basin shall be provided with large area lift out strainers with perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution nozzles and an anti-vortexing device to prevent air entrainment. The strainer and vortex device shall be constructed of the same material as the cold water basin to prevent dissimilar metal corrosion.

3.1. Fan System: The fans and motors shall be factory installed at the base of the unit in the dry entering air stream to provide greater reliability and ease of maintenance. The forwardly curved centrifugal fans shall be heavy-duty centrifugal flow types. Fan housings shall have curved inlet rings for efficient air entry and rectangular discharge cowls shall extend into the basin to increase fan efficiency and prevent water from entering the fans. Fans shall be mounted on a steel fan shaft supported by heavy-duty self-aligning, relubricatable ball bearings with cast iron housings and designed for a minimum L10 life of 40 000 hours (280 000 hrs average life). The fan shaft shall be protected with a two-part epoxy coating for corrosion protection. 3.2. Fan Motor/Drive System: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC), IP-55, class F, selected for _____Pa static pressure. Fan motor(s) shall be suitable for _____ volts, ____ phase, ____ Hz electrical service and shall be mounted on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor base. V-belt drives and all moving parts are protected with removable screens. (Alternate 3.2.) Baltiguard Fan System: Two single speed fan motors, one sized for full speed and load, the other sized for 2/3 speed and approximately 1/3 of full load kW shall be provided in each cell for capacity control and standby protection from drive or motor failure. Two-speed motor(s) is not an acceptable alternative.
Baltimore Aircoil
VXI - C 33

5.0 Access
6.0 Sound
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
8000
dB(A)
VXI - C 34
VXI
Baltimore Aircoil
VFL - C 35
Product Detail
VFL Closed Circuit Cooling Tower ....................................................... C36 Benefits ..................................................................................................... C38 Construction Details ................................................................................ C40 Custom Features and Options ................................................................ C41 Accessories ............................................................................................... C43 Engineering Data ..................................................................................... C45 Structural Support .................................................................................. C50 Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... C51
VFL - C 36
VFL Closed Circuit Cooling Tower

Capacity
Single Model Capacity: 1 to 65 l/s
General Description
VFL Closed Circuit Cooling Towers deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of flow and temperature requirements. The VFL can be installed indoors and minimize sound levels, and are available to accommodate limited ceiling or enclosure heights. The VFL design minimizes installation costs, provides year-round operating reliability, and simplifies maintenance requirements.
Key Features
Suitable for indoor and outdoor installations Suitable for high temperature applications Suitable for locations with limited ceiling or enclosure heights and roof top installations Low sound Single side air inlet Low energy consumption Low installed cost Easy maintenance Reliable year-round operation Long service life
Baltimore Aircoil
VFL - C 37
VFL - C 38
Benefits
Indoor Installations Centrifugal fans can overcome the static pressure imposed by external ductwork, allowing this type of cooling towers to be installed indoors. Low Profile Models The fan section of low profile units is adjacent to the casing section to yield models suitable for use in height sensitive installations. Low profile models are available in heights of 1855 mm up to 2560 mm.
Low Sound
Centrifugal Fan - Centrifugal fans have inherently low sound characteristics.
Single Side Air Inlet - Particularly sound-sensitive areas can be accommodated by facing the quiet side (back panel) to the sound-sensitive direction.

Low Installed Cost

Easy Maintenance
Modular Design
Baltimore Aircoil
VFL - C 39

V-Belt Drive The fans, motor, and drive system are located outside of the moist discharge airstream, protecting them from moisture, condensation and icing hence allowing a safe year-round operation.
Long Service Life

V-Belt Drive System
VFL - C 40

Assembled in easy to handle sections, which can be removed for access to the equipment interior

5. Fan Drive System

Quiet Operation
3. Coil
Continuous serpentine, steel tubing Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF) Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid Designed for max. 10 bar operating pressure according to PED

UV resistant non-corrosive material, impervious to rot, decay and biological attack Three distinct changes in air direction to reduce drift loss significantly
8. Access Door
9. Strainer (Not Shown)

Baltimore Aircoil
VFL - C 41

Standard Construction: Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized steel protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection on the outside of the unit. Optional BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System: The BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend equipment life, is applied before assembly to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the unit.
Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin
Optional Stainless Steel Construction: Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of stainless steel either type 304 or 316. Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin: A cost-effective alternative to an all stainless steel unit. The critical components in the cold water basin and the cold water basin itself are provided in stainless steel. The remaining components are protected with the BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System.
Coil Configurations
Standard Serpentine Coil: The standard condensing coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF). Optional Extended Surface Coil: Coils are available with selected rows finned at 3 to 5 fins per inch for wet/dry applications. The coil is hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF). Optional Stainless Steel Coil: Coils are available in Type 304L or 316L stainless steel for specialized applications. All coils are designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid.
Fan Drive System

VFL - C 42

Low Sound Operation

The low sound levels generated by BAC Products with centrifugal fans make them suitable for most installations. For situations when one direction is particularly sound sensitive, the unit can be oriented so that the side opposite the air inlet faces the soundsensitive direction. Units with centrifugal fans are also available with factory designed, tested and rated sound attenuation for both the air inlet and discharge.
Sound Attenuation at Air Inlet and Discharge

Baltimore Aircoil
VFL - C 43
Accessories

Basin Heaters
Model No. VFL VFL 24X VFL 36X VFL 48X VFL 72X VFL 96X Heaters -18C (kW) 1x3 1x4 1x5 2x4 2x5

The use of plume abatement coils is recommended to reduce significantly the formation of visible plume during wet operation and extend the dry operation capability of the closed circuit cooling tower. The combination of discharge air reheating and extended dry operation minimises plume formation during weather conditions with high relative humidities. Plume abatement coils are also an effective way to save water and water treatment costs.
VFL - C 44

Solid Bottom Panels

Discharge Hoods
Discharge Hoods with Positive Closure Dampers

BAC offers a full line of standard discharge hoods with and without positive closure dampers that are built, tested, and rated specifically for all Series V Closed Circuit Cooling Towers. The tapered hoods are designed to increase the discharge air velocity to avoid recirculation in extremely tight enclosures. Straight or tapered hoods can be used to elevate the unit discharge above adjacent walls. A larger fanmotor may be necessary when this option is provided. For details of hoods furnished with positive closure dampers see section Engineering Data Heat Loss Data.
Positive Closure Damper Section
Baltimore Aircoil
VFL - C 45
Engineering Data
VFL 24 X - VFL 48 X
1. Fluid in ND100; 2. Fluid Out ND100; 3.Access Door; 4. Make Up ND25; 5. Overflow ND50 for VFL 24X - VFL 36x and ND80 for VFL 48X; 6. Drain ND50; 7. Vent ND15.
Model No. VFL VFL 241-H VFL 242-H VFL 242-J VFL 243-J VFL 361-L VFL 361-M VFL 362-M VFL 363-K VFL 363-M VFL 481-M VFL 482-L VFL 483-L VFL 483-M VFL 484-M
Heaviest Section (kg) 1280 1460 1490 1670 1810 1820 2090 2280 2350 2170 2490 2830 2840 3170
Air Flow (m/s) 7,6 7,4 8,1 7,9 12,7 13,8 13,4 10,8 13,0 15,1 13,6 13,4 14,6 14,3
Fan Motor (kW) 4 4 5,5 5,5 11 15 15 7,5 15 15 11 11 15 15
Pump Motor (kW) 0,55 0,55 0,55 0,55 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 1,1 1,1 1,1 1,1 1,1
Coil Volume (L) (1x) 176 (1x) 229 (1x) 229 (1x) 282 (1x) 258 (1x) 258 (1x) 338 (1x) 418 (1x) 418 (1x) 341 (1x) 448 (1x) 556 (1x) 556 (1x) 664
H (mm) 1855 2015 2015 2230 1855 1855 2090 2350 2350 1855 2090 2350 2350 2560
L (mm) 3350 3350 3350 3350 4560 4560 4560 4560 4560 5480 5480 5480 5480 5480
W (mm) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
VFL - C 46
VFL 72 X - VFL 96 X
1. Fluid in ND100; 2. Fluid Out ND100; 3.Access Door; 4. Make Up ND50; 5. Overflow ND80; 6. Drain ND50; 7. Vent ND15.
Model No. VFL VFL 721-L VFL 721-M VFL 721-O VFL 722-N VFL 722-O VFL 723-L VFL 723-O VFL 724-O VFL 961-P VFL 962-N VFL 962-O VFL 962-P VFL 963-O VFL 963-P VFL 964-P
Operating Weight (kg) 5150 5160 5190 5880 5900 6610 6650 7320 6520 7285 7310 7400 8210 8310 9300
Shipping Weight (kg) 3150 3160 3190 3700 3720 4210 4250 4790 3850 4360 4400 4500 5060 5160 5810
Heaviest Section (kg) 3150 3160 3190 3700 3720 4210 4250 4790 3850 4360 4400 4500 5080 5160 5810
Air Flow (m/s) 20,0 21,8 24,6 22,8 24,0 19,3 23,4 22,9 28,7 24,5 25,9 28,3 25,6 27,9 27,4
Fan Motor (kW) 11 15 22 18,5 22 11 22 22 30 18,5 22 30 22 30 30
Spray Water Flow (l/s) 17,9 17,9 17,9 17,9 17,9 17,9 17,9 17,9 24,2 24,2 24,2 24,2 24,2 24,2 24,2
Pump Motor (kW) 1,1 1,1 1,1 1,1 1,1 1,1 1,1 1,1 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2
Coil Volume (L) (2x) 258 (2x) 258 (2x) 258 (2x) 338 (2x) 338 (2x) 418 (2x) 418 (2x) 498 (2x) 341 (2x) 448 (2x) 448 (2x) 448 (2x) 556 (2x) 556 (2x) 664
H (mm) 1855 1855 1855 2090 2090 2350 2350 2560 1855 2090 2090 2090 2350 2350 2560
L (mm) 4560 4560 4560 4560 4560 4560 4560 4560 5480 5480 5480 5480 5480 5480 5480
W (mm) 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400
General Notes
1. All location dimensions for coil connections are approximate and should not be used for prefabrication of connecting piping. 2. If discharge hoods with positive closure dampers are furnished, see table in section Engineering Data Straight Discharge Hood with PCD for added weight and height. 3. For external static pressure up to 125 Pa use next larger motor size. 4. For indoor applications of fluid coolers, the room may be used as a plenum with ductwork attached to the discharge only. If inlet ductwork is required, an enclosed fan section must be specified; consult your BAC Balticare representative for details. 5. Fan cycling results only in on-off operation. For additional steps of control, two-speed fan motors are available. More precise capacity control can be obtained with modulation fan discharge dampers or a BALTIGUARD Drive System 6. Make up, overflow, suction, drain connections and access door can be provided on side opposite to that shown; consult your BAC Balticare representative. 7. Shipping/operating weights indicated are for units without accessories such as sound attenuators, discharge hoods, plume abatement coils, etc. Consult factory certified prints to obtain weight additions and the heaviest section to be lifted.
Baltimore Aircoil
VFL - C 47
Sound Attenuation
1.Discharge attenuator, 2. Access Door, 3. Intake Attenuator; W & H = Unit Dimensions (See Engineering Data).
VFL - C 48
1.Discharge attenuator, 2. Access Door, 3. Intake Attenuator, 4. Plenum; W & H = Unit Dimensions (See Engineering Data).
Dimensions (mm) Model No VFL HS VFL 24X VFL 36X VFL 48X VFL 72X VFL 96X 2390 2640 2640 2640 2640 L2 HD 3125 3375 3375 3375 3375 VS 2010 2010 2010 2010 2010 L1 HS,HD,VS 1820 2730 3650 2730 3650 Intake Attenuator + Solid Bottom HS 430 465 465 665 665 HD 625 660 660 980 980 VS 548 541 566 756 761
Maximum Weight (kg) Discharge Attenuator HS 210 295 365 465 565 HD 230 315 385 500 605 VS 192 264 334 419 529 HS 640 760 830 1130 1230 Total HD 855 975 1045 1480 1585 VS 740 805 900 1175 1290
Note: All units with HS or VS attenuators ship in 2 pieces. All units with HD attenuators ship in 3 pieces.
Baltimore Aircoil
VFL - C 49
Heat Loss Data

Discharge Hoods with Positive Closure Dampers (PCDs)
1. Access Door.
Heat Loss Data (kW) (1) Model No. VFL VFL 241-H VFL 242-H VFL 242-J VFL 243-J VFL 361-L VFL 361-M VFL 362-M VFL 363-K VFL 363-M VFL 481-M VFL 482-L VFL 483-L VFL 483-M VFL 484-M VFL 721-L VFL 721-M VFL 721-O VFL 722-N VFL 722-O VFL 723-L VFL 723-O VFL 724-O VFL 961-P VFL 962-N VFL 962-O VFL 962-P VFL 963-O VFL 963-P VFL 964-P Standard Unit 10,6 12,7 12,7 14,4 16,0 16,0 19,1 21,6 21,6 23,0 27,2 30,5 30,5 33,8 40,1 40,1 40,1 46,4 46,4 51,5 51,5 56,6 47,9 56,3 56,3 56,3 63,0 63,0 69,7 Unit with Discharge Hood and PCDs 6,3 6,7 6,7 7,1 9,8 9,8 10,4 11,0 11,0 13,8 14,5 15,2 15,2 15,9 17,8 17,8 17,8 18,6 18,6 19,3 19,3 20,0 20,1 21,0 21,0 21,0 21,9 21,9 23,8 L W H
1820
1200
865
2730
1200
865
3650
1200
865
2730
2400
865
3650
2400
865
(1) Heat loss data based on 10C water and 14C ambient temperature with 20 m/s wind velocity (fans and pump off).
Remote Sump Data

VFL - C 50
Structural Support

Model No. VFL VFL 24X VFL 36X VFL 48X VFL 72X VFL 96X A (mm) 2426 3334 4255 3334 4255 B (mm) 1193 1193 1193 2343 2343 Maximum Allowable Beam Deflection (mm) 10 13 13 13 13
1. Outline of Unit, 2. Support Beams, 3. Fan Side, 4. Mounting Holes 22 mm.
Notes:
Baltimore Aircoil
VFL - C 51
1.0 General: Furnish and install ____factory assembled, forced draft, centrifugal fan, closed circuit cooling tower(s) with vertical air discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications and schedules as shown on the plans. Overall dimensions shall not exceed approximately ____mm long x ____mm wide x ____ mm high. The total connected fan kW shall not exceed ____kW. The total connected pump kW shall not exceed ____kW. The closed circuit cooling tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Company Model(s) ________________. 1.2. Thermal Capacity (water as heat transfer fluid): The closedcircuit cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to cool ______l/s of _______ water from ____C to ____C at ____C entering wet-bulb temperature. (Alternate1.2.) Thermal Capacity (aqueous glycol solution as heat transfer fluid): The closed circuit cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to cool ________l/s of _____% by volume ethylene/propylene glycol solution from ______C to _____C at _____C entering wet-bulb temperature. Coil pressure drop shall not exceed ________bar. 1.3. Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel, with all sheared edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound and the exterior protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection. (Alternate1.3.) Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, and dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program. 1.4. Quality Assurance: The closed circuit cooling tower manufacturer shall have a management system certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of its products and services. 1.5. Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of startup or eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.

2.1.Tower Structure: The closed circuit cooling tower shall be constructed of heavy-gauge steel utilizing double-brake flanges for maximum strength and rigidity and reliable sealing of water-tight joints. All sheared edges shall be protected with a coating of zinc-rich compound. 2.2. Casing Assembly: The closed circuit cooling tower shall include a coil casing section consisting of a serpentine coil, spray water distribution system, and drift eliminators, as indicated by the manufacturer. Plastic drift eliminators shall be removable in easily handled sections. They shall incorporate a minimum of three changes in air direction. 2.3. Coil Assembly: The cooling coil shall be fabricated of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel at the manufacturers own facility, and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. The cooling coil shall be pneumatically tested at 15 bar. The cooling coil shall be designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid and shall be compliant to PED. Maximum allowable working pressure shall be 10 bar. 2.4. Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed evenly over the coil at a minimum flow rate of 3,1 l/s/m to ensure complete wetting of the coil at all times by large-diameter, non-clog, plastic 360 distribution nozzles, spaced across the coil face area in PVC spray branches by snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of individual nozzles or complete branches for cleaning or flushing. Nozzles shall utilize a two-stage diffusion pattern to provide overlapping, umbrella spray patterns that create multiple intersection points with adjacent nozzles. 2.5. Spray Pump System: The closed circuit cooling tower shall include a close-coupled, bronze-fitted centrifugal pump equipped with a mechanical seal, mounted on the basin and piped to the suction strainer and water distribution system. It shall be installed so that it can be drained when the basin is drained. The pump assembly shall include a metering valve and bleed line to control the bleed rate from the pump discharge to the overflow connection. The pump motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type with IP 55 protection and class B insulation suitable for outdoor service, _____ kW, _______Volt, ________Hz, ______Phase. (Alternate 2.5.) Spray Pump System-Remote Sump: On installations requiring a remote sump, the closed circuit cooling tower shall be modified to accommodate the use of an independent basin and pump (both by others) for recirculating water. 2.6. Basin Assembly: The combination basin/fan section shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 galvanized steel. The basin shall be provided with large area lift out strainers with perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution nozzles and an anti-vortexing device to prevent air entrainment. The strainer and vortex device shall be constructed of the same material as the cold water basin to prevent dissimilar metal corrosion.

VFL - C 52

5.0 Access
6.0 Sound
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
8000
dB(A)
Baltimore Aircoil
FXV - C 53
FXV
Product Detail
FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Tower ....................................................... C54 Benefits ..................................................................................................... C56 Construction Details ................................................................................ C58 Custom Features and Options ................................................................ C60 Accessories ............................................................................................... C62 Engineering Data FXV Models .............................................................. C65 Structural Support FXV Models ............................................................ C70 Engineering Data FXV-D Models .......................................................... C71 Structural Support FXV-D Models ........................................................ C74 Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... C75
FXV - C 54
FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Tower

Capacity
Single Cell Capacity: FXV: 3-149 l/s FXV-D: up to 300 l/s
FXV
General Description
FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of flow and temperature requirements. Standard design features satisfy todays environmental concerns, minimize installation costs, maximize year-round operating reliability, and simplify maintenance requirements.
Key Features
z
Low Energy Consumption Low installed cost Easy maintenance Application flexibility Reliable year-round operation Long service life
Baltimore Aircoil
FXV - C 55
FXV - C 56
Benefits
z
Evaporative Cooling Equipment minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system because it provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving natural resources and reducing environmental impact. FXV provides heat rejection at the lowest possible energy input and maintenance requirements via: - High efficiency, low kW axial fans - Closed loop cooling, which minimizes process fouling - Patented combined flow technology, which reduces evaporation directly off the coil, minimizing the potential for scaling and fouling - Parallel flow of air and spray water, which eliminates scale-promoting dry spots - Multiple Fan Motor System: independent fan motor and drive assembly per fan, which allows for extra steps of capacity control.
FXV
z z z z z
Low Installed Cost

Support All models mount directly on parallel I-beams and ship complete with motors and drives factory-installed and aligned. Modular Design Units ship in multiple sections to minimize the size and weight of the heaviest lift, allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes.
Easy Maintenance
Access - Hinged access doors provide easy access to the unit interior. In addition, all FXV models are provided with an internal walkway as standard. An internal walkway is available as an option on FXV-D models. Spacious Interior Provides easy access to the cold water basin, drift eliminators, fan drive system and heat transfer coil. Access to Spray Distribution Parallel flow of air and spray water over the coil allows for inspection and access to the top of the coil during full operation.
Easy Access to Coil Section
Baltimore Aircoil
FXV - C 57
Oversized, hinged access door
Spray Distribution System
Application Flexibility
z
Difficult thermal duties - The combined flow design is ideal for applications requiring a close approach and/or large range. Replacement applications Single air inlet models are designed to mount directly on existing support steel of both crossflow and counterflow units. Highest capacity in the industry FXV-D models offer the highest single cell capacity of any evaporative closed circuit cooling tower in the industry. Projects benefit from fewer required cells, lower overall fan kW, and fewer piping connections.

z
Long Service Life

z
FXV - C 58
FXV Models
FXV
z Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel panels
z Plastic material z Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack z Designed and manufactured by BAC
2. Fan Drive System

z Premium quality belts z Corrosion resistant sheaves z Heavy-duty bearings z Adapted fan motor for operation in saturated conditions. z Easily removable

z Corrosion Resistant
3. Low kW Axial Fan

z Quiet operation z Corrosion resistant aluminum z UV resistant plastic material
8. Cold Water Basin

z Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning z Suction strainer with anti-vortex hood z Adjustable water make-up assembly from air inlet side z Integral internal walkway as standard

z Visible and accessible during operation z Overlapping spray patterns ensure proper water coverage z Large orifice, non-clog nozzles
5. Coil Section (Not Shown)

z Continuous serpentine, steel tubing z Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF) z Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid z Designed for maximum 10 bar operating pressure according to
9. Recirculating Spray Water Pump

z Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump z Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor z Bleed line with metering valve installed from pump discharge to
overflow
PED

z Inward swinging door
Baltimore Aircoil
FXV - C 59
FXV-D Models
z Heavy-gauge Z600 galvanized steel frame
z Designed for maximum 10 bar operating pressure according to
PED

z Corrosion resistant z Maintenance free z UV-resistant finish
7. BACrossII Wet Deck Surface with Integral Drift Eliminators

z Plastic material z Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack z Designed and manufactured by BAC
3. Fan Drive System

z Premium quality belts z Corrosion resistant sheaves z Heavy-duty bearings z Adapted fan motor for operation in saturated conditions.

z Corrosion Resistant z Easily removable z UV resistant plastic material
9. Cold Water Basin

z Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning z Suction strainer with anti-vortex hood z Adjustable water make-up assembly from inside the unit
4. Low kW Axial Fan

z Quiet operation z Corrosion resistant aluminum

z Visible and accessible during operation z Overlapping spray patterns ensure proper water coverage z Large orifice, non-clog nozzles
10. Integral Recirculating Spray Water Pumps (Not Shown)

z Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump z Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor z Bleed line with metering valve installed from pump discharge to
6. Coil Section
z Continuous serpentine, steel tubing z Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF) z Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid
overflow

z Inward swinging door on each end wall
FXV - C 60

z
FXV
Prime Surface Coil Configurations

Standard Serpentine Coil: The standard cooling coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel, hotdip galvanized (outside surface) after fabrication (HDGAF). The coil is designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 15 bar and PED compliant. Stainless Steel Coil: Coils are available in Type 304L and 316L stainless steel for specialized applications. The coil is designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 15 bar and is PED compliant.
Multiple Fan Drive System (not on FXV-D Models)

All FXV-models (except FXV-D) are standard equipped with the multiple fan motor system. This system consists of an independent fan motor and drive assembly per fan with a plenum partition to allow independent operation of each fan. This standard feature provides 2 steps of capacity control on dual fan units and 3 steps of capacity control on triple fan units, as illustrated below.
Baltimore Aircoil
FXV - C 61
Low Sound Operation

The low sound levels generated by Series 1500 Units, thanks to the use of high efficiency low noise fans as standard, make them suitable for installation in most environments. For very sound sensitive installations all models are also available with a Whisper Quiet sound fan option that significantly reduces the sound levels generated from the tower with minimal impact on thermal performance. For extremely sound sensitive installations, factory designed, tested and rated sound attenuation is available for both the air inlet and discharge.
Gear Drive System, Externally Mounted Motor (FXV-D models only)

The D-models are available with a gear drive system with external TEFC motor and a noncorrosive carbon-fiber composite drive shaft with stainless steel hubs is selected with a 2,0 service factor. The motor and drive shaft ship separately for easy field installation.
Gear Drive System, Closed-Coupled Motor (FXV-D models only)

The D-Models are available with a close-coupled gear drive system. Both the gear drive and couplings are selected with a 2,0 service factor. Gear construction includes a nickel-alloy steel shaft, casehardened gears, self-lubrication, and a single piece, gray iron housing. This drive system ships completely installed and aligned.
Gear Drive System, close-coupled motor



FXV - C 62
Accessories
Basin Heaters
Model No. FXV FXV 422 FXV 423 FXV 424 FXV 432 FXV 433 FXV 442 FXV 443 FXV 444 FXV Q440 FXV Q441 FXV 542 FXV 543 FXV 544 FXV Q540 FXV Q541 FXV 561 FXV 562 FXV Q560 FXV Q561 FXV 642 FXV 643 FXV 644 FXV 661 FXV 662 FXV Q661 FXV D288 FXV D364 Heaters -18C (kW) 1 x4 1x4 1x4 1x6 1x6 1x6 1x6 1x6 1x6 1x6 1x8 1x8 1x8 1x8 1x8 2x6 2x6 2x6 2x6 2x6 2x6 2x6 2x8 2x8 2x8 2 x 14 2 x 14
FXV

Internal Ladder
For access to the motor and drive assemblies internal ladders are available on all models.
Baltimore Aircoil
FXV - C 63

For access to the motor and drive assemblies on single air inlet models FXV-54x through FXV-66x and all FXV-D models, an internal ladder and upper service platform with handrails is available. Safety gates are available for all handrail openings.
Top Air Inlet Screens

The screens protect the air inlet side above the coil section only. Top air inlet screens are always in Baltibond Corrosion Protection System.




FXV - C 64
Mechanical Equipment Removal System (Only on FXV-D Models)

Positive Closure Damper (PCD) Hoods
FXV
The FXVs innovative design results in a low heat loss when the unit is idle. When additional heat loss protection is desired, coil air intake hoods with factory mounted PCDs and damper actuators can be provided.
Baltimore Aircoil
FXV - C 65
Engineering Data FXV Models

FXV 42x - FXV 44x
1. Fluid in; 2. Fluid out; 3. Make-Up ND15; 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access door; 7. Vent ND15.
Model No. FXV FXV 422-H FXV 422-J FXV 422-K FXV 423-J FXV 423-K FXV 432-J FXV 432-K FXV 432-L FXV 433-L FXV 442-K FXV 442-L FXV 442-M FXV 443-L FXV 443-M FXV 444-M FXV Q440-K FXV Q440-L FXV Q441-L
Heaviest Section (kg) 1440 1450 1460 1600 1610 2140 2150 2160 2390 2590 2610 2620 2910 2920 3210 2590 2610 3200
Air Flow (m3/s) 12,5 14,3 15,7 13,9 15,3 20 22 25,1 24,5 25,5 29,2 32,1 28,5 31,4 30,7 25,5 29,1 27,9
Fan Motor (kW) 4 5,5 7,5 5,5 7,5 (2) 4 (2) 4 (2) 5,5 (2) 5,5 (2) 4 (2) 5,5 (2) 7,5 (2) 5,5 (2) 7,5 (2) 7,5 (2) 4 (2) 5,5 (2) 5,5
Spray Pump Inlet/Outlet Coil Volume Water Motor Coil Conn. (L) Flow (kW) (mm) (l/s) 12 12 12 12 12 18 18 18 18 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 1,1 1,1 1,1 1,1 1,1 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 (1x) 226 (1x) 226 (1x) 226 (1x) 278 (1x) 278 (1x) 337 (1x) 337 (1x) 337 (1x) 418 (1x) 452 (1x) 452 (1x) 452 (1x) 560 (1x) 560 (1x) 669 (1x) 452 (1x) 452 (1x) 669 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 150 (1x) ND 150 (1x) ND 150
H (mm) 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980
L (mm) 1861 1861 1861 1861 1861 2775 2775 2775 2775 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690
W (mm) 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385
FXV - C 66
FXV 54x - FXV 56x
FXV
1. Fluid in; 2. Fluid out; 3. Make-Up ND25; 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access door; 7. Vent ND15.
Model No. FXV FXV 542-L FXV 542-M FXV 542-N FXV 543-M FXV 543-N FXV 543-O FXV 544-N FXV 544-O FXV Q540-M FXV Q540-O FXV Q541-N FXV Q541-O FXV 561-M FXV 561-N FXV 561-O FXV 562-M FXV 562-N FXV 562-O FXV Q560-L FXV Q560-O FXV Q561-L FXV Q561-O
Heaviest Section (kg) 3240 3250 3270 3690 3710 3720 4150 4160 3250 3280 4150 4160 4020 4070 4090 4680 4730 4740 4670 4740 6010 6090
Air Flow (m3/s) 31,7 34,9 37,5 33,9 36,5 38,8 35,7 38,1 34,9 39,8 35,7 38,1 53,1 57,2 60,8 52,7 56,7 60,3 47,8 60,1 45,6 57,3
Fan Motor (kW) (2) 5,5 (2) 7,5 (2) 11 (2) 7,5 (2) 11 (2) 11 (2) 11 (2) 11 (2) 7,5 (2) 11 (2) 11 (2) 11 (3) 7,5 (3) 11 (3) 11 (3) 7,5 (3) 11 (3) 11 (3) 5,5 (3) 11 (3) 5,5 (3) 11
Spray Water Flow (l/s) 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 54
Pump Motor (kW) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5
Coil Volume (L) (1x) 671 (1x) 671 (1x) 671 (1x) 832 (1x) 832 (1x) 832 (1x) 993 (1x) 993 (1x) 671 (1x) 671 (1x) 993 (1x) 993 (1x) 762 (1x) 762 (1x) 762 (1x) 1007 (1x) 1007 (1x) 1007 (1x) 1007 (1x) 1007 (1x) 1562 (1x) 1562
Inlet/Outlet Coil Conn. (mm) (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 150 (1x) ND 150 (1x) ND 150 (1x) ND 150 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 150 (1x) ND 150 (1x) ND 150 (1x) ND 150
H (mm) 4790 4790 4790 4790 4790 4790 4790 4790 4790 4790 4790 4790 4930 4930 4930 4930 4930 4930 4930 4930 4930 4930
L (mm) 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 5520 5520 5520 5520 5520 5520 5520 5520 5520 5520
W (mm) 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985
Baltimore Aircoil
FXV - C 67
FXV 64x - FXV 66x
1. Fluid in; 2. Fluid out ND 3. Make-Up ND25; 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access door; 7. Vent ND15.
Model No. FXV FXV 642-L FXV 642-M FXV 642-N FXV 643-M FXV 643-N FXV 643-O FXV 644-N FXV 644-O FXV 661-M FXV 661-N FXV 661-O FXV 662-M FXV 662-N FXV 662-O FXV Q661-M FXV Q661-N FXV Q661-O
Operating Weight (kg) 9070 9090 9110 9770 9800 9810 10470 10480 12260 12300 12320 13270 13310 13330 15310 15360 15370
Shipping Weight (kg) 5380 5400 5420 5880 5900 5910 6370 6380 7000 7050 7060 7710 7760 7770 9160 9210 9220
Heaviest Section (kg) 3490 3510 3530 3990 4010 4020 4480 4490 4360 4400 4420 5070 5110 5130 6510 6560 6570
Air Flow (m3/s) 36,1 39,7 42,8 38,4 41,3 43,9 40,5 43 61 65,5 70 60,1 64,7 68,7 56,9 61,3 65,1
Fan Motor (kW) (2) 5,5 (2) 7,5 (2) 11 (2) 7,5 (2) 11 (2) 11 (2) 11 (2) 11 (3) 7,5 (3) 11 (3) 11 (3) 7,5 (3) 11 (3) 11 (3) 7,5 (3) 11 (3) 11
Spray Water Flow (l/s) 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 54
Pump Motor (kW) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5
Coil Volume (L) (1x) 723 (1x) 723 (1x) 723 (1x) 896 (1x) 896 (1x) 896 (1x) 1069 (1x) 1069 (1x) 821 (1x) 821 (1x) 821 (1x) 1084 (1x) 1084 (1x) 1084 (1x) 1658 (1x) 1658 (1x) 1658
Inlet/Outlet Coil Conn. (mm) (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 100 (1x) ND 150 (1x) ND 150 (1x) ND 150
H (mm) 4790 4790 4790 4790 4790 4790 4790 4790 4930 4930 4930 4930 4930 4930 4930 4930 4930
L (mm) 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 5520 5520 5520 5520 5520 5520 5520 5520 5520
W (mm) 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610
General Notes
1. Operating weight is for the tower with the water level in the cold water basin at the overflow. 2. When the flow rate for FXV units exceeds 25 l/s the quantity of the coil connections will be double. When the flow rate for FXV-Q units exceeds 57 l/s, connections of ND200 will be used (1 x inlet; 1 x outlet). 3. Inlet and outlet connections are beveled for welding. 4. Standard make-up, drain and overflow connections are MPT. 5. Dimensional drawings show standard (right hand) arrangements. Left hand arrangements can be furnished by special order. 6. All FXV-models will be shipped in two sections: upper and lower section.
FXV - C 68
Sound Attenuation FXV Models
FXV
1. Intake Attenuator; 2. Discharge Attenuator.
Model No FXV FXV 42X FXV 43X FXV (Q)44X FXV (Q)54X FXV (Q)56X FXV 64X FXV (Q)66X
Dimensions (mm) D 1345 1345 1345 1500 1500 2005 2005 Ht 4715 4715 4715 5525 5665 5525 5665 Intake 100 130 175 250 375 250 375
Weight (kg) Discharge 140 210 255 270 385 310 440
W = Unit Width, see general Engineering data.
Baltimore Aircoil
FXV - C 69
Heat Loss Data FXV
Heat Loss Data (kW) Model No. FXV FXV 422 FXV 423 FXV 424 FXV 432 FXV 433 FXV 442 FXV 443 FXV 444 FXV Q440 FXV Q441 FXV 542 FXV 543 FXV 544 FXV Q540 FXV Q541 FXV 561 FXV 562 FXV Q560 FXV Q561 FXV 642 FXV 643 FXV 644 FXV 661 FXV 662 FXV Q661 Standard Unit 25,6 30,9 35,9 38,5 46,4 50,7 61,0 70,7 50,7 70,7 71,1 86,0 99,9 71,1 99,9 82,9 105,8 105,8 147,6 76,2 91,8 106,4 89,3 113,6 157,4 Unit with Positive Closure Damper Hood 13,2 14,1 15,1 18,4 19,7 23,0 24,5 26,0 23,0 26,0 29,7 31,4 33,0 29,7 33,0 42,8 44,8 44,8 48,6 30,7 32,3 33,9 44,2 46,2 50,1 Weight (kg) 150 150 150 200 200 250 250 250 250 250 310 310 310 310 310 450 450 450 450 340 340 340 490 490 490
Positive Closure Damper Hood Length (L) (mm) 1815 1815 1815 2730 2730 3645 3645 3645 3645 3645 3645 3645 3645 3645 3645 5480 5480 5480 5480 3645 3645 3645 5480 5480 5480 Width (X) (mm) 1045 1045 1045 1045 1045 1045 1045 1045 1045 1045 1490 1490 1490 1490 1490 1490 1490 1490 1490 1615 1615 1615 1615 1615 1615 Height (Y) (mm) 835 835 835 835 835 835 835 835 835 835 835 835 835 835 835 835 835 835 835 835 835 835 835 835 835 Total Height (H) (mm) 4715 4715 4715 4715 4715 4715 4715 4715 4715 4715 5525 5525 5525 5525 5525 5665 5665 5665 5665 5525 5525 5525 5665 5665 5665
Notes:
1. Heat loss data based on 10C coil water and 14C with 20 m/s wind velocity (fans and pump off). 2. Positive closure dampers are available to reduce the heat loss during shut down. Consult your BAC Balticare representative for further details. 3. Electric immersion heaters with thermostat and low level cut out switch. All components are factory installed in the cooler pan. Heaters are selected to maintain +4C pan water at 18C ambient temperature. In outdoor locations trace heating and insulation of spray pump(s) (by others) may be required for freeze protection. 4. Hood weight excludes shipping skid weight.
Remote Sump Data FXV Models

FXV - C 70
Structural Support FXV Models

FXV
1. Unit Outline, 2. Air Intake, 3. Mounting Holes, 4. Unit
Model FXV FXV 42X FXV 43X FXV (Q)44X FXV (Q)54X FXV 64X FXV (Q)56X FXV (Q)66X
Max. Deflection (mm) W 5 8 10 10 10 12 12 2385 2385 2385 2985 3610 2985 3610 L 1860 2775 3690 3690 3690 5520 5520
Dimensions (mm) A 2325 2325 2325 2925 3550 2925 3550 B 2440 2440 C 255 255 255 255 255 270 270
No of 16 mm Anchorbolts 4 4 4 4 4 8 8
Notes :
1. Support steel and anchor bolts to be designed and furnished by others. 2. All support steel must be level at the top. 3. Beams must be selected in accordance with accepted structural practice. Maximum deflection of beam under unit see table. 4. If vibration isolation rails are to be used between the unit and supporting steel, be certain to allow for the length of the vibration rails when determining the length of the supporting steel, as vibration rail length and mounting hole locations may differ from those of the unit. 5. If point vibration isolation is used with multi-cell units, the isolators must be located under the support steel, not between the support steel and the towers.
Baltimore Aircoil
FXV - C 71
Engineering Data FXV-D Models

FXV-D Double Sided Units
1. Fluid out (see Note 2); 2. Fluid in (see Note 2); 3. Make-up ND40; 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access Door
Model No. FXV-D
Max. Operating Weight (kg) 20355 22030 22030 23830 25805 25805
Max. Shipping Weight (kg) 12892 14150 14140 14715 16200 16200
Max. Heaviest Section (6) (kg) 3650 4280 4280 4260 5005 5005
Max. Air Flow (m3/s) 105,5 104,7 104,2 132,5 131,2 130,6
Fan Motor (kW) 15 to 45 15 to 45 15 to 45 18,5 to 55 18,5 to 55 18,5 to 55
Pump Motor (kW) 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5
Coil Volume (L)
H (mm)
L (mm)
W (mm)
FXV-D288-3 FXV-D288-4 FXV-D288-Q FXV-D364-3 FXV-D364-4 FXV-D364-Q
(2x) 1082 (2x) 1294 (2x) 1283 (2x) 1268 (2x) 1514 (2x) 1540
5767 5767 5767 5996 5996 5996
3632 3632 3632 4245 4245 4245
7328 7328 7328 8013 8013 8013
General Notes
1. Operating weight is for the tower with the water level in the cold water basin at the overflow. 2. The actual size and number of inlet and outlet connections may vary with the design flow rate. Consult unit print for dimensions. 3. Inlet and outlet connections are beveled for welding. 4. Standard make-up, drain and overflow connections are located on the bottom of the unit. 5. Models shipped with an optional gear drive may have heights up to 130 mm greater than shown. Models with fan motor up to 22 kW are belt driven only; models with motor between 22 kW and 45 kW have standard belt drive but gear drive as an option; models with 55 kW motor have gear drive only. 6. FXV-D Models will be shipped in four sections; 1 x lower, 1 x fan and 2 x coil section. Weight is shown for one coil section.
FXV - C 72
Sound Attenuation FXV-D Models
FXV
1. Inlet Attenuator; 2. Discharge Attenuator.
Model No FXV-D FXV-D288 FXV-D364
Dimensions (mm) D 3500 4185 Ht 6748 6748
Weight (kg) Both Intake Sides 685 808 Discharge 477 563
Baltimore Aircoil
FXV - C 73
Heat Loss Data FXV-D
Heat Loss Data (kW) Model No. FXV FXV-D288-3 FXV-D288-4 FXV-D288-Q FXV-D364-3 FXV-D364-4 FXV-D364-Q Standard Unit 222,8 258,2 258,2 262,0 303,7 303,7 Unit with Positive Closure Damper Hood 81,1 86,3 86,3 96,8 101,5 101,5 Total Weight (kg) 470
Positive Closure Damper Hood Length (L) (mm) 3632 Width (X) (mm) 1915 Height (Y) (mm) 835 Total Height (H) (mm)
6272
545
4245
1915
835
6272
Notes:
1. Heat loss data based on 10C coil water and 14C with 20 m/s wind velocity (fans and pump off). 2. Positive closure dampers are available to reduce the heat loss during shut down. Consult your BAC Balticare representative for further details. 3. Electric immersion heaters with thermostat and low level cut out switch. All components are factory installed in the cooler pan. Heaters are selected to maintain +4C pan water at 18C ambient temperature. In outdoor locations trace heating and insulation of spray pump(s) (by others) may be required for freeze protection. 4. Hood weight excludes shipping skid weight. 5. Models shipped with optional gear drive may be higher.
Remote Sump Data FXV-D Models

FXV - C 74
Structural Support FXV-D Models

FXV
1. Unit Outline; 2. Air Intake; 3 Mounting Holes
Model FXV-D FXV-D288 FXV-D364
Max. Deflection (mm) 12 12
Dimensions (mm) A 3560 4173 B 3570 3913 C 37 37
No of 16 mm Anchorbolts 12 12
Notes:
Baltimore Aircoil
FXV - C 75
1.1 General: Furnish and install ____factory assembled closed circuit cooling tower(s) of induced draft design with single side air entry and vertical air discharge. Overall dimensions shall not exceed approximately ____ mm long x ____ mm wide, with an overall height not exceeding approximately _____ mm. Operating weight shall not exceed ____ kg. The closed circuit cooling tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Company Model(s)________________. (Alternate 1.1) General: Furnish and install ____factory assembled closed circuit cooling tower(s) of induced draft design with dual side air entry and vertical air discharge. Overall dimensions shall not exceed approximately ____ mm long x ____ mm wide, with an overall height not exceeding approximately _____ mm. Operating weight shall not exceed ____ kg. The closed circuit cooling tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Company Model(s)________________. 1.2. Thermal Capacity (water as heat transfer fluid): The closedcircuit cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to cool ______l/s of _______ water from ____C to ____C at ____C entering wet-bulb temperature. (Alternate1.2.) Thermal Capacity (aqueous glycol solution as heat transfer fluid): The closed circuit cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to cool ________l/s of _____% by volume ethylene/propylene glycol solution from ______C to _____C at _____C entering wet-bulb temperature. Coil pressure drop shall not exceed ________ kPa. 1.3. Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel, with all sheared edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound and the exterior protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection. (Alternate1.3.) Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, and dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program. 1.4. Quality Assurance: The closed circuit cooling tower manufacturer shall have a management system certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of its products and services. 1.5. Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of startup or eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.

2.1 Coil Section: The heat transfer section of the closed circuit cooling tower shall be encased with removable heavy-gauge galvanized steel panels (or corrosion resistant, fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP) on Models FXV-D). The coil shall be constructed of continuous serpentine all prime surface steel designed for 10 bar, and be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. The coil shall be designed for free drainage of fluid. 2.2 Cold Water Basin: The basin shall include a depressed section with drain/clean-out connection. Standard accessories shall include large area, lift-out steel strainers with perforated openings sized smaller than water distribution nozzle orifices, and integral antivortexing hood to prevent air entrainment, waste water bleed line, and brass make-up valve with large diameter plastic float arranged for easy adjustment. 2.3 Casing Panels: For models FXV with single air inlet side the casing panels shall be constructed of steel matching the structure defined in section 1.3. For Models FXV-D the casing panels shall be constructed of corrosion resistant, fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP).

3.1 Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow low noise, with aluminium alloy blades. Air shall discharge through a fan cylinder designed for streamlined air entry and minimum fan blade tip clearance for maximum fan efficiency. (Alternate 3.1) Fan(s) for FXV-models: Fan(s) shall be of Whisper Quiet fan design for ultra low sound consisting of specially shaped aluminium blades with end caps and flexible hub connection. (Alternate 3.1) Fan(s) for FXV-D models: Fan(s) shall be of Whisper Quiet fan design for ultra low sound consisting of multiblade aerofoil fan design constructed of fibreglass reinforced plastic blades. 3.2 Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported by heavy-duty, selfaligning, grease-packed ball bearings with moisture-proof seals and integral slinger rings, designed for minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours. Fan(s) shall be belt driven and specifically designed for evaporative cooling service. Fan and motor sheave(s) shall be fabricated from cast aluminum. 3.3 Independent motor and drives: Each fan is equipped with an independent motor and drive assembly, which allows independent operation of each fan. 3.4 Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing, designed specifically for evaporative cooling duty on _____ volts___ hertz ___ phase electrical service. The motor shall be furnished with special moisture protection on windings, shafts, and bearings. Each motor shall be mounted on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor base.
FXV - C 76

4.1. BACross Wet Deck Surface and Drift Eliminators (FXV models): The wet deck surface and integral drift eliminators shall be formed from plastic material and shall be impervious to rot, decay, fungus and biological attack. The surface shall be manufactured and performance tested by the closed circuit cooling tower manufacturer to provide single source responsibility and assure control of the final product. A separate set of drift eliminators shall be removable in easily handled sections for quick access to the coil. Eliminators shall have a minimum of three changes in air direction. (Alternate 4.1) BACross II Wet Deck Surface and Drift Eliminators (FXV-D models): The wet deck surface and integral drift eliminators shall be formed from plastic material and shall be impervious to rot, decay, fungus and biological attack. The surface shall be manufactured and performance tested by the closed circuit cooling tower manufacturer to provide single source responsibility and assure control of the final product. A separate set of drift eliminators shall be removable in easily handled sections for quick access to the coil. Eliminators shall have a minimum of three changes in air direction.
FXV
5.0 Combined Inlet Shields

6.0 Spray Water System

3.1 Spray Water Pump(s): The closed circuit cooling tower shall include an appropriate number of close-coupled, bronze-fitted centrifugal pump and motor assemblies equipped with mechanical seal, mounted in the basin and piped from the suction connection to the water distribution system. The pump motor(s) shall be the totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type suitable for _____ volts, ___ phase, and ____ hertz electrical service. The system shall include a metering valve and bleed line to control the bleed rate from the pump discharge to the overflow connection. 3.2 Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed evenly over the coil at a flow rate sufficient to ensure complete wetting of the coil at all times. Large diameter, non-clog, 360 plastic distribution nozzles shall utilize a two stage diffusion pattern to provide overlapping, umbrella spray patterns that create multiple intersection points with adjacent nozzles. The branches and spray nozzles shall be held in place by snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of individual nozzles or complete branches for cleaning or flushing.
7.0 Access
7.1 Plenum Access: A large, hinged access door shall be provided for access to the coil, drift eliminators and fan plenum section. The water make-up valve, float ball and suction strainer shall be easily accessible.
8.0 Sound
Location Discharge Air Inlet End Back (not on D-models)
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
8000
dB(A)
Baltimore Aircoil
WS - D 1
Water Saving Hybrid Wet-Dry Products

Overview
Water Saving Products

General Information ................................................................................. D2 Principle of Operation .............................................................................. D2 Configuration ............................................................................................. D2 Fan System ................................................................................................. D3 Capacity Range .......................................................................................... D4 Maximum Entering Fluid Temperature .................................................. D4 Typical Applications .................................................................................. D4 Product Line Overview Table .................................................................. D4 Advantages of Intelligent Water Saving Products ................................. D6 Engineering Considerations ..................................................................... D6
WS - D 2
General Information
Water saving and hybrid products provide cooling for many types of systems, and the specific application will largely determine which BAC product is best suited for a project. Water saving and hybrid products can be categorised within three different technologies. These are the hybrid wetdry, dry and adiabatic and the Product Line Overview Table indicates the BAC products available under each of these technologies. This overview table is intended as a general guide. Specialised assistance is available through your local BAC Balticare Representative. Refer to the section Advantages of water saving and hybrid wet-dry products for the advantages of each technology.
Overview
Water saving and hybrid products are usually of the closed circuit type where the heat load to be rejected is transferred from the process fluid (Fluid to be cooled) to the ambient air through a heat exchange coil. The coil serves to isolate the process fluid from the outside air, keeping it clean and contamination free in a closed loop. The Hybrid wet-dry products cool the liquid to be cooled by efficiently combining dry sensible air cooling with evaporative cooling. These products include two or more distinctive heat transfer surfaces or sections combined into one product optimising the use of the ambient dry and wet bulb temperature. Dry Fluid Coolers cool the liquid in a closed circuit by means of sensible heat transfer from the highdensity finned coil block to the air at ambient dry bulb temperature. Adiabatic Fluid Coolers are dry coolers equipped with an Adiabatic Pre-Cooler section. Before the air is drawn through the high density finned coil however, it is pre-cooled adiabatically as it passes through an evaporative pad where water is evaporated in the air.
Configuration
BAC manufactures two types of water saving and hybrid wet-dry products: combined flow and counterflow.
Combined Flow
Combined flow is the use of a prime surface and a dry finned heat exchange coil in combination with a wet deck surface for heat transfer in a hybrid wet-dry product. The addition of wet deck surface hybrid wet-dry product reduces evaporation in the coil section and is also used as an adiabatic pre-cooler section. BACs combined hybrid wet-dry products utilize parallel flow of air and spray water over the prime surface coil, counterflow of fluid and air in the dry finned coil and crossflow air/water flow through the wet deck surface. In parallel flow, air and water flow over the coil in the same direction. The process fluid travels from the bottom to the top of the coil, increasing efficiency by bringing the coldest spray water and air in contact with the process fluid at its coldest temperature.
Combined flow: Crossflow configuration over the wet deck
Baltimore Aircoil
WS - D 3
Combined flow: Counterflow of air over the coil and fluid inside the coil.
Counterflow
In a counterflow water saving and hybrid wet-dry product, the flow of the air is in the opposite direction of the spray water or fluid inside the heat exchange coil. In BACs counterflow dry and adiabatic products, air travels vertically up through the coil while the fluid in the coil travels down.
Fan System
The flow of air through most factory assembled water saving hybrid wet-dry products is provided by one or more mechanically driven fans. The fan(s) may be axial or centrifugal, each type having its own distinct advantages. Centrifugal fan units are capable of overcoming reasonable amounts of external static pressure ( 125 Pa), making them suitable for both indoor and outdoor installations. Centrifugal fans are also inherently quieter than axial fans, although the difference can be overcome through the application of optional fan speed control, low sound fans and/or sound attenuation on axial fan units. Fans can be applied in an induced draft or a forced draft configuration.
Centrifugal Fans
Axial Fans
Induced Draft The rotating air handling components of induced draft equipment are mounted in the top deck of the unit, minimising the impact of fan noise on near-by neighbours. The air being drawn through the unit hereby discharges over the inducing fan. The use of corrosion resistant materials ensures long life and minimises maintenance requirements for the air handling components. Forced Draft Rotating air-handling components are located on the air inlet face at the base of forced draft towers whereby fresh air is blown through the unit. This base fan position facilitates easy access for routine maintenance and service. Additionally, location of these components in the dry entering air stream extends component life by isolating them from the corrosive saturated discharge air when units operate in evaporative mode.
WS - D 4
Capacity Range
In the Product Line Overview Table, product capacities are called out in terms of a fluid flow rate for hybrid wet-dry products and nominal kW of heat rejection capacity for dry and adiabatic products. All capacities shown are for a single cell; multiple cell units can be applied to achieve larger capacities.
Maximum Entering Fluid Temperature
Overview
All BAC hybrid wet-dry products are capable of withstanding entering fluid temperatures as high as 82C. All BAC dry and adiabatic products are capable to withstanding entering fluid temperatures as high as 70C.

HXI HFL
Technology
Hybrid Wet-Dry closed circuit cooling tower combining sensi- Hybrid Wet-Dry closed circuit cooling tower combining sensible and evaporative heat transfer ble and evaporative heat transfer. Combined Flow Axial Fan, Induced Draft 45 to 150 l/s Counterflow Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft 9 to 90 l/s
Configuration Fan System Capacity Range (Single Cell) Maximum Entering Fluid Temperature
82C Medium to large HVAC & industrial applications Installations requiring plume abatement Installation requiring water conservation Low energy consumption Easy maintenance
82C Medium to large HVAC & industrial applications Installations requiring plume abatement Installation requiring water conservation Sound sensitive locations Indoor Installations
1. Air in; 2. Air out; 3. Fluid in; 4. Fluid out; 5. Water, 6.Combined Inlet Shields; 7. Wet deck surface; 8. Cold water basin; 9. Water distribution system; 10. Spray water pump; 11. Coil; 12. Finned coil; 13. Three way valve.
Baltimore Aircoil
WS - D 5
DFC Dry Fluid Coolers
DFC-AD Dry Fluid Coolers with Adiabatic Pre-Cooler
Dry Fluid Coolers equipped with an Adiabatic Pre-Cooler cool the liquid by Dry Fluid Coolers cool the liquid in a closed circuit by means of sensible heat sensible heat transfer only. Before the air is drawn through the high density transfer from the high-density finned coil block to the air at ambient dry bulb finned coil however, it is pre-cooled adiabatically as it passes through an temperature. evaporative pad where water is evaporated in the air. Counterflow Axial Fan, Induced Draft Counterflow Axial Fan, Induced Draft
250 kW 1620 kW at Eurovent Conditions according to EN 1048. 30 kW 1110 kW at Eurovent Conditions according to EN 1048. 1,5 80 l/s 34% Ethylene Glycol Solution at 40 oC / 35 oC / 25 oC dry bulb 13 86 l/s 34% Ethylene Glycol Solution at 40 oC / 35 oC / 25 oC dry bulb temperature temperature 70 oC High temperature execution available, max. 150 oC, max. 10 bar pressure Small to medium HVAC and industrial applications Locations with limited water availability Large range, large approach applications High temperature industrial applications 70 oC
Small to medium HVAC and industrial applications Locations with limited water and limited space availability High temperature industrial applications
1. Dry heat exchanger coil; 2. Fluid Inlet. 3. Fluid Outlet; 4. Axial Fans; 5. High efficient evaporative cooling pad; 6. Water inlet connections; 7. Water outlet connections; 8. Adiabatic cooling of ambient air; 9. Air discharge; 10. Air in.
WS - D 6
Advantages of Intelligent Water Saving Products

Low water and water treatment cost, vastly improved operational safety and virtual elimination of visible plume are the main advantages of intelligent water saving products from Baltimore Aircoil. With a choice between different configurations and a vast array of material options and accessories water saving technology from Baltimore Aircoil can be optimally incorporated in any application.
Low Water Consumption reduces opeating cost
Overview
In many European countries water has become an expensive commodity and hence the cost of water often represents a significant portion of the total annual operating cost of conventional evaporative cooling equipment. To significantly reduce operating cost, BAC can offer a variety of intelligent water saving solutions. These solutions include air-cooled products with no water consumption at all, adiabatic coolers and wet-dry hybrid coolers, which consume only water when needed and as much as needed. The broad array of water saving products allows to optimise a choice for each application, including the ones where low cooling temperatures need to be achieved during a hot summer day. The cost premium associated with water saving products is usually offset in short time by the operating cost savings that can be achieved.
Lower Water Treatment Cost

The cost for water treatment in cooling applications is generally related to the amount of water consumed during a year. Water saving intelligence therefore also saves water treatment cost. For hybrid and adiabatic products periods of dry operation exist, where no water treatment at all is needed and the water treatment system does not need to be inspected, since there is no water in the products. In particular for coolers using the adiabatic principle, extensive periods of dry operation can be expected. During such periods no biological contamination of the environment can happen.
Reduction/Elimination of Visible Plume

In certain applications visible plume is considered as hinder. The use of "intelligent" water saving products from BAC will either greatly reduce the formation of visible plume or completely eliminate it. Especially when during the winter period dry operation of the products can be applied, the occurrence of visual plume will virtually be eliminated.
Location
Warning: Each unit should be located and positioned to prevent the introduction of the warm discharge air and the associated drift (hybrid and adiabatic products), which may contain chemical or biological contaminants including Legionella, into the ventilation systems of the building on which the unit is located or those of adjacent buildings.
For HFL products, bottom screens or solid bottom panels may be desirable or necessary for safety, depending on the location and conditions at the installation site.
Baltimore Aircoil
WS - D 7
Piping and Valves

Piping must be sized and installed in accordance with good piping practice. All piping should be supported by pipe hangers or other supports, not by the unit. Some installations may require flow balancing valves (supplied by others) at the coil inlets to balance the flow to individual coils and cells. External shutoff valves on the closed circuit loop (supplied by others) may also be required if the system design necessitates the isolation of individual cells.
Although equalizing lines can be used to balance water levels between multi-cell hybrid wet-dry products, the spray water for each cell must be treated separately, and a separate make-up must be provided for each cell. Note that a common remote sump for multi-cell installations can simplify make-up and water treatment see "Technical Resources, Remote Sump Tank Selection" for details. See the appropriate Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual for more information on water treatment.
Capacity Control
Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) Installations which are to be controlled by Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) require the use of an inverter duty motor as designed IEC 34.1, which recognizes the increased stresses placed on motors by these drive systems. Inverter duty motors must be furnished on VFD applications in order to maintain the motor warranty. Fan motors must be furnished with thermal protection (either PTC sensors or coil thermostats normally open, or normally closed). The motor protection consists of temperature sensitive cutout devices embedded in the motor windings (minimum 3 per motor).
Warning: Rapid on-off cycling can cause the fan motor to overheat. It is recommended that controls be set to allow a maximum of 6 on-off cycles per hour. Note: Spray water pump cycling should not be used for capacity control. This method of control often results in short cycling of the pump motor as capacity changes substantially with pump cycling. In addition, alternate wetting and drying of the coil promotes scaling of the heat exchanger coil surface.
Capacity Control Dampers (HFL models only) On centrifugal fan models, modulating capacity control dampers are available to provide close control of the leaving temperature. See Section "Accessories" or contact your local BAC Balticare representative.
WS - D 8

Water Treatment (HFL and HXI models only)
Overview
Wet Deck Surface Compatibility (HXI models only)

The standard wet deck surface in a HXI Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Tower is constructed of a plastic material This wet deck surface is compatible with the water found in most evaporative cooling applications. For applications where the entering fluid temperature exceeds 82C, contact your local BAC Balticare Representative to confirm that the standard wet deck is acceptable.
Sound Levels
Sound rating data are available for all BAC models. When calculating the sound levels generated by a unit, the designer must take into account the effects of the geometry of the tower as well as the distance and direction from the unit to noise-sensitive areas. Whisper Quiet fans and intake and discharge sound attenuation can be supplied on certain models to provide reduced sound characteristics (see the Custom Features and Options section of the appropriate product line for details). The Baltiguard Fan System, two-speed motors, or variable frequency drives can also be used to reduce sound during periods of non-peak thermal loads. For more information on sound and how it relates to evaporative cooling equipment, see Section "Technical Resources, Fundamentals of Sound". Dry and adiabatic fluid coolers for sound sensitive applications are offered with low speed motors. For detailed low sound selections, please consult your local BAC Balticare Representative.
Baltimore Aircoil
WS - D 9
Winterization (HXI and HFL models only)

Indoor Installation (HFL models only)

Safety
Fluid Compatibility
The fluid to be cooled must be compatible with the coil material. Fluids not compatible with coil materials can lead to corrosion and tube failure. Certain fluids may require occasional pressure cleaning or mechanical cleaning of the inside of coil tubes. In such cases the coil must be designed to provide this capability. Refer to the appropriate product line section for details of the available coil material.
Open / Closed System (HXI and HFL unit coils)

The standard galvanised steel serpentine coils (prime surface) are carbon steel, hot-dip galvanised on the outside only, and are intended for application on closed, pressurised systems which are not open to the atmosphere. Stainless steel coils are available to cool corrosive fluids or water and ethylene/propylene glycol solutions in systems open to the atmosphere
WS - D 10
Protection Against Coil Freezing

At below freezing ambient conditions, the unit can experience heat loss even without the recirculating spray water pump and fans in operation. Without a heat load on the circulating fluid, coil freezing can occur even at full flow. Protective means are readily available to avoid potential freeze problems. Where the system will permit, the best protection against coil freeze-up is the use of an industrially inhibited anti-freeze solution. When this is not possible, the system must be designed to meet both of the following conditions: 1. Maintain minimum recommended flow through the coil at all times, as per the table below: 2. Maintain a heat load on the circulating fluid so that the temperature of the fluid leaving the coil will not be below 7C. If the process load is extremely light, or if the process is periodically shut off entirely, then an auxiliary heat load must be applied to the circulating fluid when below freezing ambient temperatures exist to prevent damage to the coil. Refer to the Heat Loss Data table (see the product section for applicable heat loss data) for the auxiliary heat load requirement. The amount of auxiliary heat necessary to prevent coil freezing can be further reduced by the use of a positive closure damper hood and insulation. Draining the coil is not recommended as a normal method of freeze protection. However, draining is acceptable as an emergency method of freeze protection. Frequent draining can promote corrosion inside the coil tubes. If the coil is not protected by an industrially inhibited anti-freeze solution, an automatic drain valve and air vent is recommended to drain the coil if flow stops or fluid temperature drops below 7C when the ambient temperature is below freezing. Note that cold water basin heaters will not provide freeze protection for the coil. The coil of dry and adiabatic coolers can never drain completely. If a minimum heat load can not be guaranteed on the dry coil during the winter period, then the use of an anti-freeze solution is the only available protection against coil freezing.
Model HFL 24X - 48X HFL 72X - 96X HFL 108X - 144X HFL 150X - 192X HFL 180X - 240X HFL 216X - 288X HXI 42 X, 43X HXI 44X HXI 58X HXI Q5XX HXI 6XX HXI Q6XX Minimum Flow (l/s) 4,1 7,9 12 15,8 19,9 24 3 5 6 12 7 14
Overview
Warranties
Baltimore Aircoil
HXI - D 11
Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
Product Detail
HXI Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Towers ........................................ D12 Benefits ..................................................................................................... D14 Construction Details ................................................................................ D16 Custom Features and Options ................................................................ D18 Accessories ............................................................................................... D21 Engineering Data ..................................................................................... D23 Structural Support .................................................................................. D31 Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... D32 HXI offers Economic Advantages .......................................................... D34
HXI - D 12
HXI Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Towers

Capacity
General Description
HXI Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Towers deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of flow and temperature requirements. Distinct advantages of the HXI include plume abatement, significant water savings over traditional water-cooled equipment. Standard design features satisfy todays environmental concerns, minimize installation costs, maximize year-round operating reliability, and simplify maintenance requirements.
Key Features
Plume abatement Maximum water savings Low energy consumption Low installed cost Easy maintenance Reliable year-round operation Long service life
Baltimore Aircoil
HXI - D 13
HXI - D 14
Benefits
Plume Abatement
The HXI offers a combination of sensible, adiabatic, and evaporative heat transfer to significantly reduce any plume that may occur with conventional evaporative cooling equipment. During the coldest times of the year, when the potential for visible discharge is greatest, the HXI operates 100% dry, completely eliminating plume.
Maximum Water Savings

Water savings are achieved throughout the year with each of three different operating modes of the HXI. In some areas, the water cost savings alone can pay for the equipment in as little as two years! At peak conditions in the dry/wet operating mode, a significant amount of heat is removed by sensible heat transfer, providing reduced water consumption versus conventional evaporative cooling When the heat load and/or ambient temperatures drop, water consumption is further reduced in the adiabatic operating mode Water consumption is totally eliminated in the dry operating mode
Note: See section "Engineering Specifications" for details on operating modes.
High Temperature Cooling

The finned dry coil tempers the incoming fluid, allowing higher inlet water temperatures than traditional closed circuit cooling towers.

The HXI provides heat rejection at the lowest possible energy input and maintenance requirements via: High efficiency, low kW axial fans Multiple fan motor system Closed loop cooling, which minimizes process fouling Patented combined flow technology, which reduces evaporation directly off the coil, minimizing the potential for scaling and fouling Parallel flow of air and spray water, which eliminates scale-promoting dry spots
Low Installed Cost

Support All models mount directly on parallel I-beams and ship complete with motors and drives factory-installed and aligned. Modular Design Units ship in three pieces to minimize the size and weight of the heaviest lift, allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes.
Baltimore Aircoil
HXI - D 15
Easy Maintenance
Access Hinged access doors on each end wall and a standard internal walkway provide easy access to the unit interior. Spacious Interior Provides easy access to the cold water basin, drift eliminators, fan drive system and the prime surface coil. Access to spray Distribution Parallel flow of air and spray water over the coil allows for inspection and access to the top of the coil during full operation.
Large Access Door
Removable Drift Eliminators for access to the prime surface coil

Long Service Life

HXI - D 16
Baltimore Aircoil
HXI - D 17
Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack Designed and manufactured by BAC
2. Fan Drive System (Not Shown)

8. Combined Inlet Shield Technology

9. Cold Water Basin

3. Low kW Axial Fan(s) (Not Shown)


Overlapping spray patterns ensure proper water coverage Large orifice, non-clog nozzles

5. Prime Surface Coil (Not Shown)

Continuous serpentine, steel tubing Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF) Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid Designed for maximum 10 bar operating pressure according to PED
11. Three Way Valve (Optional)

With actuator With connection box
12. Recirculating Spray Pump (Not Shown)

Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor
6. Dry Finned Coil

Copper tubing with high density aluminum fins Designed for max. 10 bar operating pressure according to PED Staggered tubes coil arrangement Bleed line with metering valve installed from pump discharge to overflow
13. Manifolds and Interconnecting Pipework (Optional)

With orifice plate With hydraulic by-pass
Plastic material
HXI - D 18

Standard Construction: Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized steel protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection on the outside of the cooling towers. Optional BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System: The BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend equipment life, is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the closed circuit hybrid cooling tower (excluding heat transfer coils).

Standard Serpentine Coil: The standard cooling coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel, hot-dip galvanized (outside surface) after fabrication (HDGAF). The coil is designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 15 bar and PED compliant.
Dry Finned Coil Configurations

The standard finned coil on the HXI unit has 6 rows and is available in 1-1/2 serpentine and triple serpentine arrangements. The serpentine arrangement indicates the way in which these rows are circuited internally, and influences the process fluid velocity (the smaller the serpentine, the higher the flow velocity) and the total fluid pressure through the unit (the smaller the serpentine, the higher the finned coil pressure drop). Hence, the unit flow and pressure drop allowance must be taken into account when the finned coil serpentine is selected to obtain the most suitable HXI selection. Consult your local BAC Balticare Representative for selection assistance.
Prime Surface Coil
Finned Coil
Baltimore Aircoil
HXI - D 19
Wet Deck Surface

Cross flow plastic wet deck surface with integrated high efficiency drift eliminators Fill pack extended into the cold water basin to avoid sound of water splash Reduction of recirculating spray water temperature result in compact prime surface coil resulting in both reduced refrigerant and piping costs. Saturation and pre-cooling of incoming outside air.
Wet Deck Surface
Fan Drive System
The low sound fan drive system provides the cooling air necessary to reject heat from the system to the atmosphere. The standard fan drive system consists of an independent fan motor and drive assembly per fan with a plenum partition to allow independent operation of each fan. This standard feature provides an extra step of capacity control.
Low Noise Fans

The low sound levels generated by HXI Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Towers are due to the use of high efficiency low noise axial fans and make them suitable for installation in most environments. For extremely sound sensitive installations, factory designed, tested and rated sound attenuation is available for both the air intake and discharge.
Low Noise Fans (dry coil section removed)
HXI - D 20


Baltimore Aircoil
HXI - D 21
Accessories
Basin Heaters
Although most HXI units will operate dry in the winter, basin heaters are available for freeze protection when required. Basin heaters prevent freezing of the water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which maintain the water temperature at 4C, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection.
Model No. HXI HXI 42X-K HXI 43X-L HXI 44X-M HXI (Q)54X-O HXI (Q)56X-O HXI (Q)64X-O HXI (Q)66X-O Electric Immersion Heaters -18C kW 1x4 1x6 1x6 1x8 2x6 2x6 2x8

Flow Control Package

A flow control package is available to provide maximum plume control and water savings. This package consists of a 3-way flow control valve arrangement with actuator, and all connecting piping. The 3-way flow control valve arrangement shown below for single prime surface and double prime surface coil connections.
3-way Flow Control Valve
Single Prime Surface Coil Connections

1. Fluid in; 2. Fluid out.; (shown for 3/4, 1/1 and 1-1/2 serpentine) Note: For double serpentine, the manifold inlet is relocated to opposite side.
Double Prime Surface Coil Connections

1. Fluid in; 2. Fluid out.
HXI - D 22


External Service Platforms

Internal Ladder

For access to the motor and drive assemblies an upper service platform with ladder and handrails is available. Safety gates are available for handrail openings.

Baltimore Aircoil
HXI - D 23
Engineering Data
HXI 42X - 44X
1. Inlet Connection; 2. Outlet Connection, 3. Make Up ND15, 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access door.
Model No. HXI 420-K 421-K 422-K 430-L 431-L 432-L 440-M 441-M 442-M
Shipping Weight (kg) 2570 2710 2850 3700 3910 4130 4520 4800 5090
Operating Weight (kg) 3810 4020 4230 5560 5870 6190 7010 7420 7850
Heaviest Section (kg) 1110 1260 1400 1660 1870 2090 1960 2240 2530
Airflow (m/s)
Fan Motor (kW) (1) 7,5 (1) 7,5 (1) 7,5 (2) 5,5 (2) 5,5 (2) 5,5 (2) 7,5 (2) 7,5 (2) 7,5
Pump (kW)
Spray Water Flow (l/s) 12 12 12 18 18 18 24 24 24
Inlet / Outlet Coil Connections (mm) Prime Surface Coil (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 (1) 100 Finned Coil (2) 80 (2) 80 (2) 80 (2) 80 (2) 80 (2) 80 (2) 80 (2) 80 (2) 80
H (mm)
L (mm)
W (mm)
13,0 12,9 12,8 20,2 19,9 19,6 26,6 26,3 26,0
(1) 1,1 (1) 1,1 (1) 1,1 (1) 2,2 (1) 2,2 (1) 2,2 (1) 2,2 (1) 2,2 (1) 2,2
4855 4855 4855 4855 4855 4855 4855 4855 4855
1861 1861 1861 2775 2775 2775 3690 3690 3690
2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385
HXI - D 24
HXI (Q)54X - HXI (Q)56X
1. Inlet Connection; 2. Outlet Connection; 3. Make Up ND25; 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access door.
Model No. HXI
Approx. Ship Weight (kg) 5700 6140 6580 6580 7460 8220 8880 9540 9540 10880
Approx. Operating Weight (kg) 8690 9310 9930 9930 11180 12695 13635 14575 14575 16475
Approx. Heaviest Section (kg) 2400 2840 3280 3280 4160 3360 4090 4740 4740 6090
Airflow (m/s)
Fan Motor (kW) (2) 11 (2) 11 (2) 11 (2) 11 (2) 11 (3) 11 (3) 11 (3) 11 (3) 11 (3) 11
Pump (kW)
Spray Water Flow (l/s) 45 45 45 45 45 54 54 54 54 54
Inlet/Outlet Coil Connections (mm) Prime surface coil (2) 100 (2) 100 (2) 100 (1) 150 (1) 150 (2) 100 (2) 100 (2) 100 (1) 150 (1) 150 Finned coil (2) 80 (2) 80 (2) 80 (2) 80 (2) 80 (2) 100 (2) 100 (2) 100 (2) 100 (2) 100
H (mm)
L (mm)
W (mm)
540-O 541-O 542-O Q540-O Q541-O 560-O 561-O 562-O Q560-O Q561-O
35,5 35,1 34,9 34,9 34,6 53,6 53,1 52,7 52,7 52,3
(1) 4,0 (1) 4,0 (1) 4,0 (1) 4,0 (1) 4,0 (1) 5,5 (1) 5,5 (1) 5,5 (1) 5,5 (1) 5,5
6580 6580 6580 6580 6580 6785 6785 6785 6785 6785
3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 5520 5520 5520 5520 5520
2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985
Baltimore Aircoil
HXI - D 25
HXI (Q)64X - HXI (Q)66X
1. Inlet Connection; 2. Outlet Connection; 3. Make Up ND25; 4. Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access door.
Approx. Ship Model No. Weight HXI (kg) 640-O 641-O 642-O Q640-O Q641-O 660-O 661-O 662-O Q660-O Q661-O 6330 6810 7290 7290 8240 9085 9795 10505 10505 11955
Approx. Operating Weight (kg) 10050 10740 11430 11430 12790 14690 15700 16710 16710 18750
Approx. Heaviest Section (kg) 2575 3055 3535 3540 4480 3710 4420 5130 5130 6570
Airflow (m/s)
Fan Motor (kW)
Pump (kW)
Spray Water Flow (l/s) 45 45 45 45 45 54 54 54 54 54
Inlet/Outlet Coil Connections (mm) Prime Surface Coil (2) 100 (2) 100 (2) 100 (1) 150 (1) 150 (2) 100 (2) 100 (2) 100 (1) 150 (1) 150 H (mm) Finned Coil (2) 100 (2) 100 (2) 100 (2) 100 (2) 100 (2) 100 (2) 100 (2) 100 (2) 100 (2) 100 6785 6785 6785 6785 6785 6925 6925 6925 6925 6925 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 5520 5520 5520 5520 5520 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 L (mm) W (mm)
39,9 39,2 38,7 38,7 37,8 60,5 59,5 58,6 58,6 57,4
(2) 22 (2) 22 (2) 22 (2) 22 (2) 22 (3) 11 (3) 11 (3) 11 (3) 11 (3) 11
(1) 4,0 (1) 4,0 (1) 4,0 (1) 4,0 (1) 4,0 (1) 5,5 (1) 5,5 (1) 5,5 (1) 5,5 (1) 5,5
HXI - D 26
Serpentine Arrangement
Note: Only available on the finned coi.
Description:
The finned coil on the HXI unit has 6 rows. The serpentine indicates the way in which these rows are circuited internally. The serpentine influences the process fluid velocity (the smaller the serpentine, the higher the flow) and the total pressure drop over the unit ( the smaller the serpentine, the higher the finned coil pressure drop). Hence, the unit flow and pressure drop must be taken into account when the finned coil serpentine is selected to obtain the most suitable HXI selection.
Nomenclature:
Affix 3/4 serpentine 1/1 serpentine 1-1/2 serpentine Double Serpentine A B C D Example HXI 420-K A HXI 420-K B HXI 420-K C HXI 540-O D
External finned coil arrangement:

For 3/4 serpentine (A) , 1/1 serpentine (B) and 1-1/2 serpentine (C), the finned coil inlet and the outlet connections are on the same side. For double serpentine (D), the finned coil inlet connections are on the opposite side of the finned coil outlet connections.
3/4, 1/1, 1-1/2 Serpentine
Double Serpentine
General Notes
1. Pipe sizes are nominal diameters. All connections have BSP male thread except for the 15 mm vent which has female BSP thread. 2. Dimensional drawings show standard (right hand) arrangements with the standard finned coil arrangement. Left hand arrangement can be furnished by special order. 3. Coil connection locations are approximate. Dimensions should not be used for prefabrication of the connecting piping. 4. For high process flows, the double serpentine finned coil arrangement (HXI D) might be used. For a finned coil bundle with a double serpentine arrangement, the coil inlet connections will be on one side and the outlet on the opposite side. (Refer to serpentine arrangements) 5. All technical information on this page is without manifolds and three-way valve arrangement. (refer to the section "Accessories, Flow control package) 6. The units will be delivered in 3 different pieces, upper, middle and lower section. 7. For HXI Q-5XX and HXI Q-6XX units with single bare coil connections, the connection centreline is located 820 mm from the air inlet face.
Baltimore Aircoil
HXI - D 27
Sound Attenuation
1. Unit Width; 2. Unit Height; 3. Insulated Plenum; 4. Intake Attenuator.
Model No. HXI HXI 42X HXI 43X HXI 44X HXI (Q) 54X HXI (Q) 56X HXI (Q)64X HXI (Q)66X
Weight Sound Attenuator (kg) 100 130 175 150 375 250 375
Modes of Operation
Operation Mode Dry-Wet Mode Adiabatic Mode Dry Mode Dry Finned Coil Fluid Flow 100 % 100 % 100 % Wet Prime Surface Coil Fluid Flow Modulating 0% 100 % Spray Pump ON ON OFF Fans ON ON ON*
Note: * During dry mode two-speed motor operation is also possible.
HXI - D 28
Combined Dry/Wet Operation Mode

In this mode, the fluid to be cooled flows first to the dry finned coil and then to the prime surface evaporative coil, where the cooled fluid exits the unit. Spray water is drawn from the cold water basin and pumped to the water distribution system above the prime surface coil. Wetting the prime surface coil allows evaporative cooling to occur. The spray water falls from the prime surface coil over the wet deck surface, enhancing the evaporative heat transfer by sub-cooling the spray water. Air is drawn through both the prime surface coil and through the wet deck surface where it is saturated and picks up heat. The air is, however, still cold enough to achieve significant cooling within the finned coil, which is installed at the discharge above the fan(s). In the dry/wet mode, both sensible and evaporative heat transfer are used. Compared to a conventional evaporative unit, the potential for plume is substantially reduced and significant water savings can be obtained, even at peak design conditions. At reduced heat load and/or ambient temperatures, the evaporative cooling portion, and hence water usage, are further reduced as the flow through the evaporative coil is gradually decreased. This is accomplished by a modulating flow control valve arrangement, which controls the outlet fluid temperature. This control arrangement automatically assures maximum use of sensible cooling in the finned coil and minimum use of evaporative cooling in the prime surface coil. The heat transfer method and flow control are arranged to achieve maximum water savings in the dry/wet mode. Plume is minimized by reducing the amount of evaporated water and the heating of the entire discharge air with the dry finned coil.
Combined Dry-Wet Operation Mode
Water Consumption
1. Water Distribution System; 2. Air In; 3. Air Out; 4. Prime Surface Coil; 5. Wet Deck Surface; 6. Finned Coil; 7. Spray Pump; 8. Sump; 9. Axial Fan.
Adiabatic Mode
The adiabatic mode occurs when the fluid to be cooled completely bypasses the evaporative prime surface coil. No heat is rejected from this coil and the recirculating spray water merely serves to saturate and adiabatically pre-cool the incoming outside air. In most climates, the ambient air still has considerable potential for absorbing moisture. Thus adiabatic cooling of the incoming air results in significantly lower air temperatures, which greatly increases the rate of sensible heat transfer. Compared to conventional evaporative cooling equipment, visible plume and water consumption are greatly reduced while maintaining the low fluid design temperatures required to maximize system efficiency.
Adiabatic Operation Mode
Water Consumption
Baltimore Aircoil
HXI - D 29
Dry Mode
During the dry operation mode the spray water system is turned off, saving on pump energy. The fluid to be cooled is fed from the finned coil to the prime surface coil. The modulating flow control valve remains fully open to ensure both coils receive the full fluid flow in series; hence the maximum heat transfer surface is available. In this mode no water consumption occurs, and plume is completely eliminated. HXI units can be economically selected for dry bulb switchover points of 10C to 15C or higher, depending on the specific needs of the project. When the equipment operates in the dry mode for prolonged periods, draining the cold water basin is recommended, eliminating the need for freeze protection and water treatment.
Dry Operation Mode
Water Consumption
HXI - D 30
Winter Operation
Hybrid Evaporative Fluid Cooler coil(s) must be protected from damage by freezing of the fluid inside the coil(s) when exposed to subfreezing conditions. Freeze protection can be obtained by the use of ethylene or propylene glycol or other anti-freeze solutions in appropriate concentrations. If no anti-freeze solution can be used, refer to the heat loss data hereunder and to the section Winter Operation of the HXI operating and maintenance instructions bulletin M290.
HXI Model N 420-K 421-K 422-K 430-L 431-L 432-L 440-M 441-M 442-M 540-O 541-O 542-O Q540-O Q541-O 560-O 561-O 562-O Q560-O Q561-O 640-O 641-O 642-O Q640-O Q641-O 660-O 661-O 662-O Q660-O Q661-O
Heatloss Data (kW) (1) Standard Unit 85 90 95 127 135 143 167 178 189 210 225 240 240 270 318 340 365 365 415 250 265 282 282 315 374 397 421 421 468
Coil Volumes Prime Surface Coil (l) 122 174 226 175 256 337 236 344 452 349 510 671 716 1038 517 762 1052 1542 1562 377 550 723 771 1117 558 821 1084 1132 1658 Finned Coil (l) 150 150 150 214 214 214 277 277 277 349 349 349 349 349 533 533 533 533 533 450 450 450 450 450 644 644 644 644 644
Pan Volume Operating Level (mm) 556 556 556 847 847 847 1137 1137 1137 685 685 685 685 685 1036 1036 1036 1036 1036 785 785 785 785 785 1187 1187 1187 1187 1187
Notes:
1. Heat loss data, based on 10C coil water and -14C with 20 m/s wind velocity (fans and pump off). 2. Electric immersion heaters with thermostat and low level cut out. All components are factory installed in the cooler pan. Heaters are selected to maintain +4C pan water at -18C ambient temperature. In outdoor locations trace heating and insulation of spray pump(s) (by others) may be required for freeze protection. See section "Accessories" for more information on Basin Heaters.
Remote Sump Data

Baltimore Aircoil
HXI - D 31
Structural Support
1. Unit, 2. Unit outline, 3. Air intake, 4. Mounting holes
Model HXI / HXIQ 42X 43X 44X (Q) 54X (Q)-56X (Q)64X (Q)66X
Max. Deflection (mm) (4) 5 8 10 10 12 10 12
Dimensions (mm) W 2385 2385 2385 2985 2985 3610 3610 L 1860 2775 3690 3690 5520 3690 5520 A 2325 2325 2325 2925 2925 3550 3550 B 2440 2440 C 255 255 255 255 270 255 270
N of 16mm Anchorbolts 4 4 4 4 8 4 8
Notes :
1. Support steel and anchor bolts to be designed and furnished by others. 2. All support steel must be level at the top. 3. Beams must be selected in accordance with accepted structural practice. Maximum deflection of beam under unit see table. 4. If vibration isolation rails are to be used between the unit and supporting steel, be certain to allow for the length of the vibration rails when determining the length of the supporting steel, as vibration rail length and mounting hole locations may differ from those of the unit. 5. If point vibration isolation is used with multi-cell units, the isolators must be located under the support steel, not between the support steel and the towers.
HXI - D 32
1.0 Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Furnish and install _____ factory-assembled, induceddraft, axial fan, closed circuit hybrid cooling tower(s) with vertical air discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications, schedules and as shown on the plans. The unit shall be able to operate in combined dry/wet, adiabatic and dry modes for plume abatement and minimum water consumption. Overall dimensions shall not exceed approximately _____ mm long x ______ mm wide x _____ mm high. Operating weight shall not exceed ________kg. The closed circuit hybrid cooling tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model ____________. 1.2 Thermal Capacity: The closed circuit hybrid cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to cool _____ l/s of ________% by volume aqueous ethylene/propylene glycol solution (water) from ______ C to _____C at _____C entering wet-bulb temperature and from ________C to _________C at _________C entering dry bulb temperature. Total coil pressure drop shall not exceed __________kPa. 1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction (standard): Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel with all edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound and the exterior protected with the BALTIPLUS Corrosion Protection. (Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional): Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting, hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program. 1.4 Quality Assurance: The cooling tower manufacturer shall have a Management System certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of products and services. 1.5 Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of startup or eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.

2.1. Coil Sections: The dry finned coil shall consist of copper tubes with rippled edge, aluminum flat plate fins, and headers of seamless copper tubes installed in a heavy-gauge aluminum casing. Fins shall have full drawn collars to maintain consistent fin spacing and a continuous surface contact over the entire tube for maximum heat transfer. The coil shall have a design pressure of 10 bar and be pneumatically tested at 15 bar. Staggered tube coil arrangement and fin density shall be optimized for maximum sensible heat transfer during all operation modes with minimum airside pressure drop. The prime surface coil shall be encased in a heavy-gauge galvanized steel casing. The coil shall be constructed of continuous serpentine all prime surface steel, be pneumatically tested 15 bar, and be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. The coil shall be designed for free drainage of fluid and shall be PED compliant. Maximum allowable working pressure shall be 10 bar. 2.2.Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be constructed of heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized steel. The basin shall include a depressed section with drain/clean-out connection. Standard accessories shall include large area, lift-out steel strainers with perforated openings sized smaller than water distribution nozzle orifices, an integral anti-vortexing hood to prevent air entrainment, waste water bleed line, and brass make-up valve with large diameter plastic float arranged for easy adjustment.

3.1. Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow low noise, with aluminum alloy blades. Air shall discharge through a fan cylinder designed for streamlined air entry and minimum fan blade tip clearance for maximum fan efficiency. Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported by heavy-duty, self-aligning, grease-packed ball bearings with moisture-proof seals and integral slinger rings, designed for minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours. Fan(s) shall be belt driven and specifically designed for evaporative cooling service. Fan and motor sheave(s) shall be fabricated from cast aluminum. 3.2. Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing, designed specifically for evaporative cooling duty on _____ volts___ hertz ___ phase electrical service. The motor shall be furnished with special moisture protection on windings, shafts, and bearings. Each motor shall be mounted on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor base.

4.1. BACross Wet Deck Surface and Drift Eliminators: The wet deck surface and integral drift eliminators shall be formed from plastic material and shall be impervious to rot, decay, fungus and biological attack. The surface shall be manufactured and performance tested by the closed circuit cooling tower manufacturer to provide single source responsibility and assure control of the final product. A separate set of drift eliminators shall be removable in easily handled sections for quick access to the coil. Eliminators shall have a minimum of three changes in air direction.
Baltimore Aircoil
HXI - D 33
5.0 Combined Inlet Shield Technology

6.0 Access
6.1. Plenum Access: A large, hinged access door shall be provided on each end wall for access to the prime surface coil, drift eliminators, and fan plenum section. The water make-up valve, float ball, and suction strainer shall be easily accessible.
7.0 Sound
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
8000
dB(A)
HXI - D 34
HXI offers Economic Advantages

HXI First Cost Benefits
Heat rejection equipment must be selected for the maximum heat load at summer peak air temperatures. In most climates peak wet-bulb temperatures are significantly lower than peak dry-bulb temperatures. Evaporative cooling equipment based on the ambient air wet-bulb therefore has a greater temperature driving force, thus allowing the use of lower system temperatures. This greater driving force also allows the use of less and thus more cost-effective heat transfer surface area. Since the HXI concept utilizes evaporative cooling during peak load operation it Dry-bulb / Wet-bulb difference versus climate inherently benefits from this advantage. Evaporatively zone cooled units such as the HXI have a plan area and fan kilowatt advantage over the typical air-cooled arrangement, saving on support structures and electrical hookups. The HXI design also avoids the corrosion and scaling that can be associated with spraying of standard air-cooled equipment on design days for additional capacity. The lower process fluid temperatures that can be achieved compared to air-cooled systems and the greatly reduced fouling factors of closed loop cooling result in lower first cost of process equipment such as chillers or refrigeration compressors. Lastly, the costs associated with plume abatement are eliminated, as the design is inherently plume-free.
HXI Operating Cost Benefits

Due to its water saving concept and Combined Flow design, the HXI offers significant operating cost benefits. Water consumption is minimized throughout the year. During peak summer operation a large amount of heat load is already transferred by the finned coil. As the ambient temperature and/or heat load drops, the amount of evaporative heat transfer is further reduced by controlling the flow through the wet coil. This reduces the evaporation loss and blow-down as well as water treatment requirements compared to conventional evaporative cooling equipment. In the adiabatic mode only a small amount of water is needed to saturate the air and the amount of blow-down is reduced even further. Finally in the dry mode no water is used at all (while saving the energy associated with running the spray pump). With HXI hybrid units water savings up to 70% or more are possible. Depending on local water costs and availability, this advantage alone can pay for the equipment in as little as two years through cost savings in water use, water treatment chemicals, and higher system efficiencies. In addition, fouling potential associated with open circuit cooling towers is eliminated through both the closed loop cooling system and the Advanced Coil Technology design of the HXI, assuring peak efficiency and energy savings over time. Finally, the induced draft propeller fan design results in low fan energy requirements compared to centrifugal fan units.
Closed Circuit Cooling Systems offer the lowest fluid temperatures
Typical annual distribution of ambient temperature with the three operating modes
Baltimore Aircoil
HFL - D 35
Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
Product Detail
HFL Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Towers ........................................ D36 Benefits ..................................................................................................... D38 Construction Details ................................................................................ D40 Custom Features and Options ................................................................ D42 Accessories ............................................................................................... D44 Engineering Data ..................................................................................... D45 Structural Support .................................................................................. D55 Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... D57
HFL - D 36
HFL Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Towers

Capacity
Single Cell Capacity 9 to 90 l/s (30% E.G.) at 32/27/22C
General Description
The HFL combines the air cooled and evaporative technologies in one product providing the benefit of low cooling temperature and high process efficiency in the summer with the water saving advantage of air-cooled equipment in the winter. The HFL features a unique sump concept, which offers next to the principle of intelligent water saving an unprecedented level of operation flexibility. Additional features, such as compactness, ease of maintenance, low height, very low operating weight and effective suppression of plume, make this product your first choice for heat rejection applications.
Key Features
Effective suppression of plume Maximum water savings Operational flexibility Very low operating weight Ease of access and cleanability for superior maintenance Compactness
Baltimore Aircoil
HFL - D 37
HFL - D 38
Benefits
Effective Suppression of Plume
The finned coil(s) installed in the discharge air stream of the HFL Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Tower unit will raise the temperature and reduce the relative humidity of the discharge air. During wet operation this suppresses the formation of visible plume even when the relative humidity of the ambient air is high. Installation of the optional three-way valve flow control package will furthermore enhance the plume suppressing effect in that this control package ensures that at any atmospheric condition only as much evaporative cooling is applied as needed to satisfy the load requirement. Therefore the air leaving the wet portion of the equipment is dryer than is the case with conventional evaporative cooling equipment and has a much lower tendency to generate plume. The combination of finned discharge coil and three-way valve flow control package virtually eliminates the formation of visible plume even under extremely humid conditions. It is obvious that during the periods of dry operation no plume formation will occur.

To achieve a maximal reduction of water consumption in a cost-effective way, it is essential to make the best use of the heat exchangers incorporated in the HFL Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Tower. The fluid to be cooled is first fed to the finned coil(s) and then subsequently to the prime surface coil, which can either operate in wet or dry mode. This way the finned coil contributes to the heat rejection even in the summertime, when the prime surface coil is operated wet. The addition of the finned coil heat exchange surface has a significant impact on the switch point condition. Dry operation now can occur not only in wintertime but also in spring and fall and depending on the load profile even a good portion of the summer season is suitable for dry operation. To further improve the water saving feature of the HFL a three-way valve flow control system (optional) can be integrated in the piping between the finned and the prime surface coil. This intelligent control system ensures that evaporative cooling is only applied when needed and as much as needed. This way water savings up to 60% can be achieved when compared to a conventional evaporative fluid cooler.
Operational Flexibility
A critical aspect of hybrid products is the switch over from wet operation to dry operation and vice versa. In particular when during dry operation water remains in the sump, the potential danger of ice formation and subsequent damage exists in subfreezing conditions. To prevent this, manufacturers recommend draining the sump during the dry operation period. Depending on the ambient climatic conditions, sump draining may not be possible, because draining and refilling a sump requires at least several hours and hence cannot be conducted on a 24-hour cycle. To cope HFL units have been tested in subfreezing with this problem, installing a conventional conditions remote sump in a heated area inside the building is adequate, but adds complexity, costs and extra space. The HFL Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Tower has a unique sump design, which includes a wet and a dry sump. During dry operation all water will drain from the dry sump into the wet sump, which is shielded from the airstream. Heaters in the wet sump are sufficiently sized to prevent freezing at temperatures as low as -25C at full speed of the fan system. Both sumps are compactly integrated into the design of the B.A.C. HFL unit. It is for the first time that the operational flexibility and safety of a remote sump arrangement has been integrated into a factory-assembled product.
Baltimore Aircoil
HFL - D 39
Very Low Operating Weight

This is achieved by the fact that the sump water content of the HFL Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Tower is only about one quarter of the sump water content of a conventional evaporative fluid cooler. The HFL units from B.A.C. only contain the amount of water needed to wet the prime surface coil(s). This way it is avoided that supports are designed for a dead weight created by the amount of water which is in the sump, but does not contribute to the cooling process.
Ease of Access and Cleanability for Superior Maintenance

Access to the wet sump is provided through rectangular access doors at the connection end of the equipment. The wet sump is separated from the dry sump by a separation panel. This permits access to the wet sump even when the fan system is in operation, which is NOT possible with conventional equipment in forced draught configuration. Make up can be inspected and sump strainers can be cleaned whilst the cooler operates. Due to the separation panel there is also no turbulence of the sump water, which in Access to wet sump conventional designs is created by the airstream. Maintenance points in the dry sump access is provided by circular access door(s) at the side of the equipment. The bottom of the dry sump is sloping so that all water sprayed over the coil (during wet operation) will drain into the wet sump. The wet sump is compact, can be drained and cleaned easily. It is also easy to disinfect the wet sump; when this should be required.
Compactness
The HFL Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Tower has a compact design. The models have a low height and up to three fans are operated on a singe shaft with one electrical motor. Double cells can be arranged side by side with no intermediate space requirements, which allows making maximum use of the available floor space. Side by side arrangements are possible due to the fact that the access to the wet sump is at the rear end (connection end) of the equipment and that access to the dry sump only from one side is sufficient.
HFL - D 40

All major structural components are constructed from heavy gauge Z600 galvanised steel Double brake flanges are used to maximise panel and connection strength
Three distinct changes in air direction to reduce drift loss significantly Assembled in easy to handle sections, which can be removed for access to the equipment interior
2. Water Distribution System (Not Shown)

Large orifice low pressure nozzles are oriented for optimum water distribution over the heat transfer surface Non-corrosive spray branches Grommeted nozzles and branches allow quick removal and cleaning
4. Hight Efficiency Air Moving System

Forwardly curved centrifugal fan wheels A close coupled transition duct uniquely curved and flared Two piece fan housings for ease of fan and shaft removal.
5. Fan Shaft and Bearings (Not Shown)

Heavy duty self aligning relubricable ball bearings with cast iron housings Hollow shaft protection with two part epoxy coating
3. Drift Eliminators (Not Shown)

UV resistant non-corrosive material, impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
Baltimore Aircoil
HFL - D 41
Shafts supported by bearings at each shaft end, no intermediate bearings
11. Make-Up Arrangement (Not Shown)

Factory installed and set electrical float switch Slow closing solenoid valve
6. Fan Motor
TEFC with IP 55 protection, class F insulation Sized for dry operation as standard Location in protected area beneath the fan housing
12. Evaporative Heat Transfer Coil

Prime surface tube circuits Designed for max. 10 bar operating pressure according to PED Sloping tubes for free fluid drainage
7. Fan Drive System

Belt drive
8. Access
Rectangular access door(s) at the connection end provide access to the wet sump, even if the fan system is running Rectangular access door(s) provided in the plenum section under the finned discharge coil, for easy access to the water distribution system Circular access door(s) at side(s) provide access to the air distribution plenum (dry sump)
13. Finned Discharge Coil

Copper tubes with aluminium plate fins Designed for max. 10 bar operating pressure according to PED Fins with full drawn collars Staggered arrangement of minimum 4 circuits

Close Coupled, Bronze fitted, centrifugal pump Completely piped from suction strainer to the water distribution system Installed at the connection end for ease of access
9. Spray Water Collection

Sloping air separation and air distribution bottom panels to ensure complete drainage of spray water in the wet sump
10. Suction Strainer

Cylindrical lift out strainer of anti-vortex design
HFL - D 42

Coil Configurations
Standard Serpentine Coil: The standard cooling coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF). The coil is designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 10 bar and PED certified Optional Stainless Steel Coil: Coils are available in Type 304 L and 316 L stainless steel for specialized applications. The Finned Discharge Coil coil is designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. Stainless steel coils must be combined with the stainless steel material options or the Baltibond Corrosion Protection System Finned Discharge Coil (FDC): To enhance the water saving capability of wet-dry HFL units, finned discharge coils are added. These coils consist of copper tubes with corrugated aluminium plate fins, installed in a heavy gauge aluminium casing. All finned discharge coils have minimum four rows providing a significant heat exchange surface for dry operation.
Fan Drive System

Baltimore Aircoil
HFL - D 43

Low Sound Operation

Factory tested HFL Sound Attenuation (Special Execution NR45 at 10 m)
HFL units are fitted with an electric water level control to allow precise water level control. This package consists of a float switch mounted in the basin and a solenoid activated valve in the make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize water hammer.
HFL - D 44
Accessories
Basin Heaters
HFL units exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to prevent freezing of the water in the wet sump. Factory-installed heaters, which maintain the water temperature at 4C, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection. The heater package includes the heaters, a thermostat and a low level cut out switch to protect the heaters if the water level is too low. The standard electric heaters are selected for -20C ambient temperature.
Model Number HFL HFL 96 X & HFL 48 X HFL 72 X & HFL 96 X HFL 108 X & HFL 144 X HFL 150 X & HFL 192 X HFL 180 X & HFL 240 X HFL 216 X & HFL 288 X Heaters (-20C) (kW) 2x3 2x4 2x5 4x4 2x4+2x5 4x5
Discharge Hoods
Discharge hoods reduce the risk of re-circulation in tight enclosures by increasing discharge air velocity, and can be used to elevate the unit discharge above adjacent walls to comply with layout guidelines. They can also be fitted with positive closure dampers and damper actuators to minimize heat loss from convection air during idle conditions. Hoods and dampers create external static pressure and fan motors must be sized accordingly.
Capacity Control
To achieve maximum water saving it is recommended to run the fan system always at full speed. There may however be applications where capacity control by a change of fan speed is needed. In such cases several options are available: Two speed motors either as Dahlander or with separate windings Modulating fan damper controls, consisting of an aerofoil damper blade located in the discharge of each fan housing. The control package consists of a 24 Volt transformer, a damper motor actuator with end switches and a temperature controller. All components except the temperature controller are factory installed.

Flow control packages are available in combination with finned discharge coils. The control package includes a three way valve and a temperature sensor and the additional connecting piping. Flow control packages enhance water saving by making intelligent use of evaporative cooling only when needed and as much as needed.
Baltimore Aircoil
HFL - D 45
Engineering Data
HFL 36X - 48X (Single Cell Units)
1. Access; 2. Make-up; 3. Electric Float Switch; 4. Overflow; 5. Drain; 6. Water Treatment Connection; 7.Bare Coil Fluid Inlet ND100; 8. Bare Coil Fluid Outlet ND100; 9. Vent; 10. FDC Fluid Inlet ND80; 11. FDC Fluid Outlet ND80; 12. Three-Way valve; 13. Orifice; 14. Terminal Box; 15. Operating Level; 16. Overflow Level.
Dimensions (mm) Model HFL Fan Pump Air- Spray- Ship. Oper. Heaviest Motor Motor flow flow Weight Weight Section (kW) (kW) (m/s) (l/s) (kg) (kg) (kg) 11 15 15 7,5 15 15 11 11 15 15 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 1,1 1,1 1,1 1,1 12,7 13,8 13,4 10,8 13,0 12,5 13,6 13,4 14,6 14,3 9 9 9 9 9 9 12,1 12,1 12,1 12,1 2025 2035 2305 2495 2565 2825 2730 3070 3080 3410 2680 2690 3010 3350 3420 3830 4170 4630 4640 5100 2025 2035 2305 2495 2565 2825 2730 3070 3080 3410 F 610 610 845 1080 1080 1315 845 1080 1080 1315 H 2175 2175 2410 2675 2675 2880 2410 2675 2675 2880 L 2730 2730 2730 2730 2730 2730 3650 3650 3650 3650 W 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
FDC
3-Way Valve Arrangement Oper. Weight (kg) 120 120 120 120 120 120 300 300 300 300 Heaviest Section (kg) 70 70 70 70 70 70 130 130 130 130
Ship. Oper. Ship. Weight Weight Weight (kg) (kg) (kg) 250 250 250 250 250 250 315 315 315 315 315 315 315 315 315 315 400 400 400 400 80 80 80 80 80 80 190 190 190 190
HFL 361-L HFL 361-M HFL 362-M HFL 363-K HFL 363-M HFL 364-M HFL 482-L HFL 483-L HFL 483-M HFL 484-M
HFL - D 46
Dimension (mm) Model HFL Fan Motor (kW) 18,5 22 11 22 22 30 18,5 22 30 22 30 30 Pump Air- Spray- Ship. Oper. Heaviest Motor flow flow Weight Weight Section (kW) (m/s) (l/s) (kg) (kg) (kg) 1,1 1,1 1,1 1,1 1,1 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 22,8 24,0 19,3 23,4 22,9 28,7 24,5 25,9 28,3 25,6 27,9 27,4 17,9 17,9 17,9 17,9 17,9 24,2 24,2 24,2 24,2 24,2 24,2 24,2 4000 4020 4510 4550 5090 4190 4700 4740 4840 5400 5500 6150 5495 5515 6225 6265 6935 5650 6400 6440 6540 7340 7440 8430 4000 4020 4510 4550 5090 4190 4700 4740 4840 5400 5500 6150 F 845 845 1080 1080 1315 610 845 845 845 1080 1080 1315 H 2410 2410 2675 2675 2880 2175 2410 2410 2410 2675 2675 2880 L 2730 2730 2730 2730 2730 3650 3650 3650 3650 3650 3650 3650 W 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400
FDC Ship. Weight (kg) 420 420 420 420 420 525 525 525 525 525 525 525
3-Way Valve Arrangement Heaviest Section (kg) 180 180 180 180 180 220 220 220 220 220 220 220
Oper. Ship. Oper. Weight Weight Weight (kg) (kg) (kg) 555 555 555 555 555 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 270 270 270 270 270 290 290 290 290 290 290 290 420 420 420 420 420 460 460 460 460 460 460 460
HFL 722-N HFL 722-O HFL 723-L HFL 723-O HFL 724-O HFL 961-P HFL 962-N HFL 962-O HFL 962-P HFL 963-O HFL 963-P HFL 964-P
Baltimore Aircoil
HFL - D 47
Model HFL
Fan Pump Air- SprayShip. Motor Motor flow flow Weight (kW) (m/s) (l/s) (kg) (kW) 22 30 22 30 22 30 30 37 22 30 22 30 37 30 37 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 33,3 36,9 32,4 35,9 31,1 34,5 33,8 36,2 33,7 37,3 32,8 36,3 38,9 35,6 38,2 26,9 26,9 26,9 26,9 26,9 26,9 26,9 26,9 36,3 36,3 36,3 36,3 36,3 36,3 36,3 5310 5330 6050 6070 6840 6860 7660 7760 7220 7240 8170 8190 8290 9160 9260
Dimensions (mm) Oper. Heaviest Weight Section (kg) (kg) 7280 7300 8250 8270 9410 9430 10360 10460 10360 10380 11670 11690 11790 13130 13230 5310 5330 6050 6070 6840 6860 7660 7760 7220 7240 8170 8190 8290 9160 9260 F 610 610 845 845 1080 1080 1315 1315 845 845 1080 1080 1080 1315 1315 H 2175 2175 2410 2410 2675 2675 2880 2880 2410 2410 2675 2675 2675 2880 2880 L 2730 2730 2730 2730 2730 2730 2730 2730 3650 3650 3650 3650 3650 3650 3650 W 3605 3605 3605 3605 3605 3605 3605 3605 3605 3605 3605 3605 3605 3605 3605
FDC Ship. Weight (kg) 590 590 590 590 590 590 590 590 760 760 760 760 760 760 760
3-Way Valve Arrangement Heaviest Section (kg) 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 340 340 340 340 340 340 340
Oper. Ship. Oper. Weight Weight Weight (kg) (kg) (kg) 805 805 805 805 805 805 805 805 1055 1055 1055 1055 1055 1055 1055 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 510 510 510 510 510 510 510 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 670 890 890 890 890 890 890 890
HFL 1081-O HFL 1081-P HFL 1082-O HFL 1082-P HFL 1083-O HFL 1083-P HFL 1084-P HFL 1084-Q HFL 1442-O HFL 1442-P HFL 1443-O HFL 1443-P HFL 1443-Q HFL 1444-P HFL 1444-Q
HFL - D 48
HFL 150X - 192X (Double Cell Units)
Dimensions (mm) Model HFL Fan Motor (kW) Pump Motor (kW) Air- Spray- Ship. Oper. Heaviest flow flow Weight Weight Section (m/s) (l/s) (kg) (kg) (kg) 45,6 48,0 38,6 46,8 45,8 57,4 49,0 51,8 56,6 51,2 55,8 54,8 35,8 35,8 35,8 35,8 35,8 48,4 48,4 48,4 48,4 48,4 48,4 48,4 8000 8040 9020 9100 10180 8380 9400 9480 9680 10800 11000 12300 10990 11030 12450 12530 13870 11300 12800 12880 13080 14680 14880 16860 4000 4020 4510 4550 5090 4190 4700 4740 4840 5400 5500 6150 F 845 845 1080 1080 1315 610 845 845 845 1080 1080 1315 H 2410 2410 2675 2675 2880 2175 2410 2410 2410 2675 2675 2880 L 2730 2730 2730 2730 2730 3650 3650 3650 3650 3650 3650 3650 W 4840 4840 4840 4840 4840 4840 4840 4840 4840 4840 4840 4840
FDC
3-Way Valve Arrangement Oper. Heaviest Weight Section (kg) (kg) 840 840 840 840 840 920 920 920 920 920 920 920 180 180 180 180 180 220 220 220 220 220 220 220
Ship. Oper. Ship. Weight Weight Weight (kg) (kg) (kg) 840 840 840 840 840 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 540 540 540 540 540 580 580 580 580 580 580 580
HFL 1502-N 18,5+18,5 1,1+1,1 HFL 1502-O 22+22 1,1+1,1 HFL 1503-L 11+11 1,1+1,1 HFL 1503-O 22+22 1,1+1,1 HFL 1504-O 22+22 1,1+1,1 HFL 1921-P 30+30 2,2+2,2 HFL 1922-N 18,5+18,5 2,2+2,2 HFL 1922-O 22+22 2,2+2,2 HFL 1922-P 30+30 2,2+2,2 HFL 1923-O 22+22 2,2+2,2 HFL 1923-P 30+30 2,2+2,2 HFL 1924-P 30+30 2,2+2,2
Baltimore Aircoil
HFL - D 49
HFL 180X - 240 X (Double Cell Units)
Dimensions (mm) Model HFL Fan Motor (kW) Pump Motor (kW) Air- Spray- Ship. flow flow Weight (m/s) (l/s) (kg) Oper. Weight (kg) Heaviest Section (kg)
FDC Ship. Weight (kg)
3-Way Valve Arrangement Oper. Heaviest Weight Section (kg) (kg)

1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1350 1350 1350 1350 1350 320 320 320 320 320 340 340 340 340 340
Oper. Ship. Weight Weight (kg) (kg)

1360 1360 1360 1360 1360 1755 1755 1755 1755 1755 700 700 700 700 700 800 800 800 800 800
HFL 1801-P HFL 1802-O HFL 1802-P HFL 1803-P HFL 1804-Q HFL 2402-O HFL 2402-P HFL 2403-P HFL 2403-Q HFL 2404-Q
22+30 18,5+22 22+30 22+30 22+37 18,5+22 22+30 22+30 30+37 30+37
1,1+2,2 1,1+2,2 1,1+2,2 1,1+2,2 1,1+2,2 2,2+4 2,2+4 2,2+4 2,2+4 2,2+4
61,5 55,2 59,9 57,9 59,1 58,2 63,2 61,9 66,8 65,6
44,8 44,8 44,8 44,8 44,8 60,5 60,5 60,5 60,5 60,5
8790 10050 10090 11410 12850 11920 11980 13590 13790 15410
12075 13745 13785 15695 17395 16760 16820 19030 19230 21660
5330 6050 6070 6860 7760 7220 7240 8190 8290 9260
610 845 845 1080 1315 845 845 1080 1080 1315
2175 2410 2410 2675 2880 2410 2410 2675 2675 2880
2730 2730 2730 2730 2730 3650 3650 3650 3650 3650
6045 6045 6045 6045 6045 6045 6045 6045 6045 6045
1010 1010 1010 1010 1010 1285 1285 1285 1285 1285
HFL - D 50
HFL 216X - 288X (Double Cell Units)
Dimensions (mm) Model HFL Fan Motor (kW) 30+30 22+22 30+30 30+30 37+37 22+22 30+30 22+22 30+30 37+37 37+37 Pump Air- Spray- Ship. Oper. Heaviest Motor flow flow Weight Weight Section (kW) (m/s) (l/s) (kg) (kg) (kg) 2,2+2,2 2,2+2,2 2,2+2,2 2,2+2,2 2,2+2,2 4+4 4+4 4+4 4+4 4+4 4+4 73,8 64,7 71,7 69,0 72,4 67,3 74,6 65,5 72,6 77,9 76,3 53,8 53,8 53,8 53,8 53,8 72,6 72,6 72,6 72,6 72,6 72,6 10660 12100 12140 13720 15520 14440 14480 16340 16380 16580 18520 14600 16500 16540 18860 20920 20720 20760 23340 23380 23580 26460 5330 6050 6070 6860 7760 7220 7240 8170 8190 8290 9260 F 610 845 845 1080 1315 845 845 1080 1080 1080 1315 H 2175 2410 2410 2675 2880 2410 2410 2675 2675 2675 2880 L 2730 2730 2730 2730 2730 3650 3650 3650 3650 3650 3650 W 7250 7250 7250 7250 7250 7250 7250 7250 7250 7250 7250
FDC
3-Way Valve Arrangement
Ship. Oper. Ship. Oper. Heaviest Weight Weight Weight Weight Section (kg) (kg) (kg) (kg) (kg) 1180 1180 1180 1180 1180 1520 1520 1520 1520 1520 1520 1610 1610 1610 1610 1610 2110 2110 2110 2110 2110 2110 860 860 860 860 860 1020 1020 1020 1020 1020 1020 1340 1340 1340 1340 1340 1780 1780 1780 1780 1780 1780 320 320 320 320 320 340 340 340 340 340 340
HFL 2161-P HFL 2162-O HFL 2162-P HFL 2163-P HFL 2164-Q HFL 2882-O HFL 2882-P HFL 2883-O HFL 2883-P HFL 2883-Q HFL 2884-Q
General Notes
1. All connections 150 mm and smaller are MPT. Connections 200 mm and larger are bevelled-for-welding. 2. Fan kW is for HFL units without FDC (0 Pa ESP.) and in wet operation. To operate against external static pressure up to 125 Pa, consult your local BAC Balticare representative for size and location. 3. Airflow is for HFL units without FDC. For air flow of units equipped with the FDC consult you local BAC Balticare Representative 4. Unit height is indicative, for precise value refer to certified print. 5. Shipping/operating weights indicated are for units without accessories such as sound attenuators, discharge hoods, etc. Consult factory certified prints to obtain weight additions and the heaviest section to be lifted. 6. The weights for the 3-way valve arrangement are the maximum weights.
Baltimore Aircoil
HFL - D 51
Sound Attenuation
HS and HD Sound Attenuation
1. Access; 2. FDC; 3. Discharge Attenuator; 4. Intake Attenuator HS, 5. Intake Attenuator HD; 6. Three-way valve arrangement.
VS Sound Attenuation
1. Access; 2. FDC; 3. Discharge Attenuator; 4. Intake Attenuator VS, 5. Intake Plenum VS; 6. Three-way valve arrangement.
HFL - D 52
HS attenuator Model HFL Solid Bottom + Intake (kg) 515 515 790 790 1065 1065 1580 1580 1855 1855 2130 2130 Discharge (kg) 255 315 420 510 590 715 840 1020 1010 1225 1180 1430 Total (kg) 770 830 1210 1300 1655 1780 2420 2600 2865 3080 3310 3560 Solid Bottom + Intake (kg) 710 710 1105 1105 1520 1520 2210 2210 2625 2625 3040 3040
HD attenuator Discharge (kg) 275 335 455 550 560 670 910 1100 1015 1220 1120 1340 Total (kg) 985 1045 1560 1655 2080 2190 3120 3310 3640 3845 4160 4380
VS attenuator Total (kg) 880 965 1330 1435 1830 1980 2660 2870 3160 3415 3660 3960
Dimensions "L" (mm) 2730 3650 2730 3650 2730 3650 2730 3650 2730 3650 2730 3650 "W" (mm) 1250 1250 2400 2400 3605 3605 4840 4840 6045 6045 7250 7250
HFL 36X-X HFL 48X-X HFL 72X-X HFL 96X-X HFL 108X-X HFL 144X-X HFL 150X-X HFL 192X-X HFL 180X-X HFL 240X-X HFL 216X-X HFL 288X-X
Baltimore Aircoil
HFL - D 53
Operation of the HFL "Wet/Dry" Sump Design

Wet Operation
The fluid to be cooled is fed to the HFL Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Tower. Through a water distribution system installed above the prime surface coil water is sprayed over the coil. From the coil the spray water drops into a plenum with a sloping bottom panel. The spray water is then drained to the wet sump, where it is collected and pumped to the water distribution system for another cycle. The sump is shielded from the air stream by a separation panel, which extends into a water lock. By means of the water lock the pressure difference between the equipment interior (elevated pressure) and the sump (atmospheric pressure) is equalised. The water lock is designed so that the fan(s) can be operated at any fan speed (and pressure) and maintain atmospheric pressure in the sump area. This way access to the sump is possible even if the fan system is in operation.
Dry Operation
During dry operation the spray water pump is shut off. The spray water drains into the wet sump. The sloping bottom of the plenum ensures complete drainage. In subfreezing conditions an electric sump heater located underneath the water lock will ensure that the water in the sump and in particular in the water lock area will not freeze. Air will be moved over the prime surface coil to reject the heat from the fluid fed to this coil. It is possible to consider the use of multi-step fan motors or modulating air flow controls, but if the aim is to achieve the maximum reduction of water consumption, it is recommended to maintain full airflow during wet operation and change fan speed only during dry operation periods.
Three Distinct Modes of Operation

Combined wet/dry Operating Mode
The fluid to be cooled is first fed to the finned discharge coil, where it is pre-cooled by the discharge air. Subsequently the fluid is fed to the prime surface coil, which is wetted by the spray system. By means of evaporative heat transfer the fluid is cooled to its desired exit temperature. With this arrangement already at peak conditions significant water savings can be achieved. At reduced heat load and/or ambient temperatures the three-way valve (optional), which is controlled by the design fluid outlet temperature, modulates the flow through the wetted prime surface coil. As flow and heat load for the wetted prime surface coil decrease, less and less evaporative heat transfer will occur and a significant amount of water is saved.
Adiabatic Operating Mode
Wet-Dry Operating Mode
When the fluid to be cooled completely bypasses the wetted prime surface coil, the adiabatic operating mode occurs. In this mode no heat is rejected from the wetted prime surface coil and no water is evaporated for heat rejection purposes. The only water that evaporates is the water needed to humidify the air stream subsequently led over the finned discharge coil. Due to humidification the temperature of this air is reduced and the heat transfer capability of the finned discharge coil is increased.
HFL - D 54 Dry Operating Mode
During this mode the spray water pump is off and the three-way valve is set, so that the full flow of the fluid to be cooled is fed to the prime surface coil. This way it is achieved that full benefit is taken from the heat exchange surfaces of both, the finned discharge coil and the prime surface coil, which in this mode is not wetted. In this mode no water is consumed at all.
Adiabatic Operating Mode
Dry Operating Mode
Operation Mode Dry-Wet Mode Adiabatic Mode Dry Mode
Dry Finned Coil Fluid Flow 100 % 100 % 100 %
Wet Prime Surface Coil Fluid Flow Modulating 0% 100 %
Spray Pump ON ON OFF
Fans ON ON ON*
Note: * During dry mode two-speed motor operation is also possible.
Baltimore Aircoil
HFL - D 55
Structural Support

HFL 36X to HFL 144X (Single Cell Units)
1. (4) 22 mm mounting holes; 2. Support Beams; 3. Fan Side; 4. Outline of Unit.
HFL 150X to HFL 288X (Double Cell Units)
1. (8) 22 mm mounting holes; 2. Support Beams; 3. Fan Side; 4. Outline of Unit.
HFL - D 56
Model HFL 36X HFL 48X HFL 72X HFL 96X HFL 108X HFL 144X HFL 150 X HFL 192 X HFL 180 X HFL 240 X HFL 216 X HFL 288 X
A 3334 4253 3334 4253 3334 4253 3334 4253 3334 4253 3334 4253
B 1194 1194 2344 2344 3551 3551 1194 1194 3551 3551 3551 3551
C 1194 1194 2344 2344 3551 3551
Baltimore Aircoil
HFL - D 57
1.0 Hybrid Closed Circuit Cooling Tower
1.0 General: Furnish and install ____factory assembled, forced draft, centrifugal fan, hybrid closed circuit cooling tower(s) with vertical air discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications and schedules as shown on the plans. Overall dimensions shall not exceed approximately ____mm long x ____mm wide x ____ mm high. The total connected fan kW shall not exceed ____kW. The total connected pump kW shall not exceed ____kW. The hybrid closed circuit cooling tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model(s) ________________. 1.2. Thermal Capacity (water as heat transfer fluid): The hybrid closed-circuit cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to cool ______lps of _______ water from ____C to ____C at ____C entering wet-bulb temperature and from ____C to ____C at ____C entering dry bulb temperature. (Alternate1.2.) Thermal Capacity (aqueous glycol solution as heat transfer fluid): The hybrid closed circuit cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to cool ________lps of _____% by volume ethylene/propylene glycol solution from ______C to _____C at _____C entering wet-bulb temperature and from ____C to ____C at ____C entering dry bulb temperature. Coil pressure drop shall not exceed ________bar. 1.3. Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel, with all sheared edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound. (Alternate1.3.) Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBONDCorrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 metric hot-dip galvanized steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, and dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting hybrid polymer fusebonded to the substrate during a thermally activated curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program. 1.4. Quality Assurance: The hybrid closed circuit cooling tower manufacturer shall have a management system certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of its products and services. Hybrid closed circuit cooling tower manufacturers that are not ISO9001:2000 certified shall provide an additional year of warranty to the customer at no additional cost. 1.5. Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of startup or eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first.

2.1.Tower Structure: The hybrid closed circuit cooling tower shall be constructed of heavy-gauge steel utilizing double-brake flanges for maximum strength and rigidity and reliable sealing of water-tight joints. All sheared edges shall be protected with a coating of zinc-rich compound. 2.2. Casing Assembly: The hybrid closed circuit cooling tower shall include a coil casing section consisting of a serpentine coil, spray water distribution system, and drift eliminators, as indicated by the manufacturer. Drift eliminators shall be removable in easily handled sections. They shall incorporate a minimum of three changes in air direction. 2.3. Coil Assembly: 2.3.1. Prime Surface Coil: The cooling coil shall be fabricated of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel at the manufacturers own facility, and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. The cooling coil shall be pneumatically tested at 10 bar. The cooling coil shall be designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. 2.3.2. Finned Discharge Coil: The cooling coil shall be fabricated of copper tubes with corrugated aluminium plate fins and seamless copper tube headers with connections. The cooling coil shall be pneumatically tested at 10 bar. Fins with full drawn collars to maintain consistent fin spacing and a continuous surface contact over the entire tube. Staggered arrangement of minimum 4 circuits. Coils with heavy-duty aluminium frame shall be installed in a casing from Z600 galvanised steel. Casing includes an access plenum with access doors. 2.4. Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed evenly over the coil at a minimum flow rate of 3.1 lps/m to ensure complete wetting of the coil at all times by large-diameter, non-clog, plastic 360 distribution nozzles spaced across the coil face area in spray branches by snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of individual nozzles or complete branches for cleaning or flushing. Nozzles shall utilize a two-stage diffusion pattern to provide overlapping, umbrella spray patterns that create multiple intersection points with adjacent nozzles. 2.5. Spray Pump System: The hybrid closed circuit cooling tower shall include a close-coupled, bronze-fitted centrifugal pump equipped with a mechanical seal, mounted on the basin and piped to the suction strainer and water distribution system. It shall be installed so that it can be drained when the basin is drained. The pump assembly shall include a metering valve and bleed line to control the bleed rate from the pump discharge to the overflow connection. The pump motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type with IP 54 protection and class B insulation suitable for outdoor service,_____ kW, _______Volt, ________Hz, ______Phase. 2.6. Basin Assembly: The hybrid closed circuit cooling tower sump design includes a wet and a dry sump. During dry operation all water will drain from the dry sump into the wet sump, which is shielded from the airstream. Heaters in the wet sump are sufficiently sized to prevent freezing at temperatures as low as 25C at full speed of the fan system. Both sumps are compactly integrated into the design of the hybrid closed circuit cooling tower(s). The combination sump/fan section shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 metric galvanized steel. The wet sump shall be provided with large area lift out strainers with perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution nozzles and an anti-vortexing device to prevent air entrainment. The strainer and vortex device shall be constructed of the same material as the cold water basin to prevent dissimilar metal corrosion.
HFL - D 58

4.0 Access
4.1. Access Wet Sump: Large rectangular access door(s) shall be provided on the connection end of the cooling tower for access to the wet sump of the cooling tower, including water make-up valve, float ball and suction strainer. 4.2. Access Dry Sump: Circular access door(s) shall be provided for easy access to the air distribution plenum. 4.3. Acces Water Distribution System: Rectangular acces doors shall be provided in the plenum section under the finned coil for easy acces to the water distribution system.
5.0 Sound
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
8000
dB(A)
Baltimore Aircoil
DFC - D 59
Dry and Adiabatic Fluid Coolers
Product Detail
DFC Dry & Adiabatic Fluid Coolers ..................................................... D60 Benefits ..................................................................................................... D62 Construction Details ................................................................................ D66 Custom Features and Options ................................................................ D68 Accessories ............................................................................................... D70 Engineering Data ..................................................................................... D72 Engineering Specifications DFCH / T ................................................... D81 Engineering Specifications DFCV ......................................................... D82 Engineering Specifications DFCV-AD .................................................. D83
DFC - D 60
DFC Dry & Adiabatic Fluid Coolers

Capacity
Single unit capacity: 30 1620 kW according to ENV1048 norm 1,5 85 l/s 34% glycol solution by volume at 40oC/35oC/25oC
General Description
DFC Dry Fluid Coolers are available in horizontal, vertical or V-shaped configuration in a wide capacity and sound level range. The DFC has been designed to deliver maximum thermal performance and longevity while minimising sound pressure, operational and installation costs. A wide range of models is being offered with adiabatic pre-cooling of the air to increase capacity with minimum water consumption.
Key Features
140 standard models 470 models total Available in horizontal, vertical or V-shaped configuration Heavy duty design requiring minimum maintenance Suitable for cooling of all common coolants Unique retractable legs to minimise shipping and installation costs Low maintenance Low sound models available for sound sensitive applications V-shaped models offered with Adiabatic Pre-Cooling of the intake air Optimised primary fluid pressure drops due to the availability of various tube diameters
Baltimore Aircoil
DFC - D 61
DFC - D 62
Benefits
Wide Capacity and Sound Level Range
Acoustical Testing on DFC Dry Cooler
Acoustical Testing on DFC Fans
The DFC Dry Fluid Cooler is available in a broad variety of fan configurations, coil designs and motor types, resulting in a wide and complete range of capacities, optimally satisfying capacity requirements and sound level limitations. Thermal and acoustical performance has been verified according to the Eurovent rating standard 7/C/003-1995 (thermal) and 8/1 (acoustical) for air cooled equipment. This assures guaranteed cooling efficiency and noise levels throughout the life of the equipment. The low speed, dry cooler range, applying a 12-pole motor, is especially designed for very sound sensitive application, such as residential areas. The application of 1/2" as well as 5/8 tubing allows the optimisation of the primary fluid pressure drop.
Capacity Testing of DFC Dry Coolers
Capacity Testing of DFC Dry Coolers
Baltimore Aircoil
DFC - D 63
Heavy Duty Design

The DFC Dry Fluid Cooler has been designed to meet demanding conditions of an industrial environment. Highly corrosion resistant materials, double break flanges and intermediate coil supports guarantee strong structural strength. The heat exchanger is made of high quality seamless copper tubes with wall thickness above industrial standard and thick and rigid aluminium fins with rippled corrugated fin surface.
Heavy Duty Design, Double-break Flanges
Heavy Duty Design, Intermediate Coil Supports
Quick and Easy Installation

The heat exchanger section is supported by unique retractable legs, which recess into the heat transfer section to reduce shipping volume and to facilitate quick and easy installation.
Retractable Legs: in
Retractable Legs: out
DFC - D 64
Low Maintenance & Ease of Access

Fan and motor of the DFC Dry fluid cooler are designed to be totally maintenance free. Large removable panels assure ease of access to the heat exchanger for inspection and cleaning.
Removable Panels
Removable Panels
Adiabatic Pre-Cooler Option

The V-shaped DFCV dry coolers can be offered with Adiabatic Pre-Cooling of the intake air, greatly enhancing the dry coolers capacity with minimum water usage. The ambient dry bulb temperature is depressed as the air passes through a highly efficient evaporative pad, especially designed to humidify and cool the air without aerosol formation and water carry-over on the dry coil. Water at 2 to 3 bar pressure is evenly distributed over the evaporative pad. Part of the water is evaporated, while the excess water assists in rinsing the pad to keep it free from debris and minerals that would stay behind on the pad after evaporation. The excess water leaves the adiabatic section via a gutter system to the sewer. (Re-circulating systems optionally available upon request). Unlike adiabatic coolers equipped with nozzle systems, the Adiabatic Pre-Cooler Option does not need high-pressure pumps and water treatment, and provides stable and predictable capacity.
DFCV with Adiabatic Pre-Cooler
Principle of Operation Adiabatic Fluid Cooler DFCV-AD
1. Water in; 2. Water out; 3. Evaporative Cooling Pad; 4. Adiabatic Dry bulb Depression; 5. Dry Coil.
Baltimore Aircoil
DFC - D 65
Safe Operation: - No aerosol formation, no risk of dispersion of contaminated droplets. (Legionella) - Designed as once-through system, without water recirculation or water stagnation. - Complete draining and drying of all water distribution piping after each adiabatic cycle. - Water used usually comes from potable supplies or wells at temperatures between 5 and 20C where Legionella is dormant. The Adiabatic pre-cooler and its evaporative pads can be easily removed during the colder seasons. If kept in place also during the colder seasons however, the adiabatic pre-cooling could be used to enhance energy saving operation and it acts as an air washer protecting the coil year-round from any air borne debris which could cause coil fouling.
Removal of Evaporative Pads
Removal of Adiabatic Section
DFC - D 66
DFC Horizontal Dry Cooler
DFC V-Shaped Dry Cooler with Adiabatic Pre-Cooler
Baltimore Aircoil
DFC - D 67

Structure and casing of bolted heavy gauge hot dipped galvanised steel panels Z275 with double break angles and intermediate coil supports. Casing painted with zinc aluminium coating.
2. Heat Exchanger (Not Shown)

Staggered tube arrangement with dense tube spacing. Rigid 0,17 mm and 0,14 mm thick aluminium fins with rippled, corrugated fin surface design with 2,5 mm fin spacing, creates turbulent air stream for high performance. High quality seamless 15,9 mm or 12,7 mm diameter copper tubes, with 0,4 mm wall thickness. Thick seamless copper headers and threaded steel connections.
3. Fan & Fan Motor

Low profile fan. Asymmetrically spaced and crenulated blades give low noise characteristics and increased efficiency. Fan designed for frequent starting, up to 60 times an hour. Continuous running at 40 oC to 65 oC air temperature. The bearing seals and encapsulation of the motor eliminate the possibility of contamination, hence extending the product life. The fan and motor are designed to be totally maintenance free. The fan can be located underneath the coil for high temperature applications.
4. Retractable Legs
The heat exchanger section is supported by columns which recess into the heat exchanger section to reduce shipping volume, and facilitate installation.
5. Removable Panels
Large removable panels assure ease of access to the heat exchanger for inspection and cleaning.
6. Adiabatic Pre-Cooler Option

Evaporative cooling pad casing in bolted heavy gauge hot dipped galvanised steel panels or in stainless steel. Sloping water collecting sump, draining water, once through to sewage. High efficient impregnated cellulose paper evaporative cooling pad. Solenoid valve for draining of water distribution piping, and high efficient in-line water filter.
DFC - D 68

Casing Construction Options
Standard Construction: Structure and casing are constructed of bolted heavy gauge hot dipped galvanised steel panels Z275 (275 gr. of zinc per m2) with double break angles and intermediate coil supports. Panels are bolted with the best hardware available on the market, triple protected against corrosion, with zinc phosphate treatment, zinc rich inorganic resin coating and aluminium rich organic topcoat. As standard the outside of the casing is painted with Baltiplus zinc aluminium polymeric coating. Optional epoxy coating: The outside of the casing is available with protective epoxy coating as an option, for installation in more aggressive environments in industrial applications or installation at coastal areas.
High Temperature Configuration

The standard fan motor configuration is suitable for continuous running at 40 oC to 65 oC air temperature. For high temperature fluid cooling applications, where air discharge temperature may exceed 65 oC, the fans can be positioned underneath the coil in the incoming air stream, pushing the air through the heat exchanger.
DFC in High Temperature execution
Heat Exchanger Construction Materials

The standard materials of construction for the heat exchanger are seamless copper tubes with 0,4-mm wall thickness and corrugated aluminium fins of 0,17 or 0,14 mm thickness and 2,5 fin spacing. For aggressive environments in industrial applications or installation at coastal areas, the following optional fin materials are available:
Heat Exchanger
- Aluminium fins with pre-coated hydrophobic anti-corrosion surface treatment. Both sides of the aluminium fin are coated with a layer of epoxy phenolic resin. After thermosetting the high quality and firmly bonded hydrophobic film is highly effective in minimising salt corrosion and has excellent solvent resistance. - Copper fins of 0,2 mm thickness in lieu of aluminium. For the cooling of aggressive fluids incompatible with copper, a heat exchanger is available with stainless steel tubes. Stainless steel tubes are 15,8 mm diameter with 0,7 mm wall thickness, made of TP 304L grade stainless steel with aluminum fins.
Baltimore Aircoil
DFC - D 69
Adiabatic Pre-Cooler Option

Standard V-shaped B.A.C. Dry Coolers cool the liquid in a closed circuit by means of sensible heat transfer from the heat exchanger to the air at ambient dry bulb temperature. In applications where the required fluid outlet temperature approaches the design ambient dry bulb temperature, dry cooling becomes ineffective and evaporative cooling or hybrid cooling should be chosen as the most efficient way of cooling under these conditions.
Pre-Cooler on V-Shape Unit It is however possible that water supply shortage requires a high dry-to-wet switch point and water conserving measures beyond the capabilities of hybrid coolers. For these applications the DFCV coolers are available with an Adiabatic Pre-Cooler, cooling the air through aerosol-less evaporation of the water in the air. Unlike comparable adiabatic spray type coolers, the Adiabatic Pre-Cooler cools the incoming air without the production of water droplets or aerosols and without water carry-over on the dry coil.
DFC - D 70
Accessories
Wiring to Terminal Box
Each fan can be wired to a terminal box of IP55 enclosure located at the fluid connection end of the cooler, or at the opposite side. The wiring can be specified for single speed fan operation or for dual fan speed operation through delta/star reconnect.
Two-Speed Switch
All motors are suitable for dual speed operation through delta/star re-connect. A two-speed switch can be supplied as an option, installed on the unit for manual changeover.
Variable Speed Drive

Designed specifically for energy-optimised fan control, variable speed drive is available for the simultaneous speed control of the fans of the Dry Cooler. The variable speed drive is of EMC lownoise design, delivered with control panel and EMC filter. It has a built-in PID controller for fast Wiring to Terminal Box and accurate control of the fans through a direct connection to a temperature sensor. The drive is equipped with a manual/auto button for maintenance purposes. The drive is delivered with factory settings, but its menu-driven operating system allows easy re-programming in the field.
Safety Switch
If required by local codes a safety switch for each fan can be installed in the wiring to the terminal box, to be used as a maintenance switch.
Safety Switch
Baltimore Aircoil
DFC - D 71
Starter Panels
Starter panel of IP55 enclosure is available with main switch, main fuses, general contactor relay with emergency cut-out switch, control circuit fuse, thermal contactor and coil for each fan, wired to the fan motor thermostatic cut-out switch. Alternatively, starter panels designed for capacity control by fan cycling can be provided, with electronic step controller, as sequence controller with direct entry and setting of all data and immersion temperature sensor with protection pocket made of brass.
Electrical Panel
Sound Attenuation
Low Sound Dry Cooler models with low speed motors are available for installation in sound sensitive and residential areas. Alternatively the dry coolers can be equipped with air outlet silencers.
Air Inlet Screens

Wire mesh screens can be factory-installed on the air intake side to prevent debris from entering the dry cooler. For dry coolers in high temperature execution, the screen would be installed at air outlet.
DFC with Sound Attenuation
DFC - D 72
Engineering Data
Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions & weights. This brochure includes data current at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. In the interest of product improvement, specifications, weights and dimensions are subject to change without notice. Up-to-date engineering data and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Horizontal DFCH or Vertical DFCT Dry Coolers
Horizontal DFCH Dry Cooler
Vertical DFCT Dry Cooler
Baltimore Aircoil
DFC - D 73
DFCH/S80 and DFCT/S80 Standard Sound Level Models Fans 800 mm 6 pole Motor
Model DFCH/T Number of Fans Nominal Capacity kW / S8011-H213B S8011-H313B S8011-L413B S8011-H416B S8012-S213B S8012-L313B S8012-S413B S8012-L416B S8013-S213B S8013-S313B S8013-D413B S8013-S416B S8014-S213B S8014-D413B S8014-D416B S8015-D413B S8015-M516B S8022-S213B S8022-L313B S8022-S413B S8022-L416B S8023-S213B S8023-S313B S8023-D413B S8023-S416B S8024-S213B S8024-D413B S8024-D416B S8025-D413B S8025-M516B 1 o 37/32 51/43 57/47 62/51 74/64 109/91 123/101 128/105 123/104 165/138 177/146 196/161 173/146 247/202 248/206 268/219 301/244 149/128 218/182 247/202 257/210 247/209 331/277 354/292 392/322 346/293 494/404 497/412 536/439 602/489 Airflow m3/s / 6,1/4,6 5,7/4,3 5,3/4,1 5,6/4,3 12,2/9,3 11,4/8,7 10,7/8,2 11,3/8,6 18,3/13,9 17,1/13,0 16,1/12,3 16,9/12,9 24,4/18,6 21,5/16,4 22,6/17,2 24,2/18,5 24,0/18,3 24,4/18,7 22,8/17,4 21,5/16,5 22,6/17,3 36,6/28,0 34,2/26,1 32,3/24,7 33,9/25,9 48,8/37,3 43,1/33,0 45,2/34,6 48,5/37,1 48,0/36,7 Cooling Agent l/s / 1,9/1,7 2,7/2,3 3,0/2,5 3,2/2,7 3,9/3,4 5,7/4,8 6,5/5,3 6,7/5,5 6,5/5,5 8,7/7,3 9,3/7,7 10,3/8,5 9,1/7,7 13,0/10,6 13,1/10,9 14,1/11,6 15,9/12,9 7,8/6,7 11,5/9,6 13,0/10,6 13,5/11,1 13,0/11,0 17,5/14,6 18,7/15,4 20,7/17,0 18,0/15,4 26,1/21,3 26,2/21,8 28,3/23,2 31,8/25,8 p kPa / 12/9 32/23 18/13 18/13 13/10 75/54 53/36 41/29 41/30 96/69 29/21 57/40 92/68 64/44 26/19 74/51 73/50 13/10 75/54 53/36 41/29 41/30 96/69 29/21 57/40 92/68 64/44 26/19 74/51 73/50 Tube Internal Surface Connecm2 tions Volume dm3 12 18 24 37 24 35 47 74 35 53 71 112 47 95 149 95 186 47 71 95 149 71 106 142 223 95 189 298 189 372 97 145 193 173 193 290 386 347 290 435 579 520 386 773 693 773 867 386 579 773 693 579 869 1159 1040 773 1545 1386 1545 1733 Ship. Weight kg 229 246 262 281 368 401 435 473 513 563 613 670 686 820 896 871 1033 637 703 770 846 902 1003 1103 1217 1192 1460 1612 1542 1866 LpA dB(A) / A Dimensions mm B C
2 x ND65
59/56
2012 1300
2 oo
2 x ND80
61/58
3612 2900
3 ooo
2 x ND80
63/60
5212 4500
4 oooo 5 ooooo 4 oo oo 6 ooo ooo 8 oooo oooo 10 ooooo ooooo
2 x ND80
63/60
6812 6100 3050
2 x ND80
64/61
6812 6100 2410
4 x ND80
64/61
3612 2900
4 x ND80
66/63
5212 4500
4 x ND80
66/63
6812 6100 3050
4 x ND80
67/64
6812 6100 2410
DFCH/L80 and DFCT/L80 Low Sound Level Models Fans 800 mm 8 pole motor
Model DFCH/T Number of Fans Nominal Capacity kW /Y L8011-H213B L8011-H313B L8011-H413B L8011-H416B L8012-H213B L8012-L313B L8012-S413B L8012-L416B L8013-S213B L8013-S313B L8013-D413B L8013-S416B L8014-S213B L8014-D413B L8014-D416B 1 o 32/29 43/39 50/45 51/46 73/68 90/81 100/91 104/95 105/97 136/125 145/132 160/45 147/136 201/182 205/186 Airflow m3/s /Y 4,7/4,1 4,3/3,7 4,1/3,6 4,3/3,7 9,4/8,2 8,6/7,5 8,2/7,2 8,6/7,5 14,1/12,8 12,9/11,3 12,3/10,8 12,9/11,3 18,8/16,5 16,4/14,4 17,2/15,1 Cooling Agent l/s /Y 1,7/1,5 2,2/2,0 2,6/2,4 2,7/2,4 3,8/3,6 4,7/4,3 5,3/4,8 5,5/5,0 5,5/5,1 7,2/6,6 7,7/6,9 8,4/7,6 7,7/7,2 10,6/9,6 10,8/9,8 p kPa /Y 9,8/8,5 22/19,4 38/32,3 13/11,4 69/60,2 53/44,8 36/30,7 28/24,6 30/26,9 67/57,1 20/17,4 39/33,0 69/60,2 44/36,7 19/15,9 Tube Internal Surface Connecm2 tions Volume dm3 12 18 24 37 24 35 47 74 35 53 71 112 47 95 149 97 145 193 173 193 290 386 347 290 435 579 520 386 773 693 Ship. Weight kg 229 246 262 281 368 401 435 473 513 563 613 670 686 820 896 LpA dB(A) /Y A Dimensions mm B C
2 x ND65
54/51
2012 1300
2 oo
2 x ND80
56/53
3612 2900
3 ooo
2 x ND80
57/54
5212 4500
4 oooo
2 x ND80
58/55
6812 6100 3050
DFC - D 74
Model DFCH/T
Number of Fans
Nominal Capacity kW /Y
Airflow m3/s /Y 22,0/19,3 19,3/16,9 18,8/16,5 17,2/15,1 16,4/14,4 17,2/15,1 28,2/24,7 25,8/22,6 24,6/21,6 25,8/22,6 37,6/33,0 32,8/28,8 34,4/30,2 44,0/38,6 38,7/33,9
Cooling Agent l/s /Y 8,5/7,9 11,8/10,7 7,7/7,2 9,5/8,6 10,6/9,6 11,0/10,0 11,1/10,3 14,4/13,2 15,4/13,9 16,9/15,3 15,5/14,4 21,2/19,2 21,7/19,7 17,1/15,8 23,6/21,5
p kPa /Y 82/71,4 22/18,5 69/60,2 53/44,8 36/30,7 28/24,6 30/26,9 67/57,1 20/17,4 39/33,0 69/60,2 44/36,7 19/15,9 82/71,4 22/18,5
Tube Internal Surface ConnecVolume m2 tions dm3 47 186 47 71 95 149 71 106 142 223 95 189 298 95 372 386 867 386 579 773 693 579 869 1159 1040 773 1545 1386 773 1733 2 x ND80
Ship. Weight kg 737 947 637 703 770 846 902 1003 1103 1217 1192 1460 1612 1275 1694
LpA dB(A) /Y 59/56 A
Dimensions mm B C
L8015-S213B L8015-D416B L8022-H213B L8022-L313B L8022-S413B L8022-L416B L8023-S213B L8023-S313B L8023-D413B L8023-S416B L8024-S213B L8024-D413B L8024-D416B L8025-S213B L8025-D416B
5 ooooo 4 oooo
162/149 223/203 147/136 180/163 201/182 208/190 210/195 273/250 291/263 320/290 294/273 402/364 411/373 325/299 447/406
6812 6100 2410
4 x ND80
59/56
3612 2900
6 ooo ooo 8 oooo oooo 10 ooooo ooooo
4 x ND80
60/57
5212 4500
4 x ND80
61/58
6812 6100 3050
4 x ND80
62/59
6812 6100 2410
DFCH/R80 and DFCT/R80 Ultra Low Sound Level Models Fans 800 mm 12 pole motor
Model DFCH/T Number of Fans Nominal Capacity kW /Y R8011-H313B R8012-L313B R8013-S313B R8014-S313B 1 o 2 oo 3 ooo 4 oooo 4 oo oo 6 ooo ooo 8 oooo oooo 29/23 60/48 92/75 126/101 Airflow m3/s /Y 2,5/1,8 5,0/3,7 7,5/5,6 10,0/7,5 Cooling Agent l/s /Y 1,5/1,2 3,1/2,5 4,8/3,9 6,6/5,3 p kPa /Y 11/7 25/17 32/22 73/49 Tube Internal Surface Connecm2 tions Volume dm3 18 35 53 71 145 290 435 579 2 x ND65 2 x ND80 2 x ND80 2 x ND80 Ship. Weight kg LpA dB(A) /Y Dimensions mm A B C -
246 401 563 753
34/31 2012 1300 36/33 3612 2900 38/35 5212 4500
38/35 6812 6100 3050
R8022-L313B
120/97
10,0/7,5
6,3/5,1
25/17
71
579
4 x ND80
703
40/36 3612 2900
R8023-S313B
184/149
15,0/11,2
9,7/7,8
34/23
106
869
4 x ND80
1003
41/38 5212 4500
R8024-S313B
252/202
20,0/15,0
13,3/10,6
73/49
142
1159
4 x ND80
1326
41/38 6812 6100 3050
Dry Coolers capacities are tested according to EN 1048. Ratings shown are for clean tubes with 34% ethylene glycol solution by volume, 40C in and 35C out, 25C ambient air temperature. Sound Pressure Levels (LpA) are measured in the horizontal plane at a distance of 10 m from the connection end of the unit, under free field conditions.
Baltimore Aircoil
DFC - D 75
Sound Power Levels for one 800 mm Fan at Nominal Speed Rating
DFCH/T Product Range 50 Hz Fan Motor Conn. 6-pole Standard Sound Level 6-pole 8-pole Low Sound Level 8-pole 12-pole Ultra Low Sound Level 12-pole Star 43 53 55 58 58 56 54 50 65 Star Delta 76 47 77 57 74 59 73 62 72 62 71 60 68 58 62 54 77 69 Star Delta 74 79 77 80 81 77 82 76 77 75 75 74 71 71 62 65 83 80 Delta 63 73 125 82 250 85 500 83 1000 81 2000 79 4000 76 8000 69 LwA 86 Outlet Sound Power Level at Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) Total
Sound Pressure Correction Values LpA for Other Distances

For other distances the change in sound pressure depends on the dimensions of the equipment. Therefore, the correction values given in the table below are approximate values.
m dB(A) 2 +14 3 +10 5 +6 10 0 15 -4 20 -6 30 -9 40 -12 50 -14
DFC - D 76
V-Shaped Dry Coolers DFCV
DFCV V-shaped Dry Cooler
DFCV/S80 Standard Sound Level Models Fans 800 mm 6 pole motor

Model DFCV Number of Fans Nominal Capacity kW /Y S8022-L413B S8022-L416B S8023-S413B S8023-S416B S8024-S413B S8024-S416B S8025-D413B S8025-D416B S8026-D413B S8026-D416B 4 oo oo 6 ooo ooo 8 oooo oooo 10 ooooo ooooo 12 oooooo oooooo 276/225 275/224 422/344 423/346 581/472 581/471 685/559 685/557 845/688 846/692 Airflow m3/s /Y 23,6/18,0 24,0/18,3 35,4/27,0 36,0/27,5 47,2/36,0 48,0/36,6 59,0/45,0 60,0/45,8 70,8/54,1 72,0/55,0 Cooling Agent l/s /Y 14,5/11,9 14,5/11,8 22,3/18,1 22,3/18,3 30,7/24,9 30,7/24,9 36,2/29,5 36,2/29,4 44,6/36,3 44,7/36,6 p kPa /Y 36/25 14/9 54/37 22/15 97/68 34/23 31/21 13/9 52/35 21/15 Tube Internal Surface Connecm2 tions Volume dm3 121 191 182 287 243 382 303 478 364 574 992 890 1487 1335 1983 1779 2479 2224 2975 2669 Ship. Weight kg LpA dB(A) /Y Dimensions mm L W H
2 x ND80
916 1046 1283 1462 1677 1924 2070 2387 2464 2822
65/62 2517 2400 2664
2 x ND80
66/63 3617 2400 2664
4 x ND80
67/64 4717 2400 2664
4 x ND80
68/65 5817 2400 2664
4 x ND80
68/65 6917 2400 2664
DFCV/L80 Low Sound Level Models Fans 800 mm 8 pole motor

Model DFCV Number of Fans Nominal Capacity kW /Y L8022-H413B L8022-H416B L8023-L413B L8023-L416B 4 oo oo 6 ooo ooo 236/202 240/207 353/302 357/310 Airflow m3/s /Y 18,0/14,7 18,8/15,4 27,0/22,1 28,2/23,1 Cooling Agent l/s /Y 12,4/10,7 12,6/21,2 18,6/15,9 18,9/16,4 p kPa /Y 74/56 27/21 74/56 28/22 Tube Internal Surface Connecm2 tions Volume dm3 121 191 182 287 992 890 1487 1335 Ship. Weight kg LpA dB(A) /Y Dimensions mm L W H
2 x ND80
916 1046 1283 1462
60/57 2517 2400 2664
2 x ND80
61/58 3617 2400 2664
Baltimore Aircoil
DFC - D 77
Model DFCV
Number of Fans
Nominal Capacity kW /Y
Airflow m3/s /Y 36,0/29,5 37,6/30,8 45,0/36,9 47,0/38,5 54,0/44,2 56,4/46,2
Cooling Agent l/s /Y 24,9/21,4 25,3/21,9 31,7/27,1 32,5/27,6 36,3/31,0 37,3/32,1
p kPa /Y 80/60 33/25 124/94 46/34 35/26 15/11
Tube Internal Surface ConnecVolume m2 tions dm3 243 382 303 478 364 574 1983 1779 2479 2224 2975 2669
Ship. Weight kg
LpA dB(A) /Y
Dimensions mm L W H
L8024-S413B L8024-S416B L8025-S413B L8025-S416B L8026-D413B L8026-D416B
8 oooo oooo 10 ooooo ooooo 12 oooooo oooooo
472/405 480/415 601/513 615/523 686/587 706/608
2 x ND80
1677 1924 2070 2387 2464 2822
62/59 4717 2400 2664
4 x ND80
63/60 5817 2400 2664
4 x ND80
63/60 6917 2400 2664
DFCV/S90 Standard Sound Level Models Fans 900 mm 6 pole motor

Model DFCV Number of Fans Nominal Capacity kW /Y S9022-L616B 4 oo oo 6 ooo ooo 8 oooo oooo 10 ooooo ooooo 12 oooooo oooooo 366/291 Airflow m3/s /Y 26,4/19,7 Cooling Agent l/s /Y 19,3/15,3 p kPa /Y 31/21 Tube Internal Surface Connecm2 tions Volume dm3 Ship. Weight kg LpA dB(A) /Y Dimensions mm L W H
287
1335
2 x ND80
1331
59/52 2517 2400 2664
S9023-S616B
555/436
39,6/29,6
29,3/23,0
36/23
430
2002
4 x ND80
1887
61/54 3617 2400 2664
S9024-M616B
732/582
52,8/39,5
38,6/30,7
29/19
574
2669
4 x ND80
2490
61/54 4717 2400 2664
S9025-M616B
937/733
66,0/49,4
49,5/38,7
50/32
717
3336
4x ND100 4x ND100
3124
62/55 5817 2400 2664
S9026-D616B
1110/873
79,2/59,3
58,6/46,1
41/26
860
4004
3699
63/56 6917 2400 2664
DFCV/R90 Ultra Low Sound Level Models Fans 900 mm 12 pole motor
Model DFCV Number of Fans Nominal Capacity kW /Y R9022-H413B R9022-H416B R9023-L413B R9023-H416B R9024-S413B R9024-L416B R9025-S413B R9025-L416B R9026-D413B R9026-S416B 4 oo oo 6 ooo ooo 8 oooo oooo 10 ooooo ooooo 12 oooooo oooooo 170/145 169/145 255/217 260/221 340/290 341/294 435/368 434/371 501/432 522/444 Airflow m3/s /Y 12/9,9 Cooling Agent l/s /Y 9,0/7,7 8,9/7,6 13,5/11,5 13,7/11,7 18,0/15,3 18,0/15,6 23,0/19,4 22,9/19,6 26,5/22,8 27,6/23,4 p kPa /Y 42/31 14/11 42/31 42/32 38/29 27/21 71/53 51/39 21/16 40/30 Tube Internal Surface Connecm2 tions Volume dm3 121 191 182 287 243 382 303 478 364 574 992 890 1487 1335 1983 1779 2479 2224 2975 2669 Ship. Weight kg LpA dB(A) /Y Dimensions mm L W H
2 x ND80
996 1126 1403 1582 1837 2084 2270 2587 2704 3062
38/37 2517 2400 2664
18/14,8
2 x ND80
39/38 3617 2400 2664
24/19,8
4 x ND80
40/39 4717 2400 2664
30/24,8
4 x ND80
41/40 5817 2400 2664
36/29,8
4 x ND80
42/41 6917 2400 2664
DFC - D 78
Dry Cooler capacities are tested according to EN 1048 Ratings shown are for clean tubes with 34% ethylene glycol solution by volume, 40C in and 35C out, 25C ambient air temperature. Sound Pressure Levels (LpA ) are measured in the horizontal plane at a distance of 10 m from the connection end of the unit, under free field conditions.
Sound Levels for One Fan at Nominal Speed Rating 800 mm

DFCV Product Range Fan motor 6-pole Standard Sound Level 6-pole 8-pole Low Sound Level 8-pole Star 76 77 74 73 72 71 68 62 77 Star Delta 74 79 77 80 81 77 82 76 77 75 75 74 71 71 62 65 83 80 50Hz Conn Delta 63 73 Outlet Sound Power Level at Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) 125 82 250 85 500 83 1000 81 2000 79 4000 76 8000 69 Total LwA 86
900 mm
DFCV Product Range 50Hz Fan motor Conn 6-pole Standard Sound Level 6-pole 12-pole Ultra Low Sound Level 12-pole Star 48 57 60 63 63 61 57 54 67 Star Delta 55 49 69 58 75 61 78 64 78 64 76 62 73 58 67 55 82 68 Delta 63 62 125 76 250 82 500 85 1000 85 2000 83 4000 80 8000 74 LwA 89 Outlet Sound Power Level at Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) Total

m dB(A) 2 +14 3 +10 5 +6 10 0 15 -4 20 -6 30 -9 40 -12 50 -14
Baltimore Aircoil
DFC - D 79
V-Shaped Dry Coolers with Adiabatic Pre-Cooler DFCV-AD
DFCV-AD V-Shaped Dry Cooler with Adiabatic Pre-Cooler
Standard Sound Level Models Fans 900 mm 6 pole motor

Model DFCV Number of Fans Nominal Capacity kW /Y S9022-L616B-AD 4 oo oo 6 ooo ooo 8 oooo oooo 10 ooooo ooooo 12 oooooo oooooo 536/422 Air Flow m3/s /Y 24/17 Cooling Agent l/s /Y 28,3/22,3 p kPa /Y 64/41 Tube Surfac Internal Connece Volume tions 2 m dm3 LpA Ship. dB(A) Weight kg /Y 1476 Dimensions mm L W H
287
1335
2 x ND80
59/52 2517 2870 2670
S9023-S616B-AD
810/634
36/26
42,8/33,5
73/47
430
2002
4 x ND80
2086
61/54 3617 2870 2670
S9024-M616B-AD
1072/843
48/35
56,7/44,6
58/38
574
2669
4 x ND80
2738
61/54 4717 2870 2670
S9025-D616B-AD
1340/1047
60/44
70,8/55,3
53/33
717
3336
4x ND100 4x ND100
3421
62/55 5817 2870 2670
S9026-D616B-AD
1620/1269
72/53
85,6/67,1
82/53
860
4004
4050
63/56 6917 2870 2670
Ultra Low Sound Level Models Fans 900 mm 12 pole motor

Model DFCV Number of Fans Nominal Capacity KW /Y R9022-H413B-AD R9022-H416B-AD R9023-L413B-AD R9023-H416B-AD R9024-S413B-AD R9024-L416B-AD R9025-D413B-AD R9025-L416B-AD R9026-D413B-AD R9026-S416B-AD 4 oo oo 6 ooo ooo 8 oooo oooo 10 ooooo ooooo 12 oooooo oooooo 259/221 259/218 389/329 394/333 519/441 520/443 635/544 652/552 767/655 788/666 Air Flow m3/s /Y 11,2/9,3 Cooling Agent l/s /Y 13,7/11,6 13,7/11,5 20,6/17,4 20,8/17,6 27,4/23,3 24,5/23,4 33,5/28,7 34,5/29,2 40,5/34,6 41,6/35,2 p kPa /Y 89/67 31/23 91/67 89/67 81/61 59/44 28/21 51/38 45/34 82/62 Tube Internal Surface ConnecVolume m2 tions dm3 121 191 182 287 243 382 303 478 364 574 992 890 1487 1335 1983 1779 2479 2224 2975 2669 LpA Ship. dB(A) Weight kg /Y 1141 1271 1602 1781 2085 2332 2567 2884 3055 3413 Dimensions mm L W H
2 x ND80
38/37 2517 2870 2670
16,8/13,9
2 x ND80
39/38 3617 2870 2670
22,4/18,5
4 x ND80
40/39 4717 2870 2670
28,0/23,2
4 x ND80
41/40 5817 2870 2670
33,6/27,8
4 x ND80
42/41 6917 2870 2670
DFC - D 80
Dry Coolers capacities are tested according to EN 1048 Ratings shown are for clean tubes with 34% ethylene glycol solution by volume, 40C in and 35C out, 25C ambient air temperature. Sound Pressure Levels (LpA) are measured in the horizontal plane at a distance of 10 m from the connection end of the unit, under free field conditions.
Sound Levels for one fan at nominal speed rating

DFCV Product Range Fan Motor 6-pole Standard Sound Level 6-pole 12-pole Ultra Low Sound Level 12-pole Star 48 57 60 63 63 61 57 54 67 Star Delta 55 49 69 58 75 61 78 64 78 64 76 62 73 58 67 55 82 68 50Hz Conn. Delta 63 62 Outlet Sound Power Level at Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) 125 76 250 82 500 85 1000 85 2000 83 4000 80 8000 74 Total LwA 89

m dB(A) 2 +14 3 +10 5 +6 10 0 15 -4 20 -6 30 -9 40 -12 50 -14
Baltimore Aircoil
DFC - D 81
Engineering Specifications DFCH / T

1.0 Heat Exchanger
1.1 General: The finned Coil Heat Exchanger consists of either 1/2 or 5/8 O.D. phosphorus deoxidised copper seamless tubes and aluminium fins. Staggered tube construction provides substantially higher capacity since more tubes are exposed to the air stream. The advanced rippled-corrugated fin design creates a state of continuous turbulence, which effectively reduces the boundary layer formation that could otherwise reduce the rate of heat exchange. Fins have full drawn collars to maintain fin spacing and provide a continuous surface cover over the entire tube. The copper tubes are mechanically expanded into the fin collars to provide a continuous primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length for maximum heat transfer rates. Headers are made of seamless copper tubing and the coils are circuited for counterflow heat transfer to provide the maximum mean-effective temperature difference. The headers have steel male screw connections with 1/8 vent and drain. However, in units with horizontal heat exchangers, a full coil drain is not possible. It is for this reason that Fluid Coolers operating under ambient temperatures that could drop below freezing point must contain liquid with an antifreeze agent. The entire coil block is pressure tested at 10 bar dry air submerged in warm water.
2.0 Air Movement

2.1 The air movement package: This air movement package combines premium aerodynamic and acoustic performance with innovative design to offer a compact fan and motor as an integrated product. 1. Crenelated blades for the 6-pole and 8-pole fans provide low noise characteristics and increased efficiencies. The adjustable pitch angle impeller of the 12-pole fans allows the optimum aerodynamic performance to be achieved for the given motor output, therefore minimising running costs. 2. Exceptionally compact design with short overall motor length. 3. Two speed by delta / star reconnection speed control. 4. Minimal moving parts for maximum reliability. 5. Motor protection IP55. 6. Insulation Class F. 7. Fan designed for frequent starting. 8. Continuous running from -40C to 65C. 9. Integral Overheat thermal cut-out protection. 2.2 Fan(s): The Fan has superb performance with a steep volume/ pressure performance curve, giving greater flexibility in design and making it more tolerant of pressure variations which may occur because of, for instance, dirt accumulation on the fins of the heat exchanger. The fan, being an integrated product of impeller and motor, is balanced as a complete unit using dynamic single plane balancing. Balance grade is G6.3. The fan and motor are designed to be totally maintenance free. 2.3 Impeller: The one-piece impellers of the 6-pole and 8-pole fans are manufactured from glass coupled engineering polymers, which are UV stabilised. These have been developed using finite element stress analysis to provide a structural hub with a smooth transition into the blade form. Crenelated blades reduce sound levels and increase efficiency. Blade section thickness, consistent with providing sufficient strength, is kept to a minimum to further reduce noise. The impeller of the 12-pole fans has an aluminium hub and clampplate with six equally spaced, fully adjustable, moulded, black, ultraviolet stabilised, glass coupled polypropylene airfoil section blades, designed on the latest aerospace technology. 2.4 Motor: Suitable for horizontal through to vertical shaft operation. IP55 protection, with removable drain plugs. Bearings lubricated with wide temperature range grease, re-lubricated or sealed for life depending on size. Insulation class F as standard. The motor is designed to give maximum flexibility of control by PWM Frequency Inverter, or Voltage Speed Control and where appropriate can be used to give two speeds by Delta/Star reconnect, where 80% of the full speed can be obtained by this method. Electrical Supply 380 -420 V / 50 Hz / 3 ph 440- 480 V / 60 Hz / 3 ph Motor Electrical Details The motor can be run continuously from -40C to +65C (+60oC for the 12-pole fans).
Motor Poles Motor Rating, kW Y Speed, Rpm Y Full Load Current, A Y Starting Current, A Y 7,20 2,60 2,90 2,45 16,9 1,46 9,00 0,80 3,50 720 3,95 570 2,50 360 1,80 0,74 905 0,41 695 0,12 435 6 Poles 1,50 8 Poles 0,76 12 Poles 0,25
Performance Data The air and sound performance data has been measured in accordance with the following Standards: ISO 5801:1977, type A installation test method for air performance (dual numbered BS 848 Part1: 1997) BS 848 Part 2:1985, type A installation, method of noise testing.
3.0 Supporting Frame and Casing

3.1 Frame and Casing: The supporting Frame and Casing is an allbolted painted galvanised steel construction designed to withstand the most adverse weather conditions. Double brake flanges maximise strength of panels. Full baffles separate individual fan sections.
DFC - D 82
Engineering Specifications DFCV

1.0 Heat Exchanger
2.0 Air Movement

2.1 The air movement package: This air movement package combines premium aerodynamic and acoustic performance with innovative design to offer a compact fan and motor as an integrated product. 1. Crenelated blades for the 800mm diameter fans provide low noise characteristics and increased efficiencies. The adjustable pitch angle impeller of the 900mm diameter fans, allows the optimum aerodynamic performance to be achieved for the given motor output, therefore minimising running costs. 2. Exceptionally compact design with short overall motor length. 3. Two speed by delta / star reconnection speed control. 4. Minimal moving parts for maximum reliability. 5. Motor protection IP55. 6. Insulation Class F. 7. Fan designed for frequent starting. 8. Continuous running from -40C to 65C. 9. Integral, overheat thermal cut-out protection. 2.2 Fan(s): The Fan has superb performance with a steep volume/ pressure performance curve, giving greater flexibility in design and making it more tolerant of pressure variations which may occur because of, for instance, dirt accumulation on the fins of the heat exchanger. The fan, being an integrated product of impeller and motor, is balanced as a complete unit using dynamic single plane balancing. Balance grade is G6.3. The fan and motor are designed to be totally maintenance free. 2.3 Impeller: The one-piece impeller of the 800mm diameter fans is manufactured from glass coupled engineering polymers, which are UV stabilized. These have been developed using finite element stress analysis to provide a structural hub with a smooth transition into the blade form. Crenelated blades reduce sound levels and increase efficiency. Blade section thickness, consistent with providing sufficient strength, is kept to a minimum to further reduce noise. The impeller of the 900mm diameter fans has an aluminum hub and clamp-plate, with six equally spaced, fully adjustable, moulded, black, ultra violet stabilized, glass coupled polypropylene airfoil section blades, designed on the latest aerospace technology. 2.4 Motor: Suitable for horizontal through to vertical shaft operation. IP55 protection, with removable drain plugs. Bearings lubricated with wide temperature range grease, re-lubricated or sealed for life depending on size. Insulation class F as standard. The motor is designed to give maximum flexibility of control by PWM Frequency Inverter, or Voltage Speed Control and where appropriate can be used to give two speeds by Delta/Star reconnect, where 80% of the full speed can be obtained by this method. Electrical Supply 380 -420 V / 50 Hz / 3 ph 440- 480 V / 60 Hz / 3 ph Motor Electrical Details The motor can be run continuously from -40C to +65C (+60oC for the 900 mm fans). A. Fans 800 mm
Motor Poles Motor Rating, kW Y Speed, Rpm Y Full Load Current, A Y Starting Current, A Y 7,20 2,60 2,45 16,9 1,46 9,00 720 3,95 570 2,50 0,74 905 0,41 695 6 Poles 1,50 8 Poles 0,76
B. Fans 900 mm

Baltimore Aircoil
DFC - D 83
Engineering Specifications DFCV-AD

1.0 Heat Exchanger
2.0 Air Movement

2.1 The air movement package: This air movement package combines premium aerodynamic and acoustic performance with innovative design to offer a compact fan and motor as an integrated product. 1. Adjustable pitch angle impeller allows the optimum aerodynamic performance to be achieved for the given motor output, therefore minimising running costs. 2. Exceptionally compact design with short overall motor length. 3. Two speed by delta / star reconnection speed control. 4. Minimal moving parts for maximum reliability. 5. Motor protection IP55. 6. Insulation Class F. 7. Fan designed for frequent starting. 8. Continuous running from -40C to 65C. 9. Integral Overheat thermal cut-out protection. 2.2 Fan(s): The Fan has superb performance with a steep volume/ pressure performance curve, giving greater flexibility in design and making it more tolerant of pressure variations which may occur because of, for instance, dirt accumulation on the fins of the heat exchanger. The fan, being an integrated product of impeller and motor, is balanced as a complete unit using dynamic single plane balancing. Balance grade is G6.3. The fan and motor are designed to be totally maintenance free. 2.3 Impeller: The impeller has an aluminium hub and clamp-plate, with six equally spaced, fully adjustable, moulded, black, ultra-violet resistant, glass coupled polypropylene airfoil section blades, designed on the latest aerospace technology. All rotating aluminium components are X-ray examined prior to machining to ensure quality. 2.4 Motor: Suitable for horizontal through to vertical shaft operation. IP55 protection, with removable drain plugs. Bearings lubricated with wide temperature range grease, re-lubricated or sealed for life depending on size. Insulation class F as standard. The motor is designed to give maximum flexibility of control by PWM Frequency Inverter, or Voltage Speed Control and where appropriate can be used to give two speeds by Delta/Star reconnect, where 80% of the full speed can be obtained by this method. Electrical Supply 380 -420 V / 50 Hz / 3 ph 440- 480 V / 60 Hz / 3 ph Motor Electrical Details The motor can be run continuously from -40C to +60C.

4.0 Electrical Panel and Controls

4.1 Electrical Panel and Controls: The cooler is equipped with an electrical panel and operating controls and it is ready to operate once it is connected to the electrical supply. The panel consists of an IP55 enclosure constructed of 2-mm steel painted. It includes a mains switch with lock provision, main fuses, a general contactor relay with emergency cut-out switch, a thermal contactor with coil for each fan wired to the fan motor thermostatic cut-out, a control circuit switch and transformer, wiring from the electrical panel to the individual fans.
DFC - D 84
The cooler is supplied with an ambient temperature measurement sensor, the controller of which is set at the calculated depressed dry bulb temperature at design conditions. A dead-range differential is built into the controller to avoid hunting, anticipating that the adiabatic system will start and stop only once a day by actuating the main solenoid valve supplying the city water to the distribution manifold. For proper Legionella bacteria control, the system is drained daily, which is feasible because the volume of the piping is very limited. This is accomplished by the opening of the drain solenoid valve, when the city water supply is interrupted by the action of the ambient temperature sensor.
5.0 Adiabatic Pre-Cooler

5.1 Adiabatic Pre-Cooler: The cooling pad section serves as an adiabatic saturator to cool the incoming air. It consists of specially impregnated and corrugated cellulose paper sheets with different flute angles, one steep and one nearly flat that have been bonded together. Such a design yields a cooling pad with high evaporation efficiency while still operating with a very low-pressure drop. The impregnation procedure for the cellulose paper ensures a strong self supporting product, with high absorbency, which is protected against decomposition and rotting. The evaporative fluid, such as city water, is supplied to a distribution manifold and the rate of the water flow may be initially regulated by a manual-regulating valve. A distribution pad on the top of the cooling pad ensures an even water distribution and minimises the risk of dry spots. The water flows down the corrugated surface of the evaporative cooling pad. The incoming warm and dry air that passes through the pad evaporates most of the water. Any remaining water assists in washing the pad, and is drained to the gutter through a sloping pan. In addition scaling is kept to a minimum and no water carry-over occurs due to the fact that the water is directed to the air inlet side of the pad and this where the evaporation takes place. The air that leaves the pad is therefore cooled and humidified simultaneously without any external energy supply, thus adiabatically.
Baltimore Aircoil
HXC - D 85
Hybrid Condenser
Product Detail
HXC Hybrid Condenser ......................................................................... D86 Benefits ..................................................................................................... D88 Construction Details ................................................................................ D90 Custom Features and Options ................................................................ D92 Accessories ............................................................................................... D95 Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... D97
HXC - D 86
HXC Hybrid Condenser

Capacity
Single Cell Capacity: 550- 2060 Nominal R-717 kW
General Description
The HXC Hybrid Condenser offers significant water savings versus traditional water-cooled and evaporative condensers. Thanks to the standard design features the HXC satisfies additional environmental concerns by minimising also energy consumption, refrigerant charge and plume. The HXC minimises operating cost, provides year-round operating reliability and simplifies maintenance requirements.
Key Features
Maximum water savings Low energy consumption Low refrigerant charge Low installed cost Easy maintenance Plume abatement Reliable year-round operation Long service life PED 97/23/EC Coil Design
Baltimore Aircoil
HXC - D 87
The refrigerant enters the dry (finned) coil at the top, which is to be connected with the wet (prime surface) coil in series. Liquid refrigerant leaves at the bottom outlet of the wet coil. When the dampers are closed, air is induced through the wet sections (coil and fill), where it picks up heat and humidity. The air is then led over the dry (finned) coil, where it picks up additional sensible heat. Due to the sensible heat transfer of the dry (finned) coil, water consumption is reduced, when compared to a conventional evaporative condenser. To save compressor energy and reduce the condensing heat (and water consumption) the HXC hybrid condenser will operate with dampers closed until a given value of condensing temperature is reached and the ambient air is cold enough to contribute to the heat rejection. When the dampers open the air flow increases due to the lower resistance to air flow and the air distribution will shift, so that less air is induced through the evaporative sections, both of which enhances the sensible heat transfer and further reduces water consumption. If the ambient air temperature is low enough to allow dry operation, the spray pump is shut off and no water is consumed at all.
1. Air in; 2. Air out; 3. Vapour in; 4. Liquid out; 5. Wet deck surface; 6. Cold water basin; 7. Water distribution system; 8. Coil; 9. Spray Water Pump; 10. Eliminators; 12. Dry finned coil; 13. Modulating air inlet dampers; 14. Servo motor; 15. Pressure transmitter.
HXC - D 88
Benefits
Water savings are achieved throughout the year with different operating modes of the HXC. In some areas, the water cost savings alone can pay for the equipment in as little as two years! During the dry/wet operating mode, a significant amount of heat is removed by sensible heat transfer, providing reduced water consumption versus conventional evaporative cooling When the heat load and/or ambient temperatures drop, the condensing pressure is lowered to a set value, hence saving energy and water. When temperature of the ambient air is low enough, dampers in the back of the condenser open, hereby introducing an increased flow of colder ambient air, which enhances the heat transfer on the dry coil and further reduces water consumption Water consumption is totally eliminated in the dry operating mode

The HXC provides heat rejection at the lowest possible energy input and maintenance requirements via: High efficiency, low kW axial fans Patented combined flow technology, which reduces evaporation directly off the coil, minimizing the potential for scaling and fouling Parallel flow of air and spray water, which eliminates scale-promoting dry spots Variable frequency drive or two speed motors.
Reduced Refrigerant Charge

Combined flow technology provides maximum capacity at the lowest refrigerant charge available in the industry. Reduced refrigerant charge lowers installation costs and may help satisfy refrigerant charge thresholds.
Note: For more information on combined flow technology, refer to section Evaporative Condenser Product Line Overview
Low Installed Cost

Support All models mount directly on parallel I-beams and ship complete with motors and drives factory-installed and aligned.
1. HXC, 2. Forced Draft; 3. Induced Draft
Modular Design Units ship in three pieces to minimize the size and weight of the heaviest lift, allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes. Coil Connections Single prime surface coil reduces costs of pipe, valves, purgers and labour.
Baltimore Aircoil
HXC - D 89
Easy Maintenance
Access Hinged access doors and a standard internal walkway provide easy access to the unit interior. Spacious Interior Provides easy access to the cold water basin, drift eliminators, fan drive system, the prime surface coil and the modulation fan dampers. Access to spray Distribution Parallel flow of air and spray water over the coil allows for inspection and access to the top of the coil during full operation.
Large Access Door
Removable Drift Eliminators for access to the prime surface coil
Plume Abatement
The HXC offers a combination of sensible, adiabatic, and evaporative heat transfer to significantly reduce any plume that may occur with conventional evaporative cooling equipment. During the coldest times of the year, when the potential for visible discharge is greatest, the HXC operates 100% dry, completely eliminating plume.
Reliable Year Round Operation

Long Service Life

HXC - D 90
Baltimore Aircoil
HXC - D 91
8. Combined Inlet Shield Technology

2. Fan Drive System (Not Shown)

9. Cold Water Basin

3. Low kW Axial Fan(s) (Not Shown)



Visible and accessible during operation Overlapping spray patterns ensure proper water coverage Large orifice, non-clog nozzles

5. Prime Surface Coil (Not Shown)

Continuous serpentine, steel tubing Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF) Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid Designed for operating pressure of 23 bar according to PED
12. Modulating Air Inlet Dampers

Galvanised Steel Opposed blade, air-tight design Located in the back of the upper "wet" section
13. Actuators (Not shown) 6. Dry Finned Coil

Stainless Steel tubing with high density aluminum fins Designed for max. 23 bar operating pressure according to PED Staggered "triangle" tubes coil arrangement Two actuators for modulation of the dampers
14. Controller (Not Shown)

Programmable controller with multiple set points for maximum operating savings. For sequencing the operation of dampers, fans and spray pump
15. Pressure Transmitter (Not Shown)

To be installed on site (in the condenser discharge piping)
16. Interconnecting Pipework (Not Included)

Piping to be done by installing refrigeration contractor
HXC - D 92


Each coil is manufactured according to the European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97/23/EC (For more details, refer to the Evaporative Condenser "Overview" section) BAC condenser coils are standard available at a design pressure of 23 bar, and are pneumatically tested at 34 bar. Standard Serpentine Coil: The standard condensing coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF) Optional Stainless Steel Coil: Coils are available in Type 304L and 316L stainless steel for specialized applications.
Hot Dip Galvanised Coil
Multiple Refrigerant Circuit Coils (Split Coils): In general, multiple circuit coils are required primarily on halocarbon refrigerant systems where it is common practice to maintain individual compressor systems. Also, a circuit can be isolated to provide cooling of a water or glycol loop for compressor jacket cooling. A wide range of multiple circuit arrangements is available. All coils are designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid.
Dry Finned Configuration

The standard dry finned coil on the HXC hybrid condenser consists of a 6-row stainless steel AISI 304L coil in a staggered "triangle" arrangement with precoated aluminium high density fins. The coil is designed in accordance to PED regulations and has an operating pressure of 23 bar.
Stainless Steel Finned Coil
Baltimore Aircoil
HXC - D 93
Wet Deck Surface

Cross flow plastic wet deck surface with integrated high efficiency drift eliminators Fill pack extended into the cold water basin to avoid sound of water splash Reduction of recirculating spray water temperature result in compact prime surface coil resulting in both reduced refrigerant and piping costs. Saturation and pre-cooling of incoming outside air.
Wet Deck Surface
Modulating Air Inlet Dampers

Dampers are located in the back of the upper "wet section" Constructed of galvanised steel. Opposed blade, air-tight design Proportional modulation through beams
Air Flow Control Package

An air flow control package is included to provide maximum water savings and plume control. This Modulating Air Inlet Dampers package consists of a pressure transmitter (shipped loose for site installation in condenser discharge piping), actuators to activate the modulating air inlet dampers and a control system to intelligently modulate the dampers when needed. The condensing pressure is allowed to float down to a set minimum value in parallel with a proportional regulation of the cold air entry to minimise water consumption.
Fan Drive System

The low sound fan drive system provides the cooling air necessary to reject heat from the system to the atmosphere. The standard fan drive system consists of two sheaves located on minimum shaft centreline distances to maximise belt life. A fan motor, custom engineered for BAC to provide maximum performance for cooling tower service, is provided.
HXC - D 94
Low NoiseFans
The low sound levels generated by HXC Hybrid Condensers are thanks to the use of high efficiency low noise axial fans making them suitable for installation in most environments. For extremely sound sensitive installations, factory designed, tested and rated sound attenuation is available for both the air intake and discharge.
Fan Drive System
Low Noise Fans (dry coil section removed)



Baltimore Aircoil
HXC - D 95
Accessories
Ladder and Safety Cage

In the event the owner requires easy access to the top of the unit, the unit can be furnished with a platform and ladders extending from the base of the unit to the platform, as well as safety cages.
Internal Ladder

For access to the motor and drive assemblies an upper service platform with ladder and handrails is available. Safety gates are available for handrail openings.



Basin Heaters
HXC - D 96

Stand-by Pump
A factory mounted stand-by pump is available, including non-return valves in each pump piping line. In case of a pump failure, there can be switched over to the stand-by pump, eliminating the unit shut down period as much as possible.
N2 Filling of the Coil

For prolonged shipment periods (ocean freight) or extended storage on site it is recommended to charge the coil(s) with nitrogen.

Baltimore Aircoil
HXC - D 97
General
A. General: Furnish and install, _____ factory assembled hybrid condenser(s) of induced draft design, with single side air entry and vertical air discharge. Overall dimensions shall not exceed approximately _____ mm x _____ mm, with an overall height not exceeding approximately _____mm. Operating weight shall not exceed _____ kg. The hybrid condenser shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model ____________. B. Capacity: The hybrid condenser(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to have condensing capacity of _____ kW heat rejection, operating with ____ refrigerant at ___C condensing temperature and ___C entering wet-bulb temperature. C. Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty shall be for a period of one year from the date of startup or eighteen months from the date of shipment, whichever ends first. D. Quality Assurance: The manufacture shall have Management System certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of products and services.
Products
1.0 Evaporative Condenser Materials and Components
1.1 Baltiplus Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural elements shall be constructed from heavy-gauge, Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel, with all sheared edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound and the exterior protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection. (Alternate 1.1) Baltibond Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 hot dip galvanised steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse and dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated curing stage monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program.
2.0 Coil Casing Assembly

The hybrid condenser shall include a coil casing section consisting of a refrigerant condensing coil, a spray water distribution system, modulating air inlet dampers, air flow control package, drift eliminators, fans and drive system as indicated by the manufacturer. 2.1. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be fabricated of all prime surface steel at the manufacturers own facility, and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. a. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be according to European Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC, with design pressure of 23 bar. b. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be tested at 34 bar air pressure under water. c. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of liquid refrigerant. 2.2 Spray Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed evenly over the coil at a minimum flow rate sufficient to ensure complete wetting of the coil at all times by large-diameter, non-clog, 360 plastic distribution nozzles spaced across the coil face area in spray branches. Nozzles shall utilize a two-stage diffusion pattern to provide overlapping, umbrella spray patterns that create multiple intersection points with adjacent nozzles. a. Nozzles and spray branches shall be observable and accessible for cleaning from the outside of the hybrid condenser during condenser operation without the removal of other components. b. Spray branches and nozzles shall be held in place by snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of individual nozzles or complete branches for cleaning or flushing. 2.3. Removable drift eliminators shall be positioned to prevent moisture from entering the air plenum and incorporate a minimum of three (3) changes in air direction. The drift eliminators shall be removable in easy to handle sections for quick access to the coil. 2.4. Fans and Drive System: Fan(s) shall be driven by V-type belts. a. Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow low noise, with aluminium alloy blades. Air shall discharge through a fan cylinder designed for streamlined air entry and minimum fan blade tip clearance for maximum fan efficiency. b. Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported by heavy-duty, self-aligning, grease-packed ball bearings with moisture-proof seals and integral slinger rings, designed for a minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours. c. Fan and motor sheaves shall be fabricated from corrosion resistant materials. d. Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type, suitable for ____ volt, ____ phase, ___ Hz electrical service and shall be mounted on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor base. e. The motor shall be furnished with double-sealed, permanently lubricated bearings and special moisture protection on windings, shafts and bearings. f. Air plenum shall provide a minimum of 1220 mm clearance under the motor base to provide comfortable working space for service personnel. 2.5. Modulating air inlet dampers: modulating air inlet damper blocks of air-tight design (to DIN 1946) shall be located in the back of the coil casing assembly. Damper blades shall be made from galvanised rolled sheet steel and will be of opposed blade design with proportional modulation through beams. 2.6. Air flow control package: The air flow control package shall consist of a pressure transmitter (shipped loose for site installation in condenser, discharge piping), actuators to activate the modulating air inlet dampers and a control system to intelligently modulate the dampers when needed to minimise water consumption.
3.0 Pan Assembly

The hybrid condenser shall include a pan assembly consisting of cold water basin with pump assembly, heat transfer section for spray water cooling with integral drift eliminators, combined inlet shields and hinged access door and internal walkway. 3.1 The cold water basin shall be constructed of heavy-gauge steel panels and structural members either protected by Baltiplus or
Baltibond. Basin shall include a depressed section with drain/ cleanout connection. The basin area under the wet deck surface shall be sloped toward the depressed section to facilitate cleaning. 3.2 The cold water basin shall include a drain/clean-out connection; a steel strainer; a brass make-up valve; over flow connection; and a water recirculation pump assembly.
HXC - D 98
a. Cold water basin shall be designed so that the strainer, makeup valve and float, and pump assembly are easily accessible without removing any of the unit panels or other components. b. Lift-out steel strainer shall be supplied with perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution nozzle orifices and an integral anti-vortexing hood to prevent air entrainment. c. Water recirculation pump shall be a close-coupled, bronze-fitted centrifugal pump equipped with a mechanical seal, mounted on the basin and piped from the suction strainer to the water distribution system. i. The pump shall be installed with adequate drains so that it may drain freely when the basin is drained. ii. The pump assembly shall include an integral metering valve and bleed line to control the bleed rate from the pump discharge to the overflow connection. iii. The pump motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type suitable for _____ volt, ____ phase, ______ Hz electrical service. d. On installations requiring a remote sump, the hybrid condenser shall be modified to accommodate the use of an independent sump and pump for recirculating water (by others). i. The recirculating water pump, steel strainer, make-up valve, and integral bleed line assemblies shall be omitted from the hybrid condenser scope of supply. ii. The hybrid condenser shall be supplied with a cold water basin outlet sized and located as indicated on the drawings for gravity drain to the remote sump. iii. The water distribution system shall have a design operating pressure of 14 kPa at the hybrid condenser spray water inlet connection. 3.3 The heat transfer section shall consist of BACross wet deck surface with integral drift eliminators for cooling the spray water leaving the coil to optimize the thermal performance of the hybrid condenser as well as saturate and pre-cool the incoming ambient air. a. The wet deck surface and integral drift eliminators shall be formed from plastic material. b. The wet deck surface and integral drift eliminators shall be impervious to rot, decay, fungus, and biological attack. 3.4 Combined Inlet Shields: Combined inlet shields shall be separate from the wet deck surface and removable to allow easy access for inspection of the air/water interface at the air inlet side of the equipment. Combined inlet shields shall prevent UV-light and debris from entering the unit, as well as prevent water splash out during fan cycling. They shall be constructed of maintenance free, corrosion and UV resistant material. 3.5 Hinged Access Door: A large, hinged access door shall be provided for access to the coil, drift eliminators and fan plenum section. The water make-up valve, float ball and suction strainer shall be easily accessible. 3.6. Internal walkway: The hybrid condenser shall be provided with an internal walkway at the access door to facilitate servicing of the unit.
4.0 Dry Finned Coil Assembly

The hybrid condenser shall include a dry finned coil section consisting of a heavy-gauge steel panel construction (either Baltiplus or Baltibond Corrosion Protection) and two dry finned coils. The dry finned coils consist of a 6-row stainless steel AISI 304L coil in a staggered triangle tube arrangement with precoated aluminium high density fins. Coil is designed in accordance to PED for 23 bar operating pressure.
5.0 Sound
Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment, the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the hybrid condenser operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound levels detailed below.
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
8000
dB(A)
Baltimore Aircoil
EC - E 1
Overview

Principle of Operation .............................................................................. E2 Configuration ............................................................................................. E2 Fan System ................................................................................................. E3 Capacity Range .......................................................................................... E3 Typical Applications .................................................................................. E4 Product Line Overview Table .................................................................. E4 Engineering Considerations ..................................................................... E6
EC - E 2
Evaporative condensers provide heat rejection for many types of systems, and the specific application will largely determine which BAC Evaporative Condenser is best suited for a project. The product line overview table in this section is intended as a general guide. Evaporative condensers are used to provide lower condensing temperatures and compressor kilowatts savings of up to 15 percent when compared with traditional systems.
Overview
The vapor to be condensed is circulated through a condensing coil, which is continually wetted on the outside by a re-circulating water system. Air is pulled over the coil, causing a small portion of the re-circulating water to evaporate. The evaporation removes heat from the vapor in the coil, causing it to condense.
Configuration
BAC manufactures three types of evaporative condensers: combined flow, counter flow and hybrid products.
Combined Flow
Combined flow is the use of both a condensing coil and wet deck surface for heat transfer in an evaporative condenser. The addition of wet deck surface to the traditional evaporative condenser design reduces evaporation in the coil section, reducing the potential for scaling and fouling. BACs combined flow evaporative condensers utilize parallel flow of air and spray water over the coil, and crossflow air/water flow through the wet deck surface. In parallel flow, air and water flow over the coil in the same direction. In the wet deck section of BACs combined flow evaporative condensers, air and water interact in a crossflow configuration: water flows vertically down the wet deck as air flows horizontally across it.
Combined flow: Crossflow configuration over the wet deck
Baltimore Aircoil
EC - E 3
Counterflow
In a counterflow evaporative condenser design, the flow of the air is in the opposite direction of the spray water. In BACs counterflow evaporative condensers, air travels vertically up through the unit while the spray water travels vertically down over the coil.
Hybrid Products
See description under separate section "Hybrid Water Saving" Products.
Fan System
The flow of air through most factory assembled evaporative cooling equipment is provided by one or more mechanically driven fans. The fan(s) may be axial or centrifugal, each type having its own distinct advantages. Axial fan units require approximately half the fan motor kilowatt of comparably sized centrifugal fan units, offering significant life-cycle cost savings. Centrifugal fan units are capable of overcoming reasonable amounts of external static pressure ( 125 Pa), making them suitable for both indoor and outdoor installations. Centrifugal fans are also inherently quieter than axial fans, although the difference is minimal and can often be overcome through the application of optional low sound fans and/or sound attenuation on axial fan units. Fans can be applied in an induced draft or a forced draft configuration.
Centrifugal Fans
Axial Fans
Capacity Range
All capacities shown are for a single unit; multiple units can be applied to achieve larger capacities.
EC - E 4

VXC VCL
Overview
Configuration Fan System Capacity Range
Counterflow Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft 60 to 6930 kW Sound sensitive industrial refrigeration projects Installations with limited plan area Indoor Installations
Counterflow Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft 180 to 1380 kW Sound sensitive industrial refrigeration projects. Installations with extremely low height requirements Indoor Installations Skid packages
1. Air in; 2. Air out; 3. Vapour in; 4. Liquid out; 5. Wet deck surface; 6. Cold water basin; 7. Water distribution system; 8. Coil; 9. Spray Water Pump; 10. Eliminators; 11. Optional Extended Surface. 12. Dry finned coil; 13. Modulating air inlet dampers; 14. Servo motor; 15. Pressure transmitter.
Baltimore Aircoil
EC - E 5
CXV
CXV-D
HXC (For more information refer to Section Hybrid Water Saving Products)
Combined Flow Axial Fan, Induced Draft 300 to 2100 kW
Combined Flow Axial Fan, Induced Draft 2000 to 5000 kW
Combined Flow Axial Fan, Induced Draft 550 - 2060 kW
Industrial refrigeration applications
Industrial refrigeration applications in Very large industrial refrigeration and process projects requiring geographical regions where water cost is low energy consumption and low sound high
EC - E 6
Location
Overview
Piping and Valves

Piping should be adequately sized according to standard refrigeration practice and arranged to allow flexibility for expansion and contraction between component parts of the system. Suitably sized equalising lines must be installed between the condenser and high pressure receiver to prevent gas binding and refrigerant backup in the condenser. Service valves should be installed so that the component parts may be easily serviced. On multiple evaporative condenser installations, evaporative condensers in parallel with shell-andtube condensers, or single condensers with multiple coils, refrigerant outlet connections must be trapped into the main liquid refrigerant header. The height of the trapped liquid legs must be sufficient to balance the effect of the unequal coil pressures without backing up liquid refrigerant into the condensing coil. This type of liquid line piping permits independent operation of any one of the parallel circuits without manually closing inlet and outlet valves. Although equalising lines can be used to balance water levels between multi-cell evaporative condensers, the spray water for each cell must be treated separately, and a separate make-up must be provided for each cell. Note that a common remote sump for multi-cell installations can simplify make-up and water treatment. See section "Technical Resources, Application Guidelines" or the appropriate Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual for more information on water treatment.
Capacity Control
Baltimore Aircoil
EC - E 7
Warning: Rapid on-off cycling can cause the fan motor to overheat. It is recommended that controls be set to allow a maximum of 6 on-off cycles per hour. Note: Spray water pump cycling should not be used for capacity control. This method of control often results in short cycling of the pump motor as capacity changes substantially with pump cycling. In addition, alternate wetting and drying of the coil promotes scaling of the heat exchanger coil surface.
Capacity Control Dampers On centrifugal fan models, modulating capacity control dampers are available to provide close control of head pressure. See Section "Accessories" or contact your local BAC Balticare representative.

Water Treatment
Sound Levels
Sound rating data are available for all BAC models. When calculating the sound levels generated by a unit, the designer must take into account the effects of the geometry of the tower as well as the distance and direction from the unit to noise-sensitive areas. Whisper Quiet fans and intake and discharge sound attenuation can be supplied on certain models to provide reduced sound characteristics (see the Custom Features and Options section of the appropriate product line for details). The Baltiguard Fan System, two-speed motors, or variable frequency drives can also be
EC - E 8
used to reduce sound during periods of non-peak thermal loads. For more information on sound and how it relates to evaporative cooling equipment, see Section "Technical Resources, Fundamentals of Sound". For detailed low sound selections, please consult your local BAC Balticare Representative.
Winterization
Overview
Indoor Installation (applicable to VXC and VCL models only)

Safety
Code Requirement
All evaporative condenser coils supplied from Europe, including desuperheater coils, are certified according to the European Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC. Since November 1999 this Pressure Equipment Directive has been adopted by the national legislation of all EU and EFTA member states. The PED 97/23/EC specifies the design, manufacturing, quality and documentation requirements for pressure vessels and replaces previous national code requirements. BAC evaporative condenser coils fall under Category IV of the PED 97/23/EC reglementation and require a CE Declaration of Conformity which is supplied by BAC at time of shipment.
Baltimore Aircoil
EC - E 9
Standard PED Coil design (hot-dip galvanised) All BAC evaporative condenser coils, including bare serpentine coils, split circuit coils, extended surface coils and desuperheater coils are designed as standard for a maximum operating pressure of 23 bar (minimum -1 bar). Design temperatures are minimum: -20C and maximum +120C. All standard PED coils are pneumatically tested at 34 bar after fabrication. Optional High pressure PED coil design (hot dip galvanised) For specific refrigerants or applications requiring higher operating pressures (> 23 bar), the high pressure coil option is available for all hot-dip galvanised condenser coil types (see above under standard PED coil design). The high pressure coils are designed for a maximum operating pressure of 28 bar (min. -1 bar) and are pneumatically tested at 40 bar. Design temperatures are minimum -20C and maximum +120C. Optional Stainless Steel PED coil design Bare serpentine coils only (with or without split) are available in stainless steel AISI 304 or AISI 316 execution. All stainless steel coils are designed for a maximum operating pressure of 23 bar (min. -1 bar) and are pneumatically tested at 34 bar. Design temperature limits are minimum -20C and maximum +120C.
Checking the refrigeration system for non-condensables and purging

Source of Non-Condensables Air and other non-condensables gases collect in refrigeration systems from several sources : 1. Poor evacuation of a new system low side if operation is at pressures below atmospheric. 2. Failure to evacuate completely after part of a system has been open for repair. 3. Chemical breakdown of oil and/or refrigerant. Test on Non-Condensables
Check the system for non-condensable gases is done during system operation. First close the valve (V3) in the liquid line running from the receiver to the evaporator (king valve).
EC - E 10
Keep the compressor running and start pumping down the system. The compressor pressure will drop as the ammonia supply has been shut off and will finally cause the compressor to fall out (security). When this happens, simultaneously close the discharge valve V1 of the compressor. The condenser is now fully pumped up with the ammonia refrigerant (which is captured between valves V1 and V3 and cannot escape). Operate the evaporative condenser for at least two hours and measure the 5 temperatures (listed below) every 10 minutes until the pan water temperature is equal to the entering wet bulb temperature (T pan = WB in). When this happens, an equilibrium has been reached in the condenser and all 5 measured temperatures should be identical to each other. If the temperature (T1, T2) corresponding to the pressure in the evaporative condenser is higher than the entering wet bulb temperature by more than 1C, the system has an excessive amount of non-condensables (make sure that all gauges are accurate when checking for non-condensables). Five temperatures to be measured : 4. Entering wet bulb temperature at the condenser air inlet (WB in). 5. Discharge wet bulb temperature at the condenser outlet (WB out). 6. Pan (or remote sump) water temperature (T pan). 7. Temperature (T1) equivalent to refrigerant inlet pressure of the condenser. 8. Temperature (T2) equivalent to refrigerant discharge pressure of the condenser. Purge Connections The several recommended piping arrangements each show purge valves at two different locations, i.e. at the high point of the system and at each condensing coil outlet. Purging at the high point of the system can only be effective when the system is down. During normal operation the non-condensables are dispersed throughout the high velocity refrigerant vapour and too much refrigerant would be lost when purging from this high point. However, purging at the condenser coil outlet can be effectively accomplished during system operation. The non-condensables will carry through the condenser coil with the refrigerant liquid and vapour and tend to accumulate in the condensing coil outlet header and connection where the temperature and velocity are relatively low. Purge Piping All of the purge connections on the condenser coils plus the purge connection in the receiver may be cross connected to a single purge line, connected to an automatic purger. However, only one purge valve should be open at a time. Opening two or more valves tied together equalises the coil outlet pressures and the effect of the vertical drop legs is lost.
Overview
Desuperheaters
The discharge gas from ammonia reciprocating compressors is highly superheated. A desuperheater removes a portion of this superheat prior to the gas entering the condensing coil, and thereby reduces the load on the evaporative condenser. Within the normal range of singlestage compressor operation, discharge gas temperatures at 13 bar discharge pressure (36C) may run from 120C to 150C depending on the compression ratio, amount of suction gas superheat, and the compressor design. This represents up to 15% of the total heat rejection load. Other refrigerants and compressor types generally have much lower discharge gas temperatures than the ammonia reciprocating system so a desuperheater is usually impractical for these applications.
Baltimore Aircoil
EC - E 11
Ammonia Reciprocating Compressors generate significant superheat
The desuperheater coil is located on top of the condenser, above the drift eliminators.
An enhanced surface coil encased by galvanised steel panels will be fitted onto the evaporative condenser in the discharge air stream. The coil has a design for low pressure drop and is in complete compliance to the PED code requirements for a 23 bar design pressure. Optional high pressure PED coils are available designed for 28 bar operating pressure. The coil is a two pass arrangement with the entering and leaving gas connections at the same end; thus keeping all coil connections at the same end of the evaporative condenser. The coil is hot dip galvanised after fabrication and mounted into a completely enclosed plenum with access doors to allow inspection and maintenance of the drift eliminators and spray section. The piping between the desuperheater coil and the condenser coil is to be field fabricated and installed by the contractor.
Refrigerant Liquid Subcooling

The pressure at the expansion device feeding the evaporator(s) can be substantially lower than the receiver pressure due to liquid line pressure losses. If the liquid line is long or the evaporator is above the receiver, which further reduces the pressure at the expansion device, significant flashing can occur in the liquid line. To avoid liquid line flashing where the above conditions exist, it is necessary to subcool the liquid refrigerant after it leaves the receiver. The minimum amount of subcooling required is the temperature difference between the condensing temperature and the saturation temperature corresponding to the pressure at the expansion device. To determine the degree of subcooling required, it is necessary to calculate the liquid line pressure drop including valves, ells, tees, strainers, etc., and add to it the pressure drop equivalent to the static head loss between the receiver and the expansion device at the evaporator, if the evaporator is located above the receiver. Some compressor manufacturers publish their compressor ratings based on a fixed amount of subcooling at the expansion device. Subcooled liquid at the expansion device of the evaporator does increase system capacity since it increases the refrigeration effect per litre refrigerant circulated. But the increase is relatively small and seldom justifies the cost of the subcooling device and piping for this reason alone. However, where compressor ratings based on subcooled liquid are used, the specified amount of subcooling must be added to that required for liquid line pressure drop and static head loss.
Note: Increasing the evaporative condenser size over the capacity required for the system will not produce liquid subcooling. The increased condenser capacity will result only in lower operating condensing temperatures. The same result will occur if the condensing coil is piped directly to the subcooling coil.
EC - E 12
Low temperature, multistage ammonia (R-717) refrigeration systems often use liquid subcooling between stages for more economical operation. However, subcooling coils in an evaporative condenser are seldom, if ever, used with an ammonia refrigeration system for several reasons and are not available from BAC: 1. Design condensing temperatures are generally lower with ammonia, thus limiting the amount of subcooling that can be obtained. 2. The density of ammonia liquid is approximately 37 pounds per cubic foot, less than half that of the normally used halocarbons, and static head losses are proportionately less. 3. The expansion devices and system designs normally used for ammonia systems are less sensitive to small amounts of flash gas. 4. The high latent heat of ammonia (approximately 480 Btu/lb versus 70 Btu/lb for R-22) results in comparatively small amounts of flash gas with a liquid line properly sized for low pressure drop.
Note: Subcooling coils are not available from BAC.
Overview
Warranties
Baltimore Aircoil
VXC - E 13
Product Detail
VXC Evaporative Condensers ............................................................... E14 Benefits ..................................................................................................... E16 Construction Details ................................................................................ E18 Custom Features and Options ................................................................ E20 Accessories ............................................................................................... E22 Engineering Data ..................................................................................... E24 Structural Support .................................................................................. E31 Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... E33
VXC - E 14
VXC Evaporative Condensers

Capacity
Single Model Capacity: VXC : 60 kW - 6930 kW VXC-C : 950 kW - 1840 kW
General Description
VXC Evaporative Condensers deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of heat rejection and temperature requirements for various refrigerants. VXC and VXC-C models can be installed indoors and minimize sound levels. VXC-C models are designed to fit in standard dry van containers to minimize ocean freight costs. The Series VX occupies minimum floor space, provides year-round operating reliability and is ideal for sound sensitive applications.
Key Features
Suitable for indoor and outdoor installations Low sound Low ocean freight costs (VXC-C) Single side air inlet Low energy consumption Low installed cost Easy maintenance Reliable year-round operation Long service life Wide capacity range PED 97/23/EC coil design
Baltimore Aircoil
VXC - E 15
VXC - E 16
Benefits
Wide Capacity Range
Evaporative condenser capacity - The evaporative condensers are available in a broad range of unit capacities, with small capacity increments to permit close matching of unit size to design load. The VX line offers the widest selection of evaporative condensers in the industry to meet virtually every installation and application need.

Indoor Installations Centrifugal fans can overcome the static pressure imposed by external ductwork, allowing these units to be installed indoors.
Low Sound
Low Ocean Freight Cost

Size - VXC-C models are designed to fit in standard closed box containers to minimize ocean freight costs. All containerized condenser models VXC-C are shipped in a bottom fan section and a top coil section, which fit together into a 40' box container, no crating required. In order to fit the bottom fan section through the doors of the container, the fan enclosures are shipped loose inside the water basin area and are easily mounted on site.
VXC-C Model in Dry Van Container
Fan Enclosures are shipped loose
Baltimore Aircoil
VXC - E 17

Evaporative Cooling Equipment minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system because it provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving natural resources and reducing environmental impact. Evaporative Condensers provide lower condensing temperatures and can offer significant kW savings over conventional air-cooled and water-cooled condensing systems.
Low Installed Cost

Easy Maintenance

Long Service Life

VXC - E 18
Upper Section
Lower Section
Baltimore Aircoil
VXC - E 19


3. Coil
Coil according to European Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC Continuous serpentine, steel tubing Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF) Pneumatically tested at 34 bar standard coil Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid
5. Fan Drive System

Quiet Operation

8. Access Door
9. Strainer (not shown)

VXC - E 20

Coil Configurations
Each coil is manufactured according to the European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97/23/EC (For more details, refer to the Evaporative Condenser "Overview" section) BAC condenser coils are standard available at a design pressure of 23 bar, and are pneumatically tested at 34 bar. Standard Serpentine Coil: The standard condensing coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel, hot-dip galvanised after fabrication (HDGAF).
Hot Dip Galvanised Coil
Multiple Circuit Coils (Split Coils): In general, multiple circuit coils are required primarily on halocarbon refrigerant systems where it is common practice to maintain individual compressor systems. Also, a circuit can be isolated to provide cooling of a water or glycol loop for compressor jacket cooling. A wide range of multiple circuit arrangements are available. Optional Extended Surface Coil: Coils are available with selected rows finned at 3 to 5 fins per inch for wet/dry applications. The coil is hot-dip galvanised after fabrication (HDGAF). Optional Stainless Steel Coil: Coils are available in Type 304L or 316L stainless steel for specialised applications. Optional High Pressure Coil: Coils are available with a design pressure of 28 bar and pneumatically tested at 40 bar. The Coil is hot-dip galvanised after fabrication (HDGAF). All coils are designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid.
Baltimore Aircoil
VXC - E 21
Fan Drive System


Low Sound Operation


Unit with Intake and Discharge Sound Attenuation
VXC - E 22
Accessories
Ladder, Safety Cage and handrails


Basin Heaters
Model No. VXC 14-28 36-65 72-97 110-135 150-205 221-454 495-516 562-680 715-908 990-1032 1124-1360 1430-1608 S288-S350 S403-S504 S576-S700
Heater -18C (kW) 1 x 1,5 1 x 1,5 1 x 2,5 1x3 1x4 1x6 2x4 2x5 2x6 4x4 4x5 4x6 1x6 2x4 2x6
Baltimore Aircoil
VXC - E 23
Model No. VXC S806-S1010 C220 - C287 C325 - C426
Heater -18C (kW) 4x4 1x6 2x4

Solid Bottom Panels

Discharge Hoods
Desuperheater
Desuperheaters can be used in R-717 systems with reciprocating compressors. They increase the capacity of the standard model and extend the dry operation capacity. They are also effective in reducing the occurrence of visible plumes.
Steel Eliminators
Steel eliminators with Baltibond Corrosion Protection System are available for specific applications.


VXC - E 24
Engineering Data
VXC 14 - VXC 265
1. Refrigerant in ND 100; 2. Refrigerant out ND 100; 3. Make-up; 4. Overflow; 5. Drain; 6. Access (models 14 through 135 have the access door at the back); For VXC 14 through VXC 135 : make-up ND 25; overflow ND 50; drain ND 50.; For VXC 150 through VXC 265 : make-up ND 50; overflow ND 80; drain ND 50.
Model
Heaviest Section Coil (kg) 580* 660* 480 540 920* 1030* 700 700 860 1000 1000 1200 1200 1440 1440 1720 1720 1980 2240 2630 3150 3150
Air Flow (m3/s) 2,3 2,2 2,5 2,4 4,6 5,0 4,8 5,3 5,5 5,8 7,5 7,1 10,4 9,9 10,9 13,3 15,8 15,7 16,9 21,9 21,2 22,7
Fan Motor (kW) (1x) 1,5 (1x) 1,5 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 4,0 (1x) 4,0 (1x) 4,0 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 4,0 (1x) 7,5 (1x) 7,5 (1x) 7,5 (1x) 7,5 (1x) 11,0 (1x) 7,5 (1x) 11,0 (1x) 11,0 (1x) 15,0 (1x) 15,0 (1x) 15,0 (1x) 18,5
Water Flow (l/s) 2,2 2,2 2,2 2,2 4,7 4,7 4,7 4,7 4,7 7,1 7,1 7,1 9,5 9,5 9,5 13,9 13,9 13,9 13,9 19,2 19,2 19,2
Pump Motor (kW) (1x) 0,25 (1x) 0,25 (1x) 0,25 (1x) 0,25 (1x) 0,37 (1x) 0,37 (1x) 0,37 (1x) 0,37 (1x) 0,37 (1x) 0,75 (1x) 0,75 (1x) 0,75 (1x) 0,75 (1x) 0,75 (1x) 0,75 (1x) 1,5 (1x) 1,5 (1x) 1,5 (1x) 1,5 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2
R717 Charge (kg) 9 11 15 19 16 20 29 29 36 41 41 50 59 66 73 77 77 104 111 109 145 145
L (mm) 914 914 914 914 1829 1829 1829 1829 1829 2737 2737 2737 3658 3658 3658 3645 3645 3645 3645 3550 3550 3550
W (mm) 1207 1207 1207 1207 1207 1207 1207 1207 1207 1207 1207 1207 1207 1207 1207 1438 1438 1438 1438 2397 2397 2397
H (mm) 2035 2245 2467 2683 2035 2245 2467 2467 2683 2578 2578 2813 2578 2813 2813 3093 3093 3328 3563 3585 3820 3820
VXC 14 VXC 18 VXC 25 VXC 28 VXC 36 VXC 45 VXC 52 VXC 59 VXC 65 VXC 72 VXC 86 VXC 97 VXC 110 VXC 125 VXC 135 VXC 150 VXC 166 VXC 185 VXC 205 VXC 221 VXC 250 VXC 265
* Unit normally ships in one piece.
Baltimore Aircoil
VXC - E 25
VXC S288 - VXC S1010
1. Refrigerant in ND 100; 2. Refrigerant out ND 100; 3. Make-up ND 50; 4. Overflow ND 80; 5. Drain ND 50; 6. Access
Model
Heaviest Section (coil) (kg) 3850 3850 3850 4470 4710 4710 5700 5700 6690 3840 3840 3840 4470 5120* 5120* 5700 5700 6690
Air Flow (m3/s) 22,8 24,2 26,7 26,2 36,6 38,9 34,9 37,5 36,6 45,6 48,4 53,4 52,4 73,2 77,8 69,8 75,0 73,2
Fan Motor (kW) (1x) 18,5 (1x) 22,0 (1x) 30,0 (1x) 30,0 (1x) 30,0 (1x) 37,0 (1x) 30,0 (1x) 37,0 (1x) 37,0 (2x) 18,5 (2x) 22,0 (2x) 30,0 (2x) 30,0 (2x) 30,0 (2x) 37,0 (2x) 30,0 (2x) 37,0 (2x) 37,0
Water Flow (l/s) 25,2 25,2 25,2 25,2 38,5 38,5 38,5 38,5 38,5 50,4 50,4 50,4 50,4 77,0 77,0 77,0 77,0 77,0
Pump Motor (kW) (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (2x) 2,2 (2x) 2,2 (2x) 2,2 (2x) 2,2 (2x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4
R717 Charge (kg) 163 163 163 195 197 197 245 245 293 327 327 327 390 395 395 490 490 585
L (mm) 3550 3550 3550 3550 5385 5385 5385 5385 5385 7226 7226 7226 7226 10903 10903 10903 10903 10903
W (mm) 2397 2397 2397 2397 2397 2397 2397 2397 2397 2397 2397 2397 2397 2397 2397 2397 2397 2397
H (mm) 4248 4248 4248 4483 4013 4013 4248 4248 4483 4248 4248 4248 4483 4013 4013 4248 4248 4483
VXC S288 VXC S300 VXC S328 VXC S350 VXC S403 VXC S429 VXC S455 VXC S482 VXC S504 VXC S576 VXC S600 VXC S656 VXC S700 VXC S806 VXC S858 VXC S910 VXC S964 VXC S1010
* Pan section is the heaviest section.
VXC - E 26
VXC 357 - VXC 1360
1. Refrigerant in ND 100; 2. Refrigerant out ND 100; 3. Make-up; 4. Overflow ND 80; 5. Drain ND 50; 6. Access; For VXC 357 through VXC 908: make-up ND 50; For VXC 1124 through VXC 1360 Make-up ND 80.
Model
Heaviest Section (coil) (kg) 3940 4730 5510 5810 7010 8200 3940 4730 5510 5810* 7010 8200
Air Flow (m3/s) 34,3 31,6 34,4 51,2 50,0 52,0 68,6 63,2 68,8 102,4 100,1 104,0
Fan Motor (kW) (1x) 22,0 (1x) 22,0 (1x) 30,0 (2x) 18,5 (2x) 18,5 (2x) 22,0 (2x) 22,0 (2x) 22,0 (2x) 30,0 (4x) 18,5 (4x) 18,5 (4x) 22,0
Water Flow (l/s) 30,8 30,8 30,8 46,7 46,7 46,7 61,6 61,6 61,6 93,4 93,4 93,4
Pump Motor (kW) (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4
R717 Charge (kg) 181 218 250 250 349 390 362 435 499 581 699 780
L (mm) 3550 3550 3550 5388 5388 5388 7226 7226 7226 10903 10903 10903
W (mm) 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
H (mm) 4075 4310 4545 4075 4310 4545 4075 4310 4545 4075 4310 4545
VXC 357 VXC 399 VXC 454 VXC 562 VXC 620 VXC 680 VXC 714 VXC 798 VXC 908 VXC 1124 VXC 1240 VXC 1360
* Pan Section is the heaviest section.
Baltimore Aircoil
VXC - E 27
VXC 495 - VXC 1608
1. Refrigerant in ND 100; 2. Refrigerant out ND 100; 3. Make-up; 4. Overflow ND 80; 5. Drain ND 50; 6. Access. For VXC 495 through VXC 1032 : Make-up ND50; For VXC 1430 through VXC 1608: Make-up ND 80.
Model
Heat Rejection (kW) 2133 2223 3081 3326 3464 4265 4446 6161 6652 6928
Heaviest Section (coil) (kg) 5610 6550 8300 8300 9710 5610 6550 8300 8300 9710
Air Flow (m3/s) 40,0 39,4 56,1 62,3 60,4 80,0 78,8 112,2 124,6 120,8
Fan Motor (kW) (1x) 37,0 (1x) 37,0 (2x) 22,0 (2x) 30,0 (2x) 30,0 (2x) 37,0 (2x) 37,0 (4x) 22,0 (4x) 30,0 (4x) 30,0
Water Flow (l/s) 39,1 39,1 56,8 56,8 56,8 78,2 78,2 113,6 113,6 113,6
Pump Motor (kW) (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 4
R717 Charge (kg) 250 297 374 374 449 499 594 748 748 898
L (mm) 3550 3550 5388 5388 5388 7226 7226 10903 10903 10903
W (mm) 3607 3607 3607 3607 3607 3607 3607 3607 3607 3607
H (mm) 4310 4545 4310 4310 4545 4310 4545 4310 4310 4545
VXC 495 VXC 516 VXC 715 VXC 772 VXC 804 VXC 990 VXC 1032 VXC 1430 VXC 1544 VXC 1608
VXC - E 28
VXC C220 - VXC C426
1. Refrigerant in ND 100; 2. Refrigerant out ND 100; 3. Make-up ND 50; 4. Overflow ND 80; 5. Drain ND 50; 6. Access Fan covers are shipped loose.
Model
Heaviest Section (coil) (kg) 2630 3150 3150 3665 3885 3885 4685 4685 5485
Air Flow (m3/s) 20,6 20,1 21,7 22,5 31,5 33,5 32,2 35,5 34,7
Fan Motor (kW) (1x) 15,0 (1x) 15,0 (1x) 18,5 (1x) 22,0 (1x) 18,5 (1x) 22,0 (1x) 22,0 (1x) 30,0 (1x) 30,0
Water Flow (l/s) 19,2 19,2 19,2 19,2 29,0 29,0 29,0 29,0 29,0
Pump Motor (kW) (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4
R717 Charge (kg) 104 129 129 154 156 156 195 195 234
L (mm) 3550 3550 3550 3550 5385 5385 5385 5385 5385
W (mm) 2245 2245 2245 2245 2245 2245 2245 2245 2245
H (mm) 3585 3820 3820 4055 3585 3585 3820 3820 4055
VXC C220 VXC C250 VXC C265 VXC C287 VXC C325 VXC C340 VXC C380 VXC C408 VXC C426
General Notes
1. Standard refrigerant connection sizes are ND 100 BSP MPT inlet and outlet (for models VXC 14 through 28 refrigerant connection sizes are ND 80 BSP MPT), consult your local BAC representative for size and location. Other connection sizes are available on special order. Refrigerant connections are standard bevelled for welding. 2. Make up, overflow, suction, drain connections and access door can be provided on side opposite to that shown; consult your BAC Balticare representative. 3. Unit height is indicative, for precise value refer to certified print. 4. Shipping/operating weights indicated are for units without accessories such as sound attenuators, discharge hoods, etc. Consult factory certified prints to obtain weight additions and the heaviest section to be lifted. 7. Fan kW is at 0 Pa ESP. To operate against external static pressure up to 125 Pa, increase each fan motor one size. 8. Refrigerant charge listed is R 717 operating charge. To determine operating charge of R22 refrigerants, multiply by: 1,93. For R134A, multiply by: 1,98. 5. The standard right hand arrangement as shown has the air inlet side on the right when facing the connection end (for double pump units there is no difference between right and left hand arrangement; make-up connection only at one side). Left hand can be furnished by special order. Water and refrigerant connections are always located on the same end of the unit. 6. For indoor applications of evaporative condensers, the room may be used as a plenum with ductwork attached to the discharge only. If inlet ductwork is required, an enclosed fan section must be specified; consult your BAC representative for details.
Baltimore Aircoil
VXC - E 29
Sound Attenuation
XA + XB Sound Attenuation
XC Sound Attenuation
VXC - E 30
VXC
Unit + Atten. # pieces shipped
# Access doors (2) XA, XB, XC W2
Dimensions (mm) H1 W1 L1 L2 Intake + solid bottom XA 902 1816 2731 3645 3645 3645 3645 5480 140 225 300 400 500 690 690 XB 160 270 370 470 XC N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
Weights (kg) Discharge XA 130 175 280 360 XB 150 220 350 420 XC N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. XA 270 400 580 760 Total XB 310 490 720 890 XC N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
XA, XB, XC Disch. Att. Int. Att. XA, XB XC 14 - 28 36 - 65 72 - 97 110 - 135 150 - 205 221 - 265 S288 - S350 S403 - S504 S576 - S700 S806 - S1010 357 - 454 562 - 680 714 - 908 1124 - 1360 495 - 516 715 - 804 990 - 1032 1430 - 1608 4(1) 4(1) 4 4 4 4 4 4 7 7 4 4 7 7 4 4 7 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 4 1 2 2 4 1 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2352 2352 2352 2352 2583 3542 3542 3542 3542 3542 4145 4145 4145 4145 4752 4752 4752 4752
XA, XB, XC 914
N.A. 1090 1030
N.A. 1090 1030 1829 N.A. 1090 1030 2737 N.A. 1090 1030 3658 3728 1600 1420 3645 4687 2070 1955 3550 4687 2070 2365 3550 4687 2070 2365 5385 4687 2070 2365 7226
600 1200 440 820 1610 530 820 1610 660
520 1070 940 1120 2270 650 1330 1220 1470 2940 800 1640 1350 1620 3250
960 1160 2270 830 1090 2240 1790 2250 4510
7322 1380 1640 3220 1320 1600 3280 2700 3240 6500
4687 2070 2365 10903 10998 1920 2320 4540 1660 2180 4480 3580 4500 9020 5290 2560 2965 3550 5290 2560 2965 5388 5290 2560 2965 7226 3645 790 940 1850 710 880 1820 1500 1820 3670
5480 1080 1330 2590 900 1210 2490 1980 2540 5080 7322 1580 1880 3700 1420 1760 3640 3000 3640 7340
5290 2560 2965 10903 10994 2160 2660 5180 1800 2420 4980 3960 5080 10160 5897 2560 3575 3550 5897 2560 3575 5388 5897 2560 3575 7226 3645 840 990 1900 810 1030 2130 1650 2020 4030
5480 1150 1400 2660 1020 1410 2920 2170 2810 5580 7322 1680 1980 3800 1620 2060 4260 3300 4040 8060
5897 2560 3575 10903 10994 2300 2800 5320 2040 2820 5840 4340 5620 11160
(1)
VXC 14, VXC 18, VXC-36 and VXC-45 + Attenuator are shipped in 3 pieces
(2) Intake Attenuator: Access opening is 775 mm high, 405 mm wide and is located at each end of the unit. Discharge Attenuator : Access opening is 405 mm high, 1170 mm wide and is located at blank off side of the unit (VXC14-28 has 650 mm width)
Remote Sump Data

Baltimore Aircoil
VXC - E 31
Structural Support
1. Outline of Unit; 2. Mounting holes 22 mm, 3. Unit; 4. Air Intake.
Model
A Unit Length (mm) 914 1829 2737 3658 3645 3550 3550 5385 7226
B Unit width (mm) 1207 1207 1207 1207 1438 2397 2397 2397 2397
C D Center dis. Center dis. Length Width (mm) (mm) 750 1664 2572 3492 3492 3238 3238 5074 6914 1153 1153 1153 1153 1378 2397 2327 2327 2327
E (mm) 2486 3238
F (mm) 102 438
G (mm) -
X Max. Deflection (mm) 2 5 8 10 10 10 10 13 13
Mounting holes 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 8
VXC 14-28 VXC 36-65 VXC 72-97 VXC 110-135 VXC 150-205 VXC 221-265 VXC S288-S350 VXC S403-S504 VXC S576-S700
VXC - E 32
Model
A Unit Length (mm) 10903 3550 5388 7226 10903 3550 5388 7226 10903 3550 5385
B Unit width (mm) 2397 3000 3000 3000 3000 3607 3607 3607 3607 2245 2245
C D Center dis. Center dis. Length Width (mm) (mm) 10586 3238 5074 6914 10586 3238 5074 6914 10586 3238 5074 2327 2934 2934 2934 2934 3537 3537 3537 3537 2175 2175
E (mm) 2486 2486 3238 2486 2486 3238 2486 2486
F (mm) 102 102 438 102 102 438 102 102
G (mm) 438 438 438 -
X Max. Deflection (mm) 13 10 13 13 13 10 13 13 13 10 13
Mounting holes 16 4 8 8 16 4 8 8 16 4 8
VXC S806-S1010 VXC 357-454 VXC 562-680 VXC 714-908 VXC 1124-1360 VXC 495-516 VXC 715-804 VXC 990-1032 VXC 1430-1608 VXC C220-C287 VXC C325-C426
1. Outline of Unit; 2. Mounting Holes 22 mm; 3. Outline of attenuator (optional XA or XB);4. Support Channel attached to optional XA or XB attenuator; 5.+3. Outline of Attenuator (optional XC); 6.+4. Support Channels attached to optional XC attenuator; 7. Unit; 8. Sound Attenuator; 9. Air Intake.
Notes:
Baltimore Aircoil
VXC - E 33
General
A. General: Furnish and install, _____ factory assembled evaporative condenser(s) of counterflow blow-through design, with single side entry, conforming in all aspects to the specifications and schedule as shown on the plans. B. Capacity: The evaporative condenser(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to have condensing capacity of _____ kW heat rejection, operating with ____ refrigerant and ___C condensing temperature and ___C entering wet-bulb temperature. C. Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty shall be for a period of one year from the date of startup or eighteen months from the date of shipment, whichever ends first. D. Quality Assurance: The manufacture shall have Management System certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of products and services.
Products
General: All steel panels and structural elements shall be constructed from heavy-gauge, Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel, with cut edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound.

The evaporative condenser shall include a coil casing section consisting of a refrigerant condensing coil, a spray water distribution system, and drift eliminators as indicated by the manufacturer. 1. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be fabricated of all prime surface steel at the manufacturers own facility, and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. a. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be tested at 34 bar air pressure under water. b.The refrigerant condensing coil shall be designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of liquid refrigerant. c. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be according to European Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC. 2. Water shall be distributed evenly over the coil at a minimum flow rate of 14 kPa to ensure complete wetting of the coil at all times by large-diameter, non-clog, 360 plastic distribution nozzles spaced across the coil face area in plastic material spray branches. Nozzles shall utilize a two-stage diffusion pattern to provide overlapping, umbrella spray patterns that create multiple intersection points with adjacent nozzles. Spray branches and nozzles shall be held in place by snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of individual nozzles or complete branches for cleaning or flushing. 3. Removable plastic material drift eliminators shall be positioned to prevent moisture from leaving the evaporative condenser and incorporate a minimum of three (3) changes in air direction.
3.0 Pan Assembly

The evaporative condenser shall include a pan assembly consisting of cold water basin with pump assembly and fan assemblies with single side air inlet and integral air plenum. 1. The cold water basin shall include: a drain/clean-out connection; a steel strainer; a brass make-up valve; overflow connection; and a water recirculation pump assembly. a. Drain/cleanout connection shall be located in the cold water basin to allow removal of recirculating water. b. Lift-out steel strainer shall be supplied with perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution nozzle orifices and an integral anti-vortexing hood to prevent air entrainment. c. Brass make-up valve shall be supplied with a large-diameter plastic float arranged for easy adjustment. d. Overflow connection shall be provided in the cold water basin to protect against recirculating water spillage. e. Water recirculation pump shall be a close-coupled, bronze-fitted centrifugal pump equipped with a mechanical seal, mounted on the basin and piped from the suction strainer to the water distribution system. i. The pump shall be installed so that it may drain freely when the basin is drained. ii. The pump assembly shall include an integral metering valve and bleed line to control the bleed rate from the pump discharge to the overflow connection. iii. The pump motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type suitable for _____ V, ____ phase______ Hz electrical service. f. On installations requiring a remote sump, the evaporative condenser shall be modified to accommodate the use of an independent sump and pump for recirculating water (by others) i. The recirculating water pump, steel strainer, make-up valve, and integral bleed line assemblies shall be omitted from the evaporative condenser scope of supply. ii. The evaporative condenser shall be supplied with a cold water basin outlet sized and located as indicated on the drawings for gravity drain to the remote sump. iii. The water distribution system shall have an operating pressure of 14 kPa at the evaporative condenser spray water inlet connection. 2. Air shall enter the evaporative condenser through the centrifugal fan assemblies and integral air plenum. a. Fans and motors shall be located in the dry entering airstream to provide greater reliability and ease of maintenance. b. Fan housings shall have curved inlet rings for efficient air entry and rectangular discharge cowls that extend into the pan to increase fan efficiency and prevent water from entering the fans. c. Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, centrifugal flow type mounted on a steel shaft with heavy-duty, self-aligning, relubricatable bearings with cast iron housings, designed for a minimum L10 life of 40 000 hours. d. Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type, suitable for _____ V, ____ phase, ______ Hz electrical service and shall be mounted on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor base. Special moisture protection shall be furnished on the windings, shafts, and bearings.
VXC - E 34 4.0 Optional Equipment Specifications

A. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with basin heaters to prevent freezing of the water in the cold water basin when the evaporative condenser is idle. 1. The basin heaters shall be selected to maintain +4C basin water temperature at -18C ambient temperature. 2. Basin heaters shall be electric immersion type controlled by a remote thermostat with the sensing bulb located in the basin water. 3. Basin heaters shall be provided with a factory-installed low water level cutout switch to prevent heater operation unless the heater elements are fully submerged. B. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with a factory assembled, field-installed access ladder and handrails to provide access to the top of the evaporative condenser. C. Evaporative condenser shall be supplied with the Baltiguard Drive System to improve part load efficiency and provide system redundancy in case of a motor failure. 1. The Baltiguard Drive System shall include the main fan motor as listed in the manufacturers published literature and a pony motor sized for approximately 1/3 of design kW and 2/3 of design fan speed to optimize energy savings during non-design load conditions.
Baltimore Aircoil
VCL - E 35
Product Detail
VCL Evaporative Condensers ............................................................... E36 Benefits ..................................................................................................... E38 Construction Details ................................................................................ E40 Custom Features and Options ................................................................ E41 Accessories ............................................................................................... E43 Engineering Data ..................................................................................... E44 Structural Support .................................................................................. E48 Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... E49
VCL - E 36
VCL Evaporative Condensers

Capacity
Single Model Capacity: 180 kW - 1380 kW
General Description
VCL Evaporative Condensers deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of heat rejection and temperature requirements for various refrigerants. VCL models can be installed indoors, minimize sound levels, and are available to accommodate limited ceiling or enclosure heights. The Series VL minimizes installation costs, provides year-round operating reliability, and is ideal for sound sensitive applications.
Key Features
Suitable for indoor and outdoor installations Suitable for locations with limited ceiling or enclosure heights and roof top installations Low sound Single side air inlet Low energy consumption Low installed cost Easy maintenance Reliable year-round operation Long service life PED 97/23/EC coil design
Baltimore Aircoil
VCL - E 37
VCL - E 38
Benefits
Indoor Installations Centrifugal fans can overcome the static pressure imposed by external ductwork, allowing this type of unit to be installed indoors. Low Profile Models The fan section of low profile units is adjacent to the casing section to yield models suitable for use in height sensitive installations. Low profile models are available in heights of 1585 mm up to 2560 mm.
Low Sound
Centrifugal Fan - Centrifugal fans have inherently low sound characteristics.
Single Side Air Inlet - Particularly sound-sensitive areas can be accommodated by facing the quiet side (back panel) to the sound-sensitive direction.

Evaporative Cooling Equipment minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system because it provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving natural resources and reducing environmental impact. Evaporative Condensers provide lower condensing temperatures and can offer significant kW savings over conventional air-cooled and water-cooled condensing systems.
Low Installed Cost

Easy Maintenance
Modular Design

Baltimore Aircoil
VCL - E 39
Long Service Life

The interior of the unit is easily accessible
V-Belt Drive for Series VL
VCL - E 40

Three distinct changes in air direction to reduce drift loss significantly Assembled in easy to handle sections, which can be removed for access to the equipment interior

5. Fan Drive System

3. Coil
Coil according to European Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC Continuous serpentine, steel tubing Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF)
Quiet Operation

Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor
Pneumatically tested at 34 bar standard coil Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid Bleed line with metering valve installed from pump discharge to overflow
UV resistant non-corrosive material, impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
8. Access Door
9. Strainer (Not Shown)

Baltimore Aircoil
VCL - E 41

Coil Configurations
Each coil is manufactured according to the European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97/23/ EC (For more details, refer to the Evaporative Condenser "Overview" section) BAC condenser coils are standard available at a design pressure of 23 bar, and are pneumatically tested at 34 bar. Standard Serpentine Coil: The standard condensing coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel, hot-dip galvanised after fabrication (HDGAF). Multiple Circuit Coils (Split Coils): In general, multiple circuit coils are required primarily on halocarbon refrigerant systems where it is common practice to maintain individual compressor systems. Also, a circuit can be isolated to provide cooling of a water or glycol loop for compressor jacket cooling. A wide range of multiple circuit arrangements are available. Optional Extended Surface Coil: Coils are available with selected rows finned at 3 to 5 fins per inch for wet/dry applications. The coil is hot-dip galvanised after fabrication (HDGAF). Optional Stainless Steel Coil: Coils are available in Type 304L or 316L stainless steel for specialised applications. Optional High Pressure Coil: Coils are available with a design pressure of 28 bar and pneumatically tested at 40 bar. The Coil is hot-dip galvanised after fabrication (HDGAF). All coils are designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid.
VCL - E 42
Fan Drive System


Low Sound Operation

Unit with Sound Attenuation
Remote Sump
Baltimore Aircoil
VCL - E 43
Accessories

Basin Heaters
Model No. VCL VCL 042 - 079 VCL 084 - 119 VCL 131 VCL 133 VCL 140 - 159 VCL 167-235 VCL 239 - 257 VCL 258 VCL 285 - 321 Heaters -18C (kW) 3 4 5 4 5 2x4 2x5 2x4 2x5

Desuperheater
Desuperheaters can be used in R-717 systems with reciprocating compressors. They increase the capacity of the standard model and extend the dry operation capacity. They are also effective in reducing the occurrence of visible plumes.


Steel Eliminators
Steel eliminators with Baltibond Corrosion Protection System are available for specific applications.
VCL - E 44
Engineering Data
VCL 042 H - VCL 159 M
1. Refrigerant in ND 100; 2. Refrigerant out ND 100; 3. Access; 4. Make-up ND 25; 5. Overflow: ND 50 on VCL 042-119 & 133, ND 80 on VCL 131 & 140-159; 6. Drain ND 50; 7. Spray Pump; 8. Fan Motor.
Model VCL042-H VCL048-G VCL054-H VCL058-G VCL065-H VCL071-J VCL073-H VCL079-J VCL084-K VCL096-J VCL102-K VCL111-L VCL115-K VCL119-M VCL133-M VCL131-L VCL140-M VCL148-L VCL159-M
Operating Weight (kg) 1610 1800 1810 1990 2005 2025 2190 2220 2530 2810 2820 2840 3090 2845 3120 3560 3570 3930 3940
Shipping Weight (kg) 1100 1270 1280 1440 1460 1490 1640 1670 1750 2010 2020 2080 2280 2090 2350 2490 2500 2830 2840
Air Flow (m3/s) 7,9 6,7 7,6 6,4 7,4 8,1 7,2 7,9 11,4 10,2 11,2 12,3 10,8 12,4 13,0 13,6 14,8 13,4 14,6
Fan Motor (kW) (1x) 4,0 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 4,0 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 4,0 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 4,0 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 7,5 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 7,5 (1x) 11 (1x) 7,5 (1x) 15 (1x) 15 (1x) 11 (1x) 15 (1x) 11 (1x) 15
Water Flow (l/s) 5,9 5,9 5,9 5,9 5,9 5,9 5,9 5,9 9,0 9,0 9,0 9,0 9,0 9,0 9,0 12,1 12,1 12,1 12,1
Pump Motor (kW) (1x) 0,55 (1x) 0,55 (1x) 0,55 (1x) 0,55 (1x) 0,55 (1x) 0,55 (1x) 0,55 (1x) 0,55 (1x) 0,75 (1x) 0,75 (1x) 0,75 (1x) 0,75 (1x) 0,75 (1x) 0,75 (1x) 0,75 (1x) 1,1 (1x) 1,1 (1x) 1,1 (1x) 1,1
R-717 Charge (kg) 20 28 28 38 38 38 46 46 42 42 55 55 72 55 72 74 74 92 92
L1 (mm) 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 3350 4560 4560 4560 4560 4560 4560 4560 5480 5480 5480 5480
L2 (mm) 1820 1820 1820 1820 1820 1820 1820 1820 2730 2730 2730 2730 2730 2730 2730 3650 3650 3650 3650
W (mm) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
H (mm) 1585 1855 1855 2015 2015 2015 2230 2230 1855 2090 2090 2090 2350 2090 2350 2090 2090 2350 2350
Baltimore Aircoil
VCL - E 45
VCL 167 K - VCL 321 P
1. Refrigerant in ND 100; 2. Refrigerant out ND 100; 3. Access; 4. Make-up ND 50; 5. Overflow: ND 80. 6. Drain ND 50; 7. Spray Pump; 8. Fan Motor.
Model VCL167-K VCL171-N VCL185-L VCL208-N VCL209-L VCL219-L VCL235-N VCL258-O VCL239-L VCL257-M VCL285-O VCL286-N VCL299-O VCL321-P
Air Flow (m3/s) 17,4 23,3 19,6 22,8 19,3 18,9 22,3 23,0 20,7 22,6 25,6 23,9 25,3 27,5
Fan Motor (kW) (1x) 7,5 (1x) 18,5 (1x) 11,0 (1x) 18,5 (1x) 11,0 (1x) 11,0 (1x) 18,5 (1x) 22,0 (1x) 11,0 (1x) 15,0 (1x) 22,0 (1x) 18,5 (1x) 22,0 (1x) 30,0
Water Flow (l/s) 17,9 17,9 17,9 17,9 17,9 17,9 17,9 17,9 24,2 24,2 24,2 24,2 24,2 24,2
Pump Motor (kW) (1x) 1,1 (1x) 1,1 (1x) 1,1 (1x) 1,1 (1x) 1,1 (1x) 1,1 (1x) 1,1 (1x) 1,1 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2
R-717 Charge (kg) 110 85 110 110 143 165 143 165 183 183 183 219 219 219
L1 (mm) 4560 4560 4560 4560 4560 4560 4560 4560 5480 5480 5480 5480 5480 5480
L2 (mm) 2730 2730 2730 2730 2730 2730 2730 2730 3650 3650 3650 3650 3650 3650
W (mm) 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400
H (mm) 2090 1855 2090 2090 2350 2560 2350 2560 2350 2350 2350 2560 2560 2560
General Notes
1. All models are single coil section units. Fan cycling results only in on-off operation. For additional steps of control, the Baltiguard Drive System and two-speed fan motors are available. More precise capacity control can be obtained with modulating fan discharge dampers. 2. Make up, overflow, suction, drain connections and access door can be provided on side opposite to that shown; consult your BAC representative. 3. Unit height is indicative, for precise value refer to certified print. 4. Shipping/operating weights indicated are for units without accessories such as sound attenuators, discharge hoods, etc. Consult factory certified prints to obtain weight additions and the heaviest section to be lifted. 5. For indoor applications of evaporative condensers, the room may be used as a plenum with ductwork attached to the discharge only. If inlet ductwork is required, an enclosed fan section must be specified; consult your BAC representative for details. 6. Fan kW is at 0 Pa ESP. To operate against external static pressure up to 125 Pa, increase each fan motor one size. 7. Refrigerant charge listed is R 717 operating charge. To determine operating charge of R22 refrigerants, multiply by: 1,93. For R134A, multiply by: 1,98. 8. Refrigerant connections are standard bevelled for welding.
VCL - E 46
Sound Attenuation
Baltimore Aircoil
VCL - E 47
1.Discharge attenuator, 2. Access Door, 3. Intake Attenuator, 4. Plenum; W & H = Unit Dimensions (See Engineering Data).
Dimensions (mm) Model No HS VCL 042-079 VCL 084-133 VCL 131-159 VCL 167-258 VCL 239-321 2390 2640 2640 2640 2640 L2 HD 3125 3375 3375 3375 3375 VS 2010 2010 2010 2010 2010 L1 HS,HD,V S 1820 2730 3650 2730 3650 HS 430 465 465 665 665 Intake Attenuator HD 625 660 660 980 980 VS 548 541 566 756 761
Maximum Weight (kg) Discharge Attenuator HS 210 295 365 465 565 HD 230 315 385 500 605 VS 192 264 334 419 529 HS 640 760 830 1130 1230 Total HD 855 975 1045 1480 1585 VS 740 805 900 1175 1290
Note: All units with HS or VS attenuator ship in 2 pieces. All units with HD attenuator ship in 3 pieces.
Remote Sump Data

VCL - E 48
Structural Support
1. Outline of Unit, 2. Support Beams, 3. Fan Side, 4. Mounting Holes 22 mm.
Model No VCL VCL 042-079 VCL 084-119 VCL 131 VCL 133 VCL 140-159 VCL 167-235 VCL 239-257 VCL 258 VCL 285-321
A (mm) 2426 3334 4255 3334 4255 3334 4255 3334 4255
B (mm) 1193 1193 1193 1193 1193 2343 2343 2343 2343
Maximum Deflection (mm) 10 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
Notes:
Baltimore Aircoil
VCL - E 49
General
A. General: Furnish and install, _____ factory assembled evaporative condenser(s) of counterflow blow-through design, with single side entry, conforming in all aspects to the specifications and schedule as shown on the plans. The condenser shall be of unitary design with all moving parts factory mounted and aligned. B. Capacity: The evaporative condenser(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to have condensing capacity of _____ kW heat rejection, operating with ____ refrigerant and ___C condensing temperature and ___C entering wet-bulb temperature. C. Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty shall be for a period of one year from the date of startup or eighteen months from the date of shipment, whichever ends first. B. Quality Assurance: The manufacture shall have Management System certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of products and services.
Products
General: All steel panels and structural elements shall be constructed from heavy-gauge, Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel, with cut edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound.
2.0 Coil Assembly

The heat transfer section shall be integral to the pan section to facilitate rigging and shall include the coil below a spray water distribution system and drift eliminators. 1. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be fabricated of all prime surface steel at the manufacturers own facility, and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. a. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be tested at 34 bar air pressure under water. b. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of liquid refrigerant. c. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be according to European Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC. 2. Water shall be distributed evenly over the coil at a minimum flow rate of 14 kPa to ensure complete wetting of the coil at all times by large-diameter, non-clog, 360 plastic distribution nozzles spaced across the coil face area in plastic material spray branches. Nozzles shall utilize a two-stage diffusion pattern to provide overlapping, umbrella spray patterns that create multiple intersection points with adjacent nozzles. Spray branches and nozzles shall be held in place by snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of individual nozzles or complete branches for cleaning or flushing. 3. Removable plastic material drift eliminators shall be positioned to prevent moisture from leaving the evaporative condenser and incorporate a minimum of three (3) changes in air direction.
3.0 Pan Assembly

The evaporative condenser shall include a pan assembly consisting of cold water basin with pump assembly and fan assemblies with single side air inlet. 1. The cold water basin shall include: a drain/clean-out connection; a steel strainer; a brass make-up valve; overflow connection; and a water recirculation pump assembly. a. Drain/cleanout connection shall be located in the cold water basin to allow removal of recirculating water. b. Lift-out steel strainer shall be supplied with perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution nozzle orifices and an integral anti-vortexing hood to prevent air entrainment. c. Brass make-up valve shall be supplied with a large-diameter plastic float arranged for easy adjustment. d. Overflow connection shall be provided in the cold water basin to protect against recirculating water spillage. e. Water recirculation pump shall be a close-coupled, bronze-fitted centrifugal pump equipped with a mechanical seal, mounted on the basin and piped from the suction strainer to the water distribution system. i. The pump shall be installed so that it may drain freely when the basin is drained. ii. The pump assembly shall include an integral metering valve and bleed line to control the bleed rate from the pump discharge to the overflow connection. iii. The pump motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type suitable for _____ V, ____ phase______ Hz electrical service. f. On installations requiring a remote sump, the evaporative condenser shall be modified to accommodate the use of an independent sump and pump for recirculating water (by others) i. The recirculating water pump, steel strainer, make-up valve, and integral bleed line assemblies shall be omitted from the evaporative condenser scope of supply. ii. The evaporative condenser shall be supplied with a cold water basin outlet sized and located as indicated on the drawings for gravity drain to the remote sump. iii. The water distribution system shall have an operating pressure of 14 kPa at the evaporative condenser spray water inlet connection. 2. Air shall enter the evaporative condenser through the centrifugal fan assemblies. a. Fans and motors shall be located in the dry entering airstream to provide greater reliability and ease of maintenance. b. Fan housings shall have curved inlet rings for efficient air.entry. c. Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, centrifugal flow type mounted on a steel shaft with heavy-duty, self-aligning, relubricatable bearings with cast iron housings, designed for a minimum L10 life of 40 000 hours. d. Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type, suitable for _____ V, ____ phase, ______ Hz electrical service and shall be mounted on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor base. Special moisture protection shall be furnished on the windings, shafts, and bearings.
VCL - E 50 4.0 Optional Equipment Specifications

A. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with basin heaters to prevent freezing of the water in the cold water basin when the evaporative condenser is idle. 1. The basin heaters shall be selected to maintain +4C basin water temperature at -18C ambient temperature. 2. Basin heaters shall be electric immersion type controlled by a remote thermostat with the sensing bulb located in the basin water. 3. Basin heaters shall be provided with a factory-installed low water level cutout switch to prevent heater operation unless the heater elements are fully submerged. B. Evaporative condenser shall be supplied with the Baltiguard Drive System to improve part load efficiency and provide system redundancy in case of a motor failure. 1. The Baltiguard Drive System shall include the main fan motor as listed in the manufacturers published literature and a pony motor sized for approximately 1/3 of design kW and 2/3 of design fan speed to optimize energy savings during non-design load conditions.
Baltimore Aircoil
CXV - E 51
Product Detail
CXV Evaporative Condensers ............................................................... E52 Benefits ..................................................................................................... E54 Construction Details CXV Models ........................................................ E56 Construction Details CXV-D Models ..................................................... E57 Custom Features and Options ................................................................ E58 Accessories ............................................................................................... E61 Engineering Data CXV Models .............................................................. E63 Structural Support CXV Models ........................................................... E67 Engineering Data CXV-D Models .......................................................... E68 Structural Support CXV-D Models ....................................................... E70 Engineering Specifications ..................................................................... E71
CXV - E 52
CXV Evaporative Condensers

Capacity
Single Model Capacity: 300 - 2100 Nominal R-717 kW's
General Description
CXV Evaporative Condensers deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of heat rejection and temperature requirements for various refrigerants. Standard design features directly address todays environmental concerns by minimizing refrigerant charge and energy consumption. The Series 1500 minimizes installation costs, provides year-round operating reliability, and simplifies maintenance requirements.
Key Features
Low energy consumption Easy maintenance Reduced refrigerant charge Low installed cost Application flexibility Reliable year-round operation Long service life PED 97/23/ EC coil design
Baltimore Aircoil
CXV - E 53
CXV - E 54
Benefits
Evaporative Cooling Equipment minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system because it provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving natural resources and reducing environmental impact. Evaporative Condensers provide lower condensing temperatures and can offer significant horsepower savings over conventional air-cooled and water-cooled condensing systems. CXV provides heat rejection at the lowest possible energy input and maintenance requirements via: - High efficiency, low kW axial fans - Patented combined flow technology, which reduces evaporation directly off the coil, minimizing the potential for scaling and fouling - Parallel flow of air and spray water, which eliminates scale-promoting dry spots - Multiple Fan Motor System: independent fan motor and drive assembly per fan, which allows for extra steps of capacity control.
Easy Maintenance
Access - Hinged access doors provide easy access to the unit interior. In addition, all CXV models are provided with an internal walkway as standard. An internal walkway is available as an option on CXV-D models. Spacious Interior Provides easy access to the cold water basin, drift eliminators, fan drive system and condensing coil. Access to Spray Distribution Parallel flow of air and spray water over the coil allows for inspection and access to the top of the coil during full operation.
Easy Access to Coil Section
Oversized, hinged access door
Spray Distribution System
Baltimore Aircoil
CXV - E 55
Reduced Refrigerant Charge

Combined flow technology provides maximum capacity at the lowest refrigerant charge available in the industry. Reduced refrigerant charge lowers installation costs and may help satisfy refrigerant charge thresholds.
Note: For more information on combined flow technology, refer to section Evaporative Condenser Product Line Overview
1. CXV, 2. Forced Draft; 3. Induced Draft
Low Installed Cost

Support All models mount directly on parallel I-beams and ship complete with motors and drives factory-installed and aligned. Modular Design The modular design minimizes the size and weight of the heaviest lift, allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes. Coil Connections - Fewer coil connections reduce costs of pipe, valves, purges, and labour.
Application Flexibility
The unit shown ships in two pieces to minimise shipping and rigging costs
Replacement applications Single air inlet models are designed to mount directly on existing support steel of both crossflow and counterflow units. Coil configurations Alternate coil configurations and materials available. Highest capacity in the industry CXV-D models offer the highest single cell capacity of any evaporative condenser in the industry. Projects benefit from fewer required cells, lower overall fan kW, and fewer piping connections.

Long Service Life

CXV - E 56
Construction Details CXV Models

.
Multiple circuit coils are possible
2. Fan Drive System


Corrosion Resistant
3. Low kW Axial Fan

Quiet operation Corrosion resistant aluminum Easily removable UV resistant plastic material

8. Cold Water Basin

5. Coil Section (Not Shown)

Coil according to European Pressure Equipment Directive 97/ 23/EC, standardized at 23 bar design pressure. Continuous serpentine, steel tubing Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF) Pneumatically tested at 34 bar standard coil Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid
9. Recirculating Spray Water Pump


Baltimore Aircoil
CXV - E 57
Construction Details CXV-D Models
Heavy-gauge Z600 galvanized steel frame
Pneumatically tested at 34 bar standard coil Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid Multiple circuit coils are possible

Corrosion resistant UV resistant finish Maintenance free
7. BACrossII Wet Deck Surface with Integral Drift Eliminators

3. Fan Drive System


4. Low kW Axial Fan

9. Cold Water Basin

Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning Suction strainer with anti-vortex hood Adjustable water make-up assembly from inside the unit

10. Integral Recirculating Spray Water Pumps (Not Shown)

6. Coil Section
Coil according to European Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC, standardized at 23 bar design pressure. Continuous serpentine, steel tubing

Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF) Inward swinging door on each end wall
CXV - E 58

Coil Configurations
Each coil is manufactured according to the European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97/23/ EC (For more details, refer to the Evaporative Condenser "Overview" section) BAC condenser coils are standard available at a design pressure of 23 bar, and are pneumatically tested at 34 bar. Standard Serpentine Coil: The standard condensing coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF) Optional Stainless Steel Coil: Coils are available in Type 304L and 316L stainless steel for specialized applications. Optional High Pressure Coil: Coils are available with a design pressure of 28 bar, with a test pressure of 40 bars. The Coil is hot-dip galvanised after fabrication (HDGAF). Multiple Refrigerant Circuit Coils (Split Coils): In general, multiple circuit coils are required primarily on halocarbon refrigerant systems where it is common practice to maintain individual compressor systems. Also, a circuit can be isolated to provide cooling of a water or glycol loop for compressor jacket cooling. A wide range of multiple circuit arrangements is available. All coils are designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid.
Baltimore Aircoil
CXV - E 59
Multiple Fan Drive System (not on CXV-D models)

All CXV-models (except CXV-D) are standard equipped with the multiple fan motor system. This system consists of an independent fan motor and drive assembly per fan with a plenum partition to allow independent operation of each fan. This standard feature provides 2 steps of capacity control on dual fan units and 3 steps of capacity control on triple fan units, as illustrated below.
Low Sound Operation

The low sound levels generated by Series 1500 Units, thanks to the use of high efficiency low noise fans as standard, make them suitable for installation in most environments. For very sound sensitive installations all models are also available with a Whisper Quiet sound fan option that significantly reduces the sound levels generated from the tower with minimal impact on thermal performance. For extremely sound sensitive installations, factory designed, tested and rated sound attenuation is available for both the air inlet and discharge.
Gear Drive System, Externally Mounted Motor (CXV-D models only)

The D-models are available with a gear drive system with external TEFC motor and a noncorrosive carbon-fiber composite drive shaft with stainless steel hubs is selected with a 2,0 service factor. The motor and drive shaft ship separately for easy field installation.
Gear Drive System, Closed-Coupled Motor (CXV-D models only)

The D-Models are available with a close-coupled gear drive system. Both the gear drive and couplings are selected with a 2,0 service factor. Gear construction includes a nickel-alloy steel shaft, casehardened gears, self-lubrication, and a single piece, gray iron housing. This drive system ships completely installed and aligned.
Gear Drive System, close-coupled motor
CXV - E 60
Combined Inlet Shield Technology



Baltimore Aircoil
CXV - E 61
Accessories
Internal Ladder(s)
For access to the motor and drive assemblies on models CXV-207 thru -481, and all CXV-D models, an upper service platform with ladder and handrails is available. Safety gates are available for handrail openings.

Basin Heaters
Model No. CXV CXV 074 - 093 CXV 117 - 147 CXV 153 - 193 CXV 207 - 296 CXV 338 - 435 CXV 283 - 327 CXV 416 - 481 CXV D645 - D792 CXV D791 - D944 Heater -18C (kW) 1x4 1x6 1x6 1x8 2x6 2x6 2x8 2 x 14 2 x 14

CXV - E 62


Stand-by Pump
A factory mounted stand-by pump is available, including non-return valves in each pump piping line. In case of a pump failure, there can be switched over to the stand-by pump, eliminating the unit shut down period as much as possible.


Mechanical Equipment Removal System (Only on CXV-D Models)

Baltimore Aircoil
CXV - E 63
Engineering Data CXV Models

CXV 74 - CXV 193
1. Refrigerant in ND 100; 2. Refrigerant out ND 100; 3. Make-up ND 15; 4. Overflow ND 80; 5. Drain ND 50; 6. Access.
Model No. CXV CXV 74 CXV 80 CXV 84 CXV 89 CXV 93 CXV 117 CXV 123 CXV 131 CXV 137 CXV 147 CXV 153 CXV 164 CXV 173 CXV 184 CXV 193
Operating Weight (kg) 3400 3410 3420 3590 3600 4960 4980 5000 5240 5260 6290 6310 6320 6650 6660
Shipping Weight (kg) 2350 2360 2370 2520 2530 3370 3390 3410 3610 3640 4150 4180 4190 4480 4490
Air Flow (m3/s) 12,5 14,3 15,7 13,9 15,3 20,0 22,0 25,1 21,4 24,5 25,6 29,2 32,1 28,6 31,4
Fan Motor (kW) (1x) 4 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 7,5 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 7,5 (2x) 4 (2x) 4 (2x) 5,5 (2x) 4 (2x) 5,5 (2x) 4 (2x) 5,5 (2x) 7,5 (2x) 5,5 (2x) 7,5
Water Flow (l/s) 12,0 12,0 12,0 12,0 12,0 18,0 18,0 18,0 18,0 18,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0 24,0
Pump Motor (kW) (1x) 1,1 (1x) 1,1 (1x) 1,1 (1x) 1,1 (1x) 1,1 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2 (1x) 2,2
L (m) 1861 1861 1861 1861 1861 2775 2775 2775 2775 2775 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690
W (mm) 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385 2385
H (mm) 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980
CXV - E 64
CXV 207 - CXV 435
Model No. CXV CXV 207 CXV 214 CXV 229 CXV 241 CXV 253 CXV 258 CXV 269 CXV 280 CXV 288 CXV 296 CXV 338 CXV 354 CXV 369 CXV 379 CXV 396 CXV 411 CXV 424 CXV 435
Air Flow (m3/s) 38,0 40,4 31,7 34,9 37,6 39,9 33,9 36,5 38,8 38,1 47,9 52,7 56,7 60,3 51,2 55,1 58,6 57,5
Fan Motor (kW) (2x) 11 (2x) 11 (2x) 5,5 (2x) 7,5 (2x) 11 (2x) 11 (2x) 7,5 (2x) 11 (2x) 11 (2x) 11 (3x) 5,5 (3x) 7,5 (3x) 11 (3x) 11 (3x) 7,5 (3x) 11 (3x) 11 (3x) 11
Water Flow (l/s) 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 54,0 54,0 54,0 54,0 54,0 54,0 54,0 54,0
Pump Motor (kW) (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 5,5
L (m) 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 3690 5520 5520 5520 5520 5520 5520 5520 5520
W (mm) 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985 2985
H (mm) 4790 4790 4790 4790 4790 4790 4790 4790 4790 4790 4935 4935 4935 4935 4935 4935 4935 4935
Baltimore Aircoil
CXV - E 65
CXV 283- CXV 481
Model No. CXV CXV 283 CXV 297 CXV 309 CXV 327 CXV 416 CXV 437 CXV 454 CXV 468 CXV 481
Air Flow (m3/s) 35,0 38,5 41,5 43,1 53,0 58,3 62,8 66,7 65,3
Fan Motor (kW) (2x) 5,5 (2x) 7,5 (2x) 11 (2x) 11 (3x) 5,5 (3x) 7,5 (3x) 11 (3x) 11 (3x) 11
Water Flow (l/s) 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 54,0 54,0 54,0 54,0 54,0
Pump Motor (kW) (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 4 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 5,5 (1x) 5,5
L (m) 3690 3690 3690 3690 5520 5520 5520 5520 5520
W (mm) 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610 3610
H (mm) 4790 4790 4790 4790 4935 4935 4935 4935 4935
General Notes CXV Models

1. Standard refrigerant in- and outlet connection sizes are ND100. Consult your local BAC Balticare representative for size and location. Other connection sizes are available on special order. Refrigerant connections are standard bevelled for welding. 2. Unit height is indicative, for precise value refer to certified print. 3. Shipping/operating weights indicated are for units without accessories such as sound attenuators, discharge hoods, etc. Consult factory certified prints to obtain weight additions and the heaviest section to be lifted. Operating weight shown in the tables is based on total unit weight, weight of refrigerant operating charge and basin filled to overflow level. 4. Refrigerant charge listed is R717 operating charge. To determine operating charge of R22 refrigerants, multiply by: 1,93. For R134A, multiply by: 1,98. 5. The standard right hand arrangement as shown has the horizontal air inlet side on the right when facing the coil connection side. Left hand can be furnished by special order. Water and refrigerant connections are always located on the opposite ends of the unit. 6. All CXV models will be shipped in two sections.
CXV - E 66
Sound Attenuation CXV Models
1. Intake Attenuator; 2. Discharge Attenuator; Ht = H (unit height) + 735 mm; W = Unit Width, see general Engineering data.
Model No CXV 74 - 93 117 - 147 153 - 193 207 - 296 338 - 435 283 - 327 416 - 481 D 1345 1345 1345 1500 1500 2005 2005
Dimensions (mm) Ht 4715 4715 4715 5525 5665 5525 5665 Intake 100 130 175 250 375 250 375
Weight (kg) Discharge 140 210 255 270 385 310 440
Remote Sump Data CXV Models

Baltimore Aircoil
CXV - E 67
Structural Support CXV Models

1. Unit Outline; 2. Air Intake; 3 Mounting Holes; 4. Unit.
Model CXV CXV 074 - 093 CXV 117 - 147 CXV 153 - 193 CXV 207 - 296 CXV 283 - 327 CXV 338 - 435 CXV 416 - 481
Max. Deflection (mm) 5 8 10 10 10 12 12
Dimensions (mm) A 2325 2325 2325 2925 3550 2925 3550 B 2400 2400 C 255 255 255 255 255 270 270
No of 16 mm Anchorbolts 4 4 4 4 4 8 8
Notes:
CXV - E 68
Engineering Data CXV-D Models

CXV-D 645L - CXV-D 944L
1. Refrigerant in ND100; 2. Refrigerant out ND100; 3. Make-Up ND40, Overflow ND80; 5. Drain ND50; 6. Access at both ends.
Weight Model No. CXV-D Shipping (kg) 12710 12785 12790 14045 14050 14150 14560 14570 14670 16055 16155 16200 Operating (kg) 18555 18625 18630 19990 19990 20090 21780 21785 21885 23395 23495 23540 Heaviest Section (kg) 3650 3650 3650 4280 4280 4280 4259 4259 4259 5003 5003 5003 Air flow (m3/s) Fan Motor (kW) Pump Motor (kW) (2) 5,5 (2) 5,5 (2) 5,5 (2) 5,5 (2) 5,5 (2) 5,5 (2) 5,5 (2) 5,5 (2) 5,5 (2) 5,5 (2) 5,5 (2) 5,5 R717 Charge (kg) 298 298 298 354 354 354 342 342 342 410 410 410 W (mm) 7328 7328 7328 7328 7328 7328 8013 8013 8013 8013 8013 8013
Dimensions L (mm) 3632 3632 3632 3632 3632 3632 4245 4245 4245 4245 4245 4245 H (mm) 5767 5767 5767 5767 5767 5894 5869 5869 5869 5869 5996 5996
CXV-D645L CXV-D686L CXV-D717L CXV-D729L CXV-D763L CXV-D792L CXV-D791L CXV-D827L CXV-D857L CXV-D876L CXV-D906L CXV-D944L
83,6 92,2 99,6 91,2 98,4 104,7 106,4 115,7 123,1 113,3 120,6 131,2
22 30 37 30 37 45 30 37 45 37 45 55
Baltimore Aircoil
CXV - E 69
General Notes CXV-D Models

1. Standard refrigerant in- and outlet connection sizes are ND100. Consult your local BAC Balticare representative for size and location. Other connection sizes are available on special order. Refrigerant connections are standard bevelled for welding. 2. Unit height is indicative, for precise value refer to certified print. 3. Shipping/operating weights indicated are for units without accessories such as sound attenuators, discharge hoods, etc. Consult factory certified prints to obtain weight additions and the heaviest section to be lifted. Operating weight shown in the tables is based on total unit weight, weight of refrigerant operating charge and basin filled to overflow level. 6. Models with fan motor up to 22 kW have belt drive only; models between 22 kW and 45 kW have standard belt drive but gear drive as an option; models with 55 kW have gear drive only. 7. Models supplied with an optional gear drive may have heights up to 130 mm greater than shown. 8. All CXV-D models will be shipped in three sections. 4. Refrigerant charge listed is R717 operating charge. To determine operating charge of R22 refrigerants, multiply by: 1,93. For R134A, multiply by: 1,98. 5. Unit includes 2 coil sections. Weight is shown for one section.
Sound Attenuation CXV-D models
1. Intake Attenuator; 2. Discharge Attenuator; W = Unit Width, see general Engineering data.
Model No CXV-D 645L - 792L 791L - 944L
Dimensions (mm) D 3500 4185 Ht 6748 6748
Weight (kg) Both Intake Sides 685 808 Discharge 477 563
Remote Sump Data CXV-D models

CXV - E 70
Structural Support CXV-D Models

1. Unit Outline; 2. Air Intake; 3 Mounting Holes
Model CXV-D 645L- 792L 791L - 944L
Max. Deflection (mm) 12 12
Dimensions (mm) A 3560 4173 B 3570 3913 C 37 37
No of 16 mm Anchorbolts 12 12
Notes:
Baltimore Aircoil
CXV - E 71
General
A. General: Furnish and install, _____ factory assembled evaporative condenser(s) of induced draft design, with single side air entry and vertical air discharge. Overall dimensions shall not exceed approximately _____ mm x _____ mm, with an overall height not exceeding approximately _____mm. Operating weight shall not exceed _____ kg. The evaporative condenser shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model ____________. (Alternate) General: Furnish and install, _____ factory assembled evaporative condenser(s) of induced draft design, with dual side air entry and vertical air discharge. Overall dimensions shall not exceed approximately _____ mm x _____ mm, with and overall height not exceeding approximately _____mm. Operating weight shall not exceed _____ kg. The evaporative condenser shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model ____________. B. Capacity: The evaporative condenser(s) shall be warranted by the manufacturer to have condensing capacity of _____ kW heat rejection, operating with ____ refrigerant at ___C condensing temperature and ___C entering wet-bulb temperature. C. Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty shall be for a period of one year from the date of startup or eighteen months from the date of shipment, whichever ends first. D. Quality Assurance: The manufacture shall have Management System certified by an accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of products and services.
Products
1.1 Baltiplus Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural elements shall be constructed from heavy-gauge, Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel, with all sheared edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound and the exterior protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection. (Alternate 1.1) Baltibond Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of Z600 hot dip galvanised steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse and dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated curing stage monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program. Or for CXV-D models: General: Casing panels shall be constructed of corrosion resistant, fiberglass, reinforced polyester (FRP).

The evaporative condenser shall include a coil casing section consisting of a refrigerant condensing coil, a spray water distribution system, drift eliminators, fan and drive system as indicated by the manufacturer. 2.1. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be fabricated of all prime surface steel at the manufacturers own facility, and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. a. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be according to European Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC, with design pressure of 23 bar. b. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be tested at 34 bar air pressure under water. c. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of liquid refrigerant. 2.2 Spray Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed evenly over the coil at a minimum flow rate sufficient to ensure complete wetting of the coil at all times by large-diameter, non-clog, 360 plastic distribution nozzles spaced across the coil face area in spray branches. Nozzles shall utilize a two-stage diffusion pattern to provide overlapping, umbrella spray patterns that create multiple intersection points with adjacent nozzles. a. Nozzles and spray branches shall be observable and accessible for cleaning from the outside of the evaporative condenser during condenser operation without the removal of other components. b. Spray branches and nozzles shall be held in place by snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of individual nozzles or complete branches for cleaning or flushing. 2.3. Removable drift eliminators shall be positioned to prevent moisture from entering the air plenum and incorporate a minimum of three (3) changes in air direction. The drift eliminators shall be removable in easy to handle sections for quick access to the coil. 2.4. Fan(s) and Drive System: Fan(s) shall be driven by V-type belts. a. Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow low noise, with aluminium alloy blades. Air shall discharge through a fan cylinder designed for streamlined air entry and minimum fan blade tip clearance for maximum fan efficiency. (Alternate a) Fan(s) shall be of Whisper Quiet fan design for ultra low sound consisting of: i. multiblade aerofoil fan design constructed of fibreglass reinforced plastic blades (for CXV-D models). ii. specially shaped aluminium blades with end caps and flexible hub connection (for CXV-models). b. Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported by heavy-duty, self-aligning, grease-packed ball bearings with moisture-proof seals and integral slinger rings, designed for a minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours. c. Fan and motor sheaves shall be fabricated from corrosion resistant materials. d. Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type, suitable for ____ volt, ____ phase, ___ Hz electrical service and shall be mounted on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor base. e. The motor shall be furnished with double-sealed, permanently lubricated bearings and special moisture protection on windings, shafts and bearings. f. Air plenum shall provide a minimum of 1220 mm clearance under the motor base to provide comfortable working space for service personnel. g. Each fan is equipped with an independent motor and drive assembly to allow independent operation of each fan.
3.0 Pan Assembly

The evaporative condenser shall include a pan assembly consisting of cold water basin with pump assembly, heat transfer section for spray water cooling with integral drift eliminators, combined inlet shields and hinged access door. 3.1 The cold water basin shall be constructed of heavy-gauge steel panels and structural members either protected by Baltiplus or Baltibond. Basin shall include a depressed section with drain/ cleanout connection. The basin area under the wet deck surface shall be sloped toward the depressed section to facilitate cleaning. - OR -
CXV - E 72
(Alternate 3.1) The cold water basin shall be constructed of heavygauge Type 304 or 316 stainless steel panels and structural members. Basin shall include a depressed section with drain/ cleanout connection. The basin area under the wet deck surface shall be sloped toward the depressed section to facilitate cleaning. 3.2 The cold water basin shall include a drain/clean-out connection; a steel strainer; a brass make-up valve; over flow connection; and a water recirculation pump assembly. a. Cold water basin shall be designed so that the strainer, makeup valve and float, and pump assembly are easily accessible without removing any of the unit panels or other components. b. Lift-out steel strainer shall be supplied with perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution nozzle orifices and an integral anti-vortexing hood to prevent air entrainment. c. Water recirculation pump shall be a close-coupled, bronze-fitted centrifugal pump equipped with a mechanical seal, mounted on the basin and piped from the suction strainer to the water distribution system. i. The pump shall be installed with adequate drains so that it may drain freely when the basin is drained. ii. The pump assembly shall include an integral metering valve and bleed line to control the bleed rate from the pump discharge to the overflow connection. iii. The pump motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type suitable for _____ volt, ____ phase, ______ Hz electrical service. d. On installations requiring a remote sump, the evaporative condenser shall be modified to accommodate the use of an independent sump and pump for recirculating water (by others). i. The recirculating water pump, steel strainer, make-up valve, and integral bleed line assemblies shall be omitted from the evaporative condenser scope of supply. ii. The evaporative condenser shall be supplied with a cold water basin outlet sized and located as indicated on the drawings for gravity drain to the remote sump. iii. The water distribution system shall have a design operating pressure of 14 kPa at the evaporative condenser spray water inlet connection. 3.3 The heat transfer section shall consist of BACross wet deck surface with integral drift eliminators for CXV and BACrossII wet deck surface with integral drift eliminators for CXV-D for cooling the spray water leaving the coil to optimize the thermal performance of the evaporative condenser. a. The wet deck surface and integral drift eliminators shall be formed from plastic material. b. The wet deck surface and integral drift eliminators shall be impervious to rot, decay, fungus, and biological attack. 3.4 Combined Inlet Shields: Combined inlet shields shall be separate from the wet deck surface and removable to allow easy access for inspection of the air/water interface at the air inlet side of the equipment. Combined inlet shields shall prevent UV-light and debris from entering the unit, as well as prevent water splash out during fan cycling. They shall be constructed of maintenance free, corrosion and UV resistant material. 3.5 Plenum Access: A large, hinged access door shall be provided for access to the coil, drift eliminators and fan plenum section. The water make-up valve, float ball and suction strainer shall be easily accessible.
4.0 Optional Equipment Specifications

A. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with basin heaters to prevent freezing of the recirculating water when the evaporative condenser is idle. 1. The basin heaters shall be selected to maintain 4C basin water temperature at 18C ambient temperature 16 km/h wind speed. 2. Basin heaters shall be electric immersion type controlled by a remote thermostat with the sensing bulb located in the basin water. 3. Basin heaters shall be provided with a low water level cutout switch to prevent heater operation unless the heater elements are adequately submerged. B. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with extended lubrication lines with standard grease fittings for lubricating the fan shaft bearings from the outside base of the condenser. C. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with a factory assembled field-installed external platform with an access ladder and handrails to provide access to the top of the evaporative condenser. 1. Optional ladder with safety cage shall be available. Or, for CXV-D Models C. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with factory assembled, field installed perimeter safety railings and walking surface above coil air intake to provide access to the top of the evaporative condenser. D. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with a moveable ladder with fixed ladder supports to provide access to the fan drive system and coil assembly. E. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with an internal walkway at the access door to facilitate servicing the unit. (Standard on S1500 only). F. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with a factory assembled internal working platform with ladder to provide a permanent working surface for maintenance personnel (CXV-193 and larger only). For CXV-D models: G. Evaporative condenser shall be supplied with a right angle gear drive designed specifically for evaporative condenser service. All gears shall have a minimum service factor of 2.0 based on design fan horsepower. An oil level fill port and sight glass shall be located on the gear drive to facilitate routine inspection and maintenance.
5.0 Sound
5.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment, the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 15 m from the condenser operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound levels detailed below.
Location Discharge Air Inlet End Back (not on D-models)
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
8000
dB(A)
Baltimore Aircoil
TSU - F 1
Thermal Storage Products
Product Detail
ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Products .......................................... F2 Benefits ........................................................................................................ F4 Proven Technology ..................................................................................... F7 Construction Details TSU-M - Internal Melt Application ..................... F9 Engineering Data TSU-M ........................................................................ F10 Engineering Specifications TSU-M ........................................................ F18 Construction Details TSU-C/D - External Melt Application ............... F19 Engineering Data TSU-C/D ..................................................................... F20 Engineering Specifications TSU-C/D ..................................................... F27 Engineering Considerations ICE CHILLER Products ..................... F28
TSU - F 2
ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Products

General Description
Cooling with ice thermal storage can be the most cost-effective, reliable system approach to cooling offices, schools, hospitals, malls and other buildings, and provides a steady source of low temperature fluids for process cooling applications. These systems are environmentally friendly because they help lower energy consumption and reduce greenhouse gas emissions. With thousands of successful installations worldwide, BAC is the global leader in the application of ice thermal storage.
Key Features
Lowest first cost Reduced energy cost Variable capacity Improved system reliability Reduced maintenance Environmentally friendly Proven technology
Baltimore Aircoil
TSU - F 3
TSU - F 4
Benefits
Lowest First Cost
Systems with ice thermal storage can be installed at the same or lower first cost than traditional systems when designed with the colder supply water available from ice. The savings that result from the use of smaller chillers and cooling towers, reduced pump and pipe sizes and less connected horsepower, offset the cost of the ice thermal storage equipment. Additional savings can be found when using lower temperature air distribution, which allows reduced ductwork and fan sizes. Smaller Chillers and Heat Rejection Equipment: By designing the system around 24-hour per day chiller operation, the size of the chillers and cooling towers or air-cooled condensers required for an ice system is significantly reduced, when compared to conventional chillers and heat rejection equipment sized for the instantaneous peak load. A typical thermal storage design includes chillers that provide 50 to 60% of the peak cooling load. The balance of the cooling requirement is provided from the ice storage system. Reduced Pump and Pipe Sizes: Pump and pipe sizes are also reduced in a properly designed ice storage system. Substantial savings in the chilled water distribution loop are realized when the system design incorporates reduced flow rates that result from using a larger temperature range in the water loop. Use of a larger temperature range, for example 10C instead of the more traditional 5.5C temperature range results in a reduction of pipe size. Condenser water pipe sizes are reduced due to lower flow requirements for the smaller chiller. Pump savings due to reduced chilled water and condenser water flow rates are also realized.
Reduced Cooling Coil and Supply Air Fan Sizes: Cooling coils sized using lower supply water temperatures and traditional supply air temperatures are generally smaller due to fewer rows. The reduction in rows leads to lower supply fan kW.
Baltimore Aircoil
TSU - F 5
Reduced Air Handling Equipment: When the air distribution is designed with lower supply air temperatures, the size of the ductwork, fans and fan motors are reduced. Reduced Electrical Distribution: Smaller chillers, heat rejection equipment and pumps require less horsepower than a traditional system, which results in smaller transformers, switchgear, wire sizes and starter panels. Reduced Generator Size: If a facility has a generator for daily or back-up power, the size of the generator will be significantly reduced when the peak electrical load of the facility is reduced using ice storage.
Reduced Energy Cost

An ice thermal storage system reduces peak demand, shifts energy usage to non-peak hours, saves energy, and reduces energy costs. Reduces Peak Demand and Shifts Energy Usage: With less connected horsepower, ice storage can lower peak electrical demand for the HVAC or process cooling system by 50% or more. Since most electrical rates include demand charges during peak demand times and/or higher day versus night kWh charges, savings on electrical bills can be substantial. In areas with real time pricing, where the electric rate varies hour by hour based on the market price of electricity, day to night kWh costs can vary by 500 to 1000%. The use of electricity at night versus peak daytime hours can lead to large savings on energy bills. Saves Energy: In addition, total annual kilowatt-hours used are less when the system is designed taking advantage of the low supply water temperature available from the ice storage system. Lower kWh consumption is possible for five reasons: 1. Although making ice requires more energy than producing chilled water, the efficiency penalty is not as large since the ice is made at night when condensing temperatures are lower, increasing the efficiency of the chiller. 2. Ice systems typically operate the chiller at full load. Chillers are inefficient when run with low loads during the spring and fall. A typical chiller will operate at less than 30% capacity for half the year. 3. Reduced pumping horsepower. 4. Reduced fan horsepower due to lower air pressure drop across the cooling coil. A higher chilled water temperature differential across the cooling coil usually results in fewer rows and therefore a lower pressure drop. 5. The ability to recover waste heat from the chiller for heating water both night and day. Additional kWh savings are possible if the air distribution is designed to take advantage of the low temperatures available from the ice storage system. As the electric industry continues to deregulate, and time-of-use rates, real time pricing schedules and negotiated power prices become standard, ice storage can provide even greater future savings in operating costs.
TSU - F 6
Variable Capacity
The ice thermal storage system will maintain a constant supply temperature regardless of the variations in instantaneous cooling demand. The flow and entering water temperature set the instantaneous capacity.
Improved System Reliability

Ice storage systems provide the reliability necessary to ensure air-conditioning is available. With traditional systems, installing multiple chillers provides redundancy. In the event of a mechanical failure of one chiller, the second chiller provides limited cooling capacity. The maximum available cooling for the traditional system would only be 50% on a design day. Most ice storage systems utilize two chillers in addition to the ice storage equipment. Two chillers are designed to provide approximately 60% of the required cooling on a design day while the ice storage provides the remaining 40% of the cooling capacity. In the event only one chiller is available to provide cooling during the day, up to 70% of the cooling capacity is available. The one operable chiller provides 30% of the cooling requirement while the ice provides up to 40%. Based on typical HVAC load profiles and ASHRAE weather data, 70% of the cooling capacity would meet the total daily cooling requirements 85% of the time.
Reduced Maintenance
The ice thermal storage coils have no moving parts so very little maintenance is required. Because the chillers, pumps and heat rejection equipment are smaller, ice storage systems will have less maintenance than a traditional system. The ice thermal storage system also allows a chiller to undergo routine maintenance during the day when the ice storage can handle the system load.
Environmentally Friendly
Reducing energy consumption and using electricity at night will reduce global warming. Electricity generated at night generally has a lower heat rate (lower fuel use per power output), and therefore lower carbon dioxide and greenhouse gas emissions resulting in less global warming. The California Energy Commission concluded that the use of electricity at night created a 31% reduction in air emissions over the use of electricity during the day. With smaller chillers, an ice thermal storage system reduces the amount of refrigerant in a system. Most refrigerants in use today are slated to be banned in the future under the Montreal Protocol because they contribute to global warming. Using smaller amounts of refrigerant helps to save the ozone and reduce global warming.
Baltimore Aircoil
TSU - F 7
Proven Technology
BAC has successfully applied ice thermal storage technology to thousands of installations worldwide. BAC has the application and system experience to assist you in the design, installation and operation of your ice storage system. BAC has supplied ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Products for projects that range in size from 90 to 125,000 ton-hours (0,3 to 441,3 MWh). Installations include office buildings, hospitals, manufacturing processes, schools, universities, sports arenas, produce storage facilities, hotels and district cooling applications. The ICE CHILLER Product line includes a variety of factory-assembled units. For large applications, where space is limited or factory-assembled units are not cost effective, ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Coils are available for installation in field-erected tanks. The BAC product offering provides system design flexibility. Ice can be built using ammonia or various glycols on steel coils and is used to provide either chilled water or glycol to the cooling system. This flexibility, combined with a broad range of application experiences, allows B.A.C. to provide a cost-effective product to meet your specific requirements.
CNES - Toulouse (France)

The cooling plant of the Centre Nationale dEtudes Spatiales (CNES) in Toulouse, incorporated 3 centrifugal chillers, each 3 MW cooling capacity. As the facilities grew in size over the years, the plant became short of capacity on peak cooling load days. Rather than adding another chiller to increase the maximum cooling capacity, CNES wanted a more energy and cost efficient solution. An 11 MWh Ice Thermal Storage System, proved to be the most economical. During daytime the chillers run continuously at maximum capacity and thus at highest efficiency. At night ice is built to take advantage of the lower off-peak electricity costs.
CNES
CSELT - Turin (Italy)

Designing a high quality and reliable climate control system with a low first cost and a low operating cost for the new CSELT (Centro SIP Elaborazione Telecomunicazioni) Research Centre was an ambitious goal. This requirement however was fully met by using standard glycol chillers with a 13 MWh BAC Thermal Storage System. During the night ice is built to provide part of the cooling capacity for the next day. In the daytime the water from the cooling load is first cooled by the chillers and then further cooled to the design temperature by the BAC Thermal CSELT Storage System. This series arrangement, with the chiller upstream in the most favourable position, is only possible due to the high melt off capacity offered by the BAC ICE CHILLER which guarantees a constant low leaving water temperature from the Thermal Storage System.
TSU - F 8
Academic Hospital - Groningen (Netherlands)

The cooling for the HVAC system in the new Academic Hospital in Groningen is provided by a standard 650 kW glycol chiller and a 6 MWh BAC ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage System. The system design makes full use of the low leaving water temperatures available from the ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage System by placing the chiller upstream and in series with the ICE CHILLER. This provides the most economical solution, an overall low energy cost and a great flexibility in the cooling plant operation.
Academic Hospital
KBC - Leuven (Belgium)

This new 90.000 m building for the KBC ban headquarter has a total daily cooling load of 26 MWh with a peak of 3 MW. The HVAC system selected by the owner included a Thermal Storage System because of its low first cost, economical operating cost and high system reliability. A 1 MW chiller combined with a 10 MWh BAC Thermal Storage System can easily satisfy the 3MW peak cooling load. Energy costs are lower than with a conventional system because electrical demand charges and expensive day rates are reduced to a minimum.
KBC Bank
Granada Centre - Riyadh (Saudi Arabia)

The designers of the Granada Centre in Riyadh, Saudi Arabia were confronted with a limited electrical power supply to the new site. This forced the client to consider all possible load shifting alternatives. After careful review of the available options it was decided to limit the power demand of the chillers and shift the generation of cooling to off-peak periods. From the maximum cooling demand, being 14.250 kW, about 8.000 kW is delivered directly by the chillers. The remaining cooling will come from the ice storage units. The ice storage plant includes 22 ice storage tanks model TSU 761 M with a total ice storage capacity of 58.800 kWh.
Granada Centre
Baltimore Aircoil
TSU - F 9
Construction Details TSU-M - Internal Melt Application
1. Covers
Watertight Heavy-gauge Z600 Hot-dip galvanized steel panels Insulated with 50 mm extruded polystyrene insulation
6. Extruded Polystyrene Insulation

110 mm of total insulation 20 mm of insulation between primary and secondary liner Contributes to total insulating value of 3,1mC/W
2. Coil Support Beams

Prevent contact between coil and primary liner
7. Secondary Liner/Vapor Barrier

Prevents moisture from penetrating through the insulation
3. Glycol Connections
Threaded connections Flanged connections (optional)
8. Wall Panel
Heavy-gauge glavanised steel with double brake flanges Extruded polystyrene insulation Contributes to total insulating value of 3,1mC/W
4. Galvanised Steel Coil

Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF) Steel tubing, encased in a steel framework Pneumatically tested at 13 bar Rated for 10 bar operating pressure
9. Sight Tube
Visual indicator of the amount of ice remaining in unit
5. Primary Liner
Single piece 48-hour integrity test before shipment
10. Ice Inventory Sensor (Optional) - Not Shown

Mechanical Water Level Difference Transmitter provides an electrical 4-20 mA output signal which is proportional to the amount of ice in inventory
TSU - F 10
Engineering Data TSU-M

TSU-M & TSU-LM Units
1. Outlet; 2. Inlet; 3. Sight Tube; 4. Access Hatch.
Model TSU-M TSU-237M TSU-476M TSU-594M TSU-761M
Latent Capacity (kWh) 834 1674 2087 2676
Approx. Sh. Weight (kg) 4420 7590 9150 10990
Approx. Op. Weight (kg) 17730 33530 42200 51610
Tank Water Coil Glycol Connection Volume Volume Size ND (l) (l) (mm) 11320 22110 28250 34640 985 1875 2320 2990 50 80 80 80
Unit Width (mm) 2400 2400 2980 3600
Unit Length (mm) 3240 6050 6050 6050
Unit Height (mm) *H1 2440 2440 2440 2440
Tank Height (mm) *H2 2390 2390 2390 2390
Model TSU-LM TSU-L184M TSU-L370M TSU-L462M TSU-L592M
Latent Capacity (kWh) 647 1301 1625 2082
Approx. Sh. Weight (kg) 3760 6400 7710 9200
Approx. Op. Weight (kg) 14360 27060 34030 41560
Tank Water Coil Glycol Connection Volume Volume Size ND (l) (l) (mm) 8820 17250 22030 27020 770 1460 1810 2280 80 80 80 80
Unit Width (mm) 2400 2400 2980 3600
Unit Length (mm) 3240 6050 6050 6050
Unit Height (mm) *H1 2000 2000 2000 2000
Tank Height (mm) *H2 1950 1950 1950 1950
General Notes
1. All dimensions are in mm. Weights are in kg. 2. Unit should be continuously supported on a flat level surface. 3. All connections are threaded 4. H1 = installed height. Coils are capped for shipping and storage. Add 75 mm for shipping height.
Baltimore Aircoil
TSU - F 11
Custom Coils for Internal Melt Application (TSU-M)

BAC will manufacture custom ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Coils to meet project specific requirements. B.A.C. has done extensive research and testing on the build and melt characteristics of ice storage. This research and testing has resulted in selection capabilities unmatched by any other company in the industry. BAC can predict the temperatures required on an hour by hour basis for building ice on custom Installation of Coil Module coils, over a variety of conditions and build times. The physical space available, load profile, discharge temperatures, chiller capacity and operating sequences can be evaluated to find the design that best meets the application. The ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Coils are constructed of continuous 26,7 mm O.D. all prime surface serpentine steel tubing. The coils are assembled in a structural steel frame designed to support the weight of the coil stack with a full ice build. After fabrication the coils are tested for leaks using 13 bar air pressure under water, then hot-dip galvanized for corrosion protection. The coils are configured to provide countercurrent glycol flow in adjacent circuits for maximum storage capacity. Individual coils can be factory-assembled into modules of two (2) coils for optimization of transport cost and reduction of site assembly time. Glycol manifolds are coated with zinc-rich, cold galvanizing finish at the factory. Necessary support steel and lifting lugs are provided on the modules to allow for lifting into and final positioning within the storage tank.
Load Profile
A daily load profile is the hourbyhour representation of cooling loads for a 24hour period. Most HVAC applications use a daily load profile to determine the amount of storage required. Some HVAC systems apply a weekly load profile. For conventional airconditioning systems, chillers are selected based on the peak cooling load. For ice storage systems, the chillers are selected based on the kWh of cooling required and a defined operating strategy. Typical HVAC Load Profile Thermal storage systems provide much flexibility for varying operating strategies as long as the total kWh selected are not exceeded. This is why an accurate load profile must be provided when designing an ice storage system. Load profiles take many different shapes based on the application. Figure 1 illustrates a typical HVAC load profile for an office building with a 1750 kW peak cooling load and a 12hour cooling requirement. The shape of this curve is representative of most HVAC applications. For preliminary equipment selections, BAC's ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Unit Selection Program can generate a similar load profile. Information required is the estimated building peak cooling load and duration of the cooling load.
TSU - F 12
The AirConditioning & Refrigeration Institute (ARI) has published Guideline T, "Specifying the Thermal Performance of Cool Storage Equipment." The purpose of Guideline T is to establish the minimum user specified data and supplier specified performance data. Design data provided by the engineer includes: System Loads, Flow Rates and Temperatures. Table 1 shows all necessary Ice Storage system data needed for a Thermal Storage selection.
Operating Strategies
Once the load profile is generated, the next step in selecting Thermal Storage equipment is to define an operating strategy or in other words, determine the hours per day during which the glycol chiller is allowed to operate. Which operating strategy to use is dependent upon the load profile (application), the utility rate structure, the energy cost and the equipment first cost. In other words, the economical balance between the system installation and operating cost or the payback period must be calculated. There are 2 different operating strategies, either full or partial storage. Full Storage Systems store all the cooling capacity required during the off peak periods and eliminate the need to operate the chiller(s) during the utility on-peak period. This strategy shifts the largest amount of electrical demand and results in the lowest operating cost. However, the equipment first cost is considerably higher than partial storage systems due to larger chiller and storage requirement and full storage is therefore seldom used. Partial Storage Systems require that the chiller(s) operate also during the on-peak period. The partial storage system allowing the glycol chiller to run for 24 hours per day at its full capacity is most commonly used as it results in the smallest chiller selection. In many cases, the smaller chiller selection is the driving force for an ice storage system because of lower installed electrical kW, smaller refrigerant charge, smaller cooling towers or other heat rejection equipment (lower noise), smaller standby chillers (if required), lower capital and maintenance cost, ... Other partial storage operating strategies stop the chiller a few hours per day when electricity cost are high and/or where non-cooling electricity usage are important (so when the chiller operation would increase the electrical demand). It is however important to know that the more hours the chiller is stopped during the day, the larger its size will be. Furthermore, if the chiller is stopped during the cooling period, the size of the storage equipment needs to be increased. If the chiller is stopped during the non-cooling period, the ice build time is reduced and therefore lower glycol temperatures are required and the chiller COP is reduced. Besides determining when the chiller should run or be stopped, an other aspect of operating strategy is if during melt-out, priority is given to the chiller or to the ice to cover the presented cooling load. In a chiller priority system the chiller always operates at full capacity. When the cooling load exceeds the chiller performance, the excess is covered by the melting ice. A constant portion of the load is covered by the chiller while the variation in load is covered by the ice. In an ice priority system, a constant part of the load is covered by the ice, where the variation in load is taken by the chiller. Because the chiller does not continuously operate at its maximum capacity, it will be oversized versus the chiller priority system. Ice priority systems result in oversized ice and chiller selections and are therefore seldom used. Normal practice is that partial storage systems using chiller priority with 24h chiller operation are most commonly used.
Baltimore Aircoil
TSU - F 13
Modes of Operation
The modular ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Unit can operate in any of five distinct operating modes. These modes of operation provide the flexibility required by building operators to meet their daily HVAC cooling requirements. Ice Build: In this operating mode, ice is built by circulating a 25% solution (by weight) of inhibited ethylene glycol at negative temperatures through the coils contained in the ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Unit. During this operating mode, the chiller's operating conditions are monitored and the chiller is turned off when the minimum supply glycol temperature off the chiller is reached. Optionally, the ICE LOGIC Ice Quantity Meter is available to control the chiller operation. The Figure below illustrates typical chiller supply Chiller Supply Temperatures temperatures for 8, 10 and 12 hour build cycles. For a typical 10hour build time, the supply glycol temperature is never lower than -5,5C. As the graph illustrates, for build times exceeding 10 hours, the minimum glycol temperature is greater than -5,5C. For build times less than 10 hours, the minimum glycol temperature will be lower than -5,5C at the end of the build cycle. This performance is based on a chiller flow rate associated with a 3T range. When a larger temperature range is the basis of the chiller selection, the chiller supply temperatures will be lower than shown in the figure below. Ice Build with Cooling: When cooling loads exist during the ice build period, some of the cold ethylene glycol used to build ice is diverted to the cooling load to provide the required cooling. The amount of glycol diverted is determined by the building loop set point temperature. BAC recommends that this mode of operation be applied on systems using primary/secondary pumping (See page 5, figure 4). This reduces the possibility of damaging the cooling coil or heat exchanger by pumping cold glycol, lower than 0C, to this equipment. Cooling Ice only: In this operating mode the chiller is off. The warm return ethylene glycol solution iscooled to the desired set point temperature by melting ice stored in the modular ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Unit. Cooling Chiller only: In this operating mode the chiller supplies all the building cooling requirements. Glycol flow is diverted around the thermal storage equipment to allow the cold supply glycol to flow directly to the cooling load. Temperature set points are maintained by the chiller. Cooling Ice with Chiller: In this operating mode, cooling is provided by the combined operation of the chiller and thermal storage equipment. The glycol chiller pre-cools the warm return glycol. The partially cooled glycol solution then passes through the ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Unit where it is cooled by the ice to the design temperature.
TSU - F 14
System Schematics
Two basic flow schematics are applied to select ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Units. The below figure illustrates a single piping loop with the chiller installed upstream of the thermal storage equipment. This design allows the thermal storage system to operate in four of the five possible operating modes. They are Ice Build, Cooling-Ice Only, Cooling-Chiller Only and CoolingIce with Chiller. For this figure the following control logic is applied:
Single Loop Chiller Upstream
MODE Ice Build Cooling Ice Only Cooling Chiller Only Cooling Ice with Chiller
CHILLER On Off On On
P-1 On On On On
V-1 A-B Modulate C-B Modulate
V-2 C-B A-B A-B A-B
Valve V-1 modulates in response to temperature sensor, TS-1. Valve V-2 could be positioned to either maintain a constant flow, less than P-1, or modulate in response to the return glycol temperature from the cooling load. When the building loop contains chilled water, a heat exchanger must be installed to separate the glycol loop from the buildings chilled water loop. On applications where an existing water chiller is available, it can be installed in the chilled water loop to reduce the load on the thermal storage system.
Baltimore Aircoil
TSU - F 15
This design should not be used when there is a requirement to build ice and provide cooling. This would require the cold return glycol from the thermal storage equipment be pumped to the cooling load or heat exchanger. Since the glycol temperature is below 0C, the cooling coil or heat exchanger is subject to freezing. The flow schematic illustrated in the below figure details a primary/secondary pumping loop with the chiller located upstream of the thermal storage equipment. This design allows the system to operate in all five operating modes.
Primary/Secondary Pumping Loop Chiller Upstream
For this figure the following control logic is applied:

MODE Ice Build Ice Build with Cooling Cooling - Chiller Only Cooling Ice Only Cooling Ice with Chiller CHILLER On On On Off On P-1 On On On On On P-2 Off On On On On V-1 A-B A-B C-B Modulate Modulate V-2 A-C Modulate A-B A-B A-B
Valve V-1 and Valve V-2 modulate, depending on the operating mode, in response to temperature sensor, TS-1. The benefit provided by the primary/secondary pumping loop is that the system can build ice and provide cooling without fear of freezing a cooling coil or heat exchanger. This system design also allows for different flow rates in each of the pumping loops. When the flow rates in the pumping loops are different, the glycol flow rate in the primary loop should be greater than or equal to the glycol flow rate in the secondary loop. If not, colder supply glycol temperatures from the primary loop are needed to guarantee the design TS-1 set point (because there is always a mix with warm return glycol from the secondary loop. This reduces the chiller COP. At very large flow rate differences, negative glycol temperatures out of the TSU would be needed to obtain TS-1 (which is impossible) As in the single loop schematic, a heat exchanger and a base water chiller can be added to the system schematic. Variations to these schematics are possible but these are the most common for thermal storage systems. One common variation positions the chiller downstream of the thermal storage equipment. This design is used when the glycol temperatures off the ice cannot be maintained for the entire cooling period. By positioning the chiller downstream of the ice, the chiller is used to maintain the required supply temperature. In both of the above figures, the chiller is installed upstream of the ice. This offers two significant advantages compared to system designs that locate the chiller downstream of the ice. First, the chiller operates at higher glycol temperatures to precool the return glycol. This enables the chiller to operate at a higher capacity, which reduces the amount of ice required. Second, since the chiller is operating at higher evaporator temperatures, the efficiency of the chiller is improved.
TSU - F 16
Chiller Performance
Most packaged chillers can provide a wide range of glycol discharge temperatures and are suited for thermal storage applications. Chiller types applied to thermal storage applications include reciprocating, rotary screw and centrifugal. The chiller type used depends on capacity, glycol discharge temperature, efficiency, condenser type, and refrigerant. Chiller capacity and glycol discharge temperature must be evaluated when designing a thermal storage system. Different glycol discharge temperatures are required for various operating modes that affect the chiller capacity. The chiller capacity provided at -5,5C is considerably less than the chiller capacity with a 6C glycol discharge temperature. Chillers selected for use with the BAC's ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Units should be able to provide -5,5C glycol when applied to a 10-hour build cycle. Longer build times result in higher glycol temperatures at the end of the build period while shorter build times require the chiller to supply glycol colder than -5,5C. The chiller capacity required could limit the use of a specific chiller type on small applications. The nominal capacity range for each chiller type is shown in the table below.
Chiller Type Reciprocating Rotary Screw Centrifugal
Nominal Capacity (kW) Range 50 850 kW 450 4200 kW 600 7000 kW+
Centrifugal and rotary screw chillers have the highest efficiencies with COPs from 5,9 to 4,7 at 6C chiller discharge temperature and 4,0 to 3,2 when providing -5,5C glycol. Reciprocating chillers are less efficient and have COPs ranging from 4,1 to 3,2 when providing 6C glycol and 3,2 to 2,7 when making ice at -5,5C. The heat rejection function of an ice storage system can be handled by any of three types of refrigerant condensers: aircooled, water-cooled or evaporative. An aircooled condenser removes heat from the refrigerant and condenses it by forcing air over an extended surface coil through which the refrigerant vapour is circulated. The latent heat of the refrigerant is removed by sensibly heating the air. The condenser capacity is determined by the ambient dry bulb temperature. A water-cooled condenser with a cooling tower rejects heat from a refrigeration system in two steps. First, the refrigerant is condensed by the water flow in the condenser. Second, heat is rejected to the atmosphere as the condenser water is cooled by a cooling tower. The evaporative condenser combines a watercooled condenser and cooling tower in one piece of equipment. It eliminates the sensible heat transfer step of the condenser water. This allows a condensing temperature substantially closer to the design wetbulb temperature. Variations in condensing temperatures should be considered when evaluating chiller performance. Reduced night-time ambient dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures offer lower condensing temperatures which help offset the reduction in chiller capacity and chiller efficiency.
Baltimore Aircoil
TSU - F 17
The percent of nominal chiller capacity at various glycol discharge temperatures are shown below.
Glycol Discharge Temperature 6,0 C 2,0 C -5,5 C Percent of Nominal Capacity* 97 % 85 % 66 %
Note: * Nominal capacity of the chiller is based on cooling water to 6oC.
Nominal capacity ratings are based on: 30C condenser water or 46C condensing temperature for cooling operation 26,5C condenser water or 40,5C condensing temperature for ice build operation The refrigerant types for chillers also vary. Centrifugal chillers are available for use with R-134a, R-123 and R-22. Reciprocating and rotary screw chillers are available for use with R134a, R-22 and R-717 (ammonia).
TSU - F 18
Engineering Specifications TSU-M

1.0 ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Unit
1.1 General: The ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Unit shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model TSU-______. Overall unit dimensions shall not exceed approximately _____ m by ____ m with an overall height not exceeding ____ m. The operating weight shall not exceed _______ kg 1.2 Thermal Capacity: Each unit shall have a latent kWh storage capacity of _______ kWh to be generated in ____ hours when supplied with _______ l/s of a 25% (by weight) solution of industrially inhibited ethylene/propylene glycol. The minimum glycol temperature required during the ice build operating mode shall be _______ C. Rated system performance shall be provided in the format recommended by the Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Guideline T. The thermal storage units shall be modular in design. Unit design shall allow units of different sizes to be installed in order to optimize unit selection and minimize space requirements. Tanks sizes can be mixed due to internal piping arrangements that create a balanced flow due to uniform pressure drop through the coil circuits.

2.1 Tank: The tank shall be constructed of heavy-gauge Z600 galvanized steel panels and include double brake flanges for structural strength. The tank walls shall be supplied with a minimum of 110 mm of insulation that provides a total insulating value of 3,1 m C/W. The tank design shall utilize two liners. The 1,5 mm E.P.D.M. liners shall be of single piece construction and be suitable for low temperature applications. Liners shall be separated from each other by 20 mm of extruded polystyrene insulation. The tank bottom shall be insulated with 70 mm extruded, polystyrene insulation. 2.2 Covers: The ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Unit shall be provided with watertight, sectional covers constructed of Z600 hot-dip galvanized steel. The covers shall be insulated with a minimum of 50 mm of extruded polystyrene insulation. 2.3 Heat Transfer Section: Contained within the tank shall be a steel heat exchanger that is constructed of 26,7 mm O.D., all prime surface serpentine steel tubing encased in a steel framework. The coil, which is hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, shall be tested at 1300 kPa air pressure under water and rated for 1000 kPa operating pressure. The coil circuits are configured to provide maximum storage capacity. Each unit shall be supplied with threaded connections. 2.4 Sight Tube: Each ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Unit shall be provided with a sight tube mounted on the end of each unit. . The sight tube, which shall be fabricated from clear plastic pipe, displays the tank water level and corresponding ice inventory. Optionally, the exclusive B.A.C. ICE LOGIC Ice Quantity Controller is available for both manual and automatic chiller control. 2.5 Heat Transfer Fluid System: The heat transfer fluid shall be an industrially inhibited, 25% by weight, ethylene glycol solution specifically designed for HVAC applications. The 25% (by weight) solution is designed to provide freeze/burst and corrosion protection as well as efficient heat transfer in water based, closed loop systems. Corrosion inhibitors shall be provided to keep pipes free of corrosion without fouling.
Baltimore Aircoil
TSU - F 19
Construction Details TSU-C/D External Melt Application
1. Tank
The tank is constructed of heavy-gauge, Z600 hot-dip galvnised steel, reinforced with full-length structural steel angles beneath and on all for sides. All seams are welded to ensure watertight construction. A zinc rich coating is applied to all exposed edges and welds.
5. Covers
Sectional insulated tank covers are proided with B.A.C.s exclusive BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System.
6. Galvanised Steel Coil

Hot-dip galvanised after fabrication (HDGAF) Steel tubing encased in a steel framework Pneumatically tested at 15 bar (31bar) for glycol (ammonia) applications Rated for 10 bar (22 bar) operating pressure
2. Insulation
Extruded polystyrene insulation is provided between the tank and the exterior panels. The insulation is 80 mm thick on the tank sides and ends, and 50 mm thick on the bottom and inside the covers
3. Exterior Panels
Exterior panels sealed at all seams provide a complete vapor barrier and protect the insulation. They are furnished with B.A.C.s exclusive BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System.
7. ICE-LOGIC Ice Thickness Controller (Not Shown)

An electronic, multi-point ice thickness control is mounted on the unit. A control relay is provided to deactivate the refrigeration system when a full build of ice is reached.
4. Air Pump
Centrifugal regenerative blower for field mounting to supply low pressure air for agitation of the water. Pump is complete with a weather protected inlet air filter and is suitable for outdoor applications.
8. Air Distribution
Low pressure air from the air pump is distributed below the coils through multiple perforated PVC pipes.
TSU - F 20
Engineering Data TSU-C/D

TSU-95C - TSU-225C & TSU-185C - TSU-450C
1. Coil Connections; 2. Make-up ND50; 3. Overflow ND50; 4. Water Out; 5. Water In; 6. Drain ND50; 7. ICE LOGIC.
Model TSU
Op. Sh. Weight Air Pump Weight (kg) (kW) (kg) 9370 10560 10980 13070 15240 17460 19550 2550 2780 2860 3270 3860 4225 4635 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 1,1 1,1
Water Volume (l) 6520 7440 7760 9390 11020 12640 14270
Pull Down Volume (l) 165 208 227 265 303 341 379
Coil Volume (l) 297 340 368 453 510 566 657
R-717 Charge (kg) 128 147 159 196 220 244 281
Water Conn. In ND (mm) 80+2x40 80+2x40 80+2x40 80+2x40 80+2x40 100+2x50 100+2x50
Water Conn. H Out (mm) ND (mm) 80 80 80 80 80 100 100 2160 2160 2160 2160 2160 2160 2160
H1 mm
L (mm)
W (mm)
TSU-95C TSU-115C TSU-120C TSU-145C TSU-170C TSU-200C TSU-225C
2311 2311 2311 2311 2311 2311 2311
3073 3683 3073 3683 4293 4877 5486
1308 1308 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600
Model TSU
Op. Weight (kg) 16935 20205 23475 26970 30240 250105 29145 33505 37545
Sh. Weight (kg) 4045 4635 5180 5950 6495 5495 6130 7085 7765
Air Pump (kW)
Water Volume (l) 12270 14880 17450 20020 22640 18700 21960 25120 28470
Pull Down Volume (l) 341 416 454 530 606 492 606 681 757
Coil Volume (l) 595 680 821 906 1020 878 1020 1161 1275
R-717 Charge (kg) 257 294 354 391 440 379 440 501 550
Water Conn. In ND (mm) 100+2x50 100+2x50 100+2x50 100+2x50 150+2x80 150+2x80 150+2x80 150+2x80 150+2x80
Water Conn. H Out (mm) ND (mm) 100 100 100 100 150 150 150 150 150 2160 2160 2160 2160 2160 2160 2160 2160 2160
H1 (mm)
L (mm)
W (mm)
TSU-185C TSU-230C TSU-270C TSU-310C TSU-350C TSU-290C TSU-340C TSU-400C TSU-450C
1,1 1,1 1,1 1,5 1,5 1,5 1,5 1,5 1,5
2360 2360 2360 2360 2360 2360 2360 2360 2360
3073 3683 4293 4877 5486 3683 4293 4877 5486
2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2982 2982 2982 2982
Baltimore Aircoil
TSU - F 21
TSU-480C - TSU-1050C & TSU-790D - TSU-1440D

1. Coil Connections; 2. Make-up ND50; 3. Overflow ND50; 4. Water Out; 5. Water In; 6. Drain ND50; 7. ICE LOGIC.
Model TSU
Op. Weight (kg) 42180 50260 58450 67195 75365 87805
Sh. Weight (kg) 8945 10355 11670 13620 14985 17210
Air Pump (kW)
Water Volume (l) 31610 38000 44670 51140 57610 67300
Water Conn. Pull Down R-717 Water Coil Volume H Volume Charge Conn. In ND Out (l) (mm) ND (l) (kg) (mm) (mm) 833 1022 1173 1363 1514 1779 1529 1784 2067 2322 2605 3115 660 770 892 1002 1125 1345 150+2x80 150+2x80 150+2x80 200+2x80 200+2x80 200+2x80 150 150 150 200 200 200 2160 2160 2160 2160 2160 2160
H1 (mm)
L (mm)
W (mm)
TSU-480C TSU-590C TSU-700C TSU-800C TSU-910C TSU-1050C
1,5 3,0 3,0 3,0 3,0 3,0
2360 2360 2360 2360 2360 2360
6096 7290 8509 9703 10922 12725
2982 2982 2982 2982 2982 2982
Model TSU
Op. Weight (kg) 68450 79380 91270
Sh. Weight (kg) 13790 15470 17920 19550 22090
Air Pump (kW)
Water Volume (l) 51860 60570 69650 78360 91230
Water Pull Down R-717 Water Conn. Coil Volume H Volume Charge Conn. In ND Out (l) (mm) (l) (kg) (mm) ND (mm) 1510 1630 1780 1890 2230 2750 3115 3455 3795 4330 1187 1345 1492 1638 1869 200+2x80 200+2x80 200+2x80 200+2x80 200+2x80 200 200 200 200 200 2415 2415 2415 2415 2415
H1 (mm)
L (mm)
W (mm)
TSU-790D TSU-940D TSU-1080D
3,0 3,0 3,0 4 4
2757 2757 2757 2757 2757
7290 8509 9703 10922 12725
3582 3582 3582 3582 3582
TSU-1220D 102970 TSU-1440D 118940
TSU - F 22
TSC-95C - TSC-1050C & TSC-790D - TSC-1440D

Data Per Coil Model TSC TSC-95C TSC-115C TSC-120C TSC-145C TSC-170C TSC-200C TSC-225C TSC-185C TSC-230C TSC-270C TSC-310C TSC-350C TSC-290C TSC-340C TSC-400C TSC-450C TSC-480C TSC-590C TSC-700C TSC-800C TSC-910C TSC-1050C TSU-790D TSU-940D TSU-1080D TSU-1220D TSU-1440D No Coils Sh. Weight (kg) 1065 1205 1315 1500 1635 1950 2135 1065 1205 1340 1590 1725 1500 1635 1950 2135 1365 1545 1680 2000 2180 1680 2065 2315 2720 2950 3310 Coil Volume (l) 297 340 368 453 510 566 651 297 340 410 453 510 453 510 566 651 380 462 519 574 660 520 687 779 864 950 1084 R-717 Charge (kg) 128 147 159 196 220 244 281 128 147 177 196 220 196 220 244 281 164 199 224 248 285 225 297 336 373 410 468 H (mm) 1912 1912 1912 1912 1912 1912 1912 1912 1912 1912 1912 1912 1912 1912 1912 1912 1912 1912 1912 1912 1912 1912 2102 2102 2102 2102 2102 H1 (mm) 2260 2260 2260 2260 2260 2260 2260 2260 2260 2260 2260 2260 2260 2260 2260 2260 2260 2260 2260 2260 2260 2260 2448 2448 2448 2448 2448 L (mm) 2654 3258 2654 3258 3861 4464 5070 2654 3258 3861 4464 5070 3258 3861 4464 5070 2721 3327 3928 4534 5137 4030 3327 3931 4534 5140 6045 W (mm) 1055 1055 1350 1350 1350 1350 1350 1055 1055 1055 1055 1055 1350 1350 1350 1350 1350 1350 1350 1350 1350 1350 1645 1645 1645 1645 1645
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 6 4 4 4 4 4
General Notes
1. All dimensions are in mm. Weights are in kg. 2. Unit should be continuously supported on a flat levelsurface. 3. All connections are threaded 4. H1 = installed height. Coils are capped for shipping and storage. Add 75 mm for shipping height. 5. Refrigerant charge listed is operating charge for pump recirculated bottom feed. For other feed systems, consult your BAC Balticare Representative.
Baltimore Aircoil
TSU - F 23
Custom Coils for External Melt Application (TSU-C/D)

BAC will manufacture custom ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Coils to meet project specific requirements. B.A.C. has done extensive research and testing on the build and melt characteristics of ice storage. This research and testing has resulted in selection capabilities unmatched by any other company in the industry. BAC can predict the temperatures required on an hour by hour basis for building ice on custom coils, over a variety of conditions and build times. Coils installed in Concrete Tank The physical space available, load profile, discharge temperatures, chiller capacity and operating sequences can be evaluated to find the design that best meets the application. The ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Coils are constructed of continuous 26,7 mm O.D. all prime surface serpentine steel tubing. The coils are assembled in a structural steel frame designed to support the weight of the coil stack with a full ice build for glycol (ammonia) application. After fabrication the coils are tested for leaks using 15 bar (31bar) air pressure under water, then hotdip galvanized for corrosion protection. The coils are configured to provide countercurrent glycol flow in adjacent circuits for maximum storage capacity. Individual coils can be factory-assembled into modules of two (2) coils for optimization of transport cost and reduction of site assembly time. Glycol manifolds are coated with zinc-rich, cold galvanizing finish at the factory. Necessary support steel and lifting lugs are provided on the modules to allow for lifting into and final positioning within the storage tank.
Modes of Operation
The ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Unit operates in two main operating modes or cycles. A possible combination of these cycles of operation provides the flexibility to meet the daily HVAC or cooling requirements. Long periods of simultaneously circulating glycol or ammonia through the coil tubes and circulating water through the ICE CHILLER should however be avoided to optimise system performance. Ice Build: In this operating cycle, ice is built by circulating ammonia or a 30% solution (by weight) of inhibited ethylene/propylene glycol through the coils contained in the ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Unit. The below table illustrates typical temperatures for 8, 10, 12 and 14 hour build cycles. At the start of the ice build cycle, the temperature will be higher while at the end of the ice build cycle, the temperatures will be lower.
TSU - F 24
Unit Capacity & Average Temperatures for Glycol Applications Build Time (h) & Glycol Temperature (C) Model TSU Nominal Capacity (kWh) 325 404 422 510 597 703 791 650 808 949 1090 1230 1020 1195 1406 1582 1688 2075 2462 2813 3200 3692 2776 3303 3795 4287 5060 Flow (l/s) p In TSU-95C TSU-115C TSU-120C TSU-145C TSU-170C TSU-200C TSU-225C TSU-185C TSU-230C TSU-270C TSU-310C TSU-350C TSU-290C TSU-340C TSU-400C TSU-450C TSU-480C TSU-590C TSU-700C TSU-800C TSU-910C TSU-1050C TSU-790D TSU-940D TSU-1080D TSU-1220D TSU-1440D 2,4 2,4 2,8 2,8 2,8 5,4 5,4 4,7 4,7 8,5 8,5 8,5 5,7 5,7 10,7 10,7 10,7 10,7 11,4 21,5 21,5 17,0 27,4 27,4 27,4 27,4 27,4 111,0 130,3 100,7 117,9 134,4 71,0 78,6 111,0 130,3 63,4 71,0 78,6 117,9 134,4 71,0 78,6 93,8 108,2 135,8 72,4 79,3 137,3 73,1 82,7 91,7 100,7 114,5 -8,8 -9,4 -9,0 -9,5 -10,0 -8,7 -9,0 -8,8 -9,4 -8,4 -8,7 -8,9 -9,5 -10,0 -8,7 -9,0 -9,2 -9,7 -10,1 -8,7 -9,0 -10,1 -8,2 -8,6 -8,8 -9,1 -9,6 8h Out -4,4 -3,8 -4,2 -3,7 -3,2 -4,4 -4,2 -4,4 -3,8 -4,8 -4,5 -4,3 -3,7 -3,2 -4,4 -4,2 -4,1 -3,4 -3,1 -4,4 -4,2 -3,1 -5,0 -4,6 -4,4 -4,1 -3,6 In -6,9 -7,4 -7,1 -7,5 -7,9 -6,9 -7,1 -6,9 -7,4 -9,6 -6,8 -7,1 -7,5 -7,9 -6,9 -7,1 -7,2 -7,7 -8,0 -6,9 -7,1 -8,0 -6,5 -6,7 -7,0 -7,2 -7,6 10 h Out -3,4 -2,9 -3,2 -2,8 -2,4 -3,4 -3,2 -3,4 -2,9 -3,7 -3,5 -3,3 -2,8 -2,4 -3,4 -3,2 -3,1 -2,6 -2,3 -3,4 -3,2 -2,4 -3,8 -3,6 -3,3 -3,1 -2,7 In -5,8 -6,2 -5,9 -6,3 -6,6 -5,8 -5,9 -5,8 -6,2 -5,6 -5,7 -5,9 -6,3 -6,6 -5,8 -5,9 -6,1 -6,4 -6,7 -5,8 -5,9 -6,7 -5,4 -5,7 -5,8 -6,1 -6,3 12 h Out -2,8 -2,4 -2,7 -2,4 -2,1 -2,9 -2,7 -2,8 -2,4 -3,1 -2,9 -2,8 -2,4 -2,1 -2,9 -2,7 -2,6 -2,2 -1,9 -2,9 -2,7 -2,0 -3,2 -3,0 -2,8 -2,6 -2,3 IN -5,0 -5,3 -5,1 -5,4 -5,7 -4,9 -5,1 -5,0 -5,3 -4,8 -4,9 -5,1 -5,4 -5,7 -4,9 -5,1 -5,2 -5,6 -5,8 -4,9 -5,1 -5,7 -4,7 -4,8 -5,0 -5,2 -5,4 14 h Out -2,4 -2,1 -2,3 -2,1 -1,8 -2,5 -2,3 -2,4 -2,1 -2,7 -2,5 -2,4 -2,1 -1,8 -2,5 -2,3 -2,2 -1,9 -1,7 -2,5 -2,3 -1,7 -2,8 -2,6 -2,4 -2,3 -2,0
Unit Capacity for Ammonia Applications Pump Recirculation Refrigerant Feed Nominal Capacity kWh 318 389 404 492 580 661 735 636 777 Gravity Flooded Refrigerant Feed Nominal Capacity kWh 1322 1470 1656 2015 2356 2683 2982 3576 2748
Model TSU
Model TSU
TSU-95C TSU-115C TSU-120C TSU-145C TSU-170C TSU-200C TSU-225C TSU-185C TSU-230C
TSU-400C TSU-450C TSU-480C TSU-590C TSU-700C TSU-800C TSU-910C TSU-1050C TSU-790D
Baltimore Aircoil
TSU - F 25
Unit Capacity for Ammonia Applications Pump Recirculation Refrigerant Feed Nominal Capacity kWh 910 1037 1157 984 1160 Gravity Flooded Refrigerant Feed Nominal Capacity kWh 3247 3728 4227 4940
Model TSU
Model TSU
TSU-270C TSU-310C TSU-350C TSU-290C TSU-340C
TSU-940D TSU-1080D TSU-1220D TSU-1440D
Temperatures for Ammonia Applications Design Evaporator Temperature Pump Recirculation Refrigerant Feed C Storage Factor 1,00 1,05 1,10 1,15 1,20 1,25 1,30 Build Tuime 8h -6,1 -5,7 -5,3 -5,0 -4,7 -4,5 -4,3 10 h -4,9 -4,6 -4,3 -4,1 -3,9 -3,7 -3,5 12 h -4,1 -3,9 -3,7 -3,5 -3,3 -3,1 -3,0 14 -3,6 -3;4 -3,2 -3,0 -2,8 -2,7 -2,6 Storage Factor 1,00 1,05 1,10 1,15 1,20 1,25 1,30 Design Evaporator Temperature Gravity Flooded Refrigerant Feed C Build Time 8h -5,8 -5,5 -5,2 -5,0 -4,7 -4,5 -4,3 10 h -4,8 -4,6 -4,3 -4,1 -3,9 -3,8 -3,6 12 h -4,2 -3,9 -3,7 -3,6 -3,4 -3,3 -3,1 14 h -3,7 -3,5 -3,3 -3,2 -3,0 -2,9 -2,8
Ice Melt: In this operation cycle the warm return water is cooled by direct contact between the water and the ice, melting ice stored in the modular ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Unit.
System Schematics
The basic ice storage system includes an ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Unit, a refrigeration system and ice water pump as shown below. The ICE CHILLER Unit consists of a multiple tube serpentine coil submerged in an insulated tank of water. Both the coil and tank are constructed from hot-dip galvanized steel for corrosion protection. When no cooling load exists, the refrigeration system operates to build ice on the outside surface of the coil. This refrigeration effect is provided by feeding refrigerant directly into the coil. To increase the heat transfer during the ice build cycle the water is agitated by air bubbles from a low pressure distribution system beneath the coil. When the ice has reached design thickness, BACs exclusive ICE-LOGIC Ice Thickness Controller sends a signal to turn off the refrigeration system. When chilled water is required for cooling, the chilled water pump is started, and the meltout cycle begins. Warm water returning from the load circulates through the ICE CHILLER tank and is cooled by direct contact with the melting ice. During this cycle, the tank water is also agitated to enhance heat transfer and provides a constant supply water temperature of 1C or less.
TSU - F 26
For a closed chilled water loop see figure below. With this system, warm retrun water from the load is pumped through a heat exchanger and cooled by the ice water circuit from the ICE CHILLER Unit. For more detailed information on the design and operation of BAC ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Units, contact your local BAC Balticare Representative.
Basic Scheme External Melt
Scheme with Intermediate Heat Exchanger
Baltimore Aircoil
TSU - F 27
Engineering Specifications TSU-C/D

1.0 ICE CHIILLER Thermal Storage Unit
1.1 General: The ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Unit shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model TSU-______. Overall unit dimensions shall not exceed approximately _____ m by ____ m with an overall height not exceeding ____ m. The operating weight shall not exceed _______ kg 1.2 Thermal Capacity: Each unit shall have a thermal storage capacity of _______ kWh operating with ___________refrigerant and a build time of _______ hours at a _______ C nominal evaporator temperature. 1.3 Experience: Manufacturers submitting bids for equipment in this specification shall have a standard production model of this unit, which has been manufactured and in use for 3 years. The manufacturer shall offer evidence that the equipment has been successfully operated on a minimum of 50 applications, which utilize the same refrigerant and meltout arrangement specified.

2.1 Tank: The tank shall be constructed of heavy gauge Z600 hotdip galvanized steel and reinforced with full-length structural angles underneath and on all four sides. All seams shall be welded to ensure watertight cnostruction. A zinc rich coating shall be applied to all exposed edges and welds. 2.2 Coil: The coil shall be constructed of prime surface serpentine steel circuits and shall be tested at 15 bar (31 bar for ammonia applications) air pressure under water. The coil shall be encased in a steel frame and the entire assembly hot-dip galvanised after fabrication. For use with Ammonia refrigerant, the coil shall be complete with purge connection for oil maintenance. 2.3 Insulation: Extruded polystyrene insulation shall be provided between the tank and the exterior panels. The insulation shall be 80 mm thick on the tank sides and ends, and 50 mm thick on the bottom and inside the covers. 2.4 Exterior Panels: Exterior panels sealed at all seams provide a complete vapour barrier and protect the insulation. They are furnished with B.A.C.s exclusive BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System. 2.5 Covers: The ICE CHILLER unit(s) shall be provided with sectional insulated steel covers provided with the BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System. 2.6 Ice Thickness Control: A sensing element shall be mounted on the coil to deactivate the refrigerant compressor at a full build of ice. 2.7 Air pump: Centrifugal regenerative blower for field mounting to supply low pressure air for agitation of the water. Pump is complete with a weather protected inlet air filter, and is suitable for outdoor applications. 2.8 Air Distributor: Low pressure air shall be distributed through multiple perforated PVC pipes.
TSU - F 28
Engineering Considerations ICE CHILLER Products

Installation
ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Units must be installed on a continuous flat level surface. The pitch of the slab must not exceed 3 mm over a 3 metre span See Figure: Unit Layout Guidelines. The units should be positioned so there is sufficient clearance between units and adjacent walls to allow easy access. When multiple units are installed, a minimum of 50 cm is recommended between units. When installed indoors, the access and slab requirements described above also apply. The units should be placed close to a floor drain in the event they need to be drained. The minimum height requirement above the tank for proper pipe installation is 1 metre. Below Figure illustrates the recommended overhead clearance for ICE Unit Layout Guidelines CHILLER Thermal Storage Units. BAC's ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Units are available unassembled when the units must be installed indoors and access is limited. Erection of unassembled units will require factory personnel to assist in the field assembly of this equipment. Contact the local BAC-Balticare Representative for additional details. For large applications, BAC will provide ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Coils for installation in field fabricated concrete tanks. This product offering demonstrates BAC's product design and flexibility. When coils are required, BAC's manufacturing capabilities allow coils to be manufactured in the size and configuration necessary to meet specific site and performance requirements. The concrete tank design is to be completed by a qualified structural engineer. Below figure illustrates the ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Coil layout guidelines. Buoyancy forces due to the density difference between ice and water require that holddown angles be installed on top of the coils. This will prohibit the coils from floating in an overcharged condition. For large projects that require ICE CHILLER Coils, contact the local BAC Balticare Representative for selection and dimensional information.
Recommended Overhead Clearance
Coil Layout Guidelines
Baltimore Aircoil
TSU - F 29
Unit Piping
Piping to the ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Unit should follow established piping guidelines. The coil connections on the unit are galvanized steel and are grooved for mechanical coupling. For single tank applications, each pair of manifolded coil connections should include a shut off valve so the unit can be isolated from the system. Below figure illustrates the valve arrangement for a single unit. It is recommended that the piping include a bypass circuit to allow operation of the system without the ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Unit in the piping loop. This bypass can be incorporated into the piping design by installing a three-way/modulating valve. This valve can also be used to control the leaving glycol temperature from the thermal storage unit. Temperature and pressure taps should be installed to allow for easier flow balancing and system troubleshooting. A relief valve, set at a maximum of 10 bar, must be installed between the shut off valves and the coil connections to protect the coils from excessive pressures due to hydraulic expansion. The relief valve should be vented to a portion of the system, which can accommodate expansion.
CAUTION: The system must include an expansion tank to accommodate changes in fluid volume. Adequately sized air vents must be installed at the high points in the piping loop to remove trapped air from the system. In cases where the piping to the storage tanks is at the highest elevation in the loop, purge valves must be installed in the piping on top of the units to remove excess air from the system.
Below figure illustrates reverse return piping for multiple units installed in parallel. The use of reverse return piping is recommended to ensure balanced flow to each unit. Shut off valves at each unit can be used instead of balancing valves. When large quantities of ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Units are installed, the system should be divided into groups of units. Then, balancing of each unit can be eliminated and a common balancing valve for each group of units installed. Shut off valves for isolating individual units should be installed but not used for balancing glycol flow to the unit.
Single Unit Valve Arrangement
Reverse Return Piping
Controls
An inventory control that provides a 4 20 mA signal is available. This control should be used for determining the amount of ice in inventory and to terminate the ice build cycle. Compolete operating control details are provided in the Operating and Maintenance Manual.
Glycol
ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Units typically use a 25% (by weight) solution of industrially inhibited ethylene glycol for both corrosion protection and freeze protection. Industrial grade inhibited ethylene glycol is specifically designed to prevent corrosion in HVAC and heat transfer equipment. Inhibitors are used to prevent the ethylene glycol from becoming acidic and to protect the metal components in the thermal storage system. The systems lowest operating temperature should be 3C to 4C above the glycol freeze point. The freeze point for a system with 25% (by weight) ethylene glycol is -12C.
TSU - F 30
CAUTION: 1. Uninhibited ethylene glycol and automotive antifreeze solutions are NOT to be used on thermal storage applications. 2. Ethylene glycol solutions are NOT compatible with galvanised steel parts. Therefore glycol piping should only be galvanised at the outside.
Water Treatment
In the near freezing temperatures of the ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Unit, scale and corrosion are naturally minimized. Therefore, water treatment for these two conditions may not be required or may require minimal attention unless the water is corrosive in nature. To control biological growth, a biocide may be needed to prevent the spread of iron bacteria or other organisms. For specific recommendations, consult a reputable local water treatment company and follow the guidelines below:
Property of Water PH Hardness as CaCo3 Alkalinity as CaCO3 Total Dissolved Solids Chlorides Sulfates Conductivity
Range 7.0 to 9.0 (1) 30 to 50 mg/l 500 mg/l max. 1000 mg/l max. 125 mg/l max. as Cl 125 mg/l max. 700 S/cm at 0C (2)
Notes: 1. A water pH of 8.3 or higher will require periodic passivation of the galvanised steel to prevent white rust, the accumulation of white, waxy, non-protective zinc corrosion products on galvanised steel surfaces. 2. Maximum conductivity of 700 S/cm at 0C is important for proper operation of the ICE LOGIC ice quantity controller.
If water treatment is implemented to the system, to assure full capacity of the ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Unit, the water treatment should not alter the freeze point of water.
Winterization
Precautions must be taken to protect the unit and associated piping from freezing conditions. Heat tracing and insulation should be installed on all piping connected to the unit. The sight tube, operating controls and optional inventory sensor must be heat traced and insulated. It is not necessary to drain the unit during cold weather. Freezing of the water contained in the unit during the winter will not damage the coil or unit.
Pressure Drop
The ICE CHILLER Thermal Storage Unit is designed for low pressure drop. Pressure drops, for different flow rates and for alternative fluids, are available by contacting the local BAC Balticare Representative.
Warranties
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 1
Content
Connection Guide ...................................................................................... G2 Materials of Construction ......................................................................... G4 Selection Software ..................................................................................... G5 The Value of Standards ............................................................................. G6 Selection of Remote Sump Tank .............................................................. G7 Filtration Options .................................................................................... G13 Sound Reduction Options ....................................................................... G14 Fundamentals of Sound .......................................................................... G22 Motor Controls ........................................................................................ G47 Plume Abatement .................................................................................... G49 Formulas .................................................................................................. G51 Replacement Parts .................................................................................. G52 Application Guidelines ............................................................................ G53 Glossary .................................................................................................... G61
TR - G 2
Connection Guide
Introduction
A summary of connection types used by BAC follows. The specific connection type for a particular BAC model can be found on the unit print drawing or from your local BAC Balticare Representative.
Beveled for Welding (BFW)

This connection type is a pipe stub with a beveled edge. The bevel allows for easier welding in the field and a full penetration weld. Weld materials fill the trimmed area between two beveled edges as shown here.
Grooved to suit a Mechanical Coupling

This connection type is a pipe stub with a groove to accept a mechanical pipe coupler.
Stud Circle Flat Face Flange

This connection type is a standard bolt and hole pattern at the point of connection to mate to a EN 1092 Flat Face Flange. When BAC provides this connection type to a hot water basin, mounting bolts are permanently fastened to the connection plate. All other components (piping, nuts, bolts, flatwashers, etc.) are provided by others unless otherwise specified.
Male Pipe Thread (MPT)

This connection type is a threaded pipe stub connection designed to mate with a Female Pipe Thread (FPT) fitting.
Side Outlet Depressed Sump Box

This option is offered to facilitate horizontal piping below the cold water basin of a unit, and is a compact alternative to using an elbow in the piping arrangement, saving installation time and cost.
Weld Details
1. Weld Material, 2. Beveled edge of field-installed piping, 3.Beveled Edge of BAC connection.
Grooved Connection
1. Grooved for mechanical coupling
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 3
Flat Face Flange pattern is shown on this cold water basin panel to suit a EN 1092 flange
Flat Fac Flange pattern with mounting bolts is shown on this hot water basin panel to suit a EN 1092 flange
MPT Connection
Side Outlet Depressed Sump Box
TR - G 4
Materials of Construction
Introduction
Operating environment, desired life expectancy, and budget all influence the materials of construction selected for an evaporative cooling unit. BAC products are available in a variety of materials and BAC designs focus on long life and easy maintenance. As a result, owners can maximize their operational goals. This section describes the materials of construction available for BAC products. To determine the best material options for your specific project, consult your local BAC Balticare Representative.
Galvanized Steel
Z-600 hot-dip galvanized steel is the heaviest commercially available galvanized steel, universally recognized for its strength and corrosion resistance. To assure long-life, Z-600 hot-dip galvanized steel is used as the base material for all steel products and parts, and all exposed cut edges are protected with a zinc-rich coating after fabrication. With good maintenance and proper water treatment, Z-600 galvanized steel products will provide excellent service life under the operating conditions normally encountered in comfort cooling and industrial applications.
Baltibond Corrosion Protection System

The BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System is a unique system approach to evaporative cooling equipment protection. A special hybrid polymer, formulated for tenacious bonding, toughness, and impermeability to fluids, is applied by electrostatic spray to Z-600 hot dip galvanized steel surfaces. The polymer undergoes a heat-activated, thermosetting cure process, fuse-bonding it to the galvanized steel substrate. The BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System can extend the service life of equipment and alleviates concerns with white rust, virtually eliminating the need for periodic passivation of galvanized steel components.
Stainless Steel
In certain critical applications the use of stainless steel is preferred. BAC offers stainless steel as an optional material on most of its product lines. Two types of stainless steel are available, AISI 304 (DIN Werkst. Nr. 1.4301) or AISI 316 (DIN Werkst. Nr. 1.4401 or 1.4404). Stainless steel AISI 316 is recommended for applications with chloride concentrations of more than 500 ppm in the circulating water.
Component Construction
In addition to the various materials available for the structure of its units, BAC carefully selects the materials used for all components of its products. Additional materials such as corrosion resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP), polyvinyl chloride (PVC), aluminum and copper are used for components when necessary to provide the corrosion resistance required of a unit providing evaporative cooling service.
Which material option is right for my project?

Included within the product section of each open cooling tower, closed circuit cooling tower and evaporative condenser in this catalog is a discussion on construction options. These sections define the availability of certain materials and combinations of materials for each product. Refer to these sections for specific product information. Your local BAC Balticare Sales Representative can guide you on the proper unit construction for your specific project.
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 5
Selection Software
Easy-to-Use Selection Software
BAC has developed comprehensive selection software, which simulates the performance of evaporative cooling equipment for a broad range of climatic and operating conditions. The programme provides all technical data relevant to the selected model(s).
Cooling Tower Selections

The selection programme provides the ability to make selections for a wide range of operating conditions simultaneously for different cooling tower product lines and hence allows side by side comparisons of different unit configurations. Product selections often contain reserve capacity at the design conditions. Selections can be optimised by maximising flow rates, hot and cold water temperatures, wet bulb temperatures or approach.
Closed Circuit Cooling Tower Selections

The closed circuit cooling tower selection programme provides equipment selections for applications utilizing water, aqueous ethylene glycol or aqueous propylene glycol as the process fluid.
Evaporative Condenser Selections

The evaporative condenser selection program provides equipment selections for applications utilizing R-717 (ammonia), R-22, and R-134a.
Accessories
The selection program evaluates the use of accessories that may impact capacity (i.e., low-sound fans, sound attenuation, etc.)
Alternative Fan Speed

Standard selections at nominal fan speed utilise a standard kW fan motor to meet full load performance. Alternative selections based on reduced fan speed (and motor kW) are also available.
Performance Curves
The selection program generates performance curves based on flow rates ranging from 80% to 120% of the design flow rate. Performance curves are a graphical representation of the leaving water temperature versus the entering wet-bulb temperature, and are typically evaluated at a number of ranges.
Sound Data
The selection program provides sound ratings for standard selections at any distance for your reference. For extremely sound sensitive installations, sound ratings are also available for units with low sound fans and sound attenuation.
TR - G 6
The Value of Standards

Introduction
Baltimore Aircoil strongly believes in the value of standards and independent certification programmes. Through this philosophy customers can be assured of consistent level of performance and quality when using BAC products and services.
ISO9001:2000
This fundamental belief is demonstrated first and foremost by ISO 9001:2000 Certification of BACs design, engineering, and manufacturing of evaporative cooling products. Compliance with ISO 9001:2000 standards offers BAC customers better, more consistent quality, reliable performance, and confidence that the product can be delivered on time and per the specifications. Consistent quality also reduces the potential for installation and operational problems. Any problems reported from the field receive swift corrective and preventative actions to prevent reoccurrence. This level of performance is assured through frequent internal training and audits, backed by rigorous external audits by an independent, ISO-accredited Registrar. ISO 9001:2000 also requires demonstrating continuous improvement of products, processes, and systems over time, benefiting both BAC and its many customers.
European Directives and Standards

The design of BAC products is influenced by European Directives and recognised standards. Examples include the following: European Machine Directive 98/37/EC European Pressure Equipment Directive PED 97/23/EC ATEX Directive: 94/9/EC Low voltage directive 73/23/EEC, 93/68/EC Electromagnetic Compatibility: 89/336/EEC, 92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC, 2004/10/EC EN 13741 Thermal performance acceptance testing of mechanical draught series wet cooling towers. Besides supporting these directives and standards, BAC actively works with industry organisations, such as ASHRAE, ASME, CEN, ARI, CTI, EUROVENT CECOMAF, and FM to improve their standards and technical documentation, or develop standards or guidelines where none currently exist. For instance, BAC supported the development of the Recommended Code of Practice to keep your Cooling System efficient and safe, and the brochure Evaporative Cooling, how efficient heat transfer technology helps to protect the environment, both published by EUROVENTCECOMAF. More recently BAC supported the development of the VDMA Einheitsblatt 24649 Empfehlungen zum wirksamen und sicheren Betrieb einer Verdunstungskhlanlage. BAC is an active member of numerous trade associations in the US and in Europe. BAC strongly encourages customers, suppliers, and competitors to join us developing and supporting recognised standards and certification programmes for the benefit of the industry and the society as a whole. BAC welcomes feedback on this subject, which can be send to info-bac@BaltimoreAircoil.be.
Eurovent-Cecomaf Recommended Code of Practice
Eurovent-Cecomaf Evaporative Cooling Brochure
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 7
Selection of Remote Sump Tank

For an Open Cooling Tower
Remote sump tanks are used on evaporative cooling systems to provide a means of cold water basin freeze protection during cold weather operation. The remote sump tank is usually located in a heated, indoor space, and may preclude the need to winterize the evaporative cooling equipment. A remote sump tank must provide sufficient storage volume to accommodate all the water that will drain back to it during cooling system shutdown, including: The total volume of water contained within the cooling tower during operation (cooling tower volume). The volume of water contained in all system piping located above the operating water level of the remote sump tank (system piping volume). The volume of water contained within any heat exchanger, or other equipment located above the operating water level of the remote sump tank that will drain to the tank when the cooling system is shut down (system components volume). The maximum volume of water contained within the cooling tower is the volume of water to the overflow level. Besides the water in the cold water basin during operation, this volume will take into consideration water in the distribution system, water in suspension in the wet deck, plus an allowance for the external pulldown from piping and other equipment. This simplified method is a conservative approach as it will not consider any volume reductions based on flow rates. For specific information for your application, contact your local BAC Representative.
Safety Factor
When designing a remote sump tank, make sure that your basin has a net available volume that is 5% greater than the total volume required. The net available volume is the volume between the operating level and the overflow level in the remote sump tank The minimum operating level must be maintained in the remote sump tank to prevent vortexing of air through the tank's suction connection.
Example
A VTL-059-H will be installed on a cooling tower/heat exchanger system that will utilize a remote sump tank. The tower side volume contained in the heat exchanger is 95 liters The system has been designed with 10 meter of DN 100 pipe that will be above the operating level of the remote sump tank. What is the correct remote sump tank volume? Solution: From Table 4, the cold water basin volume at overflow for the VTL-059-H is 555 liters. From Table 6, the DN 100 pipe will contain 8,2 liters of water per linear meter pipe. The total volume contained in the DN 100 pipe is 82 liters. The tower side volume of the heat exchanger is 95 liters. The total volume required is: Cooling Tower Volume at Overflow (555 liters) + System Piping Volume (82 liters) + System Components Volume (95 liters) = Total Volume 732 liters 732 liters x 1.05 (safety factor) = 770 liters required. From the above calculation the minimum volume of the remote sump tank must be 770 liters.
TR - G 8
Table 1 : Series 3000 - D

S3000-D Cold Water Basin Volumes Model No. S3 D240L - S3 D299 L S3 D333L - S3 D379 L S3 D455L - S3 D527 L S3 D412L - S3 D436 L S3 D552L - S3 D672 L S3 D728L - S3 D828 L S3 D872L - S3 D970 L S3 D1056L - S3 D985 L S3 D473L - S3 D501 L S3 D583L - S3 D725 L S3 D1132L - S3 D1301 L at Operating Level (l) 1597 1597 2036 2036 3285 3285 3285 3285 2710 4201 4201 at Overflow Level (l) 3626 3857 4879 4614 6764 8312 9330 10121 5863 8282 12154
Table 2 : TXV
TXV Cold Water Basin Volumes Model No. TXV 109 - TXV 154 TXV 177 - TXV 193 TXV 292 - TXV 237 TXV 354 - TXV 500 TXV 310 - TXV 425 at Operating Level (l) 508 679 720 1090 820 at Overflow Level (l) 2659 3565 4103 6213 5341
Table 3 : FXT
FXT Cold Water Basin Volumes Model No. FXT 27 - FXT 32 FXT 43 - FXT 51 FXT 60 - FXT 68 FXT 74 - FXT 88 FXT 97 FXT 133 FXT 160 FXT 173 FXT 211 FXT 250 FXT 194 FXT 266 FXT 320 FXT 346 FXT 422 FXT 500 at Operating Level (l) 106 155 208 310 477 636 636 954 1272 1272 at Overflow Level (l) 428 553 746 1033 1590 2112 2521 3180 4224 5042
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 9
Table 4 : VTL
VTL Cold Water Basin Volumes Model No. VTL 039 VTL 079 VTL 076 VTL 095 VTL 086 VTL 137 VTL 139 VTL 215 VTL 225 VTL 227 VTL 238 VTL 272 at Operating Level (l) 290 435 580 875 1170 875 1170 at Overflow Level (l) 555 815 1090 1655 2175 1655 2175
Table 5 : VXT
VXT Cold Water Basin Volumes Model No. VXT VXT 10 VXT 25 VXT 30 VXT 55 VXT 65 VXT 85 VXT 95 VXT 135 VXT 150 VXT 185 VXT N215 VXT N265 VXT N310 VXT N395 VXT 315 VXT 400 VXT N430 VXT N535 VXT 470 VXT 600 VXT 630 VXT 800 VXT 870 VXT 1200 at Operating Level (l) 45 100 150 205 275 850 1220 1400 1630 2125 2850 4300 at Overflow Level (l) 100 210 325 435 580 1850 2810 2300 3765 3490 4680 7060
Table 6 : Pipe Capacities

Nominal Pipe Size Inches 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 mm 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 Inside Diameter mm Based on Schedule 40 pipe 77,9 102,3 154,1 202,7 254,5 303,3 333,5 381,1 428,8 478,0 574,9 Volume per linear meter Liters 4,8 8,2 18,7 32,3 50,9 72,3 87,4 114,1 144,4 179,5 259,6
TR - G 10
For a Closed Circuit Cooling Tower or Evaporative Condenser

Note: This section provides instruction in the selection of a remote sump tank for a closed circuit cooling tower or evaporative condenser only. Remote sump tanks are used on evaporative cooling systems to provide a means of cold water basin freeze protection during cold weather operation. When the recirculating pump of a closed circuit cooling tower or evaporative condenser is not operating, all of the recirculating water drains by gravity to the remote sump. The remote sump tank is usually located in a heated, indoor space, and may preclude the need to winterize the cold water basin. The remote sump must be sized to accommodate the suction head for the pump plus a surge volume to hold all the water that will drain back to the tank when the pump is shut down. This surge volume (also called drain down volume) includes water in the evaporative cooling equipment and water held in the piping between the unit and the remote sump. The volume of water in the evaporative equipment includes the water in suspension (water within the spray distribution system and falling through the heat transfer section) and water in the cold water basin during normal operation. Tables 1 through 4 provide the volume of water in suspension plus the water in the cold water basin, labeled as "basin volume at overflow level." Table 4 can be used to calculate the volume of water in the piping between the unit and the remote sump (includes riser and drain piping) for applications where piping is Schedule 40. To select a remote sump tank for a particular application, determine the total volume (spray water volume plus piping volume) and select a remote sump tank with a net available volume that is 5% greater than required. HFL hybrid closed circuit cooling towers do not require remote sumps. Due to their small water volume and the unique sump/ plenum design, they can switch from wet to dry operation and vice versa without the need to drain the sump. Electrical sump heaters will protect the sump from freezing at ambient temperatures as low as -25C, even when the fan(s) is (are) in operation.
Application Notes
The standard close-coupled centrifugal pump normally furnished with BAC units is designed and selected specifically for the pump head and flow rate required when the pump is mounted on the unit. This pump cannot be used for remote sump applications and is therefore omitted. The following factors should be considered when selecting remote pumps: Total static head from the remote sump tank operating level to the inlet of the evaporative equipment. Pipe and valve friction losses. For all Closed Circuit Cooling Towers and all Evaporative Condensers, 14 kPa water pressure is required at the inlet of the water distribution system. Required spray flow rate as shown in Tables 1 through 4. A valve should always be installed in the pump discharge line so that the water flow can be adjusted to the proper flow rate and pressure. Inlet water pressure should be measured with a pressure gauge installed in the water supply riser near the equipment inlet. The valve should be adjusted to permit the specified inlet pressure, which results in the design water flow rate. Accurate inlet water pressure and flow rate are important for proper evaporative equipment operation. Higher pressure (in excess of 70 kPa) can cause leaks in the spray distribution system. Lower pressure or low flow may cause improper wetting of the coils, which will negatively affect thermal performance, promote scaling, and may also cause excessive drift. On remote sump applications, the standard float valve(s) and strainer(s) are omitted from the cold water basin and a properly sized outlet connection is added. The remote sump outlet connection is located on the bottom of most units. On smaller Series VL and VX units, the connection is located on the end or back side of the unit. To clarify the location of the remote sump outlet connection, refer to the appropriate unit print, available from your local BAC Balticare Representative or at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com. Another effect of using a remote sump is that the operating weight of the evaporative unit is reduced (design changes, the omission of the integral spray pump, and/or changes in cold water basin volume can contribute to this deduct).
Example
An FXV-422 will be installed on a system that will also utilize a remote sump tank. The system has been designed with 12 meter of DN 150 mm pipe that will be above the operating level of the remote sump tank. What is the correct volume of the remote sump?
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 11
Solution: From Table 1, the spray water volume for an FXV-422 is 997 liters. From Table 4, the DN 150 mm pipe will contain 18,7 l/s of water per linear meter. The total volume contained in the DN 150 mm pipe is 12 meter x 18,7 liter/meter = 225 liters. The total volume required is: Spray Water Volume (997 liters) + System Piping Volume (225 liters) = Total Volume 1222 liters 1222 liters x 1,05 (safety factor) : 1283 liters required. From the above calculation the minimum volume of the remote sump tank must be 1283 liters.
Table 1 : FXV - CXV - HXI

CXV FXV HXI Cold Water Basin Volumes Model No. CXV CXV 74 - 93 CXV 117 - 147 CXV 153 - 193 CXV 207 - 296 CXV 338 - 435 CXV 283 - 327 CXV 416 - 481 CXV D645 - D792 CXV D791 - D944 Model No. FXV FXV 42x FXV 43x FXV (Q)44x FXV (Q)54x FXV (Q)56x FXV 64x FXV (Q)66x FXV D288 FXV D364 Model No. HXI HXI 42x HXI 43x HXI 44x HXI (Q)54x HXI (Q)56x HXI (Q)64x HXI (Q)66x at Operating Level (l) 556 847 1137 685 1036 785 1187 3207 4259 at Overflow Level Spray Water Flow (l) (l/s) 997 1519 2041 2217 3350 2852 4311 5308 6587 12 18 24 45 54 45 54 108,5 108,5 Outlet Size (3) 150 150 200 200 200 200 200 300 300
Table 2 : VXI - VXC

VXI - VXC Cold Water Basin Volumes Model No. VXI VXI 9-x VXI 18-x VXI 27-x VXI 36-x VXI 50-x VXI 70-x VXI 180-x VXI 360-x VXI 95-x VXI 145-x VXI 190-x VXI 290-x VXI 144-x VXI 215-x VXI 288-x VXI 430-x Model No. VXC VXC 14 - 28 VXC 36 - 65 VXC 72 - 97 VXC 110 - 135 VXC 150 - 205 VXC 221 - 265 VXC 357 - 454 VXC 562 - 680 VXC 714 - 908 VXC 1124 - 1360 VXC S288 - S350 VXC S403 - S504 VXC S576 - S700 VXC S806 - S1010 VXC 495 - 516 VXC 715 - 804 VXC 990 - 1032 VXC 1430 - 1608 at Operating Level (l) 45 100 150 205 275 850 1400 2125 2125 4300 805 1220 1820 2470 1795 2725 3655 5515 at Overflow Level (l) 100 210 325 435 580 1850 2300 3490 3490 6420 1850 2810 3730 5690 3410 5175 6935 10475 Spray Water Flow (l/s) 2,2 4,7 7,1 9,5 13,9 19,2 30,8 46,7 61,6 93,4 25,2 38,5 50,4 77 39,1 56,8 78,2 113,6 Outlet Size (3) 65 80 100 100 150 150 200 250 250 300 150 200 250 300 200 250 250 300
TR - G 12
Table 3 : VFL - VCL

VFL - VCL Cold Water Basin Volumes Model No. VFL VFL 24X VFL 36X VFL 48X VFL 72X VFL 96X Model No. VCL VCL 042-079 VCL 084-133 VCL 131-159 VCL 167-258 VCL 239-321 at Operating Level (l) 290 435 580 875 1170 at Overflow Level (l) 555 815 1090 1655 2175 Spray Flow (l/s) 5,9 9,0 12,1 17,9 24,2 Outlet Size (3) 100 100 150 150 200
Table 4 : Pipe Capacities

Nominal Pipe Size Inches 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 mm 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 Inside Diameter mm Based on Schedule 40 pipe 77,9 102,3 154,1 202,7 254,5 303,3 333,5 381,1 428,8 478,0 574,9 Volume per linear meter Liters 4,8 8,2 18,7 32,3 50,9 72,3 87,4 114,1 144,4 179,5 259,6
Notes:
1. The overflow level is the spray water volume and based on the maximum operating water level in the cold water basin with no net drop leg included in the piping system below the unit outlet. 2. All remote sump unit volumes are based on bottom outlets sized as noted, except those models with an asterisk, which are based on an end outlet sized as noted. 3. Drain connection size is for remote sump applications only. For location of drain connection, please refer to unit certified print or contact your local BAC Balticare representative.
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 13
Filtration Options
Separators
Features
Available in flow rates from 2,5 to 76 l/sec. Automatic purge complete with electrically actuated industrial grade ball valve and adjustable purge timer. Close coupled, end suction centrifugal pump & TEFC motor. Cast iron pre-strainer with removable SST basket. Control Panel - IP65 fibreglass enclosure with motor start/ stop, circuit breakers, door disconnect switch, 3-position pump motor switch, adjustable 24 hours purge timer. Skid - fusion bonded polyester coated carbon steel. Polyester powder coated carbon steel interconnecting piping, includes flow controller and isolation ball valves. Options: package recovery system.
Application
BAC's package separators are designed specifically to remove dirt, sand, silt, precipitates, and suspended solids from process fluids. The solids in suspension are separated using the centrifugal forces and moved in an accumulation chamber. The clean fluid is returned to the process. The system utilises an automatic purge to drain the separated solids. The separator will remove unwanted contaminates resulting in increased system efficiency and decreased operating costs. In conjunction with evaporative cooling equipment it is recommended to provide this equipment with a sump sweeper piping system.
Media Filters
Designed for high pressure open applications - 700 kPa.
Features
Available in flow rates ranging from 1 to 12 l/sec. Positive filtration down to 10 micron (5 micron optional). Fusion bonded epoxy lined /polyester coated carbon steel vessel rated at 700 kPa (optional higher pressure ratings and ASME code stamp available). Industrial grade brass 3-way valves and polyester powder coated carbon steel face piping. Closed coupled, end suction centrifugal pump and TEFC motor with cast iron pre-strainer and SST basket. Skid - fusion bonded polyester coated carbon steel. Automatic control cabinet IP 65 fibreglass enclosure including door disconnects switch, circuit/breaker protection, electric actuator, step-down transformer, 3position pump motor switch, pressure differential switch, adjustable solid state timer and 24 hours backwash clock. Source water back wash.
Application
BAC's filtration systems are designed specifically to handle a wide variety of industrial water filtration applications. The permanent media filters use a silica sand media that easily backwashes for cleaning. The filter provides an excellent method for removing dirt, precipitates and suspended solids. In conjunction with evaporative cooling equipment it is recommended to provide this equipment with a sump sweeper piping system.
Service
Technical field service representatives are available to provide guidance for application, installation and repair.
TR - G 14
Sound Reduction Options

VX Sound Attenuation
Sound Efficient and Flexible VX design
Sound is an important consideration in the selection and application of evaporative cooling equipment. Depending on actual site conditions acceptable sound levels can differ greatly. The inherently quiet VX-line design and extensive range of VX sound attenuation options provide economic solutions for a wide variety of acoustical requirements.
Arrangement Standard VX unit VX unit + XA VX unit + XB VX unit + XC Day Base - 9 dB (A) - 17 dB (A) - 21 dB (A) Night - 8 dB (A) - 17 dB (A) - 25 dB (A) - 29 dB (A) Typical Noise Criteria and NC Range Light industrial & commercial areas. NC-45 to NC-55 Business premises, laboratories occupied work areas . NC-40 to NC-45 Large offices, retail shops needing acceptable listening conditions. NC-35 to NC-40 Rural or residential environment. NC-30 to NC-35
Sound reductions shown are expressed as sound pressure data at 15 m from the air intake. Daytime : full fan speed. Night-time : derated to half speed.
Indoor Applications
Directional free field sound data or overall sound power levels are not normally the best way to describe the acoustical behaviour of VX evaporative cooling equipment when installed indoors. In these cases Partial Sound Power levels are the best method to define the sound emission. Partial Sound Power levels represent the sound energy radiated from the sound source over a single directional flat surface (air intake and discharge). Partial Sound Power data for VX models are the result of extensive sound testing using the parallelepiped test methodology and describe the sound radiation for indoor environments.
Sound Testing VX VX Sound Attenuation Alternatives
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 15
1. XA Attenuator Discharge attenuator with vertical baffles Intake attenuator with angled baffles
2. XB Attenuator Discharge attenuator with vertical baffles Intake attenuator with additional baffles and not angled
3. XC Attenuator Double discharge attenuator with vertical baffles. Double intake attenuator with baffles not angled
Approximate distance between baffles is 300 mm Approximate distance between baffles is 120 mm Approximate distance between baffles is 120 mm
Scope of Supply
Intake attenuator with access plenum and access door at both unit ends. Discharge attenuator with access plenum and access door at the back of the unit. Acoustical baffles at both intake and discharge with flex tissue protection and encased in a galvanized steel frame with the Baltibond Corrosion Protection System. Acoustical material that is resistant to water, biological and chemical attack. Acoustically insulated solid bottom panels mounted under the full length of the unit. Lubrication lines extended to the air intake side of the attenuator to facilitate lubrication of the fan shaft bearings. Internal fan screens at the air intake side of the unit to guard the fan and drive system. All steel parts are Z600 galvanized steel with BALTIPLUS Protection.
VX Sound Attenuation Options

All VX sound attenuator options can be supplied with BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System. The sound attenuators can be fitted with mesh screens at the intake and/or discharge. Optional perforated steel sheet is available for additional baffle protection.
VX Standard acoustical baffle
VL Sound Attenuation
Combination of Low Heigth with Low Sound
The Low Profile Series VL provides optimal solutions for sound sensitive installations requiring low equipment height. Different sound attenuation packages are available to meet specific sound and lay-out requirements. For Horizontal Air Intake, BAC offers two Sound Attenuation alternatives:
HS-Type
HD-Type with Double Intake Attenuator
TR - G 16 Vertical Air Intake Configurations

In certain lay-out situations it may be desirable to install Low Profile Series VL products with VS vertical air intake and discharge sound attenuation. Such situations are usually limited to indoor installations where the equipment cannot be located at the perimeter of the building. VS attenuators incorporate the installation of discharge deflectors which guide the discharge air stream away from the air intake. Recycling of discharge air under all weather and wind conditions cannot however entirely be avoided, in particular for larger multi cell installations.
VS-Type
Sound Reductions
Arrangement Standard VL unit VL units + HS or VS VL unit + HD Day Base - 17 dB (A) - 21 dB (A) Night - 8 dB (A) - 25 dB (A) - 29 dB (A) Typical Noise Criteria & NC Range Acceptable working conditions in light industrial & commercial areas. NC-45 to NC-55 Large offices, retail shops needing acceptable listening conditions. NC-35 to NC-40 Good listening conditions, residential environment. NC-30 to NC-35
Sound reductions shown are expressed as sound pressure data at 15m from air intake. Daytime: full fan speed. Nighttime: derated to half fan speed
Indoor Applications
Due to its low height, VL evaporative cooling equipment is the preferred choice for indoor applications. In such cases the sound emission and evaluation procedure is significantly different to open installations with free field sound radiation. For indoor applications Partial Sound Power levels are the best method to describe the sound emission. Partial Sound Power levels represent the sound energy radiated by the sound source over a single directional flat surface (air intake/ air discharge). All sound attenuators for Low Profile Series VL products can be applied for indoor use. Partial Sound Power data for VL models are the result of extensive sound testing using the parallelepiped methodology and describe the sound radiation in indoor environments.
Sound Testing VL
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 17 Easy Maintenance
With evaporative cooling equipment ease of maintenance is linked to ease of access. All VL sound attenuators have been designed to provide spacious access to the interior areas and components of the unit requiring maintenance.
1. Discharge attenuator access door : The access door in the discharge attenuator provides easy access to the spray system and discharge attenuation baffles. 2. Pan access door : Circular door for access to the float ball adjustment and strainer 3. Intake attenuator access doors : Large twin access doors are located at both sides at the air intake attenuator. When removed, access is available to the fan motor and fan drive as well as the spray water pump.
Scope of Standard Supply

Intake attenuator with access plenum and large size access doors on both sides of the unit. Discharge attenuator with access plenum and access door. Bottom panel with drain (under fan section). Acoustical baffles with flex tissue protection and encased in a galvanized steel frame with BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System. Acoustical material that is resistant to water, biological and chemical attack. Lubrication lines extended to the air intake side of the attenuator to facilitate lubrication of the fan shaft bearings. All steel parts are Z600 galvanized steel with BALTIPLUS Protection.
TR - G 18 Available Options
All VL sound attenuator options can be supplied with the BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System. Relocation of the spray pump to the pipe connection end of the unit is available for easy access to the spray pump. The sound attenuators can be fitted with mesh screens at the intake and/or discharge. Optional perforated steel sheet is available for additional baffle protection.
Relocation of spray pump on VL unit
Axial Fan Sound Reduction Options

Quiet Energy Efficient Solutions
Inherently quiet axial fan products are BAC's Series 3000D cooling towers, FXV-D and CXV-D coil products, as well as the Series 1500 product lines. The induced draught crossflow and combined flow configuration of these product lines have a number of distinct advantages in terms of energy efficiency and sound radiation. The waterborne noise is minimised by the gravity water distribution and crossflow fill arrangement, which leads the water down into the cold water basin without the typical splash noise of counterflow arrangements. This eliminates the need for installing expensive water silencers in the pan section of the equipment. The mechanical drive arrangement is inside the cooling tower casing.
Series 3000-D, FXV-D, CXV-D product lines Standard Low Noise Fans
All SERIES 3000-D Cooling Towers, FXV-D and CXV-D coil products as well as Series 1500 and HXI/HXC hybrid products are fitted with highly efficient low noise fans as standard. These fans have a special blade cord width and trailing edge arrangement. Due to their low tip speed extra low sound emissions are achieved.
Series 1500 product lines
Standard Low Noise Fan on S3000-D, FXV-D and CXV-D
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 19 Optional "Whisper Quiet" fans

For extremely sound sensitive applications "Whisper Quiet" fans can be used in lieu of the standard Low Noise fans.
Series 3000-D cooling towers, FXV-D and CXV-D coil products :

The "Whisper Quiet" fan option on Series 3000D, FXV-D and CXV-D coil products consists of a multi-blade aerofoil fan design with an exceptionally wide cord resulting in optimum high solidity for whisper quiet operation.
Specially shaped aerofoil blade design
Allowing individual adjustment or removal at standstill
Series 1500 product lines :

On the Series 1500 product lines the "Whisper Quiet" fan option consists of a hub of one piece steel block with specially designed aluminium hinged blades and allowing individual adjustment or removal at standstill. The high solidity specially shaped blades with unique end caps result in whisper quiet operation.
Unique end cap design for further sound reduction
Allowing individual adjustment or removal at standstil.
TR - G 20 Induced Draft Attenuator Package

To optionally match the most stringent acoustical requirements, the Induced Draft Attenuation Package is available for Series 3000D cooling towers, FXV-D and CXV-D coil products and Series 1500 products. The package consists of an acoustical enclosure of the fan discharge cowl and intake attenuation on each air inlet side. Intake attenuators have unique circular acoustical baffles in a staggered arrangement. Intake and discharge attenuators are always fitted together to obtain optimal acoustical performance. The attenuator package is available for standard low noise fans and on specific models fitted with the optional whisper quiet fans.
1. Discharge attenuator encloses fan section; 2. Intake Sound Attenuator (at each air inlet side)
Axial Fan Efficiency for Low Noise Applications

Typical sound emission reductions achieved by BAC's axial fan product lines (Series 3000-D cooling towers, FXV-D & CXV-D coil products and Series 1500 product lines) are shown in the table below.
Arrangement Standard Low Noise Fans Standard Low Noise Fans with Sound Attenuation "Whisper Quiet" Fans "Whisper Quiet" Fans with Sound Attenuation* Day Base - 5 dB(A) - 12 dB(A) - 15 dB(A) Night - 8 dB(A) - 13 dB(A) - 18 dB(A) - 20 dB(A) Application Urban & light industrial Suburban & laboratories Residential & commercial Domestic & rural
* Available only for certain models.
Scope of Supply
Standard products have low noise axial fans comprising cast iron hub and multiple aluminium fan blades with adjustable pitch. Fan blades have a special blade cord width and trailing edge arrangement to optimise airflow and minimise noise. Optional "Whisper Quiet" fans on Series 3000D, FXV-D and CXV-D models are constructed of fibreglass reinforced plastic blades of specially shaped aerofoil design. The blades are fixed on a steel, plastic coated, fan hub by aluminium blade supports and fastened through U-bolts for simple field assembly. Optional "Whisper Quiet" fans on Series 1500 (TXV, FXV, CXV) products consist of one piece steel block hub and specially shaped aluminium hinged blades allowing simple field assembly and unique end caps. Factory assembled acoustical discharge enclosure (shipped loose for installation on site) is constructed of Z600 heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanised steel protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection (exterior painting)
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 21
Factory assembled and installed intake attenuator comprising of a Z600 heavy gauge hot-dip galvanised steel protected with the Baltiplus Corrosion Protection (exterior painting). Circular acoustical baffles designed to minimise air pressure drop with acoustical materials resistant to water, biological and chemical attack.
Options
Air discharge screens fitted on the discharge attenuator. Air intake screens fitted on the intake attenuators. Sound attenuation with the Baltibond Corrosion Protection System: All galvanised steel parts, baffles, are protected with the Baltibond Corrosion Protection System.
Research and Development

Thermal and acoustical properties are partners in the performance of evaporative cooling equipment and hence must be established and evaluated together. The thermal performance of BAC equipment is verified at the BAC Research and Development Centre, the most advanced in the industry. Large environmental test chambers and refrigeration systems are able to simulate a wide range of climate and system test conditions on full size equipment. Sound tests are conducted for equipment, with and without sound attenuation, at various directions, distances and fan speeds. At BAC thermal and sound test programmes go hand in hand, providing reliable data for a wide range of environmental and operating conditions.
Thermal rating test BAC's Sound Data Sheets

For product type units, BAC provides sound pressure data per octave band and sound power data for all four sides and the top of the unit. For indoor applications BAC provides partial sound data at both air inlet and discharge. For more information on acoustics please refer to the chapter "Fundamentals of Sound".
Acoustical test
TR - G 22
Fundamentals of Sound
Introduction
Sound is an important consideration in the selection of mechanical equipment. The purpose of this article is to present a procedure for evaluating the sound levels created by evaporative cooling equipment to determine if these levels will be acceptable to the neighbors* who live or work near the installation. In addition, sound levels must comply with local code requirements. While most often these levels are found to be acceptable, certain situations may call for sound levels lower than those produced by the equipment. It is then the task of the manufacturer, engineer, and owner to determine the best way to decrease the sound levels for the particular installation. This article presents a means for assessing the impact of the evaporative cooling equipments sound on a neighbor and possible means to reduce that impact should it be a potential problem. The procedure consists of three steps, followed by a fourth step if necessary: 1. Establish the noise criterion for the equipment: i.e., determine the sound levels that will be considered acceptable by the neighbors who will be exposed to them. Also consult local codes for appropriate sound levels. For a general idea of how sound levels produced by a cooling tower compare to sound from other common sound sources, see the graph below.
2. Estimate the sound levels that will be produced by the equipment, taking into account the effects of equipment geometry, the installation, and the distance from the equipment to the neighbor.* 3. Compare the noise criterion with the expected sound levels to determine if the sound levels from the equipment will be acceptable. 4. In the event that the equipment sound levels are excessive for the particular site conditions, a method should be determined to modify the neighbors perception of the sound. There are three ways to change the effects that any undesirable sound has on the receiver of that sound: - Modify the source of the sound - Control the path of the sound - Adjust the receivers expectation or satisfaction, keeping in mind that sound can be very subjective and is highly dependent on perception
Note: *In this article, the term neighbour is used to denote the person or group of persons to be protected against excessive sound levels created by the evaporative cooling equipment. It is intended that this include not only the occupants of other buildings, but also the occupants of the building served by the equipment.
Some ways that sound from BAC equipment can be adjusted for a more favorable impact on the receiver include:
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 23
Modify equipment location or position If possible, simply do not run the equipment at the critical time (at night for residential areas and during the day for office parks) Install a second motor, two-speed motor, or VFD so that the unit can run at lower speeds when the full capacity is not required Use a low sound fan Oversize the equipment and run the fan at lower speed and power level Construct sound barriers (sound walls, etc.) or use existing barriers (trees, other buildings, etc.) when planning the location of the equipment Install sound attenuation (available on the air intake and air discharge of the equipment) The article also includes several appendices to lend assistance in understanding and performing some aspects of a sound analysis. Contact your local BAC Representative with questions on sound analysis or sound issues specific to your installation.
Terminology and Units of Measurement

The following terms and units of measure are used in this article, in accordance with accepted U.S. Standards: Decibel (dB) the unit of measurement used in sound control (dimensionless, used to express logarithmically the ratio of a sound level to a reference level). dB(A) the A-weighted sound pressure level. Evaporative cooling equipment used in this article to represent all BAC product lines in the sound analysis (includes open cooling towers, closed circuit cooling towers, and evaporative condensers). Frequency the number of repetitions per unit time (the unit for frequency is the Hertz (1 cycle/s)). Hertz abbreviated Hz, is the unit of frequency, defined as cycles per second. Noise unwanted sound. Noise Criteria the maximum allowable sound pressure level(s) (Lp) at a specific location. Criteria may be expressed as a single overall value or in individual octave bands. The NC values and curves are further explained throughout this article. Octave Band a range of sound frequencies with an upper limit twice its lower limit. The bands are identified by their center frequencies (identifying frequencies), which is the square root of the product of the upper and lower cutoff frequencies of a pass band. These center frequencies and band widths are shown on page J23. In some sound data tables, these eight octave bands are also called by their Band Numbers; hence, the Band Numbers are also listed as such in this article, in addition to the BAC Sound Rating Program and BAC Selection Software. Sound the sensation of hearing; rapid, small fluctuations to which our ears are more or less sensitive; small perturbation of the ambient state of a medium (ambient air in most cases) that propagate at a speed characteristic of the medium. Sound Pressure Level (Lp) in dB a ratio of a sound pressure to a reference pressure and is defined as: Lp = 20LogP/0.002(dB), reference 0.0002 microbar.
TR - G 24
The reference pressure used in this article is the long-used and accepted value of 0.0002 microbar. Another way to describe the same value, which may be used in other publications, is the value of 20 x 10-6 Pascals (N/m2). Sound Power Level (Lw) in dB the measure of the total acoustic power radiated by a given source and is defined by: Lw = 10Log (W/10-12 )dB, reference 10-12 . The standard reference power used in the BAC literature is 10-12 watt. To eliminate any possible confusion, the reference power should always be quoted, as in a sound power level of 94 dB reference 10-12 watt. Unit a single cell of evaporate cooling equipment.
Establishing the Noise Criterion

Introduction
At the beginning of any sound analysis, it is necessary to establish the sound level at a particular site that would be considered acceptable by those who might be affected. This acceptable sound level is called the noise criterion for that situation, and it is important to realize that it may vary widely for different situations. The procedure for developing the noise criterion involves consideration of the following: 1. The type of activity of those people in the vicinity of the evaporative cooling equipment who will be affected 2. The amount of attenuation from acoustic barriers or walls that lie between the equipment and the people who may hear it 3. The outdoor background noise that might help mask the sound from the equipment From these factors, we can arrive at the final noise criterion for the particular installation. The noise that humans hear covers a frequency range of about 20 Hz to about 20,000 Hz. Of course, there are exceptions to this, but this range has come to be accepted for most practical purposes. Furthermore, for most engineering applications, most of this audio range is subdivided into eight frequency bands called octave bands which cover the range of frequency somewhat as the octaves on a piano cover the range of pitch. The eight octave bands used in this article have the following identifying center frequencies and ranges:
Band Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Identifying Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Approx. Frequency Range (hz) 44-88 88-176 176-353 353-707 707-1414 1414-2828 2828-5656 5656-11312
When sound levels are plotted on a graph, they are most often divided into these eight octave bands. In this way it is possible to observe the variation of a sound level with change in frequency. This variation is important in any situation since humans display a different sensitivity and a different response to low frequency sounds as compared with high frequency sounds. In addition, engineering solutions for low frequency sound issues differ markedly from those for high frequency sound issues.
Indoor Neighbour Activity

From earlier studies of real-life situations where people have judged sounds all the way from comfortable to acceptable to disturbing and even to unacceptable for various indoor working or living activities, a series of Noise Criterion Curves (NC curves) has been developed. Figure 1 is a graph of these NC curves. Each curve represents an acceptable balance of low frequency to high frequency sound levels for particular situations, and is keyed into the listening conditions associated with the sound. The lower NC curves describe sound levels that are quiet enough for resting or sleeping or for excellent listening conditions, while the upper NC curves describe rather noisy work areas when even conversation becomes difficult and restricted. These curves may be used to set desired sound level goals for almost all typical indoor functional areas where some acoustic need must be served.
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 25
Note that the curves of Figure 1 have as their x-axis the eight octave frequency bands; and as their y-axis, sound pressure levels given in decibels (dB) relative to the standard reference pressure of 0.0002 microbar. For convenience, Table 1 lists the sound pressure levels at each octave band center frequency, for each Noise Criterion. Table 1: Octave Band Sound Pressure Levels (dB re 0.0002 microbar) of indoor Noise Criterion (NC) Curves of Figure 1
Octave Band Center Frequency in Hz Noise Criterion 63 NC-15 NC-20 NC-25 NC-30 NC-35 NC-40 NC-45 NC-50 NC-55 NC-60 NC-65 47 51 54 57 60 64 67 71 74 77 80 125 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64 67 71 75 250 29 33 37 41 45 50 54 58 62 67 71 8500 22 26 31 35 40 45 49 54 58 63 68 1000 17 22 27 31 36 41 46 51 56 61 66 2000 14 19 24 29 34 39 44 49 54 59 64 4000 12 17 22 28 33 38 43 48 53 58 63 8000 11 16 21 27 32 37 42 47 52 57 62
Figure 1 - Noise criterion "NC" Curves. The octave band sound pressure levels associated with the noise criterion conditions of Table 2.
Table 2 is used with the NC curves and lists some typical activities that require indoor background sound levels in range of NC-15 to NC-55. Certain unusual acoustical requirements may not easily fall into one of the Table 2 groups. It may be necessary to apply specific criteria for those special situations or to assign a criterion based in similarity to one of the criterion given in the table. It is emphasized that the NC curves are based on, and should be used only for, indoor activity. The first step in the development of the evaporative cooling equipments noise criterion is to select from Table 2 the particular activity that best describes what the indoor neighbors in the vicinity of the equipment will be doing when the equipment is operating. Where two or more neighbor conditions may be applicable, the one having the lowest NC value should be selected. The corresponding NC values of Figure 1 or Table 1 give the eight octave band sound pressure levels, in decibels, for that selection. The goal is to keep the sound heard by the neighbor, inside his home or building, at or below these sound pressure levels.
TR - G 26
Table 2: Suggested Schedule of Noise Criteria for Indoor Neighbour Activities*
ACTIVITY Sleeping, Resting, Relaxing Homes, apartments, hotels, hospitals, etc. Suburban and rural Urban Excellent Listening Conditions Required Concert Halls, recording studios, etc. Very Good Listening Conditions Required Auditoriums, theaters Large meeting and conference rooms Good Listening Conditions Required Private offices, school classrooms, libraries, small conference rooms, radio and television listening in the home, etc. Fair Listening Conditions Desired Large offices, restaurants, retail shops, and stores, etc. Moderately Fair Listening Conditions Acceptable Bussiness machine areas, lobbies, cafeterias, laboratory work areas, drafting rooms, satisfactory telephone use, etc. Acceptable Working Conditions with Minimum Speech Interference Light to heavy machinery spaces, industrial areas, commercial areas such as garages, kitchens, laundries, etc. NC-45 to NC-55 NC-40 to NC-45 NC-35 to NC-40 NC-30 to NC-35 NC-20 to NC-25 NC-25 to NC-30 NC-15 to NC-20 NC-20 to NC-25 NC-25 to NC-30 SUGGESTED RANGE OF NOISE CRITERIA
Note: * The ASHRAE Guide usually lists a 10 dB range of NC values for each situation leaving it to the option of the user to select the specific NC value for his own need. In the interest of more assuredly achieving satisfactory neighbour conditions, Table 2 listings are the more conservative lower 5 dB range of the ASHRAE value.
Sound Reduction Provided by Building Construction

Neighbors who are either indoors in their own building or outdoors on their property may hear sound from outdoor equipment. If they are outdoors, they may judge the sound against the more-or-less steady background sounds in the area. If they are indoors, they may tend to judge the sound by whether it is audible or identifiable or intrusive into the surroundings. When outdoor sound passes into a building, it suffers some reduction, even if the building has open windows. The actual amount of sound reduction depends on building construction, orientation, wall area, window area, open window area, interior acoustic absorption, and possibly some other factors. The approximate sound reduction values provided by several typical building constructions are given in Table 3. For convenience in identification, the listed wall constructions are labeled with letters A through G and are described in the notes under Table 3. Note that A represents no wall, hence no sound reduction, and the use of A indicates that the selected NC curve would actually apply in this special case to an outdoor activity, such as for a screened-in porch, an outdoor restaurant, or an outdoor terrace. By selecting the wall construction in Table 3 which most nearly represents that of the building containing the neighbor activity, and adding the amounts of sound reduction from Table 3 to the indoor NC curves, band-by-band, the outdoor sound pressure levels that would yield the desired indoor NC values when the equipment sound passes through the wall and comes inside, are obtained. This second step, then, provides a tentative outdoor noise criterion based on hearing the sound indoors in the neighbors building. Table 3: Approximate Sound Reduction (in dB) Provided by Typical Exterior Wall Construction
Octave Frequency Band (Hz) 63 125 250 500 A 0 0 0 0 B 10 10 10 10 C 13 14 15 16 Wall Type (See Notes Below) D 19 20 22 24 E 14 20 26 28 F 24 25 27 30 G 32 34 36 38
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 27
Octave Frequency Band (Hz) 1000 2000 4000 8000 A 0 0 0 0 B 10 10 10 10 C 17 18 19 20
Wall Type (See Notes Below) D 26 28 30 30 E 29 30 31 33 F 33 38 43 48 G 42 48 53 58
A: No wall; outside conditions B: Any typical wall construction, with open windows covering about 5% of exterior wall area C: Any typical wall construction, with small open-air vents of about 1% of exterior wall area, all windows closed D: Any typical wall construction, with closed but operable windows covering about 10%-20% of exterior wall area E: Sealed glass wall construction, 6 mm thickness over approximately 50% of exterior wall area F: Approximately 100 kg/m2 solid wall construction with no windows and no cracks or openings G: Approximately 250 kg/m2 solid wall construction with no windows and no cracks or openings
Outdoor Background Sound

In a relative noisy outdoor area, it is possible that the outdoor background sound is even higher than the tentative outdoor noise criterion. In this case, the steady background sound in the area may mask the sound from the evaporative cooling equipment and take over as the controlling outdoor noise criterion. Determining whether or not this situation does exist is the third step in developing the noise criterion. The best way to judge this is to take a few sound pressure level measurements to get the average minimum background level during the quietest intervals in which the equipment is expected to operate, or during the intervals when noise complaints are most likely to be caused; for example, at night in residential areas where cooling equipment is operating at night, or during the day in office areas exposed to daytime cooling equipment sound. In the event that background sound measurements cannot be made, Tables 4 and 5, and Figure 2 may be used to estimate the approximate outdoor background noise. In Table 4, the condition should be determined that most nearly describes the community area or the traffic activity in the vicinity of the evaporative cooling equipment during the quietest time that the equipment will operate. For the condition selected, there is a curve in Figure 2 that gives an estimate of the average minimum outdoor background sound pressure levels. The sound pressure levels of the Figure 2 curves are also listed in Table 5. It is cautioned that these estimates should be used only as approximations of background sounds, and that local conditions can give rise to a wide range of actual sound levels. Table 4: Estimate of Outdoor Background Sounds Based on General Type of Community Area and Nearby Automotive Traffic Activity
CONDITION 1. Nighttime, rural; no nearby traffic of concern 2. Daytime, rural; no nearby traffic of concern 3. Nighttime, suburban; no nearby traffic of concern 4. Daytime, suburban; no nearby traffic of concern 5. Nighttime, urban; no nearby traffic of concern 6. Daytime, urban; no nearby traffic of concern 7. Nighttime, business or commercial area 8. Daytime, business or commercial area 9. Nighttime, industrial or manufacturing area 10. Daytime, industrial or manufacturing area 11. Within 100 m of intermittent light traffic 12. Within 100 m of continuous light traffic 13. Within 100 m of continuous medium-density traffic 14. Within 100 m of continuous heavy-density traffic 15. 100 to 300 m from intermittent light traffic 16. 100 to 300 m from continuous light traffic CURVE No in FIGURE 2 or TABLE 5 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 4 5 6 7 3 4
TR - G 28
CONDITION 17. 100 to 300 m from continuous medium-density traffic 18. 100 to 300 m from continuous heavy-density traffic 19. 300 to 600 m from intermittent light traffic 20. 300 to 600 m from continuous light traffic 21. 300 to 600 m from continuous medium-density traffic 22. 300 to 600 m from continuous heavy-density traffic 23. 600 to 1200 m from intermittent light traffic 24. 600 to 1200 m from continuous light traffic 25. 600 to 1200 m from continuous medium-density traffic
CURVE No in FIGURE 2 or TABLE 5 5 6 2 3 4 5 1 2 3
(Determine the appropriate conditions that seem to best describe the area in question during the time interval that is most critical, i.e., day or night. Then refer to corresponding Curve No. in Figure 2 or Table 5 for average minimum background sound levels to be used in sound analysis. Use lowest Curve No. where several conditions are found to be reasonably appropriate.)
Figure 2 : Approximate average minimum outdoor background sound pressure levels associated with the conditions of table 4.
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 29
Table 5: Octave Band Sound Pressure Levels (in dB) of Outdoor Background Noise Curves of Figure 2
CURVE No. in FIGURE 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY In Hz 63 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 125 37 42 47 52 57 62 67 250 32 37 42 47 52 57 62 500 27 32 37 42 47 52 57 1000 22 27 32 37 42 47 52 2000 18 23 28 33 38 43 48 4000 14 19 24 29 34 39 44 8000 12 17 22 27 32 37 42
Final Noise Criterion

The measured or estimated average minimum background sound levels should now be compared, band-by-band, with the tentative outdoor noise criterion determined previously. The larger of these values, in each frequency band, now becomes the octave band sound pressure levels that comprise the final outdoor noise criterion for the equipment installation. Any new intruding sound is generally judged in comparison with the background sound that was already there. If the new sound stands out loudly above the existing sound, the neighbors will notice it, be disturbed by it, and object to it. On the other hand, if the new sound can hardly be heard in the presence of the old sound, it will pass relatively unnoticed. Therefore, if the sound coming from the equipment is below or just equal to the final noise criterion, it will not be noticed and our objectives will have been satisfied. If there are two or more different criterion for a particular installation, the analysis should be carried out for each situation and the lowest final criterion should be used.
Municipal Codes and Ordinances

Where local sound codes or ordinances exist, it is necessary to check the expected sound levels of the unit to be installed, including any sound control treatments, to determine if they comply with the code requirements. Depending on the form and language of the code, it may be necessary to introduce the code sound levels into the noise criterion analysis.
Example
To summarize this procedure, consider a cooling tower installation located near the edge of a college campus, approximately 91 m from a classroom building. The college is located within a large city, and two main streets pass by one corner of the campus about 450 m from the classroom building. The cooling tower will be used both day and night during warm weather. The classroom must rely on open windows for air circulation. Determine the noise criterion for the cooling tower. The steps for this example are given in the sample Sound Evaluation Work Sheet, included as Appendix D in this article. Step 1 Determine the neighbor activity condition from Table 2. For good listening conditions inside a typical classroom, select NC-30 as the noise criterion. Step 2 In the indicated spaces under Item 2 of the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet, enter the sound pressure levels for the octave frequency bands of the NC-30 curve as taken from Figure 1 or Table 1. Step 3 Determine the wall condition of Table 3 that best describes the exterior wall of the classroom. Wall B can be selected for normally open windows during the summer time. Insert the Wall B values in the Item 3 spaces. Step 4 Add the values of Steps 2 and 3 together and insert the sums in the Item 4 spaces. This is the tentative outdoor noise criterion. Step 5 In the Item 5 spaces, enter either the measured average minimum background sound pressure levels or the estimated background levels obtained from the use of Figure 2 and Tables 4 and 5. In this example, we estimate that the traffic activity is best represented by 305 m - 610 m from continuous heavy-density traffic. This leads to Curve 5 of Figure 2 and Table 5, whose values are then inserted in the Item 5 spaces.
TR - G 30
Step 6 In the Item 6 spaces insert the higher value, in each frequency band, of either the Item 4 or Item 5 values. This is the final noise criterion. In this example, note that the Item 4 values are equal to or higher than the Item 5 values in all bands. Thus, the final noise criterion is based essentially on the classroom noise criterion and the wall condition. However, the outdoor background noise estimate equals the tentative outdoor noise criterion in the 250 and 500 Hz bands. If they had been higher, in this example, those higher values would have been used in setting the final noise criterion in those bands. We will attempt to keep all octave band sound pressure levels of the selected cooling tower equal to, or below, the values of Step 6. Should a sound code exist, this would be an appropriate point in the analysis to check agreement between the code and the Step 6 final outdoor noise criterion. If the criterion developed here is lower than the sound code levels at the specified distance, the sound analysis will yield results that will comply with the code. The remaining steps of this sound evaluation example are explained in later sections of this article as we progress with the entire sound evaluation procedure.
Sound Levels for Evaporative Cooling Equipment

Introduction
Now that we have established an acceptable noise criterion, the next step is to study the source of the sound and develop equipment sound levels at the neighbor location, in the same sound pressure level terms used to express the noise criterion. It will be the aim of this section to discuss the actual sound pressure levels of BAC evaporative cooling equipment, and to show how these levels can be corrected for various distances and certain geometric arrangements. The orientation of the equipment and distance from the equipment to the most critical neighbor will be our primary concern. Where possible, the distance from the equipment to the neighbor should be kept as large as possible, and the equipment should be oriented so that its lowest sound levels are radiated toward the neighbor. Evaporative cooling equipment sound ratings can be stated in terms of both sound pressure levels and sound power levels, and both may be necessary to permit thorough sound analysis in a given situation. However, in any sound evaluation, octave band sound pressure levels for the proposed equipment are essential, and it is important to have a fairly accurate indication of the directivity characteristics of the equipments sound. For general use, sound pressure levels measured in the four different horizontal directions (one from each side) of the unit, plus the vertical direction above, will yield the desired directivity data. The primary requirements for obtaining the outdoor equipments sound levels are: 1. Accurate calibrated sound measurement equipment should be used. 2. Octave band sound pressure levels are mandatory. 3. The sound level data should indicate the true directivity effects of the units sound (there should be no nearby buildings or obstructions to distort the true radiation pattern of the unit test). 4. The measurement distance should be specified. Some equipment is rated in terms of the total sound power radiated, expressed as sound power level. Sound power level is a valid index for comparing the sum of sounds radiated by evaporative cooling equipment, but has the serious disadvantage of not revealing the directivity effects of the radiated sounds. Where only sound power level data are given, the resulting conversion to sound pressure level at a particular location will give less accurate results than if directional sound pressure level data are used. Sound generated by evaporative cooling equipment is directional, and sound pressure level ratings are necessary in order to determine the actual sound in any direction around the installation.
Single Number Rating System

Many attempts have been made to express the frequency content and pressure level (intensity) of sounds using a single number system. The most common method used is the A-B-C weighting network of sound level meters. Sound meters with A-B-C weighting networks attempt to simulate the ears response to sound at different pressure intensities. At a relatively low sound pressure level, the human ear is considerably more sensitive to high frequency than to low frequency sounds. This difference, however, becomes less noticeable at higher sound levels where the ear approaches more nearly equal sensitivity for low frequency and high frequency sounds. The A-scale weighting network is designed to simulate the ears response for low pressure sounds (below about 55 dB). The B-scale weighting is designated to simulate the ears response for medium pressure sounds (about 55 dB to 85 dB). The C-scale weighting tends to provide nearly equal response in all frequencies and is used to approximate the ears response at higher sound pressure levels (above about 85 dB).
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 31
Octave Frequency Band (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Correction for A weighting -26 -16 -9 -3 0 +1 +1 -1
A-B-C scale ratings have been used in some sound ordinances and equipment sound ratings because of their simplicity of statement. They may have value in some sound comparison situations, but such data are of little value in making an engineering evaluation of a sound issue caused by evaporative cooling equipment, because no indication of the frequency content of the sound is apparent. For example, two different types of cooling towers could have the same A scale rating, but one could have most of its energy in the low frequency bands while the other could have its energy concentrated in the high frequency bands. A single number rating will give no indication of this and its use could lead to less than optimal and sometimes costly decisions.
Comparison of Evaporative Cooling Equipment employing a Centrifugal Fan versus an Axial Fan
Based on extensive studies of field data from several cooling tower installations, it has been found that overall sound pressure levels of centrifugal fan cooling towers are about 5 to 7 dB lower than those of axial fan cooling towers for the same cooling capacity even though the axial towers use about half the kW. As a comparison, this means that an axial fan cooling tower would have to be twice as far away from the neighbours as a centrifugal fan tower in order to be just as quiet (6 dB reduction for each doubling of distance, see Table 6). The frequency distribution and the radiation patterns also differ for these two types of units. For any specific comparison of cooling towers, the manufacturers actual measured data should be used.
BAC Sound Ratings

BAC has measured the sound levels radiated by its products at 1,5 m and 15 m distances for the five principle directions, (four horizontal and one vertical). The sample sound rating data sheet indicates the five principle directions and the type of sound data available for a BAC cooling tower. As the data sheet suggests, the data given in the five blocks pertain to the sound pressure levels measured at 15 m distances from the five principle directions of the cooling tower. Where it might be desired to estimate the sound pressure levels at some intermediate direction, such as halfway between the right end and the air inlet, levels can be averaged or interpolated from the data actually presented. In addition to the five sets of sound pressure levels at each of the two distances, the data sheets contain the calculated sound power level values for the reference power level 10-12 watt. Current sound data for all BAC equipment is available from BAC Balticare Representative. Since sound power levels are being mentioned here, it is appropriate at this point to note that Appendices A, B, and C are given at the end of this article to supply basic information related to sound power levels and to other calculations that may be required from time to time in a sound evaluation. Appendix A describes a simplified method for calculating the sound power level of a unit where the five sets of sound pressure level readings are known. Appendix B gives a procedure for calculating the average sound pressure level at a given distance if the sound power level is known. Appendix C gives a simple procedure for adding decibel values. This is required, for example, in converting sound pressure levels into sound power levels, or in calculating an overall sound pressure level from the eight individual octave band levels, or in adding two or more sound sources.
TR - G 32
Effective Distance beyond 15 m

In any actual situation, it is usually necessary to determine the sound pressure levels of the equipment at some distance other than the 1,5 m and 15 m distances given in the BAC rating sheets. In this section, distance corrections are given for estimating sound pressure levels at distances beyond 15 m. For distances that are large compared to the dimensions of the unit, the inverse square law holds for sound reduction with distance: i.e., for each doubling of distance from the unit, the sound pressure level decreases 6 dB. Thus, for distances beyond 15 m the inverse square law applies and the distance correction is quite straightforward. Table 6 presents the reduction of sound pressure level for distances from 15 m out to 76 m. The values given in Table 6 are to be subtracted from the sound pressure levels at the given distance of 15 m in order to arrive at the sound pressure levels at the distance of interest. For relatively short distances (less than 30 m), the same correction value applies to all eight frequency bands. For the larger distances (greater than 30 m), high frequency sound energy is absorbed in the air and the correction terms have larger values in the high frequency bands. For distances greater than about 150 m, wind and temperature of the air may further influence sound propagation; but because these are variables, they are not considered in this article and the correction figures of Table 6 represent more or less average sound propagation conditions. If the critical distance falls between the specific distances given in the left-hand column of Table 6, interpolate the sound reduction value to the nearest 1 dB. Do not attempt to use fractions of decibels.
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 33
Table 6: Reduction of Sound Pressure Level (in dB) for Distances beyond 50 feet
Octave Band Center Frequency in Hz Distance (m) 63 15 20 25 30 37,5 50 60 75 100 120 150 200 240 300 400 480 600 800 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 125 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 250 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 500 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 25 27 29 31 33 36 1000 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 19 21 23 25 27 30 32 35 38 2000 0 2 4 6 8 10 13 15 17 19 22 24 26 29 32 35 38 42 4000 0 2 4 7 9 11 14 16 18 21 24 27 30 34 38 43 47 53 8000 0 2 4 7 10 12 15 18 21 24 27 31 35 40 46 53 61 70
Effect Distance between 1,5 m and 15 m

In this section, distance corrections are given for estimating sound pressure levels in the close-in range of 1,5 m to 15 m. When the distance from a sound source is small or comparable to the dimensions of the source, the inverse square law does not necessarily hold true for variations of sound level with distance. So, for the relatively short distances of 1,5 m to 15 m, it might be necessary to accept some sound pressure level variations, which do not follow the straightforward trends that hold for distances beyond 15 m. Table 7 permits us to estimate the sound pressure levels at these close-in distances, provided the 1,5 m and 15 m sound pressure levels are known. To illustrate the use of Table 7, suppose the sound pressure level of a unit in a particular frequency band is 68 dB at 1,5 m and 54 dB at 15 m distance. The difference between these two values is 14 dB. In Table 7, we find the column of values under the heading If the difference between the 1,5 m and 15 m levels is 13 15 dB. The numbers in this column are the values (in decibels) to be added to the 15 m sound pressure level of 54 dB to obtain the sound pressure level at some desired shorter distance. If, for instance, we wish to know the sound pressure level of this unit at 1,5 m, we find that we must add 8 dB to the 15 m level of 54 dB to get 62 dB as the sound pressure level at the desired distance of 1,5 m. Now, for these close distances, the difference values between the 1,5 m and 15 m sound pressure levels may not be constant for all frequency bands so it is necessary to follow this procedure for each octave band. For example, in one frequency band the difference may be 12 dB but in another band it may be 15 or 16 dB. Close-in interpolation of sound pressure levels is inherently somewhat unreliable; so do not be surprised if some oddities or discrepancies in the data begin to appear at very close distances. The method used here at least gives some fairly usable data to work with.
TR - G 34
Table 7: Interpolation Terms for Obtaining Sound Pressure Levels (in dB) Between 1,5 m and 15 m
If the difference between the 5 ft and 50 ft levels is: Distance et which SPL is desired (m)) 15 13,5 12 10,5 9 7,5 6 4,5 3 1,5 4-6 dB 7-9 dB 10-12 dB 13-15 dB 16-18 dB 19-21 dB* 22-24 dB
Add the following values to the 15 m sound level to obtain sound level at desired distance: 0 0 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 5 0 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 14 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 9 12 17 0 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 14 20 0 1 2 3 5 7 9 12 16 23
* This column of values is based on the "Inverse Square Law" variation with distance from 15 m all the way in to 1,5 m. All other columns represent variations with distances that do not follow the "Inverse Square Law."
Reflecting Walls and Enclosures

Discussion so far has been concerned with what might be considered simple installations from an acoustic point of view, where only distance to the neighbor and relative orientation of the unit have been required points of consideration. Frequently, the geometry of an installation involves some nearby reflecting walls or buildings, which adds to the acoustic complexity of the site. Let us consider this for three typical situations: Cases in which reflecting walls modify the radiation pattern of the sound from the unit to the neighbor Cases in which close-in walls confine the unit and cause a build-up of close-in sound levels Cases in which the unit is located in a well and all the sound radiates from the top of the wall Effect of Reflecting Walls Several factors that influence the amount of reflected sound are the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. The sound radiation pattern (directivity) of the equipment The radiating area of the equipment The orientation of the equipment The distance of the unit to the neighbors The distance of the equipment to the reflecting wall The area of the reflecting wall Various angles of incidence and reflection between the equipment, the wall, and the neighbors
Because so many variables are involved, we will not attempt to develop a rigorous procedure for estimating the influence of a reflecting wall. Rather, we caution that if a large reflecting surface is located near the equipment, it should be considered as a potential reflector of sound. If the equipment is oriented such that its loudest side is already facing toward the neighbour, the influence of the reflecting wall can be ignored! However, if this is not the case, these conditions must be met for the reflected sound to be of concern: The area of the reflecting wall is at least three times the area of the side of the equipment that faces that wall The distance from the unit to the reflecting wall is less than half the distance from the equipment to the neighbor If a simple optical ray diagram is drawn from the center of each unit to all parts of the reflecting wall and the reflecting rays are then drawn away from the wall, the neighbor is located within the angular range of the reflected rays (see sketch below) If each of these three conditions is met, then the sound pressure levels at the neighbor may be higher than if the wall were not there.
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 35
Neighbour Area Influenced by the Reflecting Wall

1. Neighbour area influenced by the reflecting wall; 2. Cooling Tower; 3. Air Intake.
In Figures 3 and 4, a few representative reflecting walls are shown for various orientations, and approximate sound pressure level adjustments are suggested for A, B, C, and D directions away from the equipment. These adjustments should be made using the 15 m levels. Figure 3 applies to units having one air intake, while Figure 4 applies to units having two air intakes. As an example, for Case 1, if the neighbor is located off the A side of the unit, apply the A adjustment to the A side 15 m sound pressure level rating of the unit and then correct as necessary to the neighbors distance. If the situation is that of Case 9 and the neighbor is located in the direction D, then the D adjustment would be utilized to arrive at a 15 m sound pressure level for the unit. Figure 3 : For Single Air Inlet Units
Case 1
A. Use Average of A and C Levels, B. Use average of B and C levels, C. Not applicable, D. Use average of D and C levels.
Case 2
A. Not applicable, B. Use greater of B level or average of B and A levels, C. No change to C levels, D. Use greater of D level or average of D and A levels.
Case 3
A. Use greater of A level or average of A and B levels, B. Not applicable, C. No change to C levels, D. Add 2 dB to D levels.
Case 4
A. Use average of A and C levels, B. Not applicable, C. Not applicable, D. Use average of D and C levels.
TR - G 36
Case 5
A. Not applicable, B. Not applicable, C. No change to C levels, D. Use average of A, C, D levels.
Case 6
Four sound levels out the open end of a 3-sided enclosure, add 3 dB to the sound pressure levels of the air intake side of the unit.
Figure 4 : For Dual Air Inlet Units
Case 7
A. Add 2 dB to A levels, B. Use average of B and C levels, C. Not applicable, D. Use average of C and D levels.
Case 8
A. No change to A levels, B. Not applicable, C. No change to C levels, D. Add 3 dB to D levels.
Case 9
A. Not applicable, B. Not applicable, C. Add 2 dB to C levels, D. Add 3 dB to D levels.
Case 10
For sound levels out the open end of a 3-sided enclosure, add 3 dB to the sound pressure levels of the air intake side(s) of the unit.
These figures and their associated adjustment values are to be used to correct base 15 m sound pressure level ratings in the neighbour direction of the effect of the reflecting surface conditions shown. Build-Up of Close-in Sound Levels Evaporative cooling equipment is sometimes located very close to a building wall, inside a court formed by two or three surrounding walls, or even in a specially provided room or space in the mechanical equipment area inside a building. In these installations, the principal concern may be the sound in the immediate vicinity (within 1,5 m- 3 m) of the unit(s), rather than the sound levels radiated and reflected away to some neighbor location.
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 37
For these situations, we may use Table 7 to determine approximately the sound pressure levels for the close-in distances of interest, and then add an increment to account for the build-up of sound levels. Here also, the geometry of the layout controls the problem and it is not possible to give a general solution that will cover the multitude of possible layouts. As an approximate acknowledgement of this situation, we suggest that the close-in sound pressure levels be increased by 5 dB, recognizing that the range of increase could be as little as 2 or 3 dB (in a fairly open courtyard) and as much as 10 to 15 dB (in a fairly confined mechanical room enclosure). This adjustment should be applied to all eight-octave band readings. Sound Radiation from a Four-Sided Enclosure or "Well" Evaporative cooling equipment is sometimes located inside a four-sided enclosure or well, where all the sound radiates more-or-less vertically out the top of the well and then spills over the sidewalls of the well. A simple generalized solution to this problem is not possible, but a reasonable approximation can be made. While the sidewalls serve as barrier walls against normal sound radiation in horizontal directions, the four-sided enclosure tends to average-out any free-field directional characteristics of the unit and causes an average sound pressure level to be radiated from the top of the well in all directions in which sound is free to radiate per the geometry of the situation. Appendix B provides a procedure for calculating sound pressure levels for a given sound power level, at various distances and with several radiation patterns. In the typical case illustrated, where the sound from the well radiates over a hemisphere, the sound pressure levels of the unit at a 15 m distance would be determined by subtracting 32 dB from the sound power levels of the unit. It should be recognized that this method of sound evaluation is an approximation. Actual sound levels may be somewhat lower in the higher frequency bands, and could be slightly lower in the lower frequency range depending upon the neighbor location relative to the equipment. If the sidewall of the well clearly serves as a barrier wall for the radiated sound, barrier wall attenuation values can be applied to the problem in the same manner as the sound evaluation procedure of this article subsequently permits for the non-well type installation.
Example Continued
Let us now summarize Step 2 in the sound evaluation process, looking at the source of sound and correcting it for distance and path. This will yield equipment sound pressure levels for the same point, which the final noise criterion was calculated in the earlier example. We are now interested in Items 7-11 in the sample Sound Evaluation Work Sheet (see Appendix D) which pertain to the cooling tower sound pressure levels as extrapolated to the 90 m distance. We continue the step-by-step procedure on the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet where we left off earlier. Step 7 Decide on the preferred orientation of the cooling tower at the site. From the BAC Sound Rating Data Sheet, determine the sound pressure levels at the 15 m distance for the side of the cooling tower facing the college classroom. Assume one of the end sides here (the blank-off sides), since they are the quietest. Insert these sound pressure level values in the Item 7 spaces of the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet. Step 8 Insert the distance 90 m in the appropriate space under Item 8 and refer to Table 6 for the distance correction values corresponding to 90 m. Insert these values in eight spaces of Item 8. Step 9 The sound pressure levels at 90 m will be lower than at 15 m, hence subtract the Item 8 values from the Item 7 values and insert the remainder in the Item 9 spaces. These then are the sound pressure levels that will exist just outside the college classroom, 90 m from the cooling tower. Step 10 Had there been a sound increase due to the presence of a reflecting wall that met one of the conditions illustrated by Figures 3 or 4, corrections would be inserted now in the Item 10 spaces. Had this been a close-in problem involving a build-up of sound levels due to some nearby enclosing walls around the tower, +5 dB would have been inserted in the Item 10 spaces. Since neither of these conditions applied in this example, we insert 0 in each of the Item 10 spaces. Step 11 Item 11 is the sum of Items 9 and 10. This is the sound pressure level of the cooling tower at the 90 m distance.
TR - G 38
Comparison of Noise Criteria and Evaporative Cooling Equipment Sound Levels

Example Continued
From the material given in the two preceding sections, it is now possible to determine if a particular cooling tower will be satisfactory (from a sound point-of-view) in a given location for a given set of circumstances. The analysis now consists of comparing the estimated cooling tower sound levels with the noise criterion developed for the neighbor situation. The comparison may be made by plotting the sound levels and the noise criterion on a graph, as show in Figure 5, or merely by comparing the two groups of values on a band-by-band basis. We are now interested in Items 12-13. Step 12 Merely as a means of simplifying the next step, copy in the Item 12 spaces the values taken from Item 6, which was the Final Noise Criterion. Step 13 By subtracting the Final Noise Criterion (Item 12) from the Resultant Cooling Tower Sound Pressure Levels (Item 11), we determine if there is any excess of cooling tower sound above the criterion. Any positive-valued remainder represents sound excess above the criterion. Any negative-valued remainder means that the cooling tower level is below the criterion and no sound reduction is required in the frequency bank; hence, 0 is inserted in that space. If the cooling tower levels in all eight octave bands are below the criterion values, there should be no sound problem. If two or three of the cooling tower levels exceed the criterion values by only 1 or 2 or 3 dB, there will probably be no sound problem. If several octave band sound levels exceed the criterion by 5 to 10 dB, or more, a sound problem should be anticipated the higher the sound excess the more assured is the problem if suitable measures are not taken.
Figure 5 - Comparison of Final Noise Criterion and Equipment Sound Levels
Judgement Factor
At this point, some remarks should be made on the overall reliability of this approach, and an opportunity should be provided for inserting a judgment factor. In as much as the original criterion selection was based mostly on lower range NC values for the various environments considered, the derivation presented here may be somewhat conservative. Because of this, decisions based on this approach will usually lead to acceptance of the sound from the equipment. As explained throughout the procedure, several approximations are made (such as for the sound reduction of various general types of walls, and the sound estimates of community or traffic background sounds, and others). These approximations may lead to some variability from one installation to the next, although it is believed that a small amount of variability can be accommodated by the procedure without changing the results unreasonably.
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 39
Experience shows that where the criterion is based on sleeping at night, the criterion should not be exceeded, and therefore, the conclusions reached by this procedure should be followed. However, where the criterion is based on somewhat less critical daytime activities, and the background sound frequently ranges considerably above the average minimum conditions used here, then the risk is not too great if the criterion is exceeded by about 5 dB. In such cases the criterion should not be exceeded by more than 5 dB for fear of serious objections. If it is decided to permit the sound to exceed the criterion by as much as 10 dB or more, sound reduction steps should be considered for future addition to the installation, even though they may not be included in the initial installation. In view of the above, if the equipments owner, architect or engineer chooses to follow a conservative approach or even to allow for some excess sound on a particular project (that is, permit the equipments sound to exceed the background sounds slightly and thus be identifiable and possibly disturbing to the neighbors), this opportunity is afforded in Items 14 and 15 of the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet. Step 14 Insert the cooling tower owners Judgment Factor. For a conservative approach insert 0 dB in the Item 14 spaces of the Work Sheet. To purposely allow the cooling tower sound to exceed the acceptable levels slightly, insert 5 dB in the Item 14 spaces. Step 15 The Final Sound Reduction Requirement for the cooling tower is the difference, in each band, obtained by subtracting Item 14 from Item 13. These are the attenuation values in each octave band necessary to reduce the cooling tower sound to an acceptable level. A brief discussion of sound control for evaporative cooling equipment is given in the next section. Step 16 Sound reduction can be accomplished in several ways, and quantitative values for possible sound reduction steps are discussed in the next section. Step 16 of the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet should include the attenuation obtained from the use of two-speed fan motors, Baltiguard drives, VFD, low sound fans, barrier walls, and from any special acoustic treatments to be provided. Other situations that may apply are oversizing the equipment and utilizing strategic layout.
Evaporative Cooling Equipment Sound Control

Introduction
The sound reduction required for evaporative cooling equipment is simply the excess of the equipments sound pressure levels over the applicable noise criterion levels. This is shown numerically by the dB values found in Item 15 of the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet when the particular calculation is carried out. The clue as to whether it will be a simple or complex sound reduction problem lies largely in the amount and frequency distribution of the required sound reduction. Job conditions may allow some quieting to be obtained by strategically positioning the equipment, controlling the fan motor, installing a low sound fan option, or constructing barrier walls located between the equipment and neighbor. Additional sound reduction needs may be met with packaged attenuators or other acoustic treatments, which, in general, can achieve high frequency noise reduction rather easily but usually involve larger weight and space requirements to accomplish low frequency quieting.
Strategic Positioning
The first and most economical strategy in reducing sound pressure levels from evaporative cooling equipment involves considering the layout of the equipment. Strategic Positioning includes two aspects. First, make sure to position the quietest side of the equipment towards the sound sensitive direction. This option should always be a first consideration with single side air inlet products. Next, take advantage of any existing sound barriers that may aid in muffling the sound from the equipment to the neighbor. For example, if a building or shed exists on the job site, position the equipment so that the structure blocks the direct path between the equipment and the neighbor, thus acting as a sound barrier. Trees and bushes are also good examples of barriers that greatly reduce sound exposure at neighboring properties.
Fan Motor Control

Operating the equipment at various speeds by utilizing a VFD, Baltiguard drives or a two-speed motor is a practical option of sound control if reduced equipment loads can be made to coincide with periods when low sound pressure levels are required. This is a normal nighttime situation for many air conditioning installations.
TR - G 40
An 1500-750 rpm fan motor operating at 750 rpm would provide about 60% of full-load capacity on a BAC unit and would give approximately the following octave band dB noise reductions:
Frequency Band - Hz 63 4 125 6 250 8 500 10 1000 8 2000 8 4000 6 8000 4
In as much as these are average dB reductions that can be anticipated for half-speed operation, these figures can apply to both sound power and sound pressure levels. Also, these approximations are sufficiently accurate to be used for both centrifugal and axial fan towers. In addition to running the equipment at a lower speed during noise-critical hours, it is beneficial to investigate whether or not the equipment could be turned off completely during these hours. This would completely negate any sound created by the unit; however, the system and its loads must be researched to understand if this option is feasible. In some cases what people find objectionable is not the steady sound of the equipment, it is the abrupt stopping and starting of the fan system. Properly setting the tower control sequence to avoid excessive cycling of fan motors is important in this regard, as well as to protect the motor from overheating. VFDs solve this issue by allowing for a soft start of the fans, followed by a gentle ramping up and down of the fan speed in line with the load requirement. Simply stated, VFD's allow the fan motor to run at the speed required to meet leaving water temperature requirements rather than running at full speed all the time. Decreasing the motor speed, and therefore the fan rpm, can decrease sound levels significantly. VFD's also minimize harsh sounding on-off cycles by providing a gradual start.
Figure 7 - If applicable, turn towers off at night to eliminate sound Figure 6 - BAC axial fan cooling tower utilizing the Baltiguard drive.
Figure 8 - VFD with Integrated Bypass Oversizing Equipment
Figure 9 - Axial Fans
If space and budget allow, it may be beneficial to oversize the equipment and run the larger capacity equipment at a lower fan speed rated for the specific job. As discussed in the previous section, reducing the motor speed reduces the fan speed and because fan speed is directly proportional to sound, reduces sound.
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 41 Low Sound Fans

Another option for reducing the sound that the equipment produces is to select a low sound fan. Low sound fans provide greater solidity than regular fans and so are able to move the same amount of air, while operating at a slower speed.
Barrier Walls
Barrier walls can be used to provide sound attenuation. In some cases barrier walls may exist due to the architectural treatment of the site, while at other times they are constructed specifically to provide needed sound reduction. Taking the first case, a wall used to shield a unit from view can also act to reduce the sound radiated by the tower, particularly high frequency sound (broadly considered here as the upper four octave frequency bands). However, such barrier walls must cover by line-of-sight the entire sound source as observed from the neighbors position. Louvered, latticed or slotted openings will render negligible the attenuation abilities of a barrier wall. A solid wall of height equal to a unit and located close to it will provide the following approximate attenuation:
FREQUENCY BAND - Hz 63 4 125 5 250 5 500 5 1000 5 2000 6 4000 7 8000 8
When greater attenuation is required, a larger specially constructed barrier wall may be designed and installed. Care must be taken, though, in locating the wall because of the many geometric and material considerations involved. As an example, a barrier wall that (1) extends at least 1 to 1,5 m beyond the line-of-sight in both the horizontal and vertical directions, (2) that is located within 1,5 to 2,5 m of the cooling tower and (3) that is made of a solid impervious material having a surface weight of at least 85 g/m2 will have approximately the following attenuation:
FREQUENCY BAND - Hz 63 5 125 5 250 6 500 8 1000 10 2000 12 4000 14 8000 16
A still larger and heavier barrier wall will provide still greater attenuation. To be most effective, however, a barrier wall must be located as close as possible to the sound source and there must be no reflecting surfaces in the area that can reflect sound around the barrier. Design details of barrier walls and other acoustic treatment such as customengineered plenum chambers and acoustic mufflers are best left to acoustical engineers or consultants and acoustical treatment manufacturers.
Figure 10 - Architectural walls being constructed around Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
TR - G 42 Sound Attenuation
A significant feature of both axial and centrifugal fan equipment is that its noise, if it is a problem at all, can be treated with relatively simple package attenuation. Figure 11 is a photograph of a BAC Series 3000 Cooling Tower (axial fan), with sound attenuation on both the intake and discharge of the unit. The fan intake attenuator is an array of parallel baffles and the discharge treatment is a lined plenum chamber. Lined plenum chambers, to be effective, (1) must be fairly large, (2) should contain a thick absorbent lining, and (3) should be arranged such that the sound path through the plenum includes does not allow line-ofsight. Depending on the degree to which the plenum chamber conforms to these three requirements, its sound reduction may range in the order of 5 to 10 dB for low frequency noise up to 10 to 20 dB for high frequency noise. BAC sound attenuation packages are designed, tested and rated by BAC, hence ensuring single source responsibility. They provide reductions in the horizontal direction up to 25 dB in the mid frequency bands. Many sound attenuation alternatives are available from BAC to optimally and economically meet a large variety of sound requirements. Sound attenuation packages are available for centrifugal and axial fan models. Exact values of the attenuation obtained from these packages are available from your local BAC representative.
Figure 11 - Intake and discharge sound attenuation on a BAC Series 3000 Cooling
Effects of Sound Reduction Options on Equipment Performance

The cost of sound attenuation, including the effect on performance, must be evaluated versus simpler methods such as oversizing the unit(s) to meet the sound criteria for a project. Note that with either low sound fans or add-on attenuation, lower sound levels often come at the expense of lower airflow. The system designer must ensure that the manufacturers ratings are adjusted to account for any decrease in thermal performance from this reduction in airflow. Another caution is for the use of sound barrier walls. It is necessary for barrier walls to be far enough away from the tower so as to prevent recirculation of the moist discharge air. If this practice is not followed, the warm air can be introduced to the air intake, increasing the wet bulb temperature of the unit, and in turn decreasing the cooling capacity of the tower.
Summary
This article provides a simple and direct evaluation method for determining whether or not a given evaporative cooling equipment installation is producing, or will produce, excess sound. It also offers some general information on methods that can be used to reduce the sound. BAC can provide reliable sound level data on its open cooling towers, closed-circuit cooling towers, and evaporative condensers through their representatives. Consult your local BAC Balticare Representative for specific project applications. Acknowledgement: BAC extends its sincere appreciation to Mark E. Schaeffer, P.E. (President of Schaffer Acoustics Inc. of Pacific Palisades, CA) for his contributions to this article.
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 43
Appendix A
The Calculation of Sound Power Level (Lw) from Measured Sound Pressure Levels (Lp)
Sound power is a measure of the total acoustic power radiated by a sound source. Sound power level is the sound power, expressed in decibels, relative to the reference power quantity 10-12 watt. Sound power is not directly measured as such. Instead, it is a calculated quantity and is obtained from the measurement of sound pressure levels at a suitable number of measurement positions. Even in indoor testing with reverberant or semireverberant rooms and a standard reference sound source, sound power level is calculated from sound pressure level measurements. In this discussion, no technical detail is given for the derivation of sound power level; instead, a very simple procedure is provided for establishing the approximate sound power level of evaporative cooling equipment for the case in which the sound pressure level is measured at four horizontal positions (each position at a specific distance from each of the four sides) plus one vertical position above the unit. The measurement positions may be at any distance between 2 and 4 times the units largest dimension, which is usually its length. The measured sound pressure levels must be obtained with accurate, calibrated equipment, and the sound data must be in the conventional eight octave bands of frequency. The measurements should be made under essentially free-field conditions: i.e., outside in an area free of any nearby reflecting surfaces. The unit is assumed to be located on the ground or on a platform reasonably close to ground level. The approximate sound power level in each of the eight octave bands is the sum, by decibel addition, of the individual five sound pressure level readings in each octave band plus a correction term (K) which is a function of the number of measurements positions, the measurement distance and the reference power. In equation form, this can be expressed as
Lw = Lp + K
The decibel summation of a number of sound pressure levels is determined from the material given in Appendix C and the correction terms are given below in Table A for the appropriate conditions. The use of the five measurement positions and the decibel addition of the five readings automatically introduce the directivity characteristics of the unit into the calculated sound power level. No further provision for directivity is required in this simplified method. To illustrate this procedure, suppose we wish to estimate the sound power level (Lw) in one octave band for the case of the five-position measurements 15 m from a cooling tower. Assume the five sound pressure levels measured in the particular frequency band are 56, 53, 59, 53 and 47 dB (re 0.0002 microbar). By the decibel addition method shown in Appendix C we find that the decibel sum of these five sound pressure levels is 62 dB. From Table A we then find that for the 15 m measurement distance, the correction term is 25 dB re 10-12 watt. For this example,
Lw = Lp + K = 62 + 25 = 87 dB
The same procedure could be followed for all octave bands to get the complete Lw of the cooling tower. The procedure given here is for the specific five measurement positions noted and may not be applicable generally to other situations. The procedure is not accurate to less than 1 dB, so fractional values of decibels should not be used or relied upon. Correction term K to be used in converting Sound Pressure Levels (Lp) into Sound Power Level (Lw) for special fiveposition procedure given
Table A
Measurement Distance (to Acoustic Center) (m) 7,5 9 10,5 12 13,5 15 Correction Term K for Lw re 10-12 Watt (dB) 19 20 21 23 24 25
TR - G 44
Measurement Distance (to Acoustic Center) (m) 18,5 21 24 27 30
Correction Term K for Lw re 10-12 Watt (dB) 26 27 29 30 31
Appendix B
The Calculation of Average Sound Pressure Level (Lp) for a given Sound Power Level (Lw)
For comparative purposes it may occasionally be necessary to estimate the approximate average sound pressure level radiated by a unit for which only the sound power level is given. There are also some applications that are best appraised by converting sound power back to average sound pressure levels. The procedure outlined in this Appendix will provide this estimate. It is important to realize that the resulting value is an average sound pressure level that theoretically would be radiated the same in all directions from the unit. In practice, the unit probably would not radiate the same levels in all directions; but, when only the sound power level is given it is not possible to know the directivity characteristics of the unit. The average sound pressure level at a desired distance is obtained by subtracting from the sound power level in any given octave frequency band the appropriate correction term (C) from Table B. In equation form, this relationship is expressed as
Lp Avg. = Lw C
As an illustration, suppose we wish to know the average sound pressure at a 15 m distance for a cooling tower that is stated to have a sound power level 87 dB re 10-12 watt. (Note that this is the counterpart of the example given in Appendix A.) From Table B, for a 15 m distance, we see that the correction term is 32 dB.
Lp Avg. = Lw C = 87 32 = 55 dB
By comparing this value with the five levels fed into the illustration in Appendix A, we see that although this is an average value, it actually does not equal any of the levels from the five measured directions. Note again that the average value does not pretend to show the directivity characteristics of the sound source. If two competitive cooling towers are being compared for a particular site condition, a comparison of the sound power level or the average sound pressure level may be a general clue to the relative sound from the two units, but a more careful comparison should take into account the actual sound levels to be radiated in the particular critical direction(s).
Table B
Correction terms C to be used in converting Sound Power Level into average Sound Pressure Level for special fiveposition procedure given.
Measurement Distance (to Acoustic Center) (m) 7,5 9 10,5 12 13,5 15 18,5 Correction Term K for Lw re 10-12 Watt (dB) 26 27 28 30 31 32 33
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 45
Measurement Distance (to Acoustic Center) (m) 21 24 27 30
Correction Term K for Lw re 10-12 Watt (dB) 34 36 37 38
Note: The correction term C is based on the sound radiating uniformly over a hemisphere. This would apply for a typical ground level installation or for a unit located on a large roof. If there are conditions such that the sound will radiate over a large angle, say a 3/4 sphere, add 3 dB to the above C. Subtract 3 dB from the above C for a 1/4 sphere radiation.
For distance beyond 30 m calculate the average Lp for 15 m using the method here; then extrapolate to the desired distance using the Lp reduction values of table 6 in section "Effect of Distance beyond 15 m"
Appendix C
Addition of Decibels
Since decibels are logarithmic values it is not proper to add them by normal algebraic addition. For example, 63 dB plus 63 dB does not equal 126 dB but only 66 dB. A very simple, but adequate schedule for adding decibels is as follows:
When two decibel values differ by: 0 or 1 dB 2 or 3 dB 4 to 8 dB 9 dB or more Add the following amount to the higher value 3 dB 2 dB 1 dB 0 dB
When several decibel values are to be added, perform the above operation on any two numbers at a time, the order does not matter. Continue the process until only a single value remains. As an illustration let us add the five sound levels used in the example of Appendix B.
Or, suppose we arrange the same numbers in a different order, as in:
Sometimes, using different orders of adding may yield sums that might differ by 1 dB, but this is not too significant a difference in acoustics. In general, the above simplified summation procedure will yield accurate sums to the nearest 1 dB. This degree of accuracy is considered acceptable in the material given in this article.
TR - G 46
Appendix D
BAC Sound Evaluation Worksheet
Job Name______________________________ Date_____________________________________ Address _______________________________ Engineer ________________________________ Architect ______________________________ BAC Model_________________________________
Items 63 Step : Noise Criterion 1. Determine appropriate "NC" Criterion for neighbour activity from Table 2 2. Insert sound pressure levels (Lp) for selected "NC" Criterion. (Obtain values from Figure 1 or Table 1) 3. Tabulate sound reduction provided by wall construction. (Obtain values from Table 3) 4. Establish tentative outdoor Noise Criterion for the unit. (Item 2 plus Item 3) 5. List average minimum outdoor background sound levels. (measured or estimated from Figure 2 and Tables 4 and 5) 6. Set final outdoor background Noise Criterion. (High value, by octave band, of Items 4 and 5) Step : Sound Levels 7. Enter unit sound pressure level rating at 15 m. 8. Insert distance correction to adjust unit ratings to distance of _ m in direction toward critical neighbour. (For distance greater than 15 m use Table 6; for distances less than 15 m use Table 7) 9. Establish outdoor unit Lp at neighbour location. (Item 7 minus Item 8 for distances greater than 15 m. Item 7 plus Item 8 for distances less than 15 m. 10. Apply reflection adjustment to meet condition existing at unit site. Refer to Figures 3 and 4 for effect of reflecting walls; or add 5 dB for close-in build up of noise; 0 dB if no reflection effects. 11. Tabulate resultant unit Lp at critical neighbour location. (Item 9 plus Item 10) Step : Comparison, Criteria vs Levels 12. Copy Item 6 levels from above. This is the outdoor noise criterion for the critical neighbour. 13. Ascertain tentative sound reduction required for unit. (Item 11 minus Item 12. Insert "0" for negative values) 14. Apply judgement factor. (For conservative approach, use "0" in all bands. To permit unit noise to exceed background levels slightly , insert "5") 15. Tabulate final sound reduction requirement for the job. (Item 13 minus item 14) 16. Indicate estimated or rated attenuation of all sound reduction treatment if used. (Should at least equal Item 15) 125 250 Center Frequency - Hz 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 47
Motor Controls
Introduction
The BAC motor control panels, incorporating Variable Frequency Drives (VFD), are specially designed seamlessly with BAC units and are engineered to meet specific application needs related to evaporative cooling equipment. BAC motor controls offer : Single Source Responsibility: BAC has designed the controls taking into consideration the exact specifications of the fan motor, and providing you with a single source solution. Indoor / Outdoor Applications: BAC offers enclosures with location flexibility; whether in a mechanical equipment room or outdoors next to the equipment.
Keypad Setting
Industrial Grade Components: While satisfying the industrys demands for a top performance variable frequency drive, the BAC motor controls are hailed as a truly environmentally friendly drive. The careful selection of the latest technology industrial grade components provide full motor protection for the evaporative cooling tower. Easy Installation: The BAC motor control is a compact, minimum maintenance reliable AC3 drive, allowing ease of installation due to the pre-engineered concept. Energy Savings: Evaporative water-cooled systems, whether for comfort cooling or process applications, offer substantial year-round system energy savings compared to air-cooled alternatives. Proper system control is crucial to fully utilising this advantage and operating your system at peak efficiency under all combinations of atmospheric and load conditions. BACs technical expertise in this field can show you how saving energy can also save you water when using BAC motor controls for a truly green solution.
Epoxy painted steel cabinet - IP 54 insulation class - Fan cooled with independent thermostat - Anti-condensation heaters - Rain shield for cold/warm weather protection 3-Pole Main Disconnect Switch - Suitable for AC3 operation - Lockable operator handle in OFF position - NO / NC contacts for auxiliary control panel Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) - Including EMC filters according EN50081 and EN50082 - Removable keypad with rotary knob - Ready, run and fault indicators - Programmable buttons & lights - Monitors motor speed, actual temperature or set point water temperature. - CE compliance to EN 61800 & EN 20178 - RS 485 communications BAC-TPU-01 Controller - Used as temperature controller / signal converter - Sensor input 0 10 Volt BAC Type OT-EMM Sensing Elements - PT 100 element - 0 10 Volt output Manual 3 Pole Bypass Switch - Automatic VDF or manual control switch Manual Star-Delta Starter - Bypass operator for manual control of fan motor
TR - G 48

Variable Frequency Drives (VFD's)
VFDs offer many benefits including : 1. Precise leaving fluid temperature control provides a more efficient and durable method to vary airflow compared to fan cycling, fan dampers, or mechanical speed changers. 2. Soft-starts, stops, and smooth accelerations prolong the mechanical system (fans, motors, belts, bearings, etc.) life while reducing maintenance. 3. The soft-start feature minimises start-up noise and smooth acceleration make the tower sound less noticeable to the neighbours.
Typical VFD Arrangement Standard VFD includes an enclosure, 24VDC power supply, control power transformer, main circuit breaker, disconnect switch with lockable operator handle, manual bypass, cooling fan and a detachable, programmable VFD keypad.
Circuit Breaker Protection, which allows for quick reset, is standard on all BAC VFDs. The circuit breaker is mechanically linked to the rotary disconnect switch mounted on the front of the panel. User Interface Keypad controls auto modes. temperature, and fault codes. The multi-monitor display shows fan speed, set point, measured
Fan Drive Controls

The BAC motor controls are an energy saving capacity control to close monitor the leaving fluid temperature of your cooling tower. The BAC motor controls are perfect for cooling tower operation where reliability, energy savings and low first cost are critical.
Equipment controls (optional) Variable Frequency Drive(s): A variable frequency drive (VFD) shall be provided for each tower. The supplier of the VFD shall be the manufacturer of the evaporative cooling equipment. The VFD shall have a manual bypass, a removable keypad, and a circuit breaker disconnect. Fuse protection will not be accepted. VFD shall be provided in an IP 54 enclosure. The heavy-duty, non-fusible safety disconnect switch shall be provided by the manufacturer of the evaporative cooling equipment. Switch shall be single-throw, 3-pole design. Switch shall have triple padlocking capability and a clear visible On/Off handle A temperature sensor shall be provided with the enclosed controls and a temperature controller shall be provided with the enclosed VFD. Option: A vibration cut-out switch input shall be provided
Note: For availability of the BAC motor controls on a specific product line, contact your local BAC Balticare representative.
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 49
Plume Abatement
Evaporative Cooling & Plume
Air enters at condition A. Air picks up heat and water in the evaporative fluid cooler ( discharge condition B ). Ambient air serves as heat sink for the discharge air ( line AB ). Intersection of saturation line leads to visible plume. Large intersection area : more plume, small intersection area : less plume.
Note: Plume is the condensation of water vapour and is harmless to the environment.
Condition of the Ambient Air

Temperature and relative humidity of the entering air influence the condition of the discharge air. Depending on the entering air condition the discharge air IS NOT ALWAYS 100 % SATURATED. Dry ambient air : discharge air has low relative humidity and high temperature. Wet ambient air : discharge air has high relative humidity and lower temperature. Warm ambient air : discharge air has lower relative humidity and higher temperature. Cold ambient air : discharge air has higher relative humidity and lower temperature. Discharge air of open cooling towers is generally higher saturated than discharge air of evaporative coil products.
EVALUATION OF PLUME FORMATION REQUIRES:

Knowledge of climatic conditions (ambient air) in which the equipment will operate. In depth knowledge of evaporative heat transfer to determine the relative humidity and temperature of discharge air in prevailing climate conditions.
Plume Influencing Factors

High humidity of ambient and discharge air enhance plume potential and vice versa. Large temperature difference between discharge and ambient air increases plume potential and vice versa. High heat load/ air flow ratio provides large temperature difference and high plume potential and vice versa (Typically heat load/ air flow ratio for evaporative coil products is smaller.). Next to equipment selection plume formation is a function of the actual heat load and climatic conditions and needs to be evaluated over a wide band of operating conditions. BAC provides the methodology to make such an evaluation.
Plume Abatement Coils
Large surface area plume abatement coils are installed in the air discharge of the evaporative coil products and piped in series with the wet coil. To be effective they must have low air and fluid side pressure drops. This results in:
TR - G 50
Significant extension of dry operation capacity. Effective increase of discharge air temperature to reduce / eliminate plume during wet operation. Additional sensible heat transfer during wet operation which saves water and treatment costs. Plume abatement coil sizing and performance prediction require a thorough evaluation of thermodynamic and airside behaviour as well as an understanding of climate condition influences. BAC can provide properly sized plume abatement coils and accurate performance data.
Capacity Control Strategy

Capacity control of the evaporative cooling equipment has a considerable influence on plume formation. No capacity control results in the lowest heat load / air flow ratio and low plume potential. Dual drives ( BALTIGUARD ) and two speed motors result in higher heat load / air flow ratio; acceptable plume elimination is achieved with plume abatement coils. Modulating capacity control results in highest heat load / air flow ratio which gives the highest plume potential. Operating and capacity control strategies are an integral part of the plume evaluation process. Consult your local BAC Balticare Representative for guidance and assistance.
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 51
Formulas
Fan Laws
The fan laws can be used to approximately predict the performance of equipment with a different fan speed: Flow 2 = Flow 1 (kW2/kW1)1/3
Formulas
Range = Entering Temperature Leaving Temperature Approach = Leaving Temperature Wet Bulb Temperature Heat Rejected: Heat Rejection (kW) = Flow (l/s) x range (C) x 4,186 Temperature conversions: Fahrenheit to Celsius : Temp (C) = 0.5556 5temp (F) 32 Celsius to Fahrenheit : Temp (F) = 1.8 Temp (C) + 32 Basic Electrical: E=IxR E = Voltage (Volts), I= current (amps), R = resistance (Ohm)
TR - G 52
Replacement Parts
BAC parts are the Perfect Fit for your cooling tower. These parts are specifically designed, engineered and manufactured to work in a cooling tower environment. They are the right parts, at competitive pricing levels, and BAC offers the best deliveries in the industry. BAC stocks most common repair and retrofit parts in our Central Parts Distribution Center and can ship other parts, often overnight, from any of three manufacturing facilities strategically located in Europe. Even with this fast delivery capability, it is still recommended that certain essential, emergency repair parts be maintained in your local inventory, to minimize any potential downtime.
Basic Recommended Spare Parts

Bearing set Float valve or repair kit Float ball Solenoid valve (if unit equipped with electronic water level control) Powerband or set of belts Spray nozzle kit with grommets Sump heater and low water cut-out Door gasket Strainer (inlet and suction) Fan and drive bushings
Parts to Consider if Extended Downtime is a Concern

Spray pump for coil products Fan or fan wheels Fan shaft Drive sheaves Fan motor
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 53
Application Guidelines
Introduction
The satisfactory performance of evaporative cooling equipment is dependent on correct selection and proper attention to overall system design, installation, water care and maintenance. The purpose of this document is to highlight the major points, which should be considered when designing a system with BAC evaporative cooling equipment.
Equipment Configurations
BAC evaporative cooling equipment is available in following configurations:
Cooling Towers Counterflow Crossflow Combined Flow VXT, VTL, RCT, IMT Series 3000D, FXT, TXV FXV, HXI CXV, HXC Closed Circuit Cooling Towers VXI, VFL Evaporative Condensers VXC, VXC-C, VCL
Thermal Duty
The selection of a particular model is based on a thermal duty and the wet bulb temperature. Thermal ratings are based on the wet bulb temperature of the air entering the equipment and do not take into account any recirculation of warm and humid discharge air, which may occur under certain weather and wind conditions. Verification of ratings assumes a test according to a recognised test standard and the application of tolerances as recorded during the test and applied to the test results.
Operating Conditions
Cooling Towers Counterflow Design pressure std. coil (bar) Design pressure high press. coil (kPa) Spray pressure, max. at inlet (kPa) fill spacing std(mm) (1) Inlet temperature, max. (C) Inlet temperature CPVC. max. (C) Inlet temperature, PP, max. (C) Outlet temperature, min. (C) Make up pressure mechanical valve (kPa) (2) NA NA 50 14 55 65 80 5 100-500 Crossflow NA NA NA 19 50 58 NA 5 100-500 Evaporative. Closed Circuit Cooling Towers Counterflow 10 NA 14 NA 80 NA NA 10 100-500 Combined Flow 10 NA 14 19 60 NA NA 10 100-500 Evaporative . Condensers Counterflow 22 28 14 NA 120 NA NA -20 100-500 Combined Flow 22 28 14 19 120 NA NA -20 100-500
(1) BACount (PVC or CPVC) fill has spacing of 14 mm and is used on all counterflow cooling towers except IMT and RCT. For these product lines fill spacing std. options are 12 mm or 19 mm. Other options are available upon request. PP fill spacings are 12 mm for VXT and VTL and 12 mm or 19 mm for IMT or RCT. (2) It must be ensured that adequate make up water supply is available for proper operation of the equipment within the supply pressure range suitable for the make up valve. Alternative valve selections are available for such cases.
TR - G 54
Construction Materials Compatibility

Cooling Towers Fill Packing
The heat transfer surface is of the film type and compatible with water found in most cooling tower applications. For cooling applications, where the water is contaminated by solids of large size, oil or grease or organic contaminants, alternative heat transfer surfaces with larger spacing must be considered.
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers and Condenser Coils

The standard coil is all prime surface continuous serpentine steel tubing. It is designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage. The coil is encased in a steel framework and the entire assembly is hot dip galvanised after fabrication. Fluids circulated through the inside of the coils must be compatible with the coil construction material, i.e. black steel, for std. hot dip galvanised coils stainless steel AISI 304L or 316L (option) galvanised steel for cleanable coil option (VXI, FXV) Standard coils may contain certain contaminants, such as carbon iron oxide or welding particles. The interior condition of the coil including humid air must be considered, when using halocarbon (or HFC) refrigerants and sensitive system components, such as electronic expansion devices or semi-hermetic compressors. The installer must take the necessary precautions on site, including complete clean up and evacuation and the installation of filter/dryers to safeguard the operation of these components in conjunction with the condenser coils. It is not uncommon that in the first year of operation filter cartridges have to be replaced more frequently.
Water Quality
Evaporative cooling is accomplished by the evaporation of a small portion of water. As water evaporates, the dissolved solids originally present in the water remain in the system. The concentration of dissolved solids increases rapidly and can reach unacceptable levels. In addition, airborne impurities and biological contaminants are often introduced into the recirculating water, since the evaporative cooler is washing the air. If impurities and contaminants are not effectively controlled, they can cause scaling, corrosion, sludge or biological fouling, which reduce heat transfer efficiency and increase system operating costs. For optimal heat transfer efficiency and maximum equipment life, the quality of the make-up and recirculating water should be maintained within the limitations listed below.
Make-Up Water
Make-up water to the evaporative cooler should be between 30 and 70 ppm hardness as CaCO3. Where use of a softener is necessary to achieve this, the supply to the evaporative cooler should not be totally softened, but blended with the incoming unsoftened water to achieve the minimum hardness between 30 and 70 ppm as Ca CO3. Maintaining a minimum hardness in the make-up water offsets the corrosive properties of totally softened water and reduces the reliance on corrosion inhibitors to protect the system.
Circulating Water Quality (Cycles of Concentration)

The quality of the recirculating water is related to the make-up water by the Cycles of Concentration. For example: If a given make-up water had 45 ppm of Chlorides, it would be possible to run the system at 150 / 45 equals 3.33 Cycles of Concentration without exceeding the 150 ppm of Chlorides allowed for a galvanised steel/Zinc Aluminium or Baltiplus unit. Note that this calculation process needs to be repeated for all of the Guideline parameters (Sulphates, Alkalinity, etc), and the lowest resultant Cycles of Concentration used.
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 55
Baltiplus Protection pH Hardness as (CaCO3) Alkaline as (CaCO3) Total Dissolved Solids Chlorides Sulfates Conductivity Chlorination (as free chlorine): continuous 7.0 to 9.0 30 to 500 mg/l 500 mg/l max. 1000 mg/l max. 125 mg/l max. 125 mg/l max. 1200 S/m 1 mg / l max.
Chlorination (as free chlorine): batch dosing for cleaning & disinfec- 5-15 mg / l max. for 6 hours max. tion
Table 8: Circulated Water Quality Guidelines for Baltiplus Protection
BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection System pH Hardness as (CaCO3) Alkaline as (CaCO3) Total Dissolved Solids Chlorides Sulfates Conductivity Chlorination (as free chlorine): continuous 6.5 to 9.0 30 to 500 mg/l 500 mg/l max. 1500 mg/l max. 250 mg/l max. 250 mg/l max. 1800 S/m 2 mg / l max.
Table 9: Circulated Water Quality Guidelines for Baltibond Corrosion Protection System
FRP pH Hardness as (CaCO3) Alkaline as (CaCO3) Total Dissolved Solids Chlorides Sulfates Conductivity Chlorination (as free chlorine): continuous 6.5 to 9.0 30 to 500 mg/l 500 mg/l max. 1500 mg/l max. 250 mg/l max. 250 mg/l max. 1800 S/m 2 mg / l max.
Table 10: Circulated Water Quality Guidelines for FRP
TR - G 56
SST AISI 304 pH Hardness as (CaCO3) Alkaline as (CaCO3) Total Dissolved Solids Chlorides Sulfates Conductivity Chlorination (as free chlorine): continuous Chlorination (as free chlorine): batch dosing for cleaning & disinfection 6.5 to 9.0 50 to 500 mg/l 500 mg/l max. 1500 mg/l max. 250 mg/l max. 250 mg/l max. 2500 S/m 2 mg / l max.
SST AISI 316 6.5 to 9.0 50 to 500 mg/l 500 mg/l max. 1500 mg/l max. 500 mg/l max. 500 mg/l max. 2500 S/m 2 mg / l max.
5-15 mg / l max. for 6 hours max.
5-15 mg / l max. for 6 hours max.
Table 11: Circulated Water Quality Guidelines for Stainless Steel
Blow Down
To prevent an excessive build-up of impurities in the recirculating water, a small amount of water must be bled from the recirculating water. In many localities, this constant bleed and replacement with fresh make-up water will keep the concentration of impurities in the system at an acceptable level. The Bleed Rate will depend on the Cycles of Concentration required to maintain recirculating water quality and the Evaporation Rate. After the Cycles of Concentration has been determined, the Bleed Rate can be calculated using the following equation: B = E / (N 1) Where B = Bleed Rate in l/s; E = Evaporation Rate in l/s; N = Number of Cycles of Concentration. methods:
The maximum Evaporation Rate can be determined by one of the following 1. 2. 3. 4.
The Evaporation Rate is approximately 1,8 litres per 1000 kcal of heat rejection. The Evaporation Rate is approximately 1,8 litres per 4180 kJ. Evaporation Rate = Water Flow Rate (I/s) x Range (C) x 0,0018 Evaporation Rate = Total Heat Rejection kW / 2322 = l/s
Examples :
Method n 2: At a flow rate of 10 I/s and a cooling range of 10 C the evaporation rate is 0.18 l/s (10 l/s x 10 C x 0,0018 = 0,18 I/s) Method n 4: Duty calculates to 418kW, therefore the evaporation rate is 0.18 l/s (418 / 2322 = 0.18 l/s)
Note: The calculation method described above should not be used to determine the water consumption of evaporative cooling equipment. Next to heat load and water quality the water consumption depends on climatic conditions, the capacity control strategy and the equipment configuration. Water consumption calculations are therefore complex and therefore should not be based on the maximum evaporation rate, which occurs at dry ambient conditions. The calculation method here is only suitable for the purpose of sizing a proper blow down.
Total Water Make-Up Rate

Water Make-up rate = Evaporation Rate + Bleed Rate + Drift Loss The Evaporation and Bleed Rates are calculated as above. Provided the equipment is correctly fitted with well maintained high efficiency drift eliminators (as per standard Baltimore Aircoil supply), the Drift Loss can be considered as insignificant when compared with the Evaporation and Bleed Rates. Note that if other system components require adherence to more stringent recirculating water quality guidelines, the more stringent guidelines must be followed.
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 57 Water Treatment
The water treatment guidelines below should be followed: 1. Water treatment chemicals or non-chemical systems need to be compatible with the materials of construction used in the cooling system including the evaporative cooling equipment itself. 2. Water treatment chemicals should be added to the recirculating water by an automatic feed system on a continuously metered basis. This will prevent localised high concentrations of chemicals, which may cause corrosion. Preferably the water treatment chemicals should be fed into the cooling system at the discharge of the recirculation pump. The chemicals should not be fed in concentrated form, nor batch fed directly into the cold water sump of the evaporative cooling equipment. 3. Acid water treatment is not recommended. Acid treatment can be considered for open cooling towers furnished with the BALTIBOND Corrosion Protection or constructed from stainless steel, provided the requirements specified above are followed. 4. A competent water treatment company should be consulted for the specific water treatment programme to be applied. Next to the supply of dosing and control equipment and chemicals, the programme should include regular monthly monitoring of the circulating and make up water quality.
Control of Biological Contamination & Water Treatment

The growth of algae, slimes and other micro-organisms, if uncontrolled, will reduce heat transfer efficiency and may contribute to the growth of potentially harmful micro-organisms, such as Legionella, in the recirculating water. Accordingly a treatment programme specifically designed to address biological control should be initiated when the system is first filled with water and administered on a regular base thereafter in accordance with any regulations (national, regional) that may exist or in accordance with accepted codes of good practice, such as EUROVENT 9 - 5 & 6. It is strongly recommended to monitor the bacteriological contamination of the recirculating water on a regular base (for example TAB test with dip slides on a weekly base) and record all results. (TAB = Total Aerobic Bacteria) In addition to the control of biological contamination, which must be done at all times, it may be necessary to install a water treatment regime to prevent the formation of scale or corrosion. To ensure recognition of any risk and the implementation of protective measures, it is recommended to conduct a risk analysis by a specialised risk assessor. It is also recommended to develop an operations plan for the cooling system.
Location
Each cooling tower, evaporative cooler or condenser should be located and positioned to prevent the introduction of the discharge air and the associated drift, which may contain contaminants, such as Legionella, into the ventilation systems or open windows of buildings. To yield full thermal performance, equipment location must be chosen in a way that there is unimpeded supply of air to the entire air intake surface. In addition access to all maintenance and inspection points must be safeguarded. Located in enclosures or close to adjoining building walls, the top of the equipment must be level with or higher than the top of the adjacent walls in order to reduce the possibility of recirculating warm and humid discharge air back to the air intake(s). To accomplish this, in some cases the equipment needs to be installed elevated or equipped with discharge hoods or ductwork. In case of elevated locations (more than 300 mm above surface), it is necessary to equip VX equipment with a solid bottom panel, to provide protection from moving parts and ensure that the air is drawn horizontally into the cooling tower and not from the bottom (bottom air entry can be considered but requires reduction of nominal fan speed to avoid fan motor overload). For indoor locations with forced draught centrifugal fan equipment it is common practice to apply ductwork to air entry and discharge. Such ductwork must be designed for even air distribution and minimum pressure drop and access doors must be foreseen to allow access to the interior of the duct and from there to the equipment itself. In some cases the equipment room may be used as an intake plenum, in which case only discharge ductwork is needed. In such cases measures need be taken to prevent erratic air distribution when switching fans and/or cells, for example by the sue of positive closure discharge dampers.
TR - G 58
Piping
General
Piping should be sized and installed in accordance with rules of good practice. Dead legs and stagnant water conditions in the piping should be avoided. If more than one inlet connection is required, balancing valves should be installed to properly balance the flow to each inlet. Depending on the design of the hydraulic circuit, it may also be necessary to install balancing valves at the suction connections of the towers. The use of shut off valves is dictated by the necessity to (automatically or manually) isolate cells or towers for capacity control or servicing. If the equipment is installed on vibration rails, compensators must be installed in the connecting piping.
Open Cooling Towers

Since the sump capacity of any cooling tower is limited, it can only accumulate a certain amount of water draining from the system into the tower, when the circulating water pump stops. Therefore install all heat exchangers and as much tower piping as possible below the operating level of the tower. The BAC Balticare Representative can advise the available sump capacity for system drainage for a given model and operating conditions. When multiple cooling towers are used on a common system, install equalising lines between the sumps of the towers to ensure a balanced water level. Standard equalising lines are designed for a maximum water level differential (between sumps) of 25 mm and an equalising flow of 15% of the circulating water flow for the largest tower in the system based on the cooling towers being located in close proximity to each other. The connecting pipework (by others) should maintain the same diameter along their length for proper operation. If hydraulical isolation of individual cells is desired a shut off valve in the equalising piping is needed.

Fluid piping should allow flexibility for expansion and contraction between component parts of the system. All fluid piping should be supported separately from the equipment by pipe hangers or supports. In a completely closed system, an expansion tank should be installed for purging air from the system and to allow for fluid expansion. A vacuum breaker or air vent at the high point and a drain at the low point should be installed in the piping system to permit complete drainage of coils.
Refer to BAC Evaporative Condenser Engineering Manual. For installations with high pressure float valves, ensure that liquid piping from condenser outlet to valve(s) is sized for low refrigerant velocity (0.5 m/s) so that valve operation is not disturbed by flash gas and that an equalising line is properly installed. For systems with thermosyphon oil cooling ensure adequate equalising and sufficient height difference between condenser(s) and receiver.
Capacity Control
General
Most cooling systems are subject to substantial changes in heat load and ambient temperature conditions during the operating season. The capacity of evaporative cooling equipment varies greatly as the wet bulb temperature changes. To prevent freezing inside the equipment at subfreezing ambient conditions and/or when a reasonably constant temperature of the cooling water is desired, some form of capacity control is required. The preferred control method is to reduce the airflow through the equipment to adapt to heat load and ambient conditions. It is not recommended to modulate the water (fluid) flow for capacity control reasons. Regardless the type of capacity control chosen, it is necessary to start the circulating pump first and the fan motor(s) thereafter. At the same time prolonged operation of circulating pump(s) only without fan(s) running should be avoided during subfreezing conditions.
Fan Cycling
Fan cycling is the simplest method of capacity control, suitable for multiple cell installations. The number of control steps available for fan cycling is generally determined by the number of fan motors, however on certain models two fan motors must be cycled simultaneously to prevent erratic air distribution. Consult your BAC Balticare Representative for more details. The more steps for fan cycling are available the better the control of the cooling water temperature is. Rapid onoff cycling can cause the fan motor to overheat. It is recommended that controls be set to allow a maximum of 6 on-off starts per hour.
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 59 Multi-Speed Drives
The number of steps available for fan cycling can be increased by using multi-speed drives. These can either be accomplished by the installation of multi-speed motors (Dahlander/Two speed separate windings) or the BALTIGUARD Drive system. At half of the nominal fan speed (Dahlander/two speed, separate windings) the nominal capacity of the tower will be appr. 60%; at 2/3 of nominal fan speed (BALTIGUARD) the nominal capacity of the tower will be appr. 70%. When switching from high to low speed a time interval of min. 15 s must be foreseen, before the low speed drive can be activated to allow the fan(s) to slow down.
Modulating Capacity Control

Modulating capacity control is recommended when a closer control of the cooling water temperature or condensing pressure is desired and in particular if free cooling at subfreezing ambient conditions is anticipated. Modulating capacity control can be accomplished with modulating fan discharge dampers (only for centrifugal fan models). Fan discharge dampers vary the airflow to match tower capacity to system heat load and ambient condition. The damper motors switch to low speed and shut off the fan motor(s) when the dampers reach minimum position. Alternatively to modulating fan dampers variable speed control devices can be installed. In such cases steps must be taken to avoid operating at or near the fans critical speed. Consult with the B.A.C. representative or B.A.C. Balticare of any application utilising variable speed control to determine whether any critical speed may be encountered and whether the anticipated fan motor selection is suitable for this application. Fan motors must be equipped with PTC Thermistors for these applications to facilitate protection against motor overheating. Where isolation rails are used in conjunction with variable fan speed controls, the isolation springing should be high deflection, and the minimum continuous running fan speed limited to avoid resonant frequencies with the springing. Modulating capacity control is the best way to closely control cooling water temperatures, however even with modulating control some variation of the cooling water temperature or condensing pressure will occur, in particular at light heat load or start-up conditions. In applications with open or closed circuit cooling towers where such variations cannot be tolerated (start-up of absorption chiller) an additional bypass to stabilise temperatures must be foreseen.
Winter Safety
General
Unless the system is shut down and drained during winter, measures must be taken to protect the system from freezing during the winter during operation and standstill. Freeze protection during operation is achieved by selecting an adequate method of capacity control. For reasonably constant loads and cooling water or condensing temperatures above 15C step control is usually adequate. For variable loads, in particular when combined with free cooling modulating controls are recommended. When the equipment is shut down in freezing weather the sump water must be protected. This can be accomplished by the installation of electrical sump heaters. The standard electric heaters are sized to maintain +4C sump water when the ambient temperature drops to 18C. All sump heaters have six power terminals and one earth terminal. Heaters with six terminals can be wired in Star for 400 Volt; 3 phase supply; or in Delta for 230 Volt, 3 phase supply. All heaters can alternatively be used with a 230 Volt single-phase supply, if the terminals are wired in parallel. Sump heaters need to be sized to maintain a sump water temperature of 4C at an applicable ambient temperature (for example: - 18C). They are installed together with a heater thermostat and a low level cut out switch to prevent heater operation, when the sump is drained. Draining the sump water into a separate tank installed in an area protected from freezing, is an alternative to auxiliary heating of the integral sump. Remote sump sizing must include the water draining from external piping, the tower water distribution system, water suspended in the fill pack or coil and sump as well as water needed to prevent vortexing inside the remote sump. In addition to the sump all exposed water piping, pumps and make up lines, including mechanical or electrical valves that do not drain at shutdown should be traced with electrical heater tape and insulated.
Closed Circuit CT Coil Protection

Where the system will permit, the best protection against coil freeze up is the use of an anti- freeze solution. When this is not possible the system must be designed to meet the following conditions:
TR - G 60
1. Maintain the recommended minimum flow (refer to BAC product engineering data) through the coil(s) at all times. 2. Maintain a heat load on the circulating fluid, so that the temperature of the fluid leaving the cooler will not fall below 10C. (refer to "Engineering Data" for heat loss data) Draining of the coil(s) is not recommended as a normal method of freeze protection unless the coil(s) are constructed from stainless steel or are of the cleanable type. For standard hot dip galvanised coils draining is acceptable as an emergency method of freeze protection. For this purpose an automatic drain valve and air vent needs to be installed to drain the coil(s) if flow stops or the fluid temperature drops below 10C when the ambient temperature is below freezing.
Plume and Plume Abatement

At the air discharge water droplets can be formed by condensation of warm humid discharge air by contact with the colder ambient air upon leaving the equipment. This type of condensation is the visible plume that often can be seen rising above evaporative cooling equipment during the winter season. The water vapour caused by condensation contains droplets of pure water and is harmless. In some instances visible plumes are considered as a hinder, in which case measures must be taken to minimise or eliminate the occurrence of plume. Consult the BAC Balticare Representative for such requests.
Electrical Wiring & Controls

Wiring to electrical components should be via suitable weatherproof cable glands. Unused electrical entries should be plugged with a weatherproof plug. Where motors are supplied with PTC Thermistors they should be incorporated into the control circuit as means of motor overheat protection. Also the use of anti condensing heaters is strongly recommended.
Starting of Fan Motors

Fan motors up to 5.5 kW nameplate rating can normally be started direct on line 5DOL). Above these ratings the motor should be started using star delta starter and not DOL. DOL starting imposes requires high starting currents and imposes a large staring torque on the fan drives. Alternatively a soft starter or a variable speed frequency drive may be used instead of star delta starting, according to the project requirements. In all cases, precautions should be incorporated into the control circuitry to protect against motor overloading.
Sound
BAC provides sound data as sound pressure levels in 5 directions, in 1,5 m and 15 m from the equipment as well as overall sound power levels. Data are available for equipment with and without sound attenuation and should be the base of any acoustical specification and guarantee for outdoor locations. For indoor locations it is preferable to specify partial sound power levels for the air intake and discharge areas. For sound pressure specifications relating to indoor locations, consult the BAC Balticare Representative.
Maintenance
Regular maintenance in accordance with the appropriate BAC Operating and Maintenance instructions and with prevailing local regulations and Codes is essential for the efficient and safe operation of a cooling tower, evaporative cooler or condenser. A programme of regular maintenance and inspections needs to be set up, executed and documented. For proper execution of maintenance and inspections and depending on site conditions ladders, safety cages, stairways, access platforms with handrails and toe-boards must be installed as appropriate for the safety and convenience of authorised service and maintenance personnel.
Safety
For safe operation of unshielded equipment exposed to wind speeds above 120 km/h installed at a height above 30 m from the ground, contact your local BAC Balticare Representative. For safe operation of equipment installed in moderate and high hazard areas contact your local BAC Balticare representative.
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 61
Glossary
Air-Conditioning: The control of the temperature, humidity, cleanliness (quality) and movement of air in a confined space. Airflow: The distribution or movement of air through a space; generally measured in cubic feet per minute (cfm). Air Handling Unit: The central component of an HVAC system that distributes conditioned air to a variety of destinations. Algae: Small, usually aquatic plants which require light to grow. Ambient: The surrounding atmosphere. Ambient Air Temperature: The surrounding air temperature, such as the outdoor air temperature around a building. Approach: The difference between the leaving water temperature and the ambient wet-bulb temperature. ARI: Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers. Biocide: A chemical capable of killing living microorganisms. Biological Contaminants: Living organisms or agents derived from those organisms (e.g., viruses, bacteria, fungi, and mammal and bird antigens) that can be inhaled and can cause many types of health effects including allergicreactions, respiratory disorders, hypersensitivity diseases, and infectious diseases. Also referred to as "microbiologicals" or "microbials. Bleed: Water deliberately removed from evaporative cooling equipment to control the concentration of dissolved solids in the system. BTU (British Thermal Unit): The amount of heat required to raise or lower the temperature of one pound of water one degree Fahrenheit. BTUH (British Thermal Unit Per Hour): Establishes a time reference to BTU input or output. A BTUH is how many BTUs are used per hour. Bypass Connection: An inlet connection provided in the cold water basin of a unit that allows recirculating water to bypass the heat transfer media when system pumps are running but evaporative cooling is not required. Capacity: The output or producing ability of a piece of equipment. Evaporative cooling capacity is normally referred to in BTUHs; the capacity at a standard set of conditions is often referred to as "tons of cooling." Carryover: Excessive drift. Casing: The exterior panels of an evaporative cooling unit. Cell: The smallest subdivision of a unit that can operate independently; often multiple cells are used together to form one unit of a greater capacity. Celsius (C): A temperature scale based on the freezing (0 degrees) and boiling (100 degrees) points of water. Also known as Centigrade. Conversion to Fahrenheit: F = 1.8(C) + 32 CFM (Cubic Feet per Minute): A standard measurement of airflow that indicates how many cubic feet of air pass by a stationary point in one minute. Charge: The amount of refrigerant placed in a refrigeration unit. Chiller: A device that produces chilled water to provide cooling for HVAC and industrial applications. Circulating Water: See Reirculating Water. Cogeneration: Simultaneous production of two or more forms of useable energy from a single fuel source, e.g., heat energy and electrical or mechanical power, in the same facility. Coil: A tube, often including fins, through which gas or liquid is passed, exchanging thermal energy with air or water surrounding it for heating or cooling purposes. Cold Water Basin: The collection pan that houses the cold water processed by the evaporative cooling unit. Combined Flow: The use of both a coil and wet deck surface for heat transfer in a closed circuit cooling tower or evaporative condeser. Combined flow designs reduce evaporation in the coil section. Comfort Cooling: The process of treating air to control its temperature to meet the comfort requirements of the occupants of a conditioned space.
TR - G 62
Commercial: The commercial sector is generally defined as non-manufacturing business establishments; this classification includes hotels, restaurants, office buildings, retail stores, educational institutions, etc. Commissioning: The start-up of a building that includes testing and adjusting HVAC, electrical, plumbing, and other systems to assure proper functioning and adherence to design criteria. Commissioning also includes the instruction of operating personnel in the use of the building systems. Compressor: The pump of a refrigerating mechanism that draws a low-pressure gas on the cooling side of the refrigerant cycle and compresses the gas into the high-pressure side of the cycle. The compressor maintains adequate pressure to cause refrigerant to flow in sufficient quantities to meet the cooling requirements of the system. Conduction: The transfer of heat through a solid material. The transfer of heat energy through a material (solid, liquid or gas) by the motion of adjacent atoms and molecules without gross displacement of the particles. Contactor: A switch used to make or break an electrical circuit. Convection: The movement of heat by airflow. Cooling Tower: Any device in which atmospheric air and water are distributed together over a heat transfer medium in order to lower the temperature of the water through evaporative cooling. Corrosion Inhibitors: Chemicals designed to prevent or slow down the waterside corrosion of metals. Counterflow: The flow of air is in the opposite direction of the flow of water. CRN: Canadian Registration Number. This registration is sometimes required on coils shipping into Canada. Crossflow: The flow of air is at a right angle to the direction of the flow of water. CTI: The Cooling Technology Institute (CTI) is an organization comprised of evaporative cooling equipment owners and operators, equipment manufacturers and component suppliers, and water treatment specialists, which advocates and promotes the use of environmentally responsible Evaporative Heat Transfer Systems for the benefit of the public through education, research, standards development, government relations, and technical information exchange. Current: A flow of electrons in an electrical conductor. The strength or rate of flow is generally measured in amperes. Damper: A series of movable plates that can be opened or closed to control the flow of air through a space. Decibel (dB): A decibel describes the relative loudness of a sound. The dimensionless unit of measurement used in noise control. Logarithmically expresses the ratio of sound level to a reference level (0.0002 microbar). Defrost Cycle: The process of removing ice or frost buildup from a piece of equipment during the winter months. Delta (or Delta T or T): A difference in temperature. Often used in the context of the difference between the entering water temperature and the leaving water temperature of a cooling tower or closed circuit cooling tower. Demand (Utility): The rate at which electricity or natural gas is delivered to or by a system, part of a system, or piece of equipment at a given instant or averaged over any designated period of time. Electricity demand is typically expressed in kilowatts. Demand Billing: The electric capacity requirement for which a large user pays. It may be based on the customer's peak demand during the contract year, on a previous maximum or on an agreed minimum. Measured in kilowatts. Demand Charge: The sum to be paid by a large electricity consumer for its peak usage level. Design Conditions: A set of conditions specific to the local climate and expected building usage, used to calculate the cooling load for a building. Dewpoint: The temperature at which air becomes saturated with water and begins to condense, forming a dew. Drift: The water aerosol carried out of an evaporative cooling unit by the discharge air. Drift eliminator: A component of most evaporative cooling units that is designed to remove water droplets from the air passing through it. Dry-Bulb Temperature (DB): The temperature measured by a standard thermometer. A measure of the sensible temperature of air. Efficiency: The ratio of the output to the input of any system. Electric Resistance Heater: A device that produces heat through electric resistance. Energy: Broadly defined, energy is the capability of doing work. In the electric power industry, energy is more narrowly defined as electricity supplied over time, generally expressed in kilowatts.
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 63
Energy Management System: A control system designed to regulate the energy consumption of a building by controlling the operation of energy consuming systems, such as the heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC), lighting and water heating systems. Entering Water Temperature (EWT): The temperature of the fluid as it returns to the evaporative cooling equipment from the system heat source. Enthalpy: A thermodynamic function of a system, equivalent to the sum of the internal energy of the system plus the product of its volume multiplied by the pressure exerted on it by its surroundings. Equalizer Connection: A connection in the cold water basin of a unit that allows piping (the piping is called an equalizer line) to be run from that unit to the basin of another unit; equalizer lines serve to correct any difference in water levels that may develop during operation. Evaporative Cooling: Cooling accomplished through the exchange of latent heat in the form of evaporation. External Pulldown Volume: The volume of water in any external piping and heat exchangers that will drain back to the unit when the pump is shut down, which is equal to the total pulldown volume minus the water suspended in the unit and its distribution system. External Static Pressure: The pressure imposed on cooling equipment by external sources such as ductwork and sound attenuation. Fahrenheit (F): A temperature scale in which the boiling point of water is 212 degrees and its freezing point is 32 degrees at normal atmospheric pressure. Conversion to Celsius: C = (F 32)/1.8 Fan, Axial: An air moving device consisting of impeller blades oriented around a central shaft, usually with an aerodynamic inlet housing; axial fans typically move large volumes of air at low pressures as compared to centrifugal fans for the same fan horsepower. Fan, Centrifugal: An air moving device consisting of impeller blades radially oriented parallel to a central shaft, bound with a rim and hub; centrifugal fans typically move smaller volumes of air than axial fans but at a higher pressure for the same fan horsepower. Fan Coil Unit: A terminal unit that delivers conditioned air directly to the occupied space. Fan Deck: The finished surface adjacent to a horizontally mounted axial fan, sometimes used as a working surface to perform maintenance when the proper safety precautions are taken (handrails, ladder, etc.). Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP): A non-corrosive composite material comprised of a plastic resin matrix, glass fiber reinforcement and other additives. Fill: See Wet Deck. Filtration: The process of separating solids from a liquid by means of a filter media through which only the liquid passes. Flume Box: A short channel that runs between two cooling towers, allowing water to flow from one cold water basin to another; a flume box serves to correct any difference in water levels that may develop during operation and generally has a greater capacity of water flow than an equalizer line. Forced Draft: Refers to the location of the fan(s) on evaporative cooling equipment. On forced draft equipment, the fans are located at the air inlets to force or push air through the unit. Fouling: Organic growth or other deposits on heat transfer surfaces causing loss of efficiency. Frequency: The number of cycles that an alternating current moves through in each second. Standard electric utility frequency in the United States is 60 cycles per second (60 Hertz). Full Load Amps (FLA): The current draw of a motor under full load. GPM: Measure of liquid flow rate (Gallons Per Minute). Typically based on U.S. gallons, sometimes clarified as USGPM. Heat Exchanger: A device for the transfer of heat energy from the source to the conveying medium. Heat Pump: A device that is capable of both heating and cooling space, depending on user comfort requirements. Heat pumps are generally individually controlled and therefore a heat pump in one room may be heating, while a heat pump in an adjacent room may be cooling. Heat Transfer: Moving heat from one location to another. Hertz (Hz): A unit of electromagnetic wave frequency that is equal to one cycle per second. Hot Water Basin: The collection pan that houses the hot water in an evaporative cooling unit with a gravity distribution system. Humidity: The amount of moisture in the air. HVAC: Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning.
TR - G 64
Induced Draft: Refers to the location of the fan(s) on evaporative cooling equipment. On induced draft equipment, the fans are located on the air discharge side of the equipment to induce air through the unit. Industrial: The industrial sector is generally defined as manufacturing, construction, mining, agriculture, fishing, and forestry establishments (Standard Industrial Classification [SIC] codes 01-39). Interference: The reintroduction of warm discharge air from one evaporative cooling unit into the air inlet of an adjacent unit. To avoid interference, layout guidelines provided by equipment manufacturers should be closely followed. Inverter: See Variable Frequency Drive. ISO 9001: 2000: A comprehensive, internationally recognized standard which is concerned with all aspects of quality management in the design, engineering and manufacturing of a product. Latent Heat: Heat that causes a change in state when added or removed, but does not cause a change in temperature. For example, heat that evaporates a substance from a liquid to a vapor but does not increase its temperature. Leaving Water Temperature (LWT): The temperature of the fluid as it leaves the evaporative cooling equipment to return to the system heat source. Legionella: A genus of bacteria; most species of this genus are capable of causing disease in humans. LD, Legionnaires Disease, is a pneumonia like disease caused by one genus of Legionella Life-Cycle Cost: The amount of money required to own, operate and maintain a piece of equipment over its useful life. Load: The demand for services or performance made on a machine or system, i.e. amount of heat rejection required by the evaporative cooling equipment Louver: A series of sloping vanes that allow the entrance of air but prevent the escape of water droplets. Make-Up Water: Water added to the recirculating water to compensate for losses from evaporation and bleed. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturing Association. Nozzle: A device used for regulating and directing the flow of a fluid. Parts Per Million (PPM): A unit which represents a comparison of mass to mass, volume to volume, mass to volume, etc.; commonly used to represent the concentration of dissolved solids in the recirculating water of evaporative cooling equipment. Plenum: The open area of a crossflow evaporative cooling unit through which air is pulled before being discharged to the atmosphere. Plume: Saturated discharge air that forms a visible cloud over evaporative cooling equipment under certain temperature and humidity conditions. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): A polymer of vinyl chloride often used for a heat transfer media surface (film) and piping on factory-assembled evaporative cooling equipment. Power: The rate at which energy is transferred. Electricity for use as energy is also referred to as power. Preventive Maintenance: Regular maintenance implemented to reduce the possibility of sudden or unexpected equipment failures. Pulldown: Water that collects in the cold water basin of a unit when the system pumps shut off. Pump, Spray: A water moving device on a closed circuit cooling tower or evaporative condenser for transporting the spray water from the basin to the water distribution system in order to wet the heat transfer surface. Pump, System: A flow moving device for transporting the fluid to be cooled (water in a cooling tower; water, glycol, or other fluid in the case of a closed circuit cooling tower) to the tower and back to the system in a continuous loop. Range: The difference between the entering water temperature and leaving water temperature of an evaporative cooling unit. See also Delta. Recirculating Water: The water being circulated over the coil or fill in an evaporative cooling unit. Recirculation: Situation that occurs when the warm discharge air flows back into the air inlets of the evaporative cooling equipment. To avoid recirculation, layout guidelines provided by equipment manufacturers should be closely followed. Reclaiming: Processing or returning used refrigerant to the manufacturer or processor for disposal or reuse. Refrigerant: A chemical that condenses from a vapor to liquid and, in the process, decreases in temperature. Refrigerant Charge: The amount of refrigerant in a system. Retrofit: Broad term that applies to any change after the original purchase, such as adding equipment or accessories to an existing installation.
Baltimore Aircoil
TR - G 65
Saturation Temperature: Also referred to as the boiling point or the condensing temperature. This is the temperature at which a refrigerant will change state from a liquid to a vapor or vice versa. Scale: The accumulation of solids from the minerals contained in water, most often referred to as hardness deposits, i.e. calcium and magnesium. Scale Inhibitor: Chemical added to water to inhibit formation of scale. Sensible Heat: Heat that causes a change in temperature when added or removed, but does not cause a change in state. Separator: A device which uses centrifugal force to separate particles from a suspension; used to remove sediment from evaporative cooling systems. Setpoint: The temperature to which a thermostat is set to result in a desired heated space temperature. Sound Attenuator: Component used on the air inlet or air discharge of an evaporative cooling unit to reduce airborne noise. Specific Heat: In English units, the quantity of heat, in BTU, needed to raise the temperature of one pound of material one degree Fahrenheit. Strainer: A filter used to remove large, suspended solids from a liquid. Subcooled Liquid: Liquid refrigerant that is cooled below its saturation temperature. Suction Connection: The outlet connection through which leaving water is pumped back to the chiller. Sump: The cold water basin of the evaporative cooling equipment. Superheated Vapor: Refrigerant vapor that is heated above its saturation temperature. Thermal (Energy) Storage: A technology that lowers the amount of electricity needed for comfort conditioning during utility peak load periods. A buildings thermal energy storage system might, for example, use off-peak power to make ice at night, then use the ice for cooling during the day. Thermostat: A temperature control device that consists of a series of sensors and relays that monitor and control the functions of a heating and cooling system. Total Pulldown Volume: The sum of the water suspended within the unit and its distribution system during operation, plus the water in any external piping and heat exchangers draining back to the unit when the pump is shut down. Valve: Any device used to control the flow of a fluid through piping. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD): An electronic device that controls the speed of a motor by controlling the frequency of the voltage supplied to that motor. Also known as an inverter. Wet-Bulb Temperature (WB): The temperature at which water, by evaporating into air, can bring the air to saturation at the same temperature. Wet Deck: A heat transfer surface where air and water interface; also known as fill.
Baltimore Aircoil International N.V., 2005 All rights reserved by Baltimore Aircoil International N.V. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored or transmitted in any form or by any means whether graphic, electronic or mechanical; including photocopying, recording or any other information storage system, without the prior written permission from Baltimore Aircoil International N.V. This edition of the EU - Product and Application Handbook was published in Belgium by Baltimore Aircoil International N.V. Industriepark, Zone A, B-2220 Heist-op-den-Berg Baltimore Aircoil International N.V. has used all reasonable efforts to ensure the data and information contained in this book are as accurate and up to date as possible at the time of publication. However, they make no representation that it is absolutely accurate or complete. Errors and omissions can occasionally occur. Baltimore Aircoil International N.V. does not accept responsibility, and expressly disclaim any liability to any party, for any loss or damage, financial or otherwise, caused by any errors or omissions in this edition of the EU - Product and Application Handbook, whether they result from negligence or any other cause.
Baltimore Aircoil
...because temperature matters
Baltimore Aircoil International N.V., Industriepark, B-2220 Heist-op-den-Berg, Belgium e-mail: info-bac@baltimoreaircoil.be - Web: www.BaltimoreAircoil.com
Baltimore Aircoil
Baltimore Aircoil International N.V., Industriepark, B-2220 Heist-op-den-Berg, Belgium e-mail: info-bac@baltimoreaircoil.be - Web: www.BaltimoreAircoil.com

BAC Product and Application Handbook

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BAC Product and Application Handbook

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Product & Application Handbook

Andreas G. Coumnas Managing Director - Europe

Complete Product Brochures featuring

How can we help?

BAC Sales Channel

BAC Product & Application Handbook

Heat Transfer Products

Open Cooling Towers

Closed Circuit Cooling Towers

Water Saving Hybrid Wet-Dry Products

Ice Thermal Storage Products

Need help deciding which product to use?

Open Cooling Towers

Open Cooling Towers

Product Group Detail

Water Distribution System

Gravity Distribution Basin

Pressurised Spray Distribution

Open Cooling Towers

... because temperature matters

Maximum Entering Water Temperature

Product Line Overview Table

Small to medium industrial applications

Open Cooling Towers

... because temperature matters

Piping and Valves

Open Cooling Towers

Vibration Cut-out Switch

... because temperature matters

Indoor Installations (applicable to VTL and VXT models only)

Wet Deck Surface Compatibility

N/A = not applicable

Open Cooling Towers

Open Cooling Towers

S3000D Open Cooling Towers

Open Cooling Towers

Low Installed Cost

Combined Inlet Shields

Reliable Year-Round Operation

Easy Removable Fill

... because temperature matters

Sloped Cold Water Basin

Free Draining Cold Water Basin

Long Service Life

S3000D Frame Construction shown without FRP Panels

Access Hatches in Hot Water Basin

Easy access to hot water basin

Open Cooling Towers

Large orifice, non-clog nozzles Steel distribution covers

Heavy-gauge Z600 galvanized steel frame

2. FRP Casing Panels

Corrosion resistant UV resistant finish Maintenance free

3. Fan Drive System

7. Combined Inlet Shields

Corrosion Resistant Easily removable UV resistant plastic material

4. Low kW Axial Fan

8. Cold Water Basin

Quiet operation Corrosion resistant aluminum

5. Water Distribution System

Low pump head gravity distribution basin

9. Hinged Access Doors (Not Shown)

Inward swinging door on each end wall

... because temperature matters

Custom Features and Options